BEAMSCAN Software

Base Version

User Manual

D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software

Reference number S080054

Scope of application Software version 4.5.1 or higher

Revision 2022-03

PTW Freiburg GmbH

Lörracher Str. 7
79115 Freiburg
Germany
Tel.: +49 761 49055-0
Fax: +49 761 49055-70
[email protected]
ptwdosimetry.com

© PTW-Freiburg, 2022

2 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 3

List of Figures.................................................................................................................8

I Introduction to the BEAMSCAN Software............................................................... 13

1 General Information.................................................................................................................................13
2 Safety Information................................................................................................................................... 15
3 Intended Use........................................................................................................................................... 19
4 Installing, Starting, and Exiting the BEAMSCAN Software..................................................................... 20
5 Licensing the BEAMSCAN Software...................................................................................................... 29

II MEPHYSTO Navigator...............................................................................................32
1 General Information on MEPHYSTO Navigator......................................................................................32
2 Main Screen............................................................................................................................................ 33
3 Selecting and Starting a Module in MEPHYSTO Navigator................................................................... 34
4 Favorites Area......................................................................................................................................... 34
5 Applications and Toolbox Areas..............................................................................................................35
6 Submenus for Applications and Toolbox Areas...................................................................................... 36
7 Configuration Mode................................................................................................................................. 38

III Basic Functions........................................................................................................40

1 Definitions................................................................................................................................................ 40
2 Screen Layout of the Modules of the BEAMSCAN Software................................................................. 42
3 Selecting and Deleting Curves............................................................................................................... 45
4 Printing Data and Curves........................................................................................................................47
5 Changing the Display of Data and Curves............................................................................................. 50
6 Crosshairs................................................................................................................................................56
7 Options.................................................................................................................................................... 59
8 Data Exchange........................................................................................................................................66

IV 'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring

System........................................................................................................................... 67
1 General Information on WaterTankScans............................................................................................... 67
2 Starting WaterTankScans........................................................................................................................ 68
3 Quick Start (Workflow)............................................................................................................................ 68
4 Main Screen............................................................................................................................................ 70
5 Measurements with WaterTankScans..................................................................................................... 72
6 Setting Up the Measuring Parameters....................................................................................................93
7 Workflow for Special Tasks................................................................................................................... 138
8 Reference Curves................................................................................................................................. 148
9 Verifying and Changing the Detector Settings at the Electrometer...................................................... 151
10 Verifying the Water Level in the PMMA Tank of the BEAMSCAN Measuring System........................ 155
11 Analyzing and Editing the Measurement Results............................................................................... 157
12 Configuring WaterTankScans.............................................................................................................. 158

D948.131.00/10 en 3
 BEAMSCAN Software
Table of Contents

V 'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN MR

Measuring System...................................................................................................... 198
1 General Information on WaterTankScans............................................................................................. 198
2 Starting WaterTankScans...................................................................................................................... 199
3 Quick Start (Workflow).......................................................................................................................... 199
4 Main Screen.......................................................................................................................................... 201
5 Measurements with WaterTankScans................................................................................................... 203
6 Setting Up the Measuring Parameters..................................................................................................223
7 Reference Curves................................................................................................................................. 251
8 Analyzing and Editing the Measurement Results................................................................................. 254
9 Configuring WaterTankScans................................................................................................................ 255

VI 'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2, and MP1
Measuring Systems.................................................................................................... 281
1 General Information on WaterTankScans............................................................................................. 281
2 Starting WaterTankScans...................................................................................................................... 282
3 Quick Start (Workflow).......................................................................................................................... 282
4 Main Screen.......................................................................................................................................... 284
5 Measurements with WaterTankScans................................................................................................... 286
6 Setting Up the Measuring Parameters..................................................................................................302
7 Workflow for Special Tasks................................................................................................................... 342
8 Reference Curves................................................................................................................................. 348
9 Verifying and Changing the High Voltage Set at the Electrometer....................................................... 351
10 Analyzing and Editing the Measurement Results............................................................................... 354
11 Configuring WaterTankScans.............................................................................................................. 355

VII 'Radiation unit Library' Module........................................................................... 391

1 General Information on the Radiation unit Library Module................................................................... 391
2 Starting the Radiation unit Library Module........................................................................................... 391
3 Main Screen.......................................................................................................................................... 392
4 Adding New Radiation Units................................................................................................................. 393
5 Editing the Parameters..........................................................................................................................394
6 Deleting Radiation Units........................................................................................................................399
7 Saving Changes.................................................................................................................................... 399
8 Creating a Data Backup........................................................................................................................400
9 Importing Radiation Units from MEPHYSTO mc²................................................................................. 400
10 Settings in the Radiation unit Library Module.....................................................................................401

VIII 'Detector Library' Module....................................................................................402

1 General Information on the Detector Library Module........................................................................... 402
2 Starting the Detector Library Module.................................................................................................... 403
3 Main Screen.......................................................................................................................................... 404
4 Adding New Detectors.......................................................................................................................... 405
5 Editing the Detector Parameters...........................................................................................................406
6 Deleting Detectors................................................................................................................................. 413
7 Saving Changes.................................................................................................................................... 413
8 Exporting and Copying the Detector Library.........................................................................................414
9 Importing the Detector Library from MEPHYSTO mc².......................................................................... 416
10 Settings in the Detector Library Module............................................................................................. 417

4 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Table of Contents

IX 'Device Database Selection' Module....................................................................418

1 General Information on the Device Database Selection Module.......................................................... 418
2 Starting the Device Database Selection Module.................................................................................. 418
3 Selecting the Global PTW Database.................................................................................................... 419

X 'Detector Positioning' Module (BeamDose Positioning)..................................... 420

1 General Information on BeamDose Positioning....................................................................................420
2 Starting BeamDose Positioning............................................................................................................ 420
3 Quick Start (Workflow).......................................................................................................................... 421
4 Main Screen.......................................................................................................................................... 422
5 Selecting the Measuring System and Setting Up the Connection........................................................ 423
6 Selecting the Detector and Defining the Mounting Direction................................................................ 425
7 Positioning the Measuring Detector...................................................................................................... 426
8 BeamDose Positioning Settings............................................................................................................431
9 Settings for Data Transfer.....................................................................................................................432

XI 'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module................................................. 438

1 General Information on DataAnalyze....................................................................................................438
2 Starting DataAnalyze.............................................................................................................................438
3 Quick Start (Workflow).......................................................................................................................... 439
4 Main Screen.......................................................................................................................................... 440
5 Opening and Saving Data and Curves.................................................................................................442
6 Generating Curves................................................................................................................................ 445
7 Comparing Curves................................................................................................................................ 449
8 Analyzing Curves.................................................................................................................................. 457
9 Modifying Curves...................................................................................................................................476
10 Working on Output Factors................................................................................................................. 499
11 Administrative Data..............................................................................................................................503
12 DataAnalyze Options...........................................................................................................................505

XII 'TPR/TMR and OCR Table Generator' Module (TableGenerator)...................... 506

1 General Information on TableGenerator............................................................................................... 506
2 Starting TableGenerator........................................................................................................................ 506
3 Quick Start (Workflow).......................................................................................................................... 506
4 Main Screen.......................................................................................................................................... 507
5 Loading Data......................................................................................................................................... 509
6 Modifying the Display............................................................................................................................ 509
7 Highlighting Data................................................................................................................................... 510
8 Normalizing............................................................................................................................................510
9 Interpolation........................................................................................................................................... 511
10 Extrapolation........................................................................................................................................513
11 Converting PDD to TPR...................................................................................................................... 514
12 Saving Data.........................................................................................................................................516
13 Deleting Data.......................................................................................................................................517
14 Printing Data........................................................................................................................................517
15 Closing a File...................................................................................................................................... 517
16 TableGenerator Options...................................................................................................................... 517
17 Error Messages................................................................................................................................... 518

D948.131.00/10 en 5
 BEAMSCAN Software
Table of Contents

XIII 'Correction Tables' Module (DataFit)..................................................................519

1 General Information on DataFit.............................................................................................................519
2 Starting DataFit..................................................................................................................................... 520
3 Quick Start (Workflow).......................................................................................................................... 520
4 DataFit Edit Modes................................................................................................................................521

XIV 'BEAMSCAN Tools' Module................................................................................ 526

1 General Information on the BEAMSCAN Tools Module....................................................................... 526
2 Starting the BEAMSCAN Tools Module................................................................................................ 526
3 Main Screen.......................................................................................................................................... 527
4 Selecting the Measuring System and Setting Up the Connection........................................................ 528
5 Verifying the Temperature and Atmospheric Pressure Measurement...................................................529
6 Settings in the BEAMSCAN Tools Module........................................................................................... 532

XV 'Convert WP600/700 data to mcc' Module (DataConvert-W)............................ 533

1 General Information on DataConvert-W............................................................................................... 533
2 Starting DataConvert-W........................................................................................................................ 533
3 Conversion.............................................................................................................................................534

XVI 'Convert IBA ASC' Module (DataConvert-S)..................................................... 536

1 General Information on DataConvert-S................................................................................................ 536
2 Starting DataConvert-S......................................................................................................................... 536
3 Converting Data.................................................................................................................................... 537

XVII Troubleshooting..................................................................................................539

Literature......................................................................................................................541

Appendix A: MEPHYSTO MCC Data Format............................................................542

Appendix B: Analysis Parameters for Profiles........................................................543

Appendix C: Analysis Parameters for FFF Photon Profiles...................................556

Appendix D: Analysis Parameters for Electron Depth Dose Curves.................... 564

Appendix E: Analysis Parameters for Photon Depth Dose Curves.......................571

Appendix F: Analysis Parameters for Bragg Peak Curves.................................... 575

Appendix G: True-to-Scale Printouts with HTML.................................................... 577

Appendix H: List of Data Exported from the Analyze Edit Window toTrack-it......579

6 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Table of Contents

Appendix I: Transferring the Basic Settings from MEPHYSTO mc² to the

BEAMSCAN Software.................................................................................................583
1 General Information...............................................................................................................................583
2 Backup of the Basic Settings................................................................................................................584
3 Software Installation.............................................................................................................................. 584
4 Transferring the Radiation Units and the Detectors............................................................................. 585
5 Transferring the Basic Settings.............................................................................................................585

Index.............................................................................................................................588

D948.131.00/10 en 7
 BEAMSCAN Software
List of Figures

List of Figures

Figure I-1: Setup Type window......................................................................................................................... 22

Figure I-2: PTW Service window...................................................................................................................... 23
Figure I-3: Program Registration window......................................................................................................... 23
Figure I-4: Virtual Serial Port Driver dialog.......................................................................................................25
Figure I-5: Program Maintenance window........................................................................................................ 26
Figure I-6: PTW License Control Center.......................................................................................................... 30
Figure I-7: Options dialog..................................................................................................................................31
Figure I-8: Modules info box for the base version........................................................................................... 31
Figure I-9: Register dialog.................................................................................................................................31
Figure II-1: Main screen..................................................................................................................................... 33
Figure II-2: Minimized navigator window showing only the Favorites area.......................................................35
Figure II-3: Submenu..........................................................................................................................................36
Figure II-4: Submenu with subgroups................................................................................................................37
Figure II-5: Subgroup with a drop-down list...................................................................................................... 37
Figure II-6: Main screen with submenu in configuration mode......................................................................... 38
Figure III-1: Screen layout...................................................................................................................................42
Figure III-2: Status bar........................................................................................................................................ 44
Figure III-3: Print dialog.......................................................................................................................................47
Figure III-4: Print dialog.......................................................................................................................................48
Figure III-5: Axes Scaling dialog.........................................................................................................................49
Figure III-6: Normalization to Value dialog......................................................................................................... 53
Figure III-7: Normalization to Position dialog......................................................................................................53
Figure III-8: Normalize Isodose to Position dialog..............................................................................................54
Figure III-9: Normalize Isodose to Value dialog................................................................................................. 55
Figure III-10: Status bar with active crosshairs.................................................................................................... 58
Figure III-11: Options dialog - Isodoses tab......................................................................................................... 60
Figure III-12: Options dialog - Graphics tab......................................................................................................... 61
Figure III-13: Options dialog - Advanced tab....................................................................................................... 62
Figure III-14: Settings Access Configuration dialog............................................................................................. 63
Figure IV-1: WaterTankScans main screen.........................................................................................................70
Figure IV-2: Auto Setup tab................................................................................................................................ 76
Figure IV-3: User Shift dialog..............................................................................................................................80
Figure IV-4: Level indicator................................................................................................................................. 87
Figure IV-5: Linac tab.......................................................................................................................................... 93
Figure IV-6: Measurement tab.............................................................................................................................96
Figure IV-7: Pane for selecting and adjusting the detectors.............................................................................. 98
Figure IV-8: PTW Detector Library dialog.........................................................................................................100
Figure IV-9: Pane for setting the EPOM position............................................................................................. 105
Figure IV-10: EPOM shift dialog......................................................................................................................... 105
Figure IV-11: Pane for selecting the measuring mode and adjusting the corresponding parameters................ 106
Figure IV-12: Spill Start/Stop measuring mode.................................................................................................. 111
Figure IV-13: Spill by Time measuring mode..................................................................................................... 112
Figure IV-14: Software Trigger measuring mode................................................................................................113
Figure IV-15: Measurement tab, PDD and Profiles view....................................................................................113
Figure IV-16: Measurement tab, PDD and Profiles view....................................................................................114
Figure IV-17: Measurement tab, Plane parallel to central beam view - Plane optimized................................... 116
Figure IV-18: Measurement tab, Plane parallel to central beam view................................................................117
Figure IV-19: Measurement tab, Plane perpendicular to central beam view - Plane optimized......................... 118
Figure IV-20: Measurement tab, Plane perpendicular to central beam view......................................................119
Figure IV-21: Measurement tab, Star Pattern view............................................................................................ 120
Figure IV-22: Measurement tab, Points view......................................................................................................121
Figure IV-23: BeamAdjust measuring program...................................................................................................123
Figure IV-24: Measurement tab, Beam Inclination view..................................................................................... 125
Figure IV-25: Output Factors measuring program.............................................................................................. 127
Figure IV-26: Configure Measurement dialog..................................................................................................... 128
Figure IV-27: Output Factors measuring program with option for determining the maximum dose....................130
Figure IV-28: BeamCenterAdjustment measuring program................................................................................ 131
Figure IV-29: BeamCenterAdjustment measuring program with the determined values.................................... 132

8 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
List of Figures

Figure IV-30: Output Factors measuring program with determined maximum dose.......................................... 132
Figure IV-31: One-dimensional representation of the output factor table...........................................................134
Figure IV-32: Measurement tab, Stationary Scans view.................................................................................... 135
Figure IV-33: Measurement tab, TG51 Lead Foil Distance view........................................................................136
Figure IV-34: Position of the BEAMSCAN measuring system for measuring half-sided profiles from center to gun
and to the left................................................................................................................................ 140
Figure IV-35: Position of the BEAMSCAN measuring system for measuring half-sided profiles from center to
target and to the right................................................................................................................... 141
Figure IV-36: TPR measurement SDD (Source Detector Distance) and SSD (Source Surface Distance).........145
Figure IV-37: Measurement tab, Continuous TPR Measurement view.............................................................. 146
Figure IV-38: Adjust Water Level dialog............................................................................................................. 147
Figure IV-39: Adjust Water Level dialog for terminating the function................................................................. 147
Figure IV-40: Detector Settings for Electrometer dialog (e. g., before a measurement is started)..................... 151
Figure IV-41: Check water level dialog............................................................................................................... 155
Figure IV-42: Check water level dialog with difference between actual and correct water level........................ 155
Figure IV-43: Check water level dialog for terminating the verification.............................................................. 156
Figure IV-44: Step-By-Step Options dialog - PDD Steps tab............................................................................. 160
Figure IV-45: Step-By-Step Options dialog - Profile Steps tab...........................................................................162
Figure IV-46: Range limits and step intervals for different field sizes................................................................ 164
Figure IV-47: Range limits and step intervals for different measuring depths....................................................164
Figure IV-48: Profile Steps for Any Size dialog.................................................................................................. 165
Figure IV-49: Step-By-Step Options dialog - Speeds tab...................................................................................166
Figure IV-50: Step-By-Step Options dialog - Delay Times tab........................................................................... 168
Figure IV-51: Continuous Options dialog - PDD Range tab...............................................................................171
Figure IV-52: Continuous Options dialog - Profile Range tab............................................................................ 173
Figure IV-53: Continuous Options dialog - PDD Speeds tab............................................................................. 175
Figure IV-54: Continuous Options dialog - Profile Speeds tab...........................................................................177
Figure IV-55: Multiple Choice dialog (e. g., for the wedge filter)........................................................................ 179
Figure IV-56: Task List dialog with two measuring task queues.........................................................................180
Figure IV-57: Task List context menu................................................................................................................. 180
Figure IV-58: Task List dialog with the Modify area........................................................................................... 182
Figure IV-59: Task List for the measurement of the depth dose curves for several field sizes...........................184
Figure IV-60: Measurement Options dialog - Presets tab.................................................................................. 188
Figure IV-61: Measurement Options dialog - Communication tab......................................................................189
Figure IV-62: Measurement Options dialog - Advanced tab.............................................................................. 190
Figure IV-63: Measurement Options dialog - Predefined Depths tab.................................................................191
Figure IV-64: Connection Control Center dialog.................................................................................................193
Figure IV-65: BEAMSCAN Devices dialog..........................................................................................................194
Figure IV-66: New Connection dialog for LAN connection................................................................................. 196
Figure IV-67: Edit Connection dialog for LAN connection.................................................................................. 196
Figure V-1: WaterTankScans main screen.......................................................................................................201
Figure V-2: Auto Setup tab.............................................................................................................................. 206
Figure V-3: Auto Setup tab.............................................................................................................................. 210
Figure V-4: Level indicator............................................................................................................................... 218
Figure V-5: Linac tab........................................................................................................................................ 223
Figure V-6: Measurement tab...........................................................................................................................226
Figure V-7: Pane for adjusting the electrometer..............................................................................................228
Figure V-8: PTW Electrometer Library dialog.................................................................................................. 228
Figure V-9: Pane for adjusting the detectors................................................................................................... 229
Figure V-10: PTW Detector Library dialog.........................................................................................................230
Figure V-11: Pane for selecting the measuring mode and adjusting the corresponding parameters................ 232
Figure V-12: Measurement tab, PDD and Profiles view....................................................................................233
Figure V-13: Measurement tab, PDD and Profiles view....................................................................................234
Figure V-14: Measurement tab, Plane parallel to central beam view - Plane optimized................................... 235
Figure V-15: Measurement tab, Plane parallel to central beam view................................................................236
Figure V-16: Measurement tab, Plane perpendicular to central beam view - Plane optimized......................... 237
Figure V-17: Measurement tab, Plane perpendicular to central beam view......................................................238
Figure V-18: Measurement tab, Star Pattern view............................................................................................ 239
Figure V-19: Measurement tab, Points view......................................................................................................240
Figure V-20: BeamAdjust measuring program...................................................................................................242
Figure V-21: Output Factors measuring program.............................................................................................. 244
Figure V-22: Configure Measurement dialog..................................................................................................... 245

D948.131.00/10 en 9
 BEAMSCAN Software
List of Figures

Figure V-23: One-dimensional representation of the output factor table...........................................................248

Figure V-24: Step-By-Step Options dialog - PDD Steps tab............................................................................. 257
Figure V-25: Step-By-Step Options dialog - Profile Steps tab...........................................................................259
Figure V-26: Range limits and step intervals for different field sizes................................................................ 261
Figure V-27: Range limits and step intervals for different measuring depths....................................................261
Figure V-28: Profile Steps for Any Size dialog.................................................................................................. 262
Figure V-29: Step-By-Step Options dialog - Speeds tab...................................................................................263
Figure V-30: Step-By-Step Options dialog - Delay Times tab........................................................................... 265
Figure V-31: Multiple Choice dialog (e. g., for the wedge filter)........................................................................ 267
Figure V-32: Task List dialog with two measuring task queues.........................................................................268
Figure V-33: Task List context menu................................................................................................................. 268
Figure V-34: Task List dialog with the Modify area........................................................................................... 270
Figure V-35: Task List for the measurement of the depth dose curves for several field sizes...........................272
Figure V-36: Measurement Options dialog - Presets tab.................................................................................. 276
Figure V-37: Measurement Options dialog - Communication tab......................................................................277
Figure V-38: Measurement Options dialog - Advanced tab.............................................................................. 278
Figure V-39: Measurement Options dialog - Predefined Depths tab.................................................................279
Figure VI-1: WaterTankScans main screen.......................................................................................................284
Figure VI-2: Auto Setup tab.............................................................................................................................. 290
Figure VI-3: Level indicator............................................................................................................................... 296
Figure VI-4: Linac tab........................................................................................................................................ 302
Figure VI-5: Measurement tab...........................................................................................................................305
Figure VI-6: Pane for selecting and adjusting the electrometer....................................................................... 307
Figure VI-7: PTW Electrometer Library dialog.................................................................................................. 307
Figure VI-8: Pane for selecting and adjusting the detectors............................................................................ 308
Figure VI-9: PTW Detector Library dialog.........................................................................................................309
Figure VI-10: Pane for selecting the measuring mode and adjusting the corresponding parameters................ 311
Figure VI-11: Spill Start/Stop measuring mode.................................................................................................. 315
Figure VI-12: Spill by Time measuring mode..................................................................................................... 316
Figure VI-13: Software Trigger measuring mode................................................................................................317
Figure VI-14: Measurement tab, PDD and Profiles view....................................................................................317
Figure VI-15: Measurement tab, PDD and Profiles view....................................................................................318
Figure VI-16: Measurement tab, Plane parallel to central beam view - Plane optimized................................... 320
Figure VI-17: Measurement tab, Plane parallel to central beam view................................................................321
Figure VI-18: Measurement tab, Plane perpendicular to central beam view - Plane optimized......................... 322
Figure VI-19: Measurement tab, Plane perpendicular to central beam view......................................................323
Figure VI-20: Measurement tab, Star Pattern view............................................................................................ 324
Figure VI-21: Measurement tab, Points view......................................................................................................325
Figure VI-22: BeamAdjust measuring program...................................................................................................327
Figure VI-23: Measurement tab, Beam Inclination view..................................................................................... 329
Figure VI-24: Output Factors measuring program.............................................................................................. 331
Figure VI-25: Configure Measurement dialog..................................................................................................... 332
Figure VI-26: Output Factors measuring program with option for determining the maximum dose....................334
Figure VI-27: BeamCenterAdjustment measuring program................................................................................ 335
Figure VI-28: BeamCenterAdjustment measuring program with the determined values.................................... 336
Figure VI-29: Output Factors measuring program with determined maximum dose.......................................... 336
Figure VI-30: One-dimensional representation of the output factor table...........................................................338
Figure VI-31: Measurement tab, Stationary Scans view.................................................................................... 339
Figure VI-32: Measurement tab, TG51 Lead Foil Distance view........................................................................340
Figure VI-33: Measurement tab, Continuous TPR Measurement view.............................................................. 343
Figure VI-34: Measurement tab, Step-By-Step TPR Measurement view........................................................... 345
Figure VI-35: TPR measurement SDD (Source Detector Distance) and SSD (Source Surface Distance).........345
Figure VI-36: Detector Settings for Electrometer dialog (e. g., before a measurement is started)..................... 352
Figure VI-37: Step-By-Step Options dialog - PDD Steps tab............................................................................. 357
Figure VI-38: Step-By-Step Options dialog - Profile Steps tab...........................................................................359
Figure VI-39: Range limits and step intervals for different field sizes................................................................ 361
Figure VI-40: Range limits and step intervals for different measuring depths....................................................361
Figure VI-41: Profile Steps for Any Size dialog.................................................................................................. 362
Figure VI-42: Step-By-Step Options dialog - Speeds tab...................................................................................363
Figure VI-43: Step-By-Step Options dialog - Delay Times tab........................................................................... 365
Figure VI-44: Continuous Options dialog - PDD Range tab...............................................................................368
Figure VI-45: Continuous Options dialog - Profile Range tab............................................................................ 370

10 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
List of Figures

Figure VI-46: Continuous Options dialog - PDD Speeds tab............................................................................. 372

Figure VI-47: Continuous Options dialog - Profile Speeds tab...........................................................................374
Figure VI-48: Multiple Choice dialog (e. g., for the wedge filter)........................................................................ 376
Figure VI-49: Task List dialog with two measuring task queues.........................................................................377
Figure VI-50: Task List context menu................................................................................................................. 377
Figure VI-51: Task List dialog with the Modify area........................................................................................... 379
Figure VI-52: Task List for the measurement of the depth dose curves for several field sizes...........................381
Figure VI-53: Measurement Options dialog - HV and Presets tab..................................................................... 385
Figure VI-54: Measurement Options dialog - Communication tab......................................................................386
Figure VI-55: Measurement Options dialog – TANDEM TC tab.........................................................................387
Figure VI-56: Measurement Options dialog - Advanced tab.............................................................................. 388
Figure VI-57: Measurement Options dialog - Predefined Depths tab.................................................................389
Figure VII-1: Radiation unit Library main screen............................................................................................... 392
Figure VIII-1: Detector Library main screen........................................................................................................404
Figure VIII-2: Edit Manufacturers dialog............................................................................................................. 412
Figure IX-1: Device Database Selection main screen...................................................................................... 419
Figure X-1: BeamDose Positioning main screen............................................................................................. 422
Figure X-2: Select water phantom dialog.........................................................................................................423
Figure X-3: PTW Detector Library dialog.........................................................................................................425
Figure X-4: Positioning the EPOM at the measuring position......................................................................... 428
Figure X-5: Positioning with EPOM Shift......................................................................................................... 429
Figure X-6: New Connection dialog for LAN connection................................................................................. 434
Figure X-7: New Connection dialog for RS232 connection............................................................................. 436
Figure X-8: Devices dialog............................................................................................................................... 437
Figure XI-1: DataAnalyze main screen............................................................................................................. 440
Figure XI-2: Add Scans dialog.......................................................................................................................... 445
Figure XI-3: Average Scans dialog................................................................................................................... 445
Figure XI-4: Depth of interpolated Profile dialog...............................................................................................446
Figure XI-5: Offaxis of interpolated Profile dialog............................................................................................. 446
Figure XI-6: Add Matrices dialog for matrices parallel to the central axis........................................................ 448
Figure XI-7: Add Matrices dialog for matrices perpendicular to the central axis.............................................. 448
Figure XI-8: Compare edit window....................................................................................................................451
Figure XI-9: Options dialog................................................................................................................................456
Figure XI-10: Analyze edit window......................................................................................................................457
Figure XI-11: Insert administrative Parameters dialog........................................................................................460
Figure XI-12: Renormalize Data dialog............................................................................................................... 462
Figure XI-13: Edit protocols and parameters dialog........................................................................................... 465
Figure XI-14: Options dialog................................................................................................................................475
Figure XI-15: Process edit window..................................................................................................................... 476
Figure XI-16: Subtract Value dialog.................................................................................................................... 481
Figure XI-17: Film Inclination dialog....................................................................................................................481
Figure XI-18: Shift Scans along Depth Axis dialog............................................................................................ 482
Figure XI-19: Correction Function f(Position) dialog........................................................................................... 482
Figure XI-20: Correction Function f(Dose) dialog............................................................................................... 483
Figure XI-21: Create equidistant points dialog....................................................................................................484
Figure XI-22: Extrapolation modes......................................................................................................................486
Figure XI-23: Edit Dose Values window..............................................................................................................487
Figure XI-24: R50 Values for Conversion dialog................................................................................................ 492
Figure XI-25: Mirrored depth dose curve............................................................................................................ 493
Figure XI-26: Scale Profile dialog....................................................................................................................... 494
Figure XI-27: Shift profiles dialog........................................................................................................................496
Figure XI-28: General tab of the Options dialog.................................................................................................497
Figure XI-29: PDI/PDD Conversion tab of the Options dialog .......................................................................... 498
Figure XI-30: DataAnalyze main screen with loaded output factors...................................................................499
Figure XI-31: One-dimensional representation of the output factor table...........................................................500
Figure XI-32: Edit Values dialog..........................................................................................................................502
Figure XI-33: Linac tab of the Administrative Data dialog.................................................................................. 503
Figure XI-34: Measurement tab of the Administrative Data dialog.....................................................................504
Figure XI-35: Table View tab of the Options dialog............................................................................................ 505
Figure XII-1: TableGenerator main screen......................................................................................................... 507
Figure XII-2: Normalization to Position dialog....................................................................................................510
Figure XII-3: Normalization to Value dialog....................................................................................................... 511

D948.131.00/10 en 11
 BEAMSCAN Software
List of Figures

Figure XII-4: Interpolate Columns dialog........................................................................................................... 512

Figure XII-5: Interpolate Rows dialog.................................................................................................................512
Figure XII-6: Convert from PDD to TPR dialog................................................................................................. 515
Figure XII-7: Options dialog................................................................................................................................517
Figure XIII-1: DataFit - Table Edit Mode............................................................................................................. 521
Figure XIII-2: DataFit - Auto Fill Mode................................................................................................................523
Figure XIV-1: Main screen BEAMSCAN Tools....................................................................................................527
Figure XIV-2: Connection Control Center dialog.................................................................................................528
Figure XIV-3: TP Adjustment tab.........................................................................................................................530
Figure XV-1: DataConvert-W dialog................................................................................................................... 535
Figure XVI-1: DataConvert-S dialog.................................................................................................................... 537
Figure B-1: Wedge angle................................................................................................................................. 545
Figure B-2: Flattened region.............................................................................................................................546
Figure B-3: Explanatory diagram for the flatness of the electron field............................................................ 548
Figure D-1: Analysis parameters for electron depth dose curves....................................................................567
Figure G-1: Sample printout............................................................................................................................. 578
Figure I-10: Settings Keeper in the backup mode........................................................................................... 584
Figure I-11: Settings Keeper in the restore mode............................................................................................ 586

12 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Introduction to the BEAMSCAN Software - General Information

I Introduction to the BEAMSCAN Software

1 General Information

– The product bears the CE-mark "CE 0124" – PTW-Freiburg only considers itself responsi-
in accordance with the Council Directive ble for the safety, reliability, and performance
93/42/EEC about Medical Devices and fulfills of the product if the assembly, extension, read-
the essential requirements of Annex I of this justment, modification, or repair is carried out
directive. The product is a class IIb device by PTW-Freiburg or by persons authorized by
(MDD). PTW-Freiburg, and if the product is used in
compliance with the technical documentation.
– The user manual is an integral part of the prod-
uct. It should always be kept near the product. – In case of any questions concerning the ser-
Observance of the manual is a prerequisite for vice, support, or warranty, please contact your
proper product performance and correct oper- supplier.
ation.
– This manual is in conformity with the prod-
– Operator safety, specified measuring accu- uct specifications, the applicable safety stan-
racy, and interference-free operation can dards, and the version of the BEAMSCAN
only be guaranteed if original products and software that are valid as at the printing date.
parts are used. Furthermore, only the acces- The version is indicated under "Scope of appli-
sories listed in this manual are approved by cation" on page 2 of the user manual. All rights
PTW-Freiburg and only they or other acces- are reserved for devices, circuits, techniques,
sories whose use has been expressly permit- software, and names referred to in the manual.
ted by PTW-Freiburg may be used in con-
junction with the product. Safe operation and – Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corpora-
proper product performance are not guaran- tion, Inc.
teed if accessories or consumables from other
manufacturers are used. – PTW-Freiburg reserves the right to make mod-
ifications.
– PTW-Freiburg cannot be held liable for dam- Please contact PTW or your local representa-
age resulting from the use of accessories tive for the most current information concern-
or consumables from other manufacturers or ing the products of interest.
when the user ignores the instructions and
information given in this manual. – No part of the technical documentation may
be reproduced without written permission from
– The warranty period is 1 (one) year and begins PTW-Freiburg.
on the day of delivery. It is unaffected by
repairs covered by the warranty regulations.

D948.131.00/10 en 13
 BEAMSCAN Software
Introduction to the BEAMSCAN Software - General Information

– PTW-Freiburg is a registered manufacturer

according to the ElektroG (Elektro- und Elek-
tronikgeräte-Gesetz).
Elektro-Altgeräte-Register (EAR). Registration
number DE15599992

– PTW-Freiburg works in strict accordance with

a quality management system that is contin-
uously updated according to the national and
international standards.

14 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Introduction to the BEAMSCAN Software - Safety Information

2 Safety Information

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used Signal Words

to alert the user to potential hazards.
Obey all safety messages that follow this DANGER
symbol to avoid any possible bodily injury
Indicates an imminent hazard. If not avoided,
or equipment damage.
the hazard will result in death or serious injury.

All safety messages consist of the following com-

ponents: WARNING
– Safety alert symbol and signal word Indicates a hazard. If not avoided, the hazard
– Type of danger can result in death or serious injury.
– Source of danger
– Consequence
CAUTION
– Measures to prevent hazards.
Indicates a potential hazard. If not avoided, the
hazard can result in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE
Indicates a potential hazard. If not avoided, the
hazard can result in product damage.

HINT
Provides application tips or other useful infor-
mation to ensure that you get the most from
your equipment.

D948.131.00/10 en 15
 BEAMSCAN Software
Introduction to the BEAMSCAN Software - Safety Information

Safety Information Concerning the Software WARNING

The PC with the BEAMSCAN software is capa-
WARNING ble of interfering with the data transmission of
Hazards originating from other system compo- other stations on the network.
nents.
Network Problem!
Incorrect Operation!
When operating the PC with the BEAMSCAN
Strictly observe the safety information provided software via the Ethernet interface, connect it
in the user manuals of the system components. only to data networks if the safety of patients,
the operator or other persons does not depend
WARNING on the proper functioning of these networks.

Use of the BEAMSCAN software by persons Ensure that only the network administrator con-
with inadequate qualifications. nects the PC to the data network.

Incorrect Operation! For information on incorporating medical

devices in clinical data networks, refer to the
Use the BEAMSCAN software only if you
standards EN 80001-1 (IEC 80001-1).
are familiar with the software and adequately
trained or experienced in the use of such soft-
ware and own the necessary decision-mak-
ing competence to ensure proper use. This
includes, for example, the following activities:

– determination of the measuring and analy-

sis parameters

– determination of the tolerance levels

– selection of correction protocols according

to different standards

– selection or generation of the correction

tables according to different standards

– evaluation and plausibility check of measur-

ing and analysis data provided by the soft-
ware

– introduction of the software in the depart-

ment

– as well as the instruction provided to the

personnel on how to perform measure-
ments.

16 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Introduction to the BEAMSCAN Software - Safety Information

CAUTION HINT
Influences by other software. PTW recommends making backups of the
BEAMSCAN software data at regular intervals.
Malfunction!
For more information, refer to section 4.6 "Stor-
Install only the BEAMSCAN software or soft- age of Data".
ware approved by PTW-Freiburg on the PC.

If software other than the BEAMSCAN software HINT

or software not approved by PTW-Freiburg is
Please observe the user manuals of all con-
installed on the PC, PTW-Freiburg cannot be
nected components!
held liable for computer malfunctions resulting
from this fact. Furthermore, PTW-Freiburg can-
not guarantee the proper functioning if third- Symbols on the Installation CD/DVD
party software was previously installed on the
PC and was not entirely removed. Symbol Description
For the proper functioning of the BEAMSCAN
software, ensure that only one version of this Refer to the user manual!
software is installed on your PC.

The product bears the CE-mark.

CAUTION
Manufacturer and date of manu-
Use in combination with unsuitable system
facture
components.

Incorrect Operation! Reference number

Install the BEAMSCAN software only on PCs

that meet the requirements of the standard
EN 60950-1 (IEC 60950-1) (UL 60950-1) or
EN 62368-1 (IEC 62368-1).
Make sure that the PC meets the minimum
requirements according to section 4.1 "Mini-
mum System Requirements" .

Do not use the PC in the patient environment.

Use the BEAMSCAN software only in conjunc-

tion with the PTW devices listed in the section
"Intended Use".

D948.131.00/10 en 17
 BEAMSCAN Software
Introduction to the BEAMSCAN Software - Safety Information

Disclaimer

PTW-Freiburg is not responsible in any way for

the consequences resulting from the use of the
BEAMSCAN software. Any conclusions drawn
from these measuring and/or analysis data are the
sole responsibility of the user.

The user automatically accepts this agreement by

their using the BEAMSCAN software.

Agreement about Updates and Licenses

PTW-Freiburg is not obliged to keep the software

up to date. When you contact us for advice, please
let us know the software revision, the serial num-
bers of the peripheral devices, and the date of pur-
chase.

18 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Introduction to the BEAMSCAN Software - Intended Use

3 Intended Use

The BEAMSCAN software can be used with vari- General Application Information for the
ous PTW measuring systems. BEAMSCAN Software

The intended use of the respective measuring The BEAMSCAN software is a software package
systems applies. The intended use is described in for automatic acquisition and analysis of relative
the user manual of the measuring system. and absolute dose distributions of radiotherapy
systems, and particularly of medical linear accel-
erators in combination with computer-controlled
PTW water phantoms, PTW solid state phantoms,
Note: In the United States, federal law restricts PTW air scanners, or film scanners.
this device to sale by or on the order of
a physician. The BEAMSCAN software allows data to be ana-
lyzed in compliance with international dosimetry
protocols.

This user manual describes the BEAMSCAN soft- The measuring data can be transferred to radia-
ware, its installation, and application. tion treatment planning systems. The data con-
version and transmission programs necessary for
this function are available as options.

D948.131.00/10 en 19
 BEAMSCAN Software
Introduction to the BEAMSCAN Software - Installing, Starting, and Exiting the BEAMSCAN Software

4 Installing, Starting, and Exiting the BEAMSCAN Software

4.1 Minimum System Hard disk: min. 100 MB of free space for
BEAMSCAN and
Requirements
min. 2.7 GB of free space for
Operating Windows 8.1 Pro x32/x64 .NET Framework 3.5 and 4.7.2
systems: Windows 10 Pro x32/x64 More free space may be
required depending on the over-
The most recent service packs all volume of analyzed data.
and updates must be installed.
For a complete list of all operating Graphics: XGA (1024 x 768 pixels)
systems approved for this soft- or higher resolution
ware, please refer to the Release recommended SXGA
Notes on the installation CD/ (1280 x 1024 pixels)
DVD. default font size enabled

.NET Frame- .NET Framework 3.5 (For Win- Software: PDF viewer program
work: dows 8.1, and 10, you need to
install this version from the Inter- Network: TCP/IP, Ethernet
net.) min. 100 Mbit/s
.NET Framework 4.7.2 or higher
(automatic installation during
setup)
The required .NET Framework
versions will be installed only if
they have not yet been installed.

Processor: min. Pentium IV processor,

2 GHz
or compatible processor
recommended multi-core
processor,
2.3 GHz or better

RAM: min. 2 GB RAM

recommended 4 GB

20 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Introduction to the BEAMSCAN Software - Installing, Starting, and Exiting the BEAMSCAN Software

4.2 Installation • Log in as the administrator.

• Start Windows on your PC and close all run-

HINT
ning applications.
On the installation CD/DVD of the BEAMSCAN
software, you will find the following installation • Insert the installation CD/DVD into the CD/
programs: DVD drive (e.g., drive D:\).
– BEAMSCAN
• In Windows Explorer, open the directory of the
– Track-it Import Client CD/DVD drive.
To be able to export data of the BEAMSCAN
• Start the installation with the "setup.exe" file.
software to the Track-it database, it is imper-
ative to additionally install the Track-it Import
➔ The installation program will run and the soft-
Client after you have installed the BEAMSCAN
ware will then install on the hard disk of your
software.
PC.

CAUTION • Please follow the prompts on the screen.

Working with an incomplete version of the
BEAMSCAN software.

Malfunction!
If a restart of the system is required during or
after the installation of the software, it is essen-
tial to restart the PC before the first use of the
software in order to ensure a correct installation
of the software.

HINT
Switch off antivirus software, energy saving
modes, and screen savers in order to avoid
problems during installation or measurements.

The installation program is delivered on a CD/

DVD.

D948.131.00/10 en 21
 BEAMSCAN Software
Introduction to the BEAMSCAN Software - Installing, Starting, and Exiting the BEAMSCAN Software

➔ The Setup Type window will be displayed. If you want to save the global PTW database for
the radiation units and the detectors on a server in
the network, the Windows service 'Device Data-
base Service' must be installed on the server. It is
not necessary to install the BEAMSCAN software
on the server.

• Select the setup type Custom and click the

Next button.

• In the Custom Setup window, activate the

installation of the Windows service 'Device
Database Service'.

• Click the Next button.

Figure I-1: Setup Type window

• In the Setup Type window, select the setup

type Custom or Complete (or name of the soft-
ware).

PTW-Freiburg recommends selecting the setup

type Complete, especially if you use the software
for the first time.
With Complete, all available programs will be
installed in the directory 'C:\Program Files(x86)\'.

If you want to choose another directory, select

the setup type Custom. The installation pro-
gram recommends the target directory 'C:\Pro-
gram Files(x86)\'.
To choose another directory, click Change.
With OK, you confirm the selection. The target
directory will be created if it does not exist yet.

22 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Introduction to the BEAMSCAN Software - Installing, Starting, and Exiting the BEAMSCAN Software

➔ The PTW Service window will be displayed. ➔ After the installation is finished, the Program
Registration window will be displayed.

Figure I-2: PTW Service window

Figure I-3: Program Registration window
• In the PTW Service window, select the auto-
matic service configuration and the port num- • In the Program Registration window, enter the
ber for the database. user information as well as the license key (see
label of the installation CD/DVD). Confirm the
The BEAMSCAN software and the database on entered data with the Register button.
the server communicate via an IP address and a
port number. The service configuration is a pre- If the data entered during installation are invalid,
requisite for the communication. an appropriate message will be displayed. The
Program Registration window will remain dis-
PTW recommends using the automatic service played to repeat the entering of registration data
configuration. Otherwise, the network administra- or to terminate registering the program by clicking
tor is required to manually configure the appropri- the Demo or existing license button. In this case,
ate settings. a demo version of the software will be licensed,
which can be used for a period of 30 days. The
The port is configurable (next free port from 8080) licensing information can be entered at a later
to prevent port conflicts with previously installed date via the PTW License Control Center (see
applications. section 5 "Licensing the BEAMSCAN Software").

• Click the Next button, and in the following win-

dow, click the Install button to start the instal-
lation.

➔ The BEAMSCAN software will be installed.

D948.131.00/10 en 23
 BEAMSCAN Software
Introduction to the BEAMSCAN Software - Installing, Starting, and Exiting the BEAMSCAN Software

If you had already installed a previous version with 4.3 Notes on Communication
valid licensing, abort the registration process by
with the BEAMSCAN MR
clicking the Demo or existing license button. In
this case, the licensing will remain also valid for
Measuring System
the already installed version. Please keep in mind
To enable communication between the BEAMS-
that this only applies if the major release numbers
CAN software and the BEAMSCAN MR measur-
of the previous and of the new version are iden-
ing system, a virtual COM port pair is required.
tical.
Use the "Virtual Serial Port Driver" software by
Eltima Software to create this COM port pair. The
• If you want to export data from the
software will be referred to as "Eltima driver" in
BEAMSCAN software to the Track-it database,
this chapter.
you need to install the Track-it Import Client.

• If you want to use the BEAMSCAN software

Installing the Eltima Driver
for measurements in a BEAMSCAN MR mea-
suring system, observe section 4.3 "Notes If you want to use the BEAMSCAN software
•
on Communication with the BEAMSCAN MR for measurements in a BEAMSCAN MR mea-
Measuring System". suring system, you need to install the Eltima
driver.

➔ The installation program is located in the

following directory:
'C:\Program Files (x86)\PTW\MEPHYSTO
mcc\Driver\Eltima'

• Start the installation with the file "vspd.exe".

• Follow the prompts displayed on the
screen. Keep all proposed settings.

➔ The installation program will be executed

and the Eltima driver will be installed on the
hard disk of your PC.

• License the Eltima driver.

24 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Introduction to the BEAMSCAN Software - Installing, Starting, and Exiting the BEAMSCAN Software

Creating Virtual COM Ports • A virtual COM port pair that is incorrect or not
needed can be deleted by selecting the COM
• Start the setup program for the Eltima driver port pair and clicking the Delete pair button.
by clicking the Windows button Start → Pro-
grams → Eltima Software → Virtual Serial Port • As an alternative, you can delete all the virtual
Driver → Configure Virtual Serial Port Driver. COM port pairs by clicking the Delete all but-
ton.
➔ The Virtual Serial Port Driver dialog will be dis-
played:

Figure I-4: Virtual Serial Port Driver dialog

• Click the Add pair button to create a virtual

COM port pair for communication with the
BEAMSCAN MR measuring system.
To simplify handling, two consecutive num-
bers should be assigned to the virtual COM
ports. If this is not done automatically, select
the desired numbers from the respective list
boxes. Be sure not to select a number that
already exists.

D948.131.00/10 en 25
 BEAMSCAN Software
Introduction to the BEAMSCAN Software - Installing, Starting, and Exiting the BEAMSCAN Software

4.4 MEPHYSTO mc² Update 4.5 Repairing and

Information Uninstalling
It is not possible to update MEPHYSTO mc² to You can uninstall the BEAMSCAN software or
the BEAMSCAN software. However, the basic repair installation errors.
settings ("Settings") of MEPHYSTO mc² can be
transferred to the BEAMSCAN software if your • Click Start → Settings → Control panel.
version of MEPHYSTO mc² is version 3.0 or
higher. • Double-click Add/Remove programs.

You can choose between two options: • Select the BEAMSCAN software and click the
Change button.
1. You install the BEAMSCAN software on a sep-
arate PC and transfer the required basic set- ➔ The Program Maintenance window will be dis-
tings, e.g., via a network connection. This is played.
the option recommended by PTW.

2. You uninstall MEPHYSTO mc² and then install

the BEAMSCAN software.
Remember that uninstalling the program
will delete all defined radiation units, detec-
tors, and settings!

To avoid any loss of data, it is important to

observe the information in Appendix I "Transfer-
ring the Basic Settings from MEPHYSTO mc² to
the BEAMSCAN Software".

Figure I-5: Program Maintenance window

The Program Maintenance window offers the fol-

lowing options.

Modify to change installation settings

Repair to check and repair the installation

Remove to uninstall the software

26 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Introduction to the BEAMSCAN Software - Installing, Starting, and Exiting the BEAMSCAN Software

4.6 Storage of Data 4.7 Starting

When you store data, be sure to write them only • Click the Windows Start button.
to shared directories. Otherwise, the data will All Programs
be stored in a virtual directory ("virtualization"). → PTW
These data in the selected storage path will no → MEPHYSTO Navigator icon.
longer be visible to other users or in Windows
Explorer. ➔ The MEPHYSTO Navigator (refer to
Figure II-1) will be displayed.
If corresponding PTW-specific files exist, they will
be saved to the following directories: • Start the desired module, refer to chapter II
"MEPHYSTO Navigator".
■ <PTW application files>
e.g., configuration files or initialization files

Directory:
'C:\ProgramData\PTW'

■ <PTW documents>
e.g., demo data, measurement data, or evalu-
ation data

Directory:
'C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\PTW'

D948.131.00/10 en 27
 BEAMSCAN Software
Introduction to the BEAMSCAN Software - Installing, Starting, and Exiting the BEAMSCAN Software

4.8 Exiting

4.8.1 Exiting the BEAMSCAN

Modules

Exiting the modules of the BEAMSCAN software

can be done in several different ways:

• Press the standard Windows hot-key

sequence Alt+F4 or

• Double-click the program icon in the title bar of

the main screen or

• Click the Windows button in the title bar of

the main screen.

If the software contains data that have not been

saved yet, an appropriate message will be dis-
played and you will be given the option to save
these data.

4.8.2 Exiting the MEPHYSTO

Navigator

Exiting the MEPHYSTO Navigator can be done in

several different ways:

• Press the standard Windows hot-key

sequence Alt+F4 or

• Click the Windows button in the title bar of

the main screen.

28 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Introduction to the BEAMSCAN Software - Licensing the BEAMSCAN Software

5 Licensing the BEAMSCAN Software

5.1 Licensing Procedure 5.2 PTW License Control

Center
Licensing can be done in two ways:
• Click the Windows Start button
1. The licensing information can be entered dur- → Program Files
ing the installation. In this case, the software → PTW
will automatically be licensed after the installa- → License Control Center icon.
tion.
➔ The PTW License Control Center will be dis-
2. If the data entered during the installation are played (refer to Figure I-6).
invalid, an appropriate message will be dis-
played and a demo version of the software will
HINT
be licensed that can be used for a period of
30 days. In this case, the licensing information The License Control Center dialog will show all
can be entered at a later date via the PTW PTW applications that are currently installed on
License Control Center. the PC. When you click a software name and
the Register button is disabled, the software
either has to be licensed from within the appli-
HINT
cation or it has already been licensed.
The trial period of the demo version begins on
the installation day.

Options, updates, and expired demo versions can

also be licensed whenever necessary via the
PTW License Control Center.

D948.131.00/10 en 29
 BEAMSCAN Software
Introduction to the BEAMSCAN Software - Licensing the BEAMSCAN Software

3
1

Figure I-6: PTW License Control Center

1 List of all licensed PTW applications, includ- 2 Click the button to open the Registration dia-
ing the version number and license status. log
Registered for … = correct registration with 3 Click the button to view the software options
user information
4 Click the button to close the PTW License
Demo expired in … days = remaining days of
Control Center
the demo version trial period
Demo expired = expired demo version
Unregistered = unregistered program version

30 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Introduction to the BEAMSCAN Software - Licensing the BEAMSCAN Software

5.3 Verifying the License 5.4 Registering the

BEAMSCAN Software, an
• In the PTW License Control Center, click
BEAMSCAN, and then click the Options but-
Option, or an Update
ton.
• In the PTW License Control Center, click
BEAMSCAN, and then click the Register but-
➔ The Options dialog will be displayed:
ton.

➔ The Register dialog opens:

Figure I-7: Options dialog

The Options dialog shows the base version and Figure I-9: Register dialog
all of the software options (if any) as well as their
license status (also refer to Figure I-6). • Enter the user information and license key
(see the label of the installation CD/DVD).
Click the base version or an option and then click
the Modules button to display the Modules info
box:

Figure I-8: Modules info box for the base

version

In the Modules info box you will see a list of all

the modules and their version numbers that are
included in the base version or in the option.

D948.131.00/10 en 31
 BEAMSCAN Software
MEPHYSTO Navigator - General Information on MEPHYSTO Navigator

II MEPHYSTO Navigator

1 General Information on MEPHYSTO Navigator

The BEAMSCAN software is a software pack-

age comprising individual, optimized modules
all of which are controlled and started from
MEPHYSTO Navigator.

Each module in MEPHYSTO Navigator is asso-

ciated with an application group (e. g., Relative
Dosimetry) in the Applications and Toolbox areas
and can be started from there. Some modules are
also listed in the favorites area that can be modi-
fied by the user.

The standard configuration of MEPHYSTO Nav-

igator shows all the PTW programs for radiation
therapy. Programs are dimmed if they are not
installed.

Programs, for which no license exists or which are

not used, can be removed from the display via the
configuration menu for the sake of clarity.

32 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
MEPHYSTO Navigator - Main Screen

2 Main Screen

Figure II-1: Main screen

1 Title bar with PTW button to open the PTW 4 Toolbox area
website a Button to minimize or maximize the area
2 Favorites area b Application groups
a Button to minimize the Navigator main 5 Buttons for the configuration mode, to mini-
screen mize the screen, and to exit the Navigator
b Icons of the Favorites 6 Drop-down list contains further entries
3 Applications area 7 Scrollbar to change between application
a Button to minimize or maximize the area groups
b Application groups

D948.131.00/10 en 33
 BEAMSCAN Software
MEPHYSTO Navigator - Favorites Area

3 Selecting and Starting 4 Favorites Area

a Module in MEPHYSTO
Navigator MEPHYSTO Navigator enables you to add fur-
ther modules in the Favorites area. These mod-
ules may be preconfigured measuring tasks for
All entries are selected with the mouse. the swift completion of measurements or links to
frequently used programs, such as other PTW
• Move the mouse cursor over the entries.
programs or Office programs.

➔ The cursor (red selection frame) will move

Favorites are added by drag & drop. Via Windows
between the entries.
Explorer, *.txt, *.doc, *.xls, *.pdf, *.exe, and *.mcc
files as well as complete folders can be added by
• Hold the mouse cursor over any entry.
drag & drop.
➔ A tooltip will appear at the respective entry.
The favorites are displayed as icons.
• Click the entry to select it.
To start a favorite, click the corresponding icon.
➔ Favorites area: The file will be opened with the program associ-
The module will be started. ated with that file type. For this, adapt the asso-
ciation of the file type and program via Windows
➔ Applications and Toolbox areas: Explorer.
A submenu will be displayed.
If not all favorites are visible, you can select the
• Select and start a module in the submenu by hidden favorites via a drop-down list.
clicking it with the mouse.
In order to add favorites, delete favorites, or
If not all entries of an area are visible, you can rearrange them, use the configuration mode.
select the hidden entries via a drop-down list or a
scrollbar.

In order to adapt MEPHYSTO Navigator to your

personal needs, use the configuration mode.

34 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
MEPHYSTO Navigator - Applications and Toolbox Areas

Minimized Favorites Area 5 Applications and

■ Click the following button in the Toolbox Areas
Favorites area.

➔ The MEPHYSTO Navigator main screen will These areas contain modules organized in appli-
be minimized. Only the Favorites area will be cation groups for radiotherapy. When you select
displayed: an application group, the main screen shrinks to
one side and a submenu with the modules will be
displayed.

If you have not installed all the modules of an

application group or if you do not use the modules,
you can set the application group concerned to be
visible or invisible via the configuration mode

If not all application groups are visible, you can

select the hidden application groups via a scroll-
bar.
Figure II-2: Minimized navigator window
showing only the Favorites area

1 Icons of the favorites

2 Button to maximize the MEPHYSTO Naviga-
tor main screen
3 Button to exit MEPHYSTO Navigator
4 Button to open the drop-down list
5 PTW button to open the PTW website

D948.131.00/10 en 35
 BEAMSCAN Software
MEPHYSTO Navigator - Submenus for Applications and Toolbox Areas

6 Submenus for Applications and Toolbox Areas

Open the submenus by selecting an application • To switch to the submenu of a preceding or fol-
group in the Applications or Toolbox area. lowing application group, click the correspond-
ing button in the scrollbar.
The submenus contain the modules.
• To start a module, click its name.
If you have not installed a particular module or if
you do not use it, you can set the module con- • To exit the submenu, click the main screen.
cerned to be visible or invisible via the configura-
tion mode.

Figure II-3: Submenu

1 Scrollbar to switch to the submenu of the pre-

vious or next application group
2 Application group
3 List of modules

36 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
MEPHYSTO Navigator - Submenus for Applications and Toolbox Areas

Submenu with Subgroups Subgroup with Drop-Down List

The Relative Dosimetry submenu contains sub- The subgroups may contain drop-down lists.
groups.
Via the drop-down lists, you can select different
measuring systems. The list of modules changes
with the selected subgroup and measuring sys-
tem.

Figure II-4: Submenu with subgroups

1 Scrollbar to switch to the submenu of the pre-

vious or next application group
2 List of modules Figure II-5: Subgroup with a drop-down list
3 Bar with subgroups
4 Selection frame 1 Scrollbar to switch to the submenu of the pre-
vious or next application group
2 Button for the drop-down list
3 Opened drop-down list with measuring sys-
• First, select a subgroup, e. g., Data Analysis,
tems
to show the list of associated modules.

• To start a module, click its name.

D948.131.00/10 en 37
 BEAMSCAN Software
MEPHYSTO Navigator - Configuration Mode

7 Configuration Mode

Figure II-6: Main screen with submenu in configuration mode

By means of the configuration mode, you can

adapt the navigator to your personal needs.

– add entries in the Favorites area

– delete entries in the Favorites area

– change the order of entries in the Favorites
area

– set the entries to visible or invisible for the

Applications and Toolbox areas as well as for
the submenus

38 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
MEPHYSTO Navigator - Configuration Mode

Starting the Configuration Mode Entries in the Applications and Toolbox

Areas as well as in Submenus
• To start the configuration mode, click
the button: The entries are labeled as follows.

➔ The MEPHYSTO Navigator main The entry is invisible in normal mode.

screen will be displayed in the config- Click the icon with the right mouse but-
uration mode. The button will change ton.The icon changes to visible.
to red:
The entry is visible in normal mode.
Click the icon with the right mouse but-
Entries in the Favorites area ton. The icon changes to invisible.

Any programs, files, or folders can be added.

Exit Configuration Mode
• Add a program from a submenu:
• To exit the configuration mode, click
Drag and drop the icon with the left mouse
the red button:
button to the desired position in the Favorites
area.
➔ The MEPHYSTO Navigator main
screen will be displayed in normal
• Add from Windows Explorer or from the desk-
mode. The button will change back to
top:
black.
Drag and drop the icon with the left mouse
button to the desired position in the Favorites
area.

• Change the order of entries:

Drag and drop the icon with the left mouse
button to the desired position in the Favorites
area.

• Delete an entry:
Move the mouse cursor to the icon so that a
red selection frame is displayed. Press the Del
key.

D948.131.00/10 en 39
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Definitions

III Basic Functions

1 Definitions

Inplane Example for an inplane profile:

Collimator angle 0° Gun
From gun to target or from target to gun, i.e., and measurement angle 0°:
toward the radiation unit. Inplane has no direction.
If a direction needs to be indicated, gun and target
are used.

Target
Crossplane

From left to right or from right to left, i.e., at right Collimator angle 90° Gun
and measurement angle 0°:
angles to the radiation unit. Crossplane has no
direction. If a direction needs to be indicated, you
look at the radiation unit from the front to deter-
mine Left and Right. Target

HINT
The axis definitions for collimator and mea- Collimator angle 0° Gun
and measurement angle 90°:
surements in the Radiation unit Library mod-
ule (refer to chapter VII "'Radiation unit Library'
Module") apply to a collimator and a gantry
angle of 0°.
Target
The profile type and axis definition do not
change if the measurements are taken with col-
limator rotation. However, the collimator angle
will be displayed in addition to the axes desig- Collimator angle 90° Gun
nation. and measurement angle 90°:

Target

40 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Definitions

HINT – field size measured in [cm]

If the curves and data shown refer to a single – curve type

radiation unit, the inplane and crossplane axis PDD for depth dose curve,
designations as determined for that unit will be first two characters of the axis designation for
indicated. profiles (e. g., IN for inplane profile, CR for
crossplane profile)
If the curves and data for multiple radiation
or combinations of multiple curve types,
units are shown – as in the table headers
POI for point measurements
(e.g., DataAnalyze) – the designations used
STEP for Step-By-Step TPR curve
are inplane or crossplane.
CONT for Continuous TPR curve
OUTPUT for output factors
Field size – collimator angle (if unequal to zero) measured
in [°] and rounded if applicable
The BEAMSCAN software always indicates field
– measuring module
sizes as inplane x crossplane measured in [cm].
WAT for WaterTankScans module
ARR for ArrayScan module
File name IMR for imrtScan module
FIL for FilmAnalyze module
When you save curves, the program suggests a
– date with the format YYMMDD
file name consisting of the following parameters:
– time of day with the format HH'MM
– modality
X for photons and cobalt A blank separates the individual parameters.
E for electrons
p for protons Example:
n for neutrons X04 W10 10X10 PDDIN WAT 160418 11'20.mcc,
12C for 12-C ions means
HP for heavy particles – photons 4 MV
– wedge filter W10
– energy
– field size 10 cm x 10 cm
– FFF for measurements of FFF energy – depth dose curve and inplane profile
(FFF = Flattening-Filter-Free) – WaterTankScans module
– wedge filter or applicator – date and time the curve was saved 2016-04-18
If no wedge filter is used, Open will be entered. at 11h20
If no applicator is defined, None will be
entered.

D948.131.00/10 en 41
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Screen Layout of the Modules of the BEAMSCAN Software

2 Screen Layout of the Modules of the BEAMSCAN

Software

Figure III-1: Screen layout

1 Title bar with module name 4 Area showing measuring parameters, mea-
2 Menu bar surement tasks, tabular data, curves, etc.
3 Toolbar 5 Status bar

42 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Screen Layout of the Modules of the BEAMSCAN Software

2.1 Menu Bar 2.2 Toolbar

For most of the BEAMSCAN software modules, The module actually displayed determines the
the menu bar is made up in the same way: number and nature of buttons appearing in the
toolbar. The functions of the toolbar are also
– File menu accessible from the corresponding menu items in
general file management commands, such as the menu bar.
Open, Print, Save, etc.

– module-specific menu items for special func-

tions
2.3 Context Menu
– Edit menu
menu to view curve properties and analysis Context menus are available for important and
data, edit, copy, delete, select curves special functions. Context menus are activated
with a right mouse click. The program offers dif-
– Measurement menu
ferent context menus for the different windows.
menu to perform measurements

– View menu
menu to change the curve presentation

– Graphics menu
menu to select the normalization mode, dis-
play crosshairs, and modify the curve display,
using the mouse

– Tools menu
menu to select options, create task lists, mod-
ule-specific additional functions

– Window menu
menu to adapt the screen layout, module-spe-
cific

– "?" menu
menu to call the online help, the tip of the day,
the homepage of PTW-Freiburg, and to view
information on PTW-Freiburg and the version
number of the software

The module currently displayed determines the

number and nature of menu items appearing in
the menu bar.

D948.131.00/10 en 43
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Screen Layout of the Modules of the BEAMSCAN Software

2.4 Status Bar

1 2 3a 3b 3c 3d 3e 3f 3g 3h 4

Figure III-2: Status bar

1 Status indicator, describes the current action d offaxis value

and status (e.g., when loading large data e applicator (for electron radiation) or wedge
records) (for all other radiation qualities)
2 Buttons to select the previous or next curve, f data status
matrix, etc. Raw Data
3 Display of the most important data of the Processed (i.e., modified) data
selected curve (If more than one curve is g date of the measurement
selected, only the data common to all curves
h name of the selected parameter set (in the
are shown.)
measuring modules)
a energy
4 Path and name of the loaded file
b field size given as inplane x crossplane
c curve type, profiles are shown with the
profile depth

44 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Selecting and Deleting Curves

3 Selecting and Deleting Curves

3.1 Selecting Curves • Select menu Edit → Discard Selection or press

the ESC key to undo the selection.
In the table, the data of the selected curves are
shown on a blue background. On the graph, • By selecting or clearing the corresponding
crosshairs or dots identify the measuring points check box in the Visible column of the table,
of the selected curves. The marker shape and each curve can be displayed or hidden indi-
size used to identify the measuring points can vidually. In order to set several curves visible
be selected from the menu Graphics → Lines or at the same time, select the desired curves
Tools → Options (refer to section 7 "Options"). and use the context menu Set Selected Visi-
ble. This will set curves that are not selected
• You select a curve by clicking the correspond- to Not visible.
ing row in the table. Press the Ctrl key and click
the corresponding row to add single curves • By selecting or clearing the corresponding
to your selection, or press the Shift key and check box in the Ref column of the table,
click the corresponding row to select a range a curve can be designated as the refer-
of curves. ence curve (DataAnalyze module only, refer to
chapter XI "'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAn-
• You select curves on the graph by dou- alyze) Module").
ble-clicking that curve. You add curves to your
selection by pressing the Shift or Ctrl key and
double-clicking the curve in question.

• Click the button in the status bar to select

the previous curve, and click the button to
select the next curve.

• Select menu Edit → Select All to select all

curves.

• Select menu Edit → Invert Selection to invert

the selection, i.e., the selected curves will be
deselected and vice versa.

D948.131.00/10 en 45
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Selecting and Deleting Curves

3.2 Curve Properties 3.3 Deleting Curves

If only one curve is selected, menu Edit → Proper- Deleting individual curves is only possible in the
ties is active. The Properties box displays, show- DataAnalyze module (see chapter XI "'Scanned
ing all information available about the selected Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module").
curve. To view information about another curve,
you can directly select that curve from the table To completely remove a file with curves from the
or in the graphics window without closing the box PC, use the Windows Explorer functions.
first. Use the standard Windows functions to move
the box.

The box is empty when no or multiple curves are

selected (possible with the command from the
Edit menu while the box is open).

By double-clicking the appropriate cell in the first

column of the table, you can change the curve
color of each curve. This change corresponds
to setting curve colors via Graphics → Lines or
Tools → Options (refer to section 7 "Options").

46 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Printing Data and Curves

4 Printing Data and Curves

4.1 Printing Then, the print setup dialog or the print preview
will be displayed.
By selecting menu File → Print, you will get the
printout, or by selecting menu File → Print Pre- HINT
view, you will get the print preview of the displayed In order to ensure a correct color printout, the
data and curves. option Printing → Print background colors and
images has to be activated in Microsoft Inter-
First, the Print dialog for entering the administra-
net Explorer by selecting menu Tools → Inter-
tive data and for selecting the setup and measur-
net Options → Advanced.
ing parameters to print will be displayed.

Figure III-3: Print dialog

D948.131.00/10 en 47
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Printing Data and Curves

4.2 True-to-Scale Printing ➔ The Arrange Plot window will be displayed

showing the following elements in their own
HINT frames:
– the graphic
True-to-scale printing is not possible when the
– file name and printing date
displayed curves are zoomed.
– administrative data
– setup parameters
• Select File → Print Designer. – measuring parameters
– measuring depths
➔ First, the Print dialog for entering the admin-
(This element is not shown if only depth
istrative data and for selecting the setup and
dose curves shall be printed.)
measuring parameters to print will be dis-
played. • Edit the printout by means of the context menu.

➔ All settings performed in the Arrange Plot win-

dow are retained for the next printout from the
current module.
The settings have to be performed separately
for all the modules.

• Initiate the printout by clicking OK.

Figure III-4: Print dialog

• Click the Arrange Plot button.

48 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Printing Data and Curves

4.2.1 Editing the Print Preview in – Horizontal Correction Factor:

the Arrange Plot Window Vertical Correction Factor:
Input boxes for correction factors for the real
• Select the printer and adjust the printer set- printout. These factors depend on the printer
tings via the context menu Printer Setup. and have to be determined manually if applic-
able.
HINT
• Print the graph with or without an additional
For archiving, the curves can be saved into a
grid by activating or deactivating the Print Grid
PDF file by means of a PDF creator (available
option in the context menu.
in the internet, e.g., from Ghost).

Arrange the elements on the print preview

HINT
•
by clicking them and moving them while the After changing this option, the Arrange Plot
mouse button is held down. window is not refreshed immediately. It
refreshes when it is displayed again.
• Adjust the scaling of the graph via the context
menu Axes Scaling. • Adjust the font type, font style and font size for
the text elements via the context menu Select
➔ The Axes Scaling dialog will be displayed: Font.

• Bring the elements to the front via the context

menu Bring to Front or to background via the
context menu Send to Back.

HINT
Bringing the elements to the front or to the
Figure III-5: Axes Scaling dialog background does not affect the printout as all
elements are printed upon another. It is only
– Horizontal Axis: used to get more clearness while arranging the
Display of the actual graphic width and input elements in the Arrange Plot window.
box for the graphic width on the printout.
• Delete unused elements via the context menu
– Vertical Axis: Remove Element.
Display of the actual graphic height and input
box for the graphic height on the printout. • Reinsert deleted elements or elements located
outside the sheet (e.g., by changing the paper
format) via the context menu Insert all Ele-
ments.

D948.131.00/10 en 49
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Changing the Display of Data and Curves

5 Changing the Display of Data and Curves

5.1 Arranging Tabular and 5.2 Curve Display

Graphic Data
With the commands in the Window menu, you can 5.2.1 Profiles and Depth Dose
change the screen layout as follows: Curves

– With Table & Graphics, you obtain a split Click this button or select
screen showing both the data or measuring View → Profiles to view only pro-
parameters in tabular form and the curves in a files.
graphics window. Click this button or select
View → Percentage Depth Doses
– With Table, the screen only shows the tabular to view only depth dose curves.
data.
Click this button or select
– With Graphics, the screen only shows a graph- View → All Scans to view all
ics window with the curves. curves.

In split screen mode, you can also toggle between Change the curve colors via Graphics → Lines or
a vertical split (Split Vertical) and a horizontal split Tools → Options. For more information, refer to
(Split Horizontal) of data and graphics window section 7 "Options".
from the Window menu. You change the size of
the data and graphics windows by moving the line
separating the two windows.

50 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Changing the Display of Data and Curves

5.2.2 Isodoses and Three- With the DataAnalyze functions Open and Add,
Dimensional Graphics it is possible to load several files at once. In that
case, only one matrix can be displayed per Open
Click this button or select or Add operation.
View → Isodoses to view the iso-
doses. Click this button or select Graph-
ics → ColorWash to toggle
Click this button or select
between colored isodose ranges
View → 3D-Graphics to view a
and isodose lines when displaying
three-dimensional representation.
isodoses or the 3D graph.
Isodoses or 3D graphs can be displayed only
Change the colors for the isodose ranges or iso-
when at least two profiles (either at different
dose lines by selecting menu Graphics → Lines
depths or with different off-axis values) were mea-
or Tools → Options. For more information, refer to
sured under identical measurement conditions or
section 7 "Options".
loaded from a file.

For the display of isodoses or 3D graphs, a matrix

is first generated from the curves of a file. Then,
the matrix points representing the same dose are
connected to each other. The table will now show
the matrix data instead of the curve data. The
maximum value of the matrix is identified with the
"+" sign.

If more than one matrix exists, the corresponding

isodoses or 3D graph can be displayed by clicking
the respective row in the table.

To collect curves acquired under identical mea-

surement conditions from different files in a sin-
gle file, in DataAnalyze open the first file with
File → Open, load all subsequent files with
File → Add, and save them altogether in a new
file.

D948.131.00/10 en 51
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Changing the Display of Data and Curves

5.3 Normalizing Curves and To CAX Maximum

Isodoses All displayed profiles will be normalized to the
maximum center value of all profiles, and this
By selecting menu Graphics → Normalize Graph-
value will become the 100% level.
ics, curves and isodoses can be displayed in dif-
ferent normalization modes. With this procedure,
The displayed depth dose curves (when All Scans
only the graphic representation is normalized, and
are shown) are normalized to their own maximum
the numeric values remain unchanged. You can
value.
directly switch between the different normalization
modes.
To CAX

5.3.1 Normalization Modes for All displayed profiles will be normalized to their
Profiles and Depth Dose own center value, and this value will become the
Curves 100% level.

The selectable normalization modes depend on The displayed depth dose curves (when All Scans
the curves displayed. are shown) are normalized to their own maximum
value.
Display Normalization Mode
Profiles To CAX Maximum
To Maximum
To CAX
To Value
All displayed depth dose curves will be normal-
To Absolute Unit
ized to their own center value, and this value will
PDDs To Maximum become the 100% level.
To Value
To Position
To Absolute Unit
All Scans To CAX Maximum
To CAX
To Value
To Absolute Unit

52 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Changing the Display of Data and Curves

To Value To Position

All displayed curves will be normalized to a value All displayed depth dose curves will be normalized
determined by the user. to a position determined by the user.

➔ The Normalization to Value dialog will open ➔ The Normalization to Position dialog will open
and a discrete crosshairs will be displayed. and a discrete crosshairs will be displayed.

Figure III-6: Normalization to Value dialog Figure III-7: Normalization to Position dialog

• Choose the value by moving the crosshairs or • Choose the position by moving the crosshairs
enter the value in the dialog and confirm with or enter the position in the dialog and confirm
OK. with OK.

➔ This normalization value will become the ➔ If the position is not identical with one of the
100% level. measuring points, the position will be deter-
mined by linear interpolation.
HINT
Please note that the value displayed in the To Absolute Unit
dialog depends on the previous normalization
mode: The data will be displayed unnormalized. The
– absolute values for the Absolute Unit mode measured values will be shown. The units of the
– percentage values for all other modes values are the units used during the measure-
ment. If the data have different units, this normal-
ization mode is not available.

D948.131.00/10 en 53
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Changing the Display of Data and Curves

5.3.2 Normalization Modes for To Position

Isodoses
The isodoses will be normalized to a value in a
position determined by the user.
To PDD Maximum
➔ The Normalize Isodose to Position dialog will
You can normalize to the maximum value of the open and a discrete crosshairs will be dis-
depth dose curve when a depth dose curve exists played.
and the measurements were performed in a plane
parallel to the central axis.

To Center

The value of the center axis of the matrix will

become the 100% level. This normalization mode
Figure III-8: Normalize Isodose to Position
is only available for matrices if the measurements
dialog
were performed in a plane perpendicular to the
central axis. Choose the position as described for the nor-
•
malization of profiles and depth dose curves
(refer to section 5.3.1 "Normalization Modes
To Matrix Maximum
for Profiles and Depth Dose Curves").
The normalization will be performed to the max-
imum value of the matrix. Maximum and nor-
malization values are superimposed. This is the
default mode for isodose measurements.

54 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Changing the Display of Data and Curves

To Value 5.4 Changing the Display

The isodoses will be normalized to a value deter-
with the Mouse
mined by the user.
Rotate
➔ The Normalization to Value dialog will open
and a discrete crosshairs will be displayed. With Graphics → Actions → Rotate, you rotate the
graph in any direction by clicking the left mouse
button and moving the mouse (active only when
Graphics → 3D-Graphics is selected).

Zoom

Figure III-9: Normalize Isodose to Value dia- Click this button or select menu
log Graphics → Actions → Zoom to
enlarge the area of the graph
• Choose the value as described for the normal- selected by clicking and drawing a
ization of profiles and depth dose curves (refer rectangle with the mouse.
to section 5.3.1 "Normalization Modes for Pro-
files and Depth Dose Curves").
Move

With menu Graphics → Actions → Move, you

move the graph anywhere on the screen by click-
ing the left mouse button and moving the mouse.

Scale

With menu Graphics → Actions → Scale, you

enlarge the graph in the window by clicking the
left mouse button and moving the mouse up and
down.

1:1 Size

Click this button or select menu

Graphics → Actions → 1:1 Size or
Graphics → Actions → Normal Size
to undo all the changes made and
restore the original graph.

D948.131.00/10 en 55
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Crosshairs

6 Crosshairs

6.1 Discrete Crosshairs • Position the mouse cursor anywhere on a

curve that is not currently selected. When you
Click this button or select the menu double-click the left mouse button, the new
Graphics → Discrete Crosshairs to curve will be selected and the crosshairs will
display a discrete crosshairs on the be displayed on the next available measure-
graph. ment point.

The function is available only when a single curve

has been selected. The values at the current posi- 6.2 Continuous Crosshairs
tion of the crosshairs are shown in the status bar
(refer to Figure III-10). Click this button or select the menu
Graphics → Continuous Crosshairs
Follow these steps to move the crosshairs in the to display a continuous crosshairs
graph: on the graph.

• Left-click on the graph and hold the mouse The values at the current position of the
button down. When you move the mouse, crosshairs are shown in the status bar (refer to
the crosshairs will move from measurement Figure III-10).
point to measurement point on the selected
curve. When you release the mouse button, The position of the crosshairs on the graph
the crosshairs will stop on the last measure- changes with the movements of the mouse cursor
ment point. as follows:

• When you position the mouse cursor on a • Click and hold the left mouse button down.
measurement point of the selected curve and The crosshairs can now be dragged to any
left-click, the crosshairs will be displayed on position in the graphics window by moving the
that measurement point. mouse. When you release the mouse button,
the crosshairs will stop at the last position.
• Holding the Strg key pressed you can move
the crosshairs from measurement point to There is no need to select curves, but measuring
measurement point with the cursor keys. points are easier to locate on a selected curve.

• Click the button in the status bar to move

the crosshairs to the next measurement point
on the left.

• Click the button in the status bar to move

the crosshairs to the next measurement point
on the right.

56 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Crosshairs

6.3 Symmetrical Crosshairs 6.4 Performing

Measurements with Two
To check the measured values of symmetrical
points you get the facility to display two symmet-
Crosshairs
rical, discrete crosshairs.
• Position the crosshairs on the first point to be
measured.
• Activate the discrete crosshairs on the graph
by clicking the Discrete button or via the
• Freeze the crosshairs in that position with the
menu Graphics → Discrete Crosshairs (active
Fix Crosshairs context menu.
crosshairs).
➔ The frozen crosshairs is displayed with dashed
• Position the crosshairs on the first point to be
lines, and a second crosshairs will be dis-
checked.
played whose position can be changed.

• Activate the second symmetrical crosshairs

• Drag the second crosshairs to the second
with the command Symmetric Crosshairs from
point to be measured.
the context menu (inactive crosshairs).
➔ The positions and measured values as well as
➔ The active crosshairs will be displayed with
the differences will be displayed in the status
continuous lines and the inactive crosshairs
bar (refer to Figure III-10).
with dashed lines.
• Additional measurements can be performed
➔ The positions and measured values as well as
any time by freezing the currently active
the differences will be displayed in the status
crosshairs with the Fix Crosshairs context
bar (according to Figure III-10).
menu.

• Additional checks can be performed by posi-

• Terminate the function by turning the
tioning the active crosshairs to each measur-
crosshairs off.
ing point.
Measurements can be performed on any point
HINT both with the discrete and with the continuous
If you select another curve by double-clicking it crosshairs.
while symmetric crosshairs are displayed, the
active crosshairs will move on the new selected
curve and the inactive crosshairs on the previ-
ous curve.

D948.131.00/10 en 57
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Crosshairs

6.5 Status Bar with Two

Active Crosshairs

HINT
The measured values displayed in the status
bar always refer to the currently selected nor-
malization mode.

1 2 3 4 5 6

Figure III-10: Status bar with active crosshairs

1 Status indicator, describes the current action 3 Position and measured value of the frozen
and status (e.g., when loading large data crosshairs
records) 4 Position and measured value of the movable
2 Buttons to move the discrete crosshairs to crosshairs
the next measuring point on the left or right 5 Difference between the positions and mea-
sured values of the frozen and movable
crosshairs
6 Path and name of the loaded data

58 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Options

7 Options

7.1 General Information on

the Options
Via Graphics → Lines or Tools → Options, you
display the Options dialog.

In the Options dialog, you will find the follow-

ing three tabs for each of the measurement and
analysis modules:

– Isodoses:
isodose levels and colors for the display of iso-
doses and 3D graphs

– Graphics:
colors for graphics and curves

– Advanced:
more options

Changes on these tabs affect all BEAMSCAN

software modules.

On the fourth tab, you will find options that are

specific to the current module, e.g., Table View
for the DataAnalyze module. For more informa-
tion, please refer to the chapters describing the
respective modules.

With the Apply button, you apply the changes and

adapt the display in the background without clos-
ing the dialog.

D948.131.00/10 en 59
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Options

7.2 Isodose Levels and Colors

1 Check box to select or deselect the isodose
level
1 2 3 4
2 Button to select the isodose colors from the
standard Windows color dialog
3 Isodose level
4 Button to restore the defaults of the settings
on the tab
5 Check box to show or hide the legend for the
isodose levels and colors
6 Button to sort the isodose levels in descend-
ing order

For the Color Color Wash display mode, an addi-

tional isodose level is active whose value adapts
to the maximum level determined. It is used for all
the values exceeding that level.

5 6

Figure III-11: Options dialog - Isodoses tab

60 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Options

7.3 Colors for Graphics and Curves

1 Button to select the curve color from the stan-
dard Windows color dialog; a maximum of
1 2 3
16 colors can be selected; the default setting
is 16 colors
2 Button to select the background, axis, and
crosshairs colors from the standard Windows
color dialog
3 Preview window for background and axis col-
ors
4 Button to restore the defaults of the settings
on the tab
5 Curve marker shape: cross or dot
6 Size of the curve markers
7 Thickness of the curve lines

4 5 6 7

Figure III-12: Options dialog - Graphics tab

D948.131.00/10 en 61
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Options

7.4 More Options 7.5 Managing the Basic

Settings
BEAMSCAN allows basic settings ("Settings") to
be saved to any drive. It is possible to configure
these basic settings once in a central location for
1 all users.

These are the basic settings:

– Definition of the measuring positions (Step-By-

2 Step Options and Continuous Options)

– Definition of measurement depths for isodoses

3
– Analysis protocols for the Analyze function

– Print layout

The option is selected via menu

Tools → Options → Advanced → Settings Path
(also refer to section 7.4 "More Options").

Figure III-13: Options dialog - Advanced tab HINT

The storage location of the detector library
1 Directory where the basic settings are stored;
(Detector Library module) and of the library
for further information, refer to section 7.5
of radiation units (Radiation unit Library mod-
"Managing the Basic Settings".
ule) is defined by means of the Device Data-
2 Icon and text
base Selection module. For further information,
If selected, the icons in the toolbar will be
refer to chapter IX "'Device Database Selection'
accompanied by a descriptive text.
Module".
3 Warn about unsaved data
If selected, the program will display this mes-
sage when you select the Open command
(File → Open) or when you exit the module
and your data have not yet been saved.
Warn about modifying (process) raw data
If selected, the program will display this
message when you try to process raw data
before having saved them first.

62 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Options

• Click the Settings Access Configuration but- CAUTION

ton.
Measuring with incorrect basic settings.
➔ The Settings Access Configuration dialog will Loss of Data!
be displayed:
A change of the mode or of the network path will
become effective only after closing and reopen-
ing all BEAMSCAN modules. If you change
a setting, you will be prompted to close all
BEAMSCAN modules that are listed at the
same time.

HINT
If a global path is selected where a directory
structure does not yet exist for the basic set-
tings, this structure will be created when you
Figure III-14: Settings Access Configuration close the program and the current basic set-
dialog tings will be copied to that directory.

In the Settings Access Mode Next Session pane,

There are three ways of accessing the basic set-
you can set the basic settings mode that will be
tings:
activated after the next program start.

Global
With the … button you select the global net-
work path. The correct directory structure is auto-
At program start, the data are copied from the
matically created in this directory. The full network
global path to a working directory. All modifi-
path is shown at Settings Path.
cations are performed in this working directory.
Thus, even if the communication via the global
path is interrupted during a measurement, work-
ing will not be affected. When closing the program,
the modifications can be written back to the global
path. For the Global option, the global path is indi-
cated additionally.

D948.131.00/10 en 63
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Options

Global Read Only HINT

Similar to Global. The only difference: When the If multiple users access a shared directory, it
program is closed, the modifications are not writ- is useful to designate one or a small number
ten back to the global path. The global data will of users as "masters". The Global setting will
thus overwrite the modifications of the basic set- only be assigned to such individuals who are
tings when the program is started the next time. then authorized to perform modifications via
For the Global Read Only option, the global path the global path. The Global Read Only setting
is indicated additionally. will be assigned to all other users. They can
make use of all settings of the global path upon
Local program start, but they cannot modify them.
The Windows user administration can also be
You are working on the local path. used to further restrict access to this directory.

The advantage of having separate local and

HINT
global settings paths is that you can work both
with the data on the global path and with the local When reading from or writing to the global path,
settings without any interference between the two. the system checks the settings for consistency.
With the Copy Global Settings to local directory In case of conflicting versions an error mes-
command, the global settings can be copied to the sage is displayed. If this problem occurs at the
local directory at any time. program start, the user can work with the local
directory.
CAUTION In the Global mode if the data on the global path
Incorrect modification of the basic settings. changed between the start and closing of mod-
ules, the differences will be shown. The user
Loss of data!
can then decide to abort the copy procedure or
The user is entirely responsible for all settings to make the changes on the global path. How-
written to the global path when the program is ever, only the data older than the changes will
closed. Any changes performed will overwrite be overwritten.
the data on the global path.

64 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Options

7.5.1 MEPHYSTO mc² Update

Information

It is not possible to update MEPHYSTO mc² to

the BEAMSCAN software. However, the basic
settings ("Settings") of MEPHYSTO mc² can be
transferred to the BEAMSCAN software if your
version of MEPHYSTO mc² is version 3.0 or
higher.

You can choose between two options:

1. You install the BEAMSCAN software on a sep-

arate PC and transfer the required basic set-
tings, e.g., via a network connection. This is
the option recommended by PTW.

2. You uninstall MEPHYSTO mc² and then install

the BEAMSCAN software.
Remember that uninstalling the program
will delete all defined radiation units, detec-
tors, and settings!

To avoid any loss of data, it is important to

observe the information in Appendix I "Transfer-
ring the Basic Settings from MEPHYSTO mc² to
the BEAMSCAN Software".

D948.131.00/10 en 65
 BEAMSCAN Software
Basic Functions - Data Exchange

8 Data Exchange

Importing MCC Files into Modules of the Between a Module of the BEAMSCAN
BEAMSCAN Software by Drag & Drop Software and Another Program via the
Clipboard
With the Drag&Drop function you can either
import complete files including curves into a mod- With the Copy Data Points function, data can be
ule of the BEAMSCAN software or you can copy copied from the modules to the Clipboard. From
displayed curves from one module to another. the Clipboard, they can be pasted to another soft-
ware program (e.g., Excel or an editor program).
• In Windows Explorer, left-click the file to copy
and hold the left mouse button down. • In the module, highlight the curves to copy.
or
In one of the modules, highlight the curves to • With the Copy Data Points command of the
copy. Right-click the table or anywhere on the context menu or via Edit → Copy Data Points,
graph and hold the mouse button down. copy the data to the Clipboard.

• Drag the mouse cursor to the window of the • Open the target program and paste the data
target module and release the mouse button. with Ctrl+V or use the Paste command of the
target program.
• Choose between the commands Insert,
Append, or Cancel. Alternatively, you can copy the selected curves
from the graphic windows to the Clipboard with
– With Insert, the existing data will be over-
Ctrl+C. With this option, the data will be copied in
written. If data are displayed in the target
the MEPHYSTO data format.
module, they will be deleted.

– With Append, the new data will be

appended to the displayed data.

– Cancel will abort the operation.

66 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - General Information on WaterTankScans

IV 'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for

the BEAMSCAN Measuring System

1 General Information on WaterTankScans

CAUTION Furthermore, WaterTankScans is used for sin-

gle-detector measurements in the TPR (tissue
Measurement for monitor calibration.
phantom ratio) mode.
Incorrect Operation!
WaterTankScans enables you to perform single
The measuring module WaterTankScans is
measuring tasks and series of measuring tasks
no absolute dosemeter for monitor calibration
(e. g., identical measuring task with different field
according to EN 60731 (IEC 60731).
sizes or energies). Task lists can be created for
this purpose (refer to section 12.3 "Working with
WaterTankScans is a module of the BEAMSCAN Task Lists").
software and it is used for single-detector mea-
surements as well as for the graphical represen-
tation, evaluation, and storage of measuring data.

WaterTankScans can be used with the following

measuring systems:

– BEAMSCAN measuring system

– BEAMSCAN MR measuring system

For further information, refer to chapter V
"'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Mod-
ule for the BEAMSCAN MR Measuring Sys-
tem".

– MP3, MP3-M/S/XS/T/P, MP2, MP1, MP1-S

For further information, refer to chapter VI
"'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Mod-
ule for the MP3, MP2, and MP1 Measuring
Systems".

D948.131.00/10 en 67
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Quick Start (Workflow)

2 Starting 3 Quick Start (Workflow)

WaterTankScans
Requirements:
WaterTankScans is started in MEPHYSTO Navi-
The complete measuring system is installed and
gator (also refer to chapter II "MEPHYSTO Navi-
all the components are connected. All the network
gator").
settings have been performed.
• In the Applications area, select the Relative
Dosimetry application group. Basic settings before starting the first
measurement:
• Select the desired measuring system and click
the appropriate measuring module. Edit the detector library via MEPHYSTO Navi-
•
gator → Toolbox area → Configuration appli-
➔ The WaterTankScans main screen will be dis-
cation group → Detector Library (refer to
played.
chapter VIII "'Detector Library' Module")

• Create radiation units via MEPHYSTO Naviga-

tor → Toolbox area → Configuration applica-
tion group → Radiation unit Library (refer to
chapter VII "'Radiation unit Library' Module")

• Start WaterTankScans

• Set communication parameters on the Com-

munication tab via menu Tools → Measure-
ment Options (refer to section 12.4 "Defining
the Measurement Options")

• Create parameter sets in the Continuous

Options dialog via menu Tools → Continuous
Options and in the Step-By-Step Options dia-
log via menu Tools → Step-By-Step Options
(refer to section 12.2 "Setting Up Parameter
Sets")

• Perform settings for the graphical represen-

tation via menu Tools → Options (refer to
chapter III "Basic Functions")

68 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Quick Start (Workflow)

Zero adjustment: • Select parameter set:

menu Tools → Continuous Options
• Perform zero adjustment: and
Zero button menu Tools → Step-By-Step Options

• Perform a measurement:
Auto Setup:
– Start measurement:
• Perform Auto Setup adjustments: Start button (or F5)
Auto Setup, Linac, and Measurement tabs – Pause measurement:
Pause button (or F6)
• Start Auto Setup:
Start button – Resume measurement:
Resume button (or F7)
• Switch off Auto Setup mode:
– Select new scale for measurement graphic:
Auto Setup button
Graphics → Normalize Graphics (or F8)

• Save measuring data:

Measurements:
Save button
• Perform settings for the radiation unit:
Linac tab
Evaluations:
– Select radiation unit
→ Name • Analyze measuring data:
Analyze button
– Define settings for current measuring task
→ Modality, Energy, Orientation, etc. • Modify measuring data:
Process button
• Perform settings for measurement:
Measurement tab
– Select and adjust detectors:
→ click detector picture • Exit WaterTankScans

– Set position of effective point of measure-

ment:
EPOM button

– Check and confirm settings in the Detector

Settings for Electrometer dialog:
Accept Selection button

– Select measuring mode

– Select measuring program

D948.131.00/10 en 69
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Main Screen

4 Main Screen

Figure IV-1: WaterTankScans main screen

1 Tabs for measurement configuration or for Auto Setup

2 Graphics window

70 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Main Screen

4.1 Explanation of the Display only profiles

Toolbar Icons
Open file Display only depth dose curves

Save data Display profiles and depth dose

curves

Toggle between Auto Setup mode Display 2D isodoses

and measuring mode

Delete displayed curves and share Display 3D isodoses

interface for control unit

Perform zero adjustment Show/hide discrete crosshairs

Start measurement (or press F5) Show/hide continuous crosshairs

Pause measurement (or press F6) Enlarge a section of the graphics

window

Resume measurement (or press Reset the graphics window to its

F7) standard size

Display Analyze edit window (refer Display the online help

to chapter XI "'Scanned Data
Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module")

Display Process edit window (refer The button functions can also be accessed from
to chapter XI "'Scanned Data the menus.
Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module")
For a more detailed description of the button func-
tions and menus, which are used in all modules
of the BEAMSCAN software, refer to chapter III
"Basic Functions".

D948.131.00/10 en 71
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5 Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.1 Preparing the • Set up the measuring system (e. g., electrom-
eter) as required.
Measurement

CAUTION CAUTION
Selection of the false measuring setup in
Electronic components near the radiation field.
WaterTankScans.
Equipment Damage! Erroneous Measure-
Erroneous Measurements!
ments!
Before starting a measurement, check that the
Electronic components must never be placed
position of the water phantom corresponds to
in the radiation field!
the position displayed on the Linac tab.
Please also refer to the information given in the
corresponding user manuals. Align your measuring system in the radiation
•
field. Adjust the source surface distance.
Before you can perform measurements with
WaterTankScans, set up the measuring system CAUTION
as follows:
Incorrect positioning of the reference detector.
• Install the measuring system and all its com- Erroneous Measurements!
ponents and put it into service.
Check that the entire sensitive volume of the
• Make sure that all the required cables are con- reference detector is within the useful beam.
nected.
• Place the detectors in the correct positions.
• Perform all the required network settings.
• For TPR measurements, also refer to
HINT section 7.3 "TPR Measurement".

Closely follow the instructions given in the user

manuals of all the components of your measur-
ing system.

72 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

• Via the Detector Library module, adjust the 5.2 Zero Adjustment
detector data in the detector library (refer to
section VIII "'Detector Library' Module"). CAUTION
• In the Radiation unit Library module, create all Zero adjustment with radiation switched on.
necessary radiation units (refer to chapter VII Erroneous Measurements!
"'Radiation unit Library' Module").
Ensure that the zero adjustment is performed
• Start WaterTankScans. without radiation.

• In menu Tools → Measurement Options on the After each restart of the system, you should per-
Communication tab, define the communication form a zero adjustment before the first measure-
settings (also refer to section 12.4 "Defining ment.
the Measurement Options").
• For this, click the Zero but-
• In menu Tools → Continuous Options and in ton or select menu Measure-
menu Tools → Step-By-Step Options, create ment → Zero Electrometer.
all the required parameter sets and select the
parameter set needed for the measurement ➔ The zero adjustment will be performed and an
(refer to section 12.2 "Setting Up Parameter appropriate message will be displayed.
Sets").
If you start a measurement and you have not per-
• In menu Tools → Options, perform the set- formed a zero adjustment before, an appropriate
tings for the graphical representation (refer to message will be displayed. By selecting menu
chapter III "Basic Functions"). Tools → Measurement Options on the Advanced
tab, the display of the message can be enabled
or disabled.

D948.131.00/10 en 73
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.3 Auto Setup HINT

Auto Setup is typically performed with a small-
Upon starting WaterTankScans, the main screen
volume ionization chamber (e. g., Semiflex 3D
will automatically be displayed in the Auto Setup
type 31021) and photon radiation. Different
mode.
detectors and different modalities, however,
are used for the different measuring tasks.
• The Auto Setup mode can be
Therefore, the settings in the Auto Setup mode
switched on and off by click-
and in the measuring mode are saved in sep-
ing the Auto Setup button or by
arate data sets, and they are available for the
selecting menu Tools → Auto
next Auto Setup or for the next measurement.
Setup.

These are the tabs on the Auto Setup mode

screen:

– Auto Setup tab

for adjusting and viewing the Auto Setup func-
tions according to section 5.3.2 "Auto Setup
Tab"

– Linac tab
for adjusting the parameters of the radiation
unit
For more information on this tab, refer to
section 6.1 "Linac Tab".

– Measurement tab
for selection of the measurement components
and for defining the measurement parameters
For more information on this tab, refer to
section 6.2 "Measurement Tab".

74 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.3.1 Applying the Measurement

Parameters

By selecting the Use settings for non Auto Setup

measurements check box on the Measurement
tab, you can perform the subsequent non Auto
Setup measurements with the following measure-
ment parameters:

– Radiation unit
– Energy

– Applicator or wedge filter

– Block

– Measuring detector and the corresponding

settings, including the EPOM settings

– Mounting direction of the measuring detector,

vertical or horizontal

– Reference detector and the corresponding set-

tings
– Measuring mode and the corresponding para-
meters

– Maximum dose rate

The check box is cleared by default whenever the

Auto Setup mode is opened and must be explicitly
selected.

You are not prompted when leaving the Auto

Setup mode.

D948.131.00/10 en 75
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.3.2 Auto Setup Tab

6
1

7
3

4
8

9
5

10 11 12

Figure IV-2: Auto Setup tab

76 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

These are the elements of the Auto Setup tab: 10 Reset of the correction values and status of the
Leveling, Beam Center Adjustment, and Auto
1 Indication of the currently set field size and Field Alignment functions
measuring depth
11 When you exit the Auto Setup mode, the
2 Selection and status of the Reference Run correction values and status of the Level-
function ing, Beam Center Adjustment, and Auto Field
Alignment functions are saved.
3 Selection, status, and correction values for the
Leveling function By clicking this button, you load the correction
values and the status of the last finished Auto
4 Selection, status, and correction values for the Setup.
Beam Center Adjustment function The data configured last and compatible with
the serial number of the control unit used will
5 Selection, status, and correction values for the
be loaded.
Auto Field Alignment function
The loaded data will be automatically trans-
6 Button to open the Adjust Parameters dialog ferred to the BEAMSCAN control unit.
for adjustment of the field size and measuring
depth HINT
This function saves you repeating the Auto
7 Area for advanced inputs (e. g., options for the Setup procedure if you exit the BEAMSCAN
Leveling function) software accidentally.

8 Area for indication of the correction values 12 Update of the correction values and status by
(e. g., for the Beam Center Adjustment func- downloading the data from the control unit
tion)
HINT
9 Status (e. g., for the Beam Center Adjustment Use this function to refresh the display
function) of the PC if you perform changes at the
no indica- function not performed or BEAMSCAN hardware directly with the
tion failed manual controller after the BEAMSCAN
software was started (e.g., another leveling
function successfully per- procedure).
formed

D948.131.00/10 en 77
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.3.3 Auto Setup Functions 5.3.3.2 Leveling

The following functions can be performed in the This function is used to set the inclination angle of
Auto Setup mode: the coordinate system with respect to the A- and
C-axis of the moving mechanism. The inclination
angles of the A- and C-axis will be displayed and
5.3.3.1 Reference Run saved in the control unit.

HINT The accuracy of the displayed inclination angle is

If the reference run is not properly completed, < 0.1°.
further Auto Setup functions or further mea-
The following three options are available for the
surements cannot be performed.
leveling function:

With this function, a reference run is performed – Auto Leveling:

with the BEAMSCAN measuring system. When the auto leveling option is selected, a
water sensor measures the water level at three
This action will reset the status of all the other Auto
given points to determine the position of the
Setup functions.
water level with respect to the moving mech-
anism. On the basis of these points, a coor-
No radiation is required for the reference run.
dinate transformation is performed that allows
Therefore, the radiation should be switched off.
the detector to move to the correct positions for
Start the reference run by clicking the Start button. the measurements without the need to physi-
cally align the PMMA tank including the mov-
The reference run can be stopped by clicking the ing mechanism.
Pause button. It is not possible to resume a can- The operation also resets the inclination and
celed reference run. rotation status.

During the reference run, no measuring data are No radiation is required for this function.
displayed in the graphics window. Therefore, the radiation should be switched
off.
This function can also be performed with the man-
Start the auto leveling function by clicking the
ual controller.
Start button.

The automatic leveling operation can be sus-

pended by clicking the Pause button and
resumed by clicking the Resume button.

During the leveling operation, no measuring

data are displayed in the graphics window.

The inclination in the A- and C-direction must

not exceed ±2°.

This function can also be performed with the

manual controller.

78 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

– Manual Leveling: 5.3.3.3 Beam Center Adjustment

When the manual leveling option is selected,
you align the PMMA tank including the moving With this function, the offset of the coordinate sys-
mechanism manually by means of the optional tem with respect to the central axis is determined.
positioning device.
The control unit does not take the inclination WaterTankScans determines the center of the set
angle into account. field size by measuring an inplane and a cross-
plane profile at the adjusted measuring depth. The
– Numerical Input: deviation in each axis direction results from the
When this option is selected, you measure the 50% dose values of the respective profile. The
inclination of the A- and C-axis by means of a deviations are displayed and stored in the control
precision water spirit and enter the measured unit. During the measurement, the graphics win-
angles in the dialog. dow displays the measuring data of the two pro-
files.
The inclination in the A- and C-direction must
not exceed ±2°. The accuracy of the displayed deviations is
< 0.2 mm.

The radiation must be switched on for this mea-

surement.

Start the function by clicking the Start button.

A message will be displayed instructing the user

to adjust the radiation unit and to switch on the
radiation. Confirm this message upon completion
of the adjustments and when the radiation unit has
stabilized.

The measurement can be suspended by clicking

the Pause button and resumed by clicking the
Resume button.

It is not possible to perform this function at the

manual controller.

D948.131.00/10 en 79
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

Zero Shift • To deactivate the zero shift, on the Auto Setup

tab in the Beam Center Adjustment pane, clear
The Beam Center Adjustment function is also the User Shift check box.
available when you have manually set a new zero
point with the BEAMSCAN manual controller, i. e., • Perform the Beam Center Adjustment function
when you have performed a zero shift. once more so that the measured deviations
refer to the reference zero point again.
• On the Auto Setup tab in the Beam Center
Adjustment pane, select the User Shift check
box.
When you move the mouse cursor over the User
• Click the … button. Shift check box, the current zero shift values will
be displayed in the form of a tooltip.
➔ The User Shift dialog will be displayed:
When restarting WaterTankScans, the zero shift
is automatically deactivated.

Figure IV-3: User Shift dialog

➔ The zero shift values currently stored in the

BEAMSCAN control unit will be displayed.

• Enter new values if necessary.

• Confirm the values with the Accept button.

➔ The new values for the zero shift will be saved

and automatically sent to the BEAMSCAN
control unit.

• Perform the Beam Center Adjustment func-

tion.

➔ The profiles will now be measured, using the

new zero point as the center, and the new
deviation will automatically be sent to the
BEAMSCAN control unit.

80 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.3.3.4 Auto Field Alignment 5.3.4 Performing Auto Setup

HINT WARNING
The Auto Field Alignment function can only Improper handling.
be performed with rectangular radiation fields.
Bodily Injury!
Otherwise, the function cannot be used. PTW
recommends a square radiation field. For controlling the water phantom from the PC
in the control room: Check that no other oper-
With this function, the rotation of the coordinate ator is present in the treatment room.
system with respect to the radiation field is deter-
mined. NOTICE
In the case of electron radiation, observe the
Since the off-axis profiles are measured at 80%
following points to prevent damage to the
of the field size, the maximum rotation that will be
water sensor and moving mechanism of the
corrected is limited at < |±5°|.
BEAMSCAN measuring system:
WaterTankScans measures two off-axis profiles – Maintain a minimum distance of 1 cm
on the A-axis for the set field size and measur- between the water surface and the applica-
ing depth. The coordinates of the 50% dose are tor.
determined for both profiles. The rotation angle
– Maintain a distance greater than 1 cm
is calculated from these coordinates. The rota-
between the water surface and the applica-
tion angle is displayed and stored in the control
tor when positioning the detector axis on the
unit. During the measurement, the graphics win-
water surface (e.g., for dosimetry protocols
dow displays the measuring data of the two pro-
other than the DIN protocol).
files.
– Note that the BEAMSCAN measuring sys-
The accuracy of the displayed rotation angle is tem requires an acceleration and a braking
< 0.2°. distance when performing continuous mea-
surements. Therefore, the water sensor will
The radiation must be switched on for this mea- be lifted further out of the water.
surement.
– If the applicator used is very small and you
Start the function by clicking the Start button. perform depth dose curve scans also above
the water surface, the water sensor may hit
The measurement can be suspended by clicking the applicator.
the Pause button and resumed by clicking the
Resume button.

It is not possible to perform this function at the

manual controller.

D948.131.00/10 en 81
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

NOTICE • On the Auto Setup tab, adjust the measuring

parameters for the Auto Setup measurements.
In the case of electron radiation, observe the
For this, click the Edit button and adjust the
following points to prevent damage to the
field size and measuring depth in the Adjust
water sensor and moving mechanism of the
Parameters dialog.
BEAMSCAN measuring system:
– Skip the reference run if less water was • On the Linac and Measurement tabs, adjust
filled into the PMMA tank and the applicator the remaining measuring parameters for the
reaches into the tank. Auto Setup measurements (also refer to
section 6 "Setting Up the Measuring Parame-
– Perform the Leveling function only if no
ters").
applicator is mounted on the accelerator.
With this function, the sensor will be lifted Select the desired Auto Setup functions by
•
further out of the water. selecting the appropriate check boxes.

For further information on application with elec- • To start Auto Setup, click the Start button (or
tron radiation, refer to the BEAMSCAN hardware press the F5 key) or select menu Measure-
user manual. ment → Start → from Beginning.

NOTICE ➔ All the selected Auto Setup functions will be

performed in order from top to bottom.
When performing absolute dosimetry, observe
the following point to prevent damage to the
➔ Once an Auto Setup function has been started,
BEAMSCAN measuring system:
a progress bar is displayed below the graphic.
– Skip the reference run if the TRUFIX BS
holder for absolute dosimetry T21008.1.020 ➔ Upon completion of the Auto Setup
is fitted. function, the status indication will be
updated, i. e., if the function was suc-
cessful, the green check mark will be
HINT displayed.
The inclination, shift, and rotation values deter-
mined in the Auto Setup mode are absolute val-
ues, i. e., even if Auto Setup is repeatedly per-
formed, you will always obtain the same values.

82 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

➔ If adjustments must be performed at the radi- 5.4 Performing the

ation unit or when the radiation must be switch
Measurement
on, appropriate messages will be displayed
before the Auto Setup function starts.
WARNING
• Confirm these messages upon completion of Improper handling.
the adjustments and when the radiation unit Bodily Injury!
has stabilized.
For controlling the water phantom from the PC
• If necessary, individual Auto Setup functions in the control room: Check that no other oper-
can be restarted. ator is present in the treatment room.

• When all desired Auto Setup

NOTICE
functions have been completed, In the case of electron radiation, observe the
switch off the Auto Setup mode following points to prevent damage to the
by clicking the Auto Setup water sensor and moving mechanism of the
button or by selecting menu BEAMSCAN measuring system:
Tools → Auto Setup. – Maintain a minimum distance of 1 cm
between the water surface and the applica-
➔ The current content of the Auto Setup tab will
tor.
be saved and can be reloaded with the Load
button. – Maintain a distance greater than 1 cm
between the water surface and the applica-
➔ WaterTankScans is now ready to perform tor when positioning the detector axis on the
measurements. water surface (e.g., for dosimetry protocols
other than the DIN protocol).

– Note that the BEAMSCAN measuring sys-

tem requires an acceleration and a braking
distance when performing continuous mea-
surements. Therefore, the water sensor will
be lifted further out of the water.

– If the applicator used is very small and you

perform depth dose curve scans also above
the water surface, the water sensor may hit
the applicator.

For further information on application with elec-

tron radiation, refer to the BEAMSCAN hardware
user manual.

D948.131.00/10 en 83
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

Requirements: 5.4.1 Setting parameters for the

measurement
– The reference run according to section 5.3
"Auto Setup" has been performed. Otherwise, • Configure all the measurement parameters on
an appropriate error message will be displayed the Linac tab according to section 6.1 "Linac
and you will not be able to perform measure- Tab".
ments.
• Configure all the measurement parameters on
– The Auto Setup functions Leveling, Beam the Measurement tab according to section 6.2
Center Adjustment, and Auto Field Alignment "Measurement Tab".
should have been performed according to
As an alternative, you can apply the measure-
section 5.3 "Auto Setup". Otherwise, an appro-
ment parameters of the Auto Setup mode by
priate message will be displayed. It is possible,
selecting the Use settings for non Auto Setup
however, to perform measurements.
measurements check box on the Measure-
ment tab in the Auto Setup mode. For further
information, refer to section 5.3 "Auto Setup".

5.4.2 Starting the Measurement

CAUTION
Measurements with false measuring parame-
ters.

Erroneous Measurements!
If you start a new measurement after loading
old measuring data, the parameters of the old
measurement will be applied to the new one.
The parameters may be different from the para-
meters currently stored in the Radiation unit
Library module.

• To start the measurement, click the Start but-

ton (or press the F5 key) or select menu Mea-
surement → Start → from Beginning.

➔ The measurements defined in the measuring

task will be completed.

84 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

➔ The scales of the measuring axes will be 5.4.3 Stopping the Measurement
adjusted automatically. In addition, the vertical
scale of the graphic can be adjusted with the There are different ways of pausing the measure-
F8 key during the measurement. ment:

• To stop the measurement immediately, click

HINT
the Pause button (or press the F6 key) or
If the curves are always slightly too high, select menu Measurement → Stop → imme-
you can go to the Measurement tab (refer to diately.
section 6.2 "Measurement Tab") and select a
higher dose rate to optimize the scaling. • To stop the measurement after the cur-
rently measured curve, select menu Measure-
➔ The measurement will start with the depth ment → Stop → after Curve.
dose curve, and then the module will switch
automatically to the profile measurement.
5.4.4 Resuming the Measurement
➔ A color will be assigned to each curve in the
graphic. HINT
When resuming measurements in the Contin-
➔ Depending on the selected display format, the
uous Scans measuring mode, only complete
depth dose curve and/or all the profiles will be
profiles can be measured.
displayed at the end of the measurement.

➔ In the Points and Output Factors measuring There are different ways of resuming a measure-
programs (refer to section 6.7.5 "Points Mea- ment:
suring Program"), only the list of measured val-
• To resume a measurement, click the Resume
ues will be displayed.
button (or press the F7 button) or select menu
Measurement → Start → from Last Position
(Resume).

➔ The last three measuring points will be mea-

sured again, and then the measurement will
continue.

or

D948.131.00/10 en 85
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

• To resume a measurement from a particular 5.4.5 Repeating Individual

curve, first select the desired curve, and then Measurements
select menu Measurement → Start → from
Selected Curve. Individual measurements can be repeated in the
following measuring programs:
➔ The measurement will continue from the first – PDD and Profiles
measuring point of the selected curve. – Plane parallel to central beam
– Plane perpendicular to central beam
or – Star Pattern

• To resume a measurement from a particular This function is not available in Auto Setup mode.
measuring point, first mark the desired mea-
suring point with the discrete crosshairs. Then
select menu Measurement → Start → from
Crosshairs. Individual measurements can only be repeated
after a task has been completed.
➔ The measurement will continue from the
marked measuring point. • Make sure that the displayed information
matches the selected curve, i. e., display of
or the profiles if profile measurements are to be
repeated or display of the depth dose curves
• If you want to repeat the complete mea- if measurements of depth dose curves are to
surement, click the Start button (or press be repeated.
the F5 key) or select menu Measure-
ment → Start → from Beginning. • Select the curves that you want to measure
again.
➔ The complete measurement will be repeated.
The curves measured before will be discarded. • Select menu Measurement → Start → Mea-
suring Selected Curves.

➔ The selected curves will be removed from the

display, measured, and then displayed again.

86 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

If a repeat measurement is paused (refer to 5.4.6 Level Indicator

section 5.4.3 "Stopping the Measurement"), the
following data will be displayed: During a measurement, the Measurement tab
(refer to Figure IV-6 ) will display the level indica-
– all measurements not to be repeated
tor.
– the measurements already repeated and the
corresponding new measured values

– the paused measurement in its current state 1

– the measurements to be repeated and the cor-

responding old measured values

These are your options in this case: 2 3

• Resume the measurement as described in

section 5.4.4 "Resuming the Measurement". Figure IV-4: Level indicator

• Repeat individual measurements as described 1 Measuring range that is set for measuring
above. and reference detector
2 Current at the last measured point for mea-
suring and reference detector

HINT 3 Bar graph for measuring and reference

detector
If a depth dose curve is to be measured again
and the profile depths are to be determined
from this curve, e. g., at depth R50, the profile Bar Graph for Measuring and Reference
measurements must be repeated as well. Detector

– 100% of the display corresponds to the max-

imum measurable current for the connected
electrometer in the selected measuring range.

– dark green bars:

The measured current is within the measuring
range.

– bar on the right is red:

The measured current is very close to the
upper limit of the measuring range.

D948.131.00/10 en 87
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.4.7 Automatic Analysis • In menu Tools → Measurement Options on

the Advanced tab, select the Show analysis
In WaterTankScans, you can directly analyze a result online check box (refer to section 12.4.3
measurement and display the result without open- "Advanced Tab"). This check box is selected
ing the Analyze edit window. by default.

The window in WaterTankScans that shows the ➔ When the measurement of a curve has been
analysis result corresponds to the Analyze edit completed, a window with the analysis result
window. of the measured curve will be displayed.

The analysis is performed with the most recent ➔ When the measurement of the next curve has
settings in the Analyze edit window. been completed, the window will display the
analysis result of the new curve.
For more information on the Analyze edit
window, refer to chapter XI "'Scanned Data ➔ When all measurements have been completed
Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module" - 8 "Analyzing or a measurement has been paused, you can
Curves". select one of the curves. Then, the window
will display the analysis result of the selected
The automatic analysis is available for the follow- curve. For profiles, it is possible to display the
ing measuring programs: analysis results of multiple, selected profiles.
– PDD and Profiles
– Plane parallel to central beam In the default settings, this window provides a
– Plane perpendicular to central beam menu bar and a toolbar with the same functions
– Star Pattern as in the Analyze edit window. Thus, you can also
select the protocol for the analysis and edit the
This function is not available in Auto Setup mode. parameters for the analysis in this window.

To display the window without menu bar and tool-

bar, go to menu Tools → Measurement Options
and select the Without menu check box on the
Advanced tab.

88 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

The window with the analysis result will be closed 5.4.8 Saving Measurement Data
in the following cases: Automatically

– Clicking the appropriate button in the title bar An interruption of a task, e. g., due to a sys-
of the window tem crash, may cause the loss of measurement
data acquired up to this point. To avoid this situ-
– Selecting menu Edit → Process, Edit → Ana- ation, WaterTankScans saves the data automat-
lyze Information or Edit → Compared Scans ically whenever the measurement of a curve or
point (for point measurements) has been com-
– Starting a new measurement with the Start pleted. The settings and measurement data are
button saved.

– Deleting all measurement data with the Clear The automatic storage is not available for the fol-
button lowing measurements:
– Measurements in Auto Setup mode
– Continuous TPR Measurement measuring
mode
– Stationary Scans measuring mode
– BeamAdjust measuring mode

HINT
The target file for the automatically saved data
is always the same. After completion of a task,
the file will be overwritten the next time a task
is started.

• To resume an incomplete task, load the

automatically saved data by selecting menu
File → Open last measurement data.

➔ The measured curves or points will be dis-

played.

D948.131.00/10 en 89
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

• Resume the measurement as described in 5.5 Selecting Curves

section 5.4.4 "Resuming the Measurement".
You select a curve in the graphics window by dou-
or
ble-clicking. To select additional curves, press and
• Repeat the entire task by clicking the Start but- hold the Shift key down while double-clicking the
ton (or press the F5 key) or by selecting menu curves.
Measurement → Start → from Beginning.
By selecting menu Edit → Select All, you select
all the curves. With Invert Selection, you invert the
selection. With Discard Selection, you cancel the
selection of the curves.

For further information on selecting curves, refer

to chapter III "Basic Functions" (3.1 "Selecting
Curves").

5.6 Curve Properties

• To display the properties of a curve, mark the
desired curve and select menu Edit → Proper-
ties.

➔ The Properties box will be displayed, showing

all the information available about the selected
curve.

For further information on the Properties box, refer

to chapter III "Basic Functions" (3.2 "Curve Prop-
erties").

90 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.7 Saving Measuring Data 5.8 Loading Stored

Measuring Data
• To save measuring data, click
the Save button or select menu Files can only be loaded when they are in the
File → Save As. MEPHYSTO MCC format (*.mcc) and when they
contain data measured with WaterTankScans.
• In the standard Save As dialog, enter a file
name and the directory. You can overwrite • To load measuring data, click
existing files or create new files. the Open button or select menu
For further information on the suggested file File → Open.
names, refer to chapter III "Basic Functions" (1
• Select a file from the standard Open dialog.
"Definitions").

➔ The currently displayed data will be overwrit-

➔ The measuring points of the curves will be
ten.
saved unnormalized.

➔ If the currently displayed data are not yet

➔ Furthermore, all the settings on the Linac and
saved, a message will be shown and you can
Measurement tabs will be saved and will, thus,
save them if required.
be available when the saved measuring data
will be loaded.

Measuring data of WaterTankScans will always

be saved in the MEPHYSTO MCC format (*.mcc).

D948.131.00/10 en 91
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.9 Deleting Measuring Data

• Click the Clear button or select
menu Measurement → Clear to
remove the measured or loaded
data from the display.

• To permanently remove complete measure-

ment files and directories, please use Win-
dows Explorer.

HINT
By clicking the Clear button, you also release
the interface to the control unit. Other programs
will then be able again to access the connected
devices.

92 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6 Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.1 Linac Tab

2 5

3 6

Figure IV-5: Linac tab

D948.131.00/10 en 93
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

On the Linac tab, you can set the following para- 4 Comment field
meters of the radiation unit: For each measurement, a comment can be
entered that will be saved with the result of the
1 Slider to select the orientation of the measur- measurement. This comment is shown on the
ing system Linac tab and on the Measurement tab. The
The options depend on the measuring system comment can be edited on both tabs.
that was selected at the time the module was
Alternatively, you can use the comment field
started in MEPHYSTO Navigator.
to display a message before the measurement
Make sure that the coordinate system refers to
starts. For this, enter the "Msg:" command
the currently selected radiation unit. The direc-
before the text.
tion of the coordinate system determines the
Example:
offset direction (asymmetry) and the off-axis
If you want the user to select a specific para-
values.
meter set in the Continuous Options dialog,
2 Indication of the orientation of the measuring you could, e. g., write the following text in the
system (e. g., BEAMSCAN measuring system) comment field:
Msg: In the Continuous Options dialog, select
3 Graphical representation of the field definition the XXX parameter set.
The possibility of showing messages is partic-
ularly useful to inform the user of required set-
tings when working with measuring task lists.

94 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

5 Combo boxes and input boxes to adjust the 6 Combo boxes and buttons for defining the irra-
parameters of the radiation unit: diated field:

– Name: – Field size, inplane x crossplane

name of the radiation unit used (in cm x cm), with two decimal places
Selection of a radiation unit created in the
– Shape of the field
Radiation unit Library module (default set-
tings: "DEMO LINAC" and "STANDARD") – Reference depth of the field
SSD, SID, or used-defined depth
– Modality:
Modality of the radiation – Button to show and hide additional input
boxes for defining asymmetry
– Energy:
Depending on how the radiation unit is con-
Energy in the unit [MV] or [MeV]
figured, you can use either the Offset or the
– Applicator / Wedge: X1X2 format.
Applicator (in case of electron radiation) or
wedge filter (in case of photon radiation) 7 Input boxes for the measurement setup

– Block: – Source surface distance

Number of the block used (SSD)

After selecting a radiation unit created in – Gantry angle

the Radiation unit Library module, the para- – Collimator angle
meters defined there (modality, energy,
etc.) can be selected from the other combo The measurement of the curves follows the
boxes. collimator and the gantry angles.

To create your own radiation unit or edit an

existing unit, use the Radiation unit Library
module (refer to chapter VII "'Radiation unit
Library' Module").

D948.131.00/10 en 95
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.2 Measurement Tab

1
9
2

3 10

4 11

12
6

7 13

Figure IV-6: Measurement tab

96 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

On the Measurement tab, you select the mea- 5 Button to rotate the preview by 90°
suring components and determine the measuring
tasks. 6 Preview of the curves to measure as frontal
view and top view
1 Mounting direction of the detector, vertical or
horizontal 7 Indication of the current position of the mea-
Depending on the mounting direction, the cor- suring detector or indication of the estimated
responding limit settings for the maximum total duration of the measurement
travel distance of the detector will be loaded You can switch between the two indications
from the detector library. in menu Tools → Measurement Options on
During the measurement, the level indicator the Advanced tab (refer to section 12.4.3
for the currents of the measuring detector and "Advanced Tab").
the reference detector (refer to section 5.4.6
"Level Indicator") will be displayed instead. 8 Comment field (refer to section 6.1 "Linac
Tab")
2 Field for input of the maximum dose rate for
scaling the graphic 9 Pane for selecting the measuring mode and
adjusting the corresponding parameters
3 Button to select and adjust the detectors
The current settings for the selected detectors 10 Pane for adjustment of the EPOM position
will be displayed in the form of a tooltip when
11 Button to restore the default settings of the
you move the mouse cursor over the picture.
measuring parameters
4 List box to select the measuring programs
12 Pane for adjustment of the parameters for the
– PDD and Profiles
selected measuring program
– Plane parallel to central beam
– Plane perpendicular to central beam
13 List box for selection of the measuring medium
– Star Pattern
Water or Air
– Points
– Continuous TPR Measurement
– BeamAdjust
– Beam Inclination
– Output Factors
– Stationary Scans
– TG51 Lead Foil Distance

The selectable measuring programs depend

on the selected measuring system.

D948.131.00/10 en 97
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.3 Selecting Detectors • If you use a reference chamber for the mea-
surement, click the Reference Channel button.

➔ The PTW Detector Library dialog will be

expanded by a pane for selection of the refer-
ence detector.
1
• Select the desired reference detector by
selecting the appropriate check box.

Figure IV-7: Pane for selecting and adjusting • If the reference detector is not required any
the detectors longer, you can deselect it. For this, press and
hold the Ctrl key while clearing the appropriate
1 Button to select and adjust the detectors check box.
The picture shows the measuring detector.
• Confirm the entries with OK.

• To select detectors, click the detector shown

(refer to Figure IV-7).

➔ The PTW Detector Library dialog for selec-

tion of the detectors will be displayed (refer to
Figure IV-8).

• Select the desired measuring detector by

selecting the appropriate check box.

• If required, enter the air density correction val-

ues (refer to section 6.3.1 "Air Density Correc-
tion") and/or a user-defined correction factor
(refer to section 6.3.2 "User-Defined Correc-
tion").

98 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

➔ The Detector Settings for Electrometer dialog • Check the detector settings at the electrome-
will be displayed (refer to Figure IV-40). ter and change them if needed (also refer to
section 9 "Verifying and Changing the Detec-
CAUTION tor Settings at the Electrometer").
Improper handling when switching the
The selectable detectors and the associated para-
BEAMSCAN hardware on or changing detec-
meters (e. g., the calibration factors) are stored
tors.
in the detector library. The detector library can be
Incorrect Measured Values! edited by means of the Detector Library module
(refer to chapter VIII "'Detector Library' Module").
Note that after switching on the BEAMSCAN
If you have not entered the calibration factor for a
hardware, the high voltage is set to 0 V by
detector in the detector library, the nominal value
default.
of the calibration factor will be used for the mea-
Also when changing a detector, the high volt- surement.
age currently adjusted may be unsuitable.

Be sure to check the high voltages and measur-

ing ranges currently set at the electrometer for
both channels (Current Electrometer HV and
Current Electrometer Range).

In the Selected HV and Selected Range list

boxes, the nominal detector voltage and the
default measuring range from the detector
library are preset.

To accept the preset values for high voltage

and measuring range, it is important to click
the Accept Selection button once. Otherwise,
the measurement will be performed with the
wrong high voltage and measuring range set-
tings (e.g., high voltage remains 0 V) and you
obtain incorrect measured values.

D948.131.00/10 en 99
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

Figure IV-8: PTW Detector Library dialog

100 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.3.1 Air Density Correction • Alternatively, you can also use the tempera-
ture and atmospheric pressure values mea-
HINT sured with the BEAMSCAN electrometer for air
density correction.
An air density correction can only be performed
for vented ionization chambers. • For this, select the Measured by BEAMS-
CAN Electrometer check box.
When using vented ionization chambers, the
Air density correction check box must be ➔ During the measurement, the temperature
selected in the detector library. and atmospheric pressure values mea-
sured by the BEAMSCAN electrometer will
• Enter the current temperature and atmos- be displayed in the status bar.
pheric pressure of the measuring site in the
appropriate input boxes.
HINT
With the default settings, the following input The temperature and atmospheric pressure
ranges and defaults apply: measurement with the BEAMSCAN elec-
trometer is factory adjusted by PTW. You
Temperature
can adapt the adjustment as needed. For
Input range: (10 … 40) °C
further information, refer to chapter XIV
Default: 20 °C
"'BEAMSCAN Tools' Module".
Atmospheric pressure
Input range: (700 … 1060) hPa ➔ The correction factor kTP for air density correc-
Default: 1013.25 hPa tion is calculated according to the following for-
mula:
• When you select the Accept values outside
rated range of use check box, the following
extended input range applies:

Temperature: (5 … 45) °C T temperature in measuring volume [°C]

Atmospheric P atmospheric pressure at measuring site
pressure: (540 … 1100) hPa [hPa]
T0 reference temperature 20 °C or 22 °C
P0 reference atmospheric pressure
1013.25 hPa

The reference temperature is taken from the

detector library.

D948.131.00/10 en 101
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

➔ If the selected detectors are vented ioniza- 6.4 Defining the EPOM
tion chambers, i. e., in the detector library, the
Position
Air density correction check box is selected,
all further measurements will be corrected by
multiplication with this correction factor. 6.4.1 General Information

When performing dosimetry in a water phan-

6.3.2 User-Defined Correction tom, the detectors should be positioned with their
EPOM at the set measuring position.
Irrespective of the air density correction, other cor-
rection factors can be taken into account, e. g., for When using the TRUFIX BS mounting system, this
radiation quality, polarity effect, or saturation with requirement for EPOMs as defined in DIN 6800-2
ion recombination loss. is fulfilled.
Example:
• If required, enter an additional correction factor
According to DIN 6800-2, the EPOM of a cylin-
kUser.
drical ionization chamber is the half of the radius
Input range: 0.1 … 10 above the chamber axis.
Default: 1
Other dosimetry protocols have different defini-
➔ All subsequent measurements will now be cor- tions of the EPOM.
rected by multiplication with this correction fac- Example:
tor. According to IAEA 398 or AAPM TG-51, the
EPOM of a cylindrical ionization chamber is the
chamber axis.

Using the EPOM (effective point of measurement)

function, you can define the EPOM position by
setting the desired method for the EPOM shift.

102 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.4.2 Methods for EPOM Shift

The selectable methods for the EPOM shift depend on the design of the detector, on its mounting direction,
and whether or not the TRUFIX BS mounting system is used:

Method for EPOM Cylindrical ionization cham- Other detector (plane-parallel Detector
shift ber with TRUFIX chamber, solid state detec- with univer-
tor, etc.) with TRUFIX sal detector
holder
Mounted hori- Mounted ver- Mounted hori- Mounted ver-
zontally tically zontally tically
+0.5 * r (TRUFIX) X
TRUFIX X X X
+0.6 * r X
Chamber Axis X
Manual X X X X X

+0.5 * r (TRUFIX) no EPOM shift

TRUFIX no EPOM shift

+0.6 * r EPOM shift by (+0.1 * r) mm with respect to position
with TRUFIX BS mounting system
The EPOM shift value is calculated and displayed in
the appropriate text field.

Chamber Axis EPOM shift by (-0.5 * r) mm with respect to the posi-

tion with TRUFIX BS mounting system, i. e., the EPOM
is the detector axis
The EPOM shift value is calculated and displayed in
the appropriate text field.

D948.131.00/10 en 103
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

Manual EPOM shift by a value between -5 mm and +5 mm

The water surface is the reference.
An input of < 0 mm means the detector is lifted out of
the water.
An input of > 0 mm means the detector is dipped into
the water.

104 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.4.3 Setting the EPOM Position • When using horizontally mounted ion-
ization chambers, you will see the Info
icon in the EPOM shift dialog. A basic
description of the EPOM shift proce-
dure will be displayed in the form of a
tooltip when you move the mouse cur-
sor over the icon.

• When using horizontally mounted cylindrical

1 2 ionization chambers, the EPOM shift dialog
contains the More button for display of the
EPOM shift explanation dialog. This dialog
Figure IV-9: Pane for setting the EPOM shows schematic representations of the differ-
position ent methods for EPOM shift.

1 Button to set the EPOM position • Select the desired EPOM position.
2 Indication of the current method for EPOM
shift • For the Manual option, enter the EPOM shift
value.
If the entered value is greater than ±5 mm, a
warning will be displayed.
• To set the EPOM position, click the EPOM but-
ton. • Confirm the entries with OK.

➔ The EPOM shift dialog will be displayed: ➔ The selected EPOM position will be displayed
to the right of the EPOM button.

➔ The EPOM shift will be taken into account for

all tasks where the depth position of the detec-
tor changes (also for the Points measuring pro-
gram).

Figure IV-10: EPOM shift dialog

D948.131.00/10 en 105
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.4.4 Moving the Detector to the 6.5 Selecting and Setting the
Zero Point Measuring Mode
• Select menu Measurement → Goto Zero Mea-
surement Position to move the detector to the
zero point shifted by the EPOM shift.
1
➔ A dialog with a progress bar will be displayed
while the detector is moving.

• To stop the detector moving to the zero point,

you can click the Stop button in this dialog. Figure IV-11: Pane for selecting the measur-
ing mode and adjusting the cor-
responding parameters

1 Pane for selecting the measuring mode and

adjusting the corresponding parameters

• Using the list box (refer to Figure IV-11), select

the appropriate measuring mode and adjust
the associated parameters.

106 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.5.1 Continuous Scans Measuring For further information on the Continuous Options
Mode dialog, refer to section 12.2 "Setting Up Parame-
ter Sets".
In the Continuous Scans measuring mode, the
detector moves continuously while the measure-
ments are being performed.

The resolution Res. set in the Continuous Options

dialog determines the distance between the
resulting measurement points.

• From the PDD list box, select the scan speed

for depth dose curve measurements.

• From the Profiles list box, select the scan

speed for profile measurements.

➔ The current settings of the scan speeds will

be displayed in the form of a tooltip when you
move the mouse cursor over the area.

In the Continuous Scans measuring mode, you

can perform measurements with and without ref-
erence detector.

D948.131.00/10 en 107
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.5.1.1 Scan Speed The very slow scan speeds are of particular
importance for small field dosimetry in order to
In the Continuous Scans measuring mode, you achieve a higher spatial resolution with longer
can define the desired scan speed: scan times when using semi-conductor detectors
or the microDiamond detector. This allows you to
– 0.2 / 0.5 / 1 / 2 / 2.5 / 4 / 5 / 6.25 / 10 / 12.5 / perform measurements with very long scan times
20 in [mm/s] at a high resolution and to obtain smooth curves
All profiles or depth dose curves will be mea- (refer to the green cells in the table below).
sured with the selected scan speed. The corre-
sponding scan times for each measuring point Please keep in mind, however, that PTW does
depend on the resolution set in the Continuous not recommend scan times longer than 1000 ms
Scans dialog (refer to table below). in combination with low resolutions. This combi-
nation would lead to a very inaccurate correla-
– Energy dep. for the measurement of a depth tion between the measured value and its measur-
dose curve: ing position (refer to the orange cells in the table
The energy-dependent scan speeds set in the below).
Continuous Options dialog will be used.

– Depth dep. for the measurement of profiles:

The depth-dependent scan speeds set in the
Continuous Options dialog will be used.

108 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.5.2 Stepwise vs Time Measuring 6.5.3 Stepwise vs Trigger

Mode Measuring Mode

In the Stepwise vs Time measuring mode, a mea- In the Stepwise vs Trigger measuring mode,
surement will be performed at a measurement the measurement is controlled by the number of
point until the measuring time has elapsed. external trigger signals at the electrometer. The
measurement starts with the next signal and ends
• Enter the desired measuring time at Meas. after the set number of signals. In this measuring
Time [s]. mode, you will always measure without a refer-
ence detector.
HINT
The measurement graphic of trigger measure-
Adapt the measuring time to the dose rate to be
ments is always scaled to 1 cGy/MU.
measured and the detector used. Typical val-
ues for semiflex chambers are 0.05 to 0.2 sec-
• Enter the desired number of monitor pulses at
onds for the BEAMSCAN electrometer.
Monitor Pulses.

In the Stepwise vs Time measuring mode, you • Click the … button.

can perform measurements with and without ref-
erence detector. ➔ The Monitor Trigger dialog will be displayed:

• Adjust the appropriate parameters:

– Timeout:
If the number of trigger signals is not
reached before the timeout expires, the
measurement will be aborted.

– Edge:
With Rising Edge, the measurement will be
controlled by the rising edge of the trigger
signal, and with Falling Edge, it will be con-
trolled by the falling edge.

D948.131.00/10 en 109
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.5.4 Manual Start/Stop Measuring 6.6 Measuring Modes for

Mode Spill Measurements
In the Manual Start/Stop measuring mode, each
measurement must be started and stopped man- HINT
ually. Some radiation units, e. g., for protons and
heavy particles, deliver the radiation in the form
The Manual Start/Stop measuring mode is only of spills. Beam pauses - periods without radia-
available in the Points, Output Factors, and Sta- tion - interrupt the spills.
tionary Scans measuring programs.
By default, the measuring modes for spill mea-
For further information, refer to the descrip-
surements will not be displayed. To display these
tion of the measuring programs Points (refer to
measuring modes, select menu Tools → Mea-
section 6.7.5 "Points Measuring Program"), Out-
surement Options, and on the Presets tab, select
put Factors (refer to section 6.7.8 "Output Fac-
the Show measurement presets for spills option
tors Measuring Program"), and Stationary Scans
(refer to section 12.4.1 "Presets Tab").
(refer to section 6.7.9 "Stationary Scans Measur-
ing Program").
6.6.1 Spill Start/Stop Measuring
Mode

In the Spill Start/Stop measuring mode, the mea-

surement is controlled by the number of external
trigger signals at the electrometer. The measure-
ment starts with the next signal and ends after the
set number of signals. In this measuring mode,
you will always measure with the reference detec-
tor.

• Enter the desired number of trigger signals at

Number of Triggers.

• Click the … button.

➔ The Spill Start/Stop dialog will be displayed.

110 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

• Adjust the appropriate parameters: 6.6.2 Spill by Time Measuring Mode

– Timeout:
In the Spill by Time measuring mode, the mea-
If the number of trigger signals is not
surement is carried out in a defined time window
reached before the timeout expires, the
within the spill. It is ensured that the existing signal
measurement will be aborted.
is above the adjusted threshold. In this measuring
– Edge: mode, you will always measure with the reference
With Rising Edge, the measurement will be detector.
controlled by the rising edge of the trigger
signal, and with Falling Edge, it will be con- • Enter the desired time window at Meas. Time
trolled by the falling edge. [s].

Example: • Click the … button.

Number of Triggers = 2 and Rising Edge
➔ The Spill by Time dialog will be displayed.

• Adjust the appropriate parameters:

1
– Threshold:
Threshold (current) for the measurement
2
– Pause Time:
3 Interval between the spills without radiation

– Timeout:
Figure IV-12: Spill Start/Stop measuring If no valid measured value is available
mode before the timeout expires, the measure-
ment will be aborted.
1 Spills
2 Trigger signal HINT
3 Measuring interval To make sure that radiation is always present
during a measurement, the measuring time
must be shorter than the pause time.

D948.131.00/10 en 111
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

Example: The entered measuring time results in 6.6.4 Software Trigger Measuring
three measuring points. Mode

If a trigger signal is not available from the radiation

device, triggering can be done by means of the
1
reference detector. For this, the measurement is
2 controlled by the current in the reference channel
in the Software Trigger measuring mode. In this
3 mode, the measurement starts when the current
in the reference channel exceeds the set thresh-
old. The measurement ends after the number of
Figure IV-13: Spill by Time measuring mode set trigger signals when the current in the refer-
ence channel is below the threshold. In this mea-
1 Spill suring mode, measurements will thus always be
2 Threshold performed with the reference detector.
3 Measuring intervals
• Enter the desired number of trigger signals at
Triggers.
6.6.3 Accumulated Charge
• Click the … button.
Measuring Mode
➔ The Software trigger dialog will be displayed.
In the Accum. Charge measuring mode, a mea-
surement will be performed at a measurement
• Adjust the appropriate parameters:
point until the accumulated charge in the refer-
ence channel reaches the set value. In this mea- – Threshold:
suring mode, you will always measure with the ref- Threshold (current) for the reference chan-
erence detector. nel

– Timeout:
• Enter the charge to be accumulated in the ref-
If no valid measured value is available
erence channel at Charge [C].
before the timeout expires, the measure-
ment will be aborted.
• Click the … button.

➔ The Accumulated Charge dialog will be dis-

played.

• Adjust the appropriate parameters:

– Timeout:
If the specified charge is not reached in
the reference channel before the timeout
expires, the measurement will be aborted.

112 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

Example: 6.7 Selecting and Adjusting

Number of Triggers = 2
the Measuring Program

Figure IV-14: Software Trigger measuring

mode

1 Spills
2 Threshold
3 Measuring interval

Figure IV-15: Measurement tab, PDD and

Profiles view

• Using the list box (refer to Figure IV-15), select

the desired measuring program and adjust the
associated parameters.

➔ The content of the Measurement tab will

change with the selected measuring program.

➔ The types of curves that can be measured

depend on the selected measuring system.

➔ The designations of the profiles correspond to

the axis designations defined in the Radiation
unit Library module for the selected radiation
unit.

D948.131.00/10 en 113
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

HINT 6.7.1 PDD and Profiles Measuring

Program
For all profile measurements, the measur-
ing depth can be set to the dose maximum With this measuring program, you can measure
Dmax. The dose maximum Dmax depends on the a depth dose curve as well as inplane and cross-
energy set on the Linac tab. plane profiles.

• For this, select the depth dmax in the

Depths [mm] combo box.

➔ The measuring depth used is the depth

Nominal dmax entered in the Radiation unit
Library module for the appropriate radiation
unit and the respective energy.

➔ The energy-dependent depths dmax will also

be transferred to the task list (refer to
section 12.3 "Working with Task Lists").

Figure IV-16: Measurement tab, PDD and

Profiles view

• Define the type of curve to measure by select-

ing the appropriate check box.

• Define the measuring direction for the depth

dose curve
– from top to bottom
– from bottom to top (recommended)

• Define the measuring parameters for the pro-

file measurements:

– Measuring direction:
– all profiles from left to right
– all profiles from right to left
– meandering (recommended)

– Measurement angle:
– diagonal
– angle referred to the axes of the mea-
suring system

114 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

– Offset Offaxis [mm] referred to the center Passing over the identifier Depths [mm] with the
axis of the measuring system mouse displays a tooltip with all the entered mea-
suring depths.
– If only halfsided profiles will be measured
(e. g., when the irradiated field is large),
➔ The step intervals for the depth dose curve and
select the halfsided Profiles check box.
the profiles will be copied from the selected
parameter set.
• Define the measuring depths Depths [mm].
You can combine the following options as
needed. The measuring depths have to be
separated with a blank.

– Measurement in user-defined measuring

depths

– Measurement in the dose maximum Dmax,

i. e., in the energy-dependent depth dmax

– Measurement in the Rxx depths that corre-

spond to the percentage dose values xx of
the depth dose curve

HINT
Define the possible Rxx depths by selecting
menu Tools → Measurement Options on the
Predefined Depths tab (refer to section 12.4.4
"Predefined Depths Tab").

• For measuring in the Rxx depths, select

the desired Rxx depths in the Depths [mm]
combo box.

➔ The actual measuring depths will be deter-

mined by means of the appropriate depth
dose curve. This means that the depth dose
curve will always be measured even if this
curve type is deactivated.

➔ The Rxx depths will also be transferred to

the task list.

D948.131.00/10 en 115
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.7.2 Plane parallel to central beam • Define the measuring direction for the depth
Measuring Program dose curve:
– from top to bottom
With this measuring program, you can measure – from bottom to top (recommended)
the inplane or crossplane profiles in a plane par-
allel to the central axis. By selecting or clearing • Define the measuring parameters for the pro-
the optimized check box, you determine whether file measurements:
the distances between the profiles will be variable
– Type of profile:
or fixed.
– crossplane
– inplane
1. Isodose Distribution: – Measuring direction:
– all profiles from left to right
When the optimized check box is selected, an – all profiles from right to left
isodose distribution will be measured. The mea- – meandering (recommended)
surement is adapted to the field distribution in the
depth. – Measurement angle:
To display isodoses, the measurement of a depth – diagonal
dose curve is required. The profiles will be nor- – angle referred to the axes of the mea-
malized to that curve. suring system

– Offset Offaxis [mm] referred to the center

• Select the optimized check box (default set- axis of the measuring system
ting).
– If only halfsided profiles will be measured
(e. g., when the irradiated field is large),
select the halfsided Profiles check box.

➔ The step intervals for the depth dose curve and

the profiles will be copied from the selected
parameter set.

➔ The measuring depths for the profiles depend

on the set energy. They are copied from the
tables by selecting menu Tools → Measure-
ment Options on the Predefined Depths tab.
Passing over the identifier Depths [mm] with
the mouse displays a tooltip with all the
entered measuring depths.

Figure IV-17: Measurement tab, Plane

parallel to central beam view
- Plane optimized

116 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

2. Matrix: – Measurement angle:

– diagonal
When the optimized check box is cleared, a rec- – angle referred to the axes of the mea-
tangular matrix will be measured with the selected suring system
step interval Resolution.
– Offset Offaxis [mm] referred to the center
• Clear the optimized check box. axis of the measuring system

– Step interval Resolution [mm]

– Overscan factor Overscan Factor:

All curves have the same length. The curve
length is determined by multiplying the
overscan factor with the field size in the ref-
erence depth.

• Define the measuring depths Depths [mm]:

– Range From … To and the step interval

Step
– user-defined measuring depths or the
energy-dependent depths (energy dep.,
refer to the measurement of the isodose
distribution)
Figure IV-18: Measurement tab, Plane The measuring depths have to be sepa-
parallel to central beam view rated with a blank.
Passing over the identifier Depths [mm]
• Define the measuring parameters for the pro- with the mouse displays a tooltip with all the
file measurements: entered measuring depths.
– Type of profile:
– crossplane
– inplane

– Measuring direction:
– all profiles from left to right
– all profiles from right to left
– meandering (recommended)

D948.131.00/10 en 117
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.7.3 Plane perpendicular to central • Define the measuring parameters for the pro-
beam Measuring Program file measurements:

– Type of profile:
With this measuring program, you can measure
– crossplane
inplane or crossplane profiles in a plane perpen-
– inplane
dicular to the central axis. By selecting or clearing
the optimized check box, you determine whether – Measuring direction:
the distances between the profiles will be variable – all profiles from left to right
or fixed. – all profiles from right to left
– meandering (recommended)

1. Optimized step interval: • Define the measuring depth Depth [mm]:

When the optimized check box is selected, the – Measurement in user-defined measuring
step intervals for the profiles will be copied from depth
the selected parameter set. – Measurement in the dose maximum Dmax,
i. e., in the energy-dependent depth dmax
• Select the optimized check box (default set-
ting). ➔ The step intervals for the profiles will be copied
from the selected parameter set.

➔ The number of the profiles to be measured is

determined by the Step-by-Step parameter set
selected last.

Figure IV-19: Measurement tab, Plane per-

pendicular to central beam view
- Plane optimized

118 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

2. Fixed step interval: – Step interval Resolution [mm]:

The number of the profiles to be measured
When the optimized check box is cleared, the pro- is also determined by the step interval.
files will be measured with a fixed step interval
– Overscan factor Overscan Factor:
Resolution.
All curves have the same length. The curve
• Clear the optimized check box. length is determined by multiplying the
overscan factor with the field size in the ref-
erence depth.

• Define the measuring depth Depth [mm]:

– Measurement in user-defined measuring

depth

– Measurement in the dose maximum Dmax,

i. e., in the energy-dependent depth dmax

Figure IV-20: Measurement tab, Plane

perpendicular to central
beam view

• Define the measuring parameters for the pro-

file measurements:

– Type of profile:
– crossplane
– inplane

– Measuring direction:
– all profiles from left to right
– all profiles from right to left
– meandering (recommended)

D948.131.00/10 en 119
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.7.4 Star Pattern Measuring – If you also want to measure the diagonal
Program profiles, select the Diagonals check box.

– If only halfsided profiles will be measured

With this measuring program, you can measure
(e. g., when the irradiated field is large),
the inplane and crossplane profiles at specific
select the halfsided Profiles check box.
angles.
Then, define the half of the profile to be
measured:
0° … < 180° or 180° … < 360°.

HINT
When measuring two halfsided star profiles
with shifting of the water tank, you have to
select the option 0.. <= 180 for the first mea-
surement of the halfsided profiles and the
option 180.. <= 360 for the second measure-
ment. Then, you can merge the halfsided pro-
files to complete profiles by selecting menu
Edit → Create → Merged Halfsided Profiles
(refer to chapter XI "'Scanned Data Analy-
sis' (DataAnalyze) Module").

Figure IV-21: Measurement tab, Star Pattern

• Define the measuring depth Depth [mm]:
view
– Measurement in user-defined measuring
• Define the measuring parameters for the pro-
depth
file measurements:
– Measurement in the dose maximum Dmax, i. e.,
– Type of profile:
in the energy-dependent depth dmax
– crossplane
– inplane
➔ The step intervals for the profiles will be copied
– Measuring direction: from the selected parameter set.
– all profiles from left to right
– all profiles from right to left
– meandering (recommended)

– Angular offset for each measurement

Angle Increment [°]

120 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.7.5 Points Measuring Program • Create a list of all points where measurements
are to be made. For this, use the buttons Add,
With this measuring program, you can perform Insert, Change, and Delete.
measurements at any selected point. The coor-
– Enter the coordinates of a point at A, B, and
dinates to enter refer to the selected measur-
C. With Add, you append it to the list.
ing system and the adjusted orientation (refer to
section 6.1 "Linac Tab"). – To insert a point in the list, highlight the
point just below the point you want to insert,
edit the coordinates in the boxes for A, B,
and C, and click the Insert button.

– To change the coordinates of a point in the

list, highlight the point, edit the coordinates
in the boxes for A, B, and C, and click the
Change button.

– Click the Delete button to remove high-

lighted points from the list.

Stepwise vs Time Measuring Mode

When the Stepwise vs Time measuring mode is

selected, all the points will be measured automat-
ically according to the adjusted measuring time.

➔ After the measurement, you will see the results

in the Val column.

Figure IV-22: Measurement tab, Points view

D948.131.00/10 en 121
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

Manual Start/Stop Measuring Mode

When the Manual Start/Stop measuring mode

is selected, you have to start and stop each
point measurement separately. In this measuring
mode, you will always measure without a refer-
ence detector.

• Enter the number of monitor units to be deliv-

ered at Monitor Units [MU].

HINT
The input of the monitor units to deliver is for
administrative purposes and for displaying the
measured values in the unit [cGy/MU]. This
input does not affect the measurement.

• Start the measurement of the first point by

clicking the Start button.

• End the measurement of the first point by click-

ing the Pause button.

➔ The first measured value will be displayed in

the Val column.

• Start the measurement of the next point by

clicking the Resume button.

• End the measurement of the next point by

clicking the Pause button.

➔ The next measured value will be displayed in

the Val column.

• Repeat these steps until all the desired points

have been measured.

122 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.7.6 BeamAdjust Measuring

Program

With this measuring program, you can continu-

ously measure profiles and analyze them auto-
matically in compliance with internationally recog-
nized dosimetry protocols. It is used for the adjust-
ment and verification of linear accelerators used
in medical applications.

Figure IV-23: BeamAdjust measuring program

1 Linac or Measurement tab for adjusting the 4 Highlighted analyze parameter

measuring parameters 5 Dialog with the analyze parameters of the
2 Tolerance lines for the flattened region measured profile
3 Display of the measured profile

D948.131.00/10 en 123
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

Adjusting the Measuring Parameters Notes on the Representation of the

Measurement Result
• Define the measuring parameters for the pro-
file measurements: – During the measurement, the profiles will be
normalized to the center value of the last pro-
– Type of profile:
file measured completely.
– crossplane
After the measurement, all the profiles will be
– inplane
normalized to their own center value.
– Measurement angle:
– diagonal – The measurement graphic will show two tol-
– angle referred to the axes of the mea- erance lines for the flattened region in the
suring system defined distance to 100% (e. g., tolerance lines
at 95% and 105% for a set tolerance range of
– Offset Offaxis [mm] referred to the center
±5%).
axis of the measuring system

– If the Show Analyze Parameter check box is

• Define the elements shown in the measure-
selected, these parameters will be shown in a
ment graphic:
separate dialog as soon as a profile has been
– Number of measured profiles Shown measured completely.
Curves The displayed analysis values always refer to
– Tolerance range Tolerance Area [+/-%] for the last profile measured completely.
the flattened region referred to 100% An analysis value is highlighted by clicking it.
To highlight another analysis value, click this
• Select the desired analysis protocol from the value.
Protocol list box and choose whether or not the
analyze parameters shall be displayed. – The measurement graphic will not show more
than the set number of profiles. The oldest
• Define the measuring depth Depth [mm]: measured profile will be deleted if another pro-
file is measured.
– Measurement in user-defined measuring
depth

– Measurement in the dose maximum Dmax,

i. e., in the energy-dependent depth dmax

➔ The step intervals for the profiles will be copied

from the selected parameter set.

124 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.7.7 Beam Inclination Measuring 6.7.7.1 Determining and Applying the

Program Inclination Angles of the Useful
Beam
With this measuring program, you can verify the
perpendicularity of the beam with respect to the PDD and profile measurements should always be
water surface. For this purpose, you measure an performed along the useful beam, particularly in
inplane and a crossplane profile at two depths. the case of small fields.
The inclination angles of these profiles will be cal-
culated on the basis of the 50% field limits in the The inclination of the useful beam with respect
inplane and crossplane directions and will be dis- to a perpendicular beam may be inplane and/
played. An automatic correction at the measuring or crossplane. With WaterTankScans, you can
system is not performed. determine the inclination angles. The measure-
ment positions of the subsequent PDD and profile
measurements will be adjusted accordingly. The
center of the rotation is located at the depth of the
last Beam Center Adjustment measurement.

HINT
Performing any function in Auto Setup mode
will automatically reset the application of the
inclination angles.

• Perform the Beam Center Adjustment function

in Auto Setup mode if not already done.

• Start the measurement by clicking the Start

button.
Figure IV-24: Measurement tab, Beam Incli-
➔ The measurements will be performed. The
nation view
graphics window will display the measuring
Define the two measuring depths Depths [mm] data of the profiles.
•
➔ The step intervals for the profiles will be copied ➔ Once all profiles have been measured, the
from the selected parameter set. inplane and crossplane inclination angles will
be calculated and displayed.

D948.131.00/10 en 125
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

➔ The Set Beam Inclination button will be acti- ➔ Inclination angles cannot be applied with
vated. asymmetric collimators or a gantry angle ≠ 0.

HINT ➔ When you exit WaterTankScans, the inclina-

tion angles will be discarded.
PTW recommends saving the measuring data.
The determined inclination angles will be saved
at the same time and you can reload them later. 6.7.7.2 Loading and Applying the
Inclination Angles of the Useful
• If you want to perform the subsequent PDD Beam
and profile measurements with the inclination
angles, click the Set Beam Inclination button. CAUTION
Applying the inclination angles with modified
➔ In the measuring programs that use the incli-
Auto Setup settings.
nation angle, the Linac and Measurement tabs
will be displayed with an orange frame and an Erroneous Measurements!
appropriate label.
The inclination angles always refer to the depth
of the Beam Center Adjustment measurement
performed last in Auto Setup mode. Check that
this depth is still valid. Otherwise, the measure-
ment results may be incorrect.
➔ The inclination angles can be applied in the fol-
lowing measuring programs:
As an alternative, you can load a Beam Inclination
– PDD and Profiles
measurement saved before and use the inclina-
– Plane parallel to central beam
tion angles of this measurement.
– Plane perpendicular to central beam
– Star Pattern
– Continuous TPR Measurement
– BeamAdjust
– TG51 Lead Foil Distance

➔ The Set Beam Inclination button label will

change to Reset Beam Inclination.

➔ The inclination angles remain valid until reset

with the Reset Beam Inclination button.

126 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.7.8 Output Factors Measuring

Program

With this measuring program, you can determine the output factors, i. e., the measured values in the central
axis depending on the field size and typically normalized to the field size of 10 cm x 10 cm. You can also
transfer the measurement of output factors to a task list.

Figure IV-25: Output Factors measuring program

1 Button to change the display mode of the out- 4 Button to transfer the average of the mea-
put factor table sured values to the output factor table
2 Selected field size 5 Output factor table
3 Measurement result for a field size with 6 Selected field size in the output factor table
– Number of measured values 7 Graphical representation of the output factors
– Measured values
– Average of the measured value
– Maximum deviation of the measured val-
ues
– Standard deviation of the measured val-
ues

D948.131.00/10 en 127
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.7.8.1 Configuring the Output Factor • Add new field sizes by entering the desired
Table field size in the empty cell at the end of the
table and confirming with the Enter key.
• To adapt the output factor table to the required
field sizes, select the table context menu Con- • Click the OK button to accept the changes.
figure Measurement. Click the Cancel button to discard the
changes.
➔ The Configure Measurement dialog will be dis-
played.

Figure IV-26: Configure Measurement dia-

log

You have to set the size of the field separately for

the inplane and crossplane direction.

• Define whether you want to measure only

square fields by selecting the only square
fields check box. In case of a two-dimensional
representation, you can then select only the
square field sizes.

• Delete the field sizes not needed with the con-

text menu Delete.

• Change a field size by entering a new field size

and confirming with the Enter key.

128 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.7.8.2 Performing a Measurement ➔ The equivalent square field size Eq. Square
[cm], i.e., the edge length of the equivalent
Only the Manual Start/Stop measuring mode is square field, will be displayed.
available for the determination of output factors.
The equivalent square field size is calculated
In this measuring mode, each measurement must
with the following formulas:
be started and stopped manually. Measurements
will always be performed without a reference
– Area a·b ≤ 16 cm²
detector.
(in accordance with TRS 483):

To ensure a measurement of the output factors

in the central beam at the maximum dose for
– Area a·b > 16 cm²
small fields, we recommend using the function for
(in accordance with DIN 6809-6):
determination of the maximum dose as described
in section 6.7.8.4 "Determining and Applying the
Maximum Dose".
• Start the measurement by clicking the Start
• Enter the number of monitor units to be deliv- button.
ered at Monitor Units [MU].
• Stop the measurement by clicking the Pause
HINT button.

The input of the monitor units to deliver is for

➔ The first measured value will be displayed in
administrative purposes and for displaying the
the Values [cGy/MU] field.
measured values in the unit [cGy/MU]. This
input does not affect the measurement. • If required, perform further measurements for
the same field size in order to obtain an aver-
• Define the measuring depth Depth [mm]: age of the measured values.
– Measurement in user-defined measuring
➔ The average, the maximum deviation, and the
depth
standard deviation of the measured values will
– Measurement in the dose maximum Dmax, automatically be calculated.
i. e., in the energy-dependent depth dmax
The standard deviation is calculated with the
following formula:
• In the output factor table, click the first field size
to be measured (usually 10 cm x 10 cm).

The empirical standard deviation is calculated

with the following formula:

D948.131.00/10 en 129
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

• Transfer the measured value or the average of 6.7.8.4 Determining and Applying the
the measured values to the output factor table Maximum Dose
by clicking the Accept button.
The Output Factors measuring program provides
• Perform further measurements for all the a function for determining the maximum dose
desired field sizes. (maximum signal at the level of the measuring
depth). This function determines the actually set
➔ When you have measured all the fields of the field size and the offset of the field from the cur-
output factor table, the graphical representa- rent zero point. This is of particular importance for
tion comprises the following curves: small fields to ensure a measurement of the out-
– one curve for each row of the two-dimen- put factors in the central beam at the maximum
sional output factor table dose.

– one curve for the diagonal of the two- • In menu Tools → Measurement Options on
dimensional output factor table the Advanced tab, select the Activate search
A curve will be displayed if at least two mea- dose max. for output factors option (refer to
sured values exist. section 12.4.3 "Advanced Tab").

• Save the measurement according to ➔ On the Measurement tab, the Search max but-
section 5.7 "Saving Measuring Data". ton will be displayed to determine the maxi-
mum dose:

6.7.8.3 Selecting a Curve

A curve can be selected in two ways:

– by double-clicking the desired curve in the

graphical representation.

– by displaying a discrete crosshairs and click-

ing one of the measuring points of the desired
curve in the output factor table.

Exception:
The curve for the square field sizes can only be
selected by double-clicking.

Figure IV-27: Output Factors measuring pro-

gram with option for determin-
ing the maximum dose

130 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

• Define the measuring depth Depth [mm] (refer ➔ The measurement will be performed:
to section 6.7.8.2 "Performing a Measure-
– WaterTankScans determines the center of
ment").
the set field size by measuring an inplane
and a crossplane profile at the adjusted
• In the output factor table, click the desired field
measuring depth.
size.
– The deviation in each axis direction results
• Click the Search max button. from the 50% dose values of the respective
profile.
➔ On the Measurement tab, the BeamCenterAd-
justment measuring program will be displayed: – During the measurement, the graphics win-
dow displays the measuring data of both
profiles.

➔ The following information will be displayed at

the end of the measurement:

– the determined field size

– the square field size equivalent to the deter-

mined field size (the formula is given in
section 6.7.8 "Output Factors Measuring
Program")

– the offset values in inplane and crossplane

direction from the current zero point

HINT
If at least one offset value is greater
Figure IV-28: BeamCenterAdjustment mea- than 0.2 mm, the measurement must be
suring program repeated to verify the determined offset val-
ues. An appropriate message will be dis-
• Check the measuring mode and the corre-
played.
sponding settings.
For the second measurement, the center is
• Start the measurement by clicking the Start shifted by the previously determined offset
button. values.

The offset value displayed after the second

measurement is the sum of both measure-
ments, i.e., the offset value referred to the
zero point.

D948.131.00/10 en 131
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

➔ After a successful measurement, the Accept

button will be activated.

Figure IV-30: Output Factors measuring pro-

gram with determined maximum
dose
Figure IV-29: BeamCenterAdjustment mea-
suring program with the deter- • Measure the required output factors as
mined values described in section 6.7.8.2 "Performing a
Measurement".
• Import the determined values into the Out-
put Factors measuring program by clicking the ➔ The determined offset values will now be
Accept button. applied to all measurements of output factors
With the Cancel button, you return to the Out- for all field sizes.
put Factors measuring program without setting
an offset between the field and the zero point. ➔ The offset values remain valid until reset with
the Reset max button.
➔ In the Output Factors measuring program,
the determined field size will be displayed at ➔ You can use the Search max button at any time
FWHM (Full Width at Half Maximum). The to determine a new offset value for any other
Search max button label changes to Reset field size.
max.
HINT
When the Search max. function is performed at
a particular field size, the determined field size
is automatically added to the comment.

132 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

HINT 6.7.8.5 Editing Output Factors

The determined offset values are not trans-

ferred to the control unit but only to the Out- Editing Measured Values
put Factors measuring program. When you
select another measuring program or exit If required, you can edit displayed measured val-
WaterTankScans, the offset values will be dis- ues.
carded.
• In the output factor table, click the output factor
to change.

• Then, click the desired measured value in the

table on the Measurement tab.

• Enter the desired measured value.

• Confirm the new value with the Enter key.

• Click the Accept button to accept all changes.

Deleting Measured Values

If required, you can delete displayed measured

values.

• To do this, click the desired measured value in

the table on the Measurement tab.

• Delete the measured value with the Del key.

• Click the Accept button to accept all changes.

D948.131.00/10 en 133
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.7.8.6 Changing the Display Normalization

The output factor table and the graphical repre-

Changing the Representation of the Output sentation of the output factors can be displayed
Factor Table in the following normalization modes by selecting
menu Graphics → Normalize Graphics:
The output factor table can be represented in two
ways: – to Value
The measured values will be normalized to a
– two-dimensional representation according to value determined by the user. For further infor-
Figure IV-25 (default setting) mation on this normalization mode, refer to
chapter III "Basic Functions".
– one-dimensional representation according to
Figure IV-31 – to Absolute Unit
The measured values will be displayed unnor-
malized.

– to Field 10x10 cm²

All the measured values will be normal-
ized to the measured value of the field size
10 cm x 10 cm (default setting).
As soon as you have measured a value for the
field size of 10 cm x 10 cm, all the measured
values will be normalized to that value.
If no measured value is available for this field
size, all the measured values will be displayed
Figure IV-31: One-dimensional representation unnormalized.
of the output factor table

• To toggle between the two-dimen-

sional representation and the one-
dimensional representation, click the
button in the upper left corner of the
output factor table.

134 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.7.9 Stationary Scans Measuring • In the Measurement Presets pane, define the
Program measurement settings:

– Movement direction Movement:

With this measuring program, you can perform
– Table
continuous measurements without the motor-dri-
– Gantry Other
ven movement of the detector.
This will, for instance, be used for the QA and – Measurement with two detectors
ATP of TomoTherapy for the following measuring Connect the second detector to the refer-
tasks: ence channel of the electrometer.
In the measuring mode pane, select the
– measuring profiles in a slab phantom with
with Reference check box, and in the Mea-
movement of the treatment table
surement Presets pane, select the Dual
– measuring with a detector and continuous Scan Mode check box.
gantry movement
– For the representation of the measurement
Measurements can only be performed in the Man- graphic, enter the approximate duration of
ual Start/Stop measuring mode. In this mode, the measurement at Auto Scale Preset X
each measurement must be started and stopped [s].
manually. – Enter the movement speed at Speed [mm/
s].
This input is used for converting measuring
times to measuring positions, as the mea-
suring system needs the measuring posi-
tions in [mm] and not in [s].
When selecting the movement direction
Other, a fixed speed of 1 mm/s will be used.

• Enter the measuring depth at Depth [mm].

• Start the measurement by clicking the Start

button.

• End the measurement by clicking the Pause

button.

➔ One measuring curve will be displayed or, in

Dual Scan Mode, two curves.

Figure IV-32: Measurement tab, Stationary

Scans view

D948.131.00/10 en 135
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

CAX Correction 6.7.10 TG51 Lead Foil Distance

Measuring Program
When the Table movement direction is selected,
you can CAX-correct the profile or the profiles With this measuring program, you can measure a
after the measurement. depth dose curves when using a lead foil (photon
radiation only).
• Define the dose values between which the
center value CAX Deviation shall be calcu-
lated.

• Click the Shift button.

• The profile will be shifted by the calculated

center value CAX Deviation.

Figure IV-33: Measurement tab, TG51 Lead

Foil Distance view

• Define the measuring direction for the depth

dose curve:
– from top to bottom
– from bottom to top (recommended)

• Enter the distance between the water phantom

and the lead foil at Phantom Foil Distance.

➔ The step intervals for the depth dose curve will

be copied from the selected parameter set.

136 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.8 Total Measurement For the Continuous TPR-Measurement measur-

ing program, it is not possible to calculate the total
Duration
duration of the TPR measurement in advance.
In the Continuous Scans and Stepwise vs This value is determined by the "Flow Speed Cal-
Time measuring modes, the estimated total ibration" measurement and is then available for
measurement duration can be displayed with the TPR measurement. The time is counted down
WaterTankScans. during the TPR measurement so that the remain-
ing time is permanently visible.
This total duration is shown on the Measurement
tab under the preview of the curves to be mea- It is not possible to calculate the total duration for
sured (refer to Figure IV-6, Pos. 7). the following measuring programs and no reading
will be displayed:
For this purpose, clear the Show current detec- – BeamAdjust
tor position check box in menu Tools → Mea-
surement Options on the Advanced tab (refer to – Output Factors
section 12.4.3 "Advanced Tab"). – Stationary Scans

The time for moving to the first measuring point The accuracy of the displayed time is < 20%.
is not included in the calculation of the total dura-
tion. Therefore, the expected total duration for a
measuring program may vary.

When working with task lists, only the total dura-

tion of the currently selected task will be dis-
played. The total duration of the entire task list or
of a task group can be determined by summing up
the durations of each single task.

When you change a measurement parameter, the

total duration will be recalculated and displayed.

After the measurement of a curve, the remain-

ing total duration for the curves left to be mea-
sured will be recalculated and displayed. The time
will also be recalculated when a measurement is
interrupted and resumed.

D948.131.00/10 en 137
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Workflow for Special Tasks

7 Workflow for Special Tasks

7.1 Small Field Dosimetry 7.2 Measuring Profiles in

Large Fields
In the measurement of small fields, it is particu-
larly important that the zero point of the measur- With WaterTankScans, it is also possible to mea-
ing field is always in the central beam. sure profiles in large fields. For these tasks, the
water phantom is set up in a position where a com-
WaterTankScans offers the following functions to plete half of the profile can be measured. The half-
assist you: sided profiles can then be merged to form new
profiles.
– When measuring output factors, you can
determine the maximum dose (maximum sig- Observe the following points when measuring
nal at the level of the measuring depth) for profiles with zero shift:
each field size. The measurement will then be
performed at this maximum dose.
CAUTION
For further information, refer to section 6.7.8 Electronic components in or near the radiation
"Output Factors Measuring Program". field.

– The Beam Inclination measuring program can Equipment Damage! Erroneous Measure-
be used to check the useful beam for an incli- ments!
nation. The determined inclination angle can If the electronic components are located in or
then be applied in subsequent measurements. near the radiation field, this will lead to higher
For further information, refer to section 6.7.7 leakage currents that affect the measurement.
"Beam Inclination Measuring Program". Also, the electronic components may be dam-
aged.

Set up the BEAMSCAN measuring system in

For small field dosimetry with semiconductor
a position where no part of the large field is
detectors or with the microDiamond detector,
on that side outside the PMMA tank where the
you can also set very slow scan speeds. You
electronic components are located. Since the
achieve a higher spatial resolution with these
foot of the treatment table is on one side of most
longer scan times. For further information, refer to
radiation units and there is only little space, the
section 6.5.1.1 "Scan Speed".
only options for positioning the system are in
most cases those shown in the following fig-
ures.

138 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Workflow for Special Tasks

CAUTION
Measurements without performing Auto Setup.

Erroneous Measurements!

Perform an Auto Setup each time after choos-

ing a new position for the BEAMSCAN measur-
ing system.

HINT
There are no marks on the PMMA tank for
alignment with zero shift. Therefore, PTW rec-
ommends the following solutions:

– Apply your own marks on the PMMA tank.

– Use the TRUFIX BS adjusting aid
T21008.1.030 and align the BEAMSCAN
measuring system with the light field indica-
tor.

D948.131.00/10 en 139
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Workflow for Special Tasks

L R
40 cm x 40 cm
Treatment
table

Figure IV-34: Position of the BEAMSCAN measuring system for measuring half-sided profiles from
center to gun and to the left

140 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Workflow for Special Tasks

Treatment 40 cm x 40 cm
L table R

Figure IV-35: Position of the BEAMSCAN measuring system for measuring half-sided profiles from
center to target and to the right

D948.131.00/10 en 141
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Workflow for Special Tasks

7.2.1 Measuring Profiles • Perform Auto Setup with a smaller field (e.g.,
10 cm x 10 cm).
In order to measure all the necessary profiles, per-
form the following steps for both positions of the • Switch off the Auto Setup mode
BEAMSCAN measuring system: by clicking the Auto Setup
button or by selecting menu
• Set up the BEAMSCAN measuring system in Tools → Auto Setup.
a position where you can measure a com-
plete half of the profile. Refer to the figures • For the measurement, on the
in section 7.2 "Measuring Profiles in Large Linac tab, select the orientation
Fields". of the BEAMSCAN measuring
system that matches its posi-
• Perform a reference run and an automatic lev- tion, for example for the position
eling procedure. shown in Figure IV-34:

• Use the manual controller to set the desired • Adjust the large field and measure the desired
zero point. profiles.
If a message informs you that some of
• Switch on the Auto Setup mode the measuring points are outside the limits,
by clicking the Auto Setup i. e., outside the maximum measurable curve
button or by selecting menu length, acknowledge the message.
Tools → Auto Setup.
• Save the measured profiles if applicable.
• For Auto Setup, on the Linac
tab, select the orientation of the • Generate the half-sided profiles as described
BEAMSCAN measuring system in section 7.2.2 "Generating Half-Sided Pro-
that matches its position, for files".
example for the position shown As an alternative, you can generate the half-
in Figure IV-34: sided profiles later in the DataAnalyze module.

• On the Auto Setup tab, activate the User Shift

function to apply the new zero point just set HINT
(also refer to section 5.3.3.3 "Beam Center
If the display was set to indicate the total dura-
Adjustment"):
tion, the displayed, expected total duration may
• Select the User Shift check box. be up to twice as long as the scan time actually
• Click the … button. required.
Reason: All the measuring points are included
➔ The zero shift values currently stored in the in the calculation of the total duration, even
BEAMSCAN control unit will be displayed those outside the limits that will not be mea-
in the User Shift dialog. sured.
• Confirm the values with the Accept button.

142 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Workflow for Special Tasks

7.2.2 Generating Half-Sided Profiles 7.2.3 Merging Half-Sided Profiles in

the DataAnalyze Module
HINT
• Load all half-sided profiles in the DataAnalyze
When generating half-sided profiles in the
module.
DataAnalyze module, make sure that only
the measured profiles for one position of the Select all curves.
•
BEAMSCAN measuring system are loaded.
• Select menu Edit → Create → Merged half-
• Select all curves. sided Profiles.

• Click the Process button or ➔ The half-sided profiles will be merged.

select menu Edit → Process.
• Save the new profiles.

➔ The profiles will be displayed in the Process

edit window.
For further information on merging half-sided pro-
• In menu Tools → Options on the General tab, files, refer to chapter XI "'Scanned Data Analy-
define whether the right or the left side of the sis' (DataAnalyze) Module" - 6.4 "Merging Half-
profile is to be generated when halving the pro- Sided Profiles".
files.

• Click the Halve button or select

menu Profiles → Halve.

➔ The half-sided profiles will be generated.

• Apply the changes by clicking

the Accept button or with menu
Process → Accept Last Correc-
tions.

• Save the half-sided profiles.

For further information on halving profiles, refer

to chapter XI "'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAna-
lyze) Module" - 9.14.6 "Halving Profiles".

D948.131.00/10 en 143
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Workflow for Special Tasks

7.3 TPR Measurement HINT

TPR measurements can only be performed if
CAUTION the gantry angle is 0°.
Unsuitable detector position.
Due to backscattering, which varies with the
Incorrect Measured Values! water level, a minimum distance of 150 mm
between the reference detector and water sur-
For TPR measurements, make sure that the
face must be ensured.
detector EPOM is at the measuring position
(according to DIN 6800-2). The EPOM of a Do not operate the water pump by hand during
cylindrical ionization chamber is the half of the the measurement. The pump will be controlled
radius above the chamber axis. by the measuring system.

TPR measurements do not allow for setting For further measurements with other SSD
a different zero point in order to achieve an values, i.e., different water layers, the entire
EPOM shift. procedure must be repeated (set zero point
again!).
For TPR measurements, only one depth dose
curve, i. e., a TPR curve (Tissue Phantom Ratio)
is measured. With this measurement, the distance
between source and detector remains constant
but the water layers above the detector vary.

Use the following measuring program for this pur-

pose:

– Continuous TPR Measurement

With this measuring program, measurements
are performed continuously and the measured
values are assigned to the corresponding
water layers

The SDD value (Source Detector Distance) is

entered on the Measurement tab and the SSD
value (Source Surface Distance) on the Linac tab.
All other measuring parameters correspond to the
PDD and Profiles program.

144 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Workflow for Special Tasks

7.3.1 Preparing the TPR • On the Measurement tab, enter the correct
Measurement SDD value (Source Detector Distance) and on
the Linac tab the SSD value (Source Surface
• Check that all the cables required for a Distance).
TPR measurement are connected. For this,
observe the user manuals of all the compo-
nents of the measuring system.

• Fill the tank with water until the water surface

is at an SSD (source surface distance) that
is equivalent to the source detector distance
minus the maximum thickness of the water
layer.

Example:
Source detector distance of 100 cm, water
layer between 0 and 25 cm result in an SSD
value of 75 cm.

source

SSD SDD

max. water
level
tw

detector

Figure IV-36: TPR measurement

SDD (Source Detector Dis-
tance) and SSD (Source Sur-
face Distance)

D948.131.00/10 en 145
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Workflow for Special Tasks

7.3.2 Continuous TPR • Perform a calibration measurement to deter-

Measurement mine the sink function of the water.

HINT
A calibration measurement must be per-
formed before the first measurement and
after each change of the SSD (Source Sur-
face Distance) or of the altitude of the water
tank.
The calibration measurement is performed
without radiation.

– Start the "Flow Speed Calibration" mea-

surement by clicking the Calibrate button.

➔ The calibration measurement will proceed

automatically and at the end, the initial
water level (zero point) will be restored

Figure IV-37: Measurement tab, Continuous ➔ Date and time of the last calibration mea-
TPR Measurement view surement will be displayed.

If the calibration measurement is paused, it

• Prepare the TPR measurement according to
must be restarted from the beginning.
section 7.3.1 "Preparing the TPR Measure-
ment". • Now, start the Continuous TPR measurement.

HINT ➔ The Continuous TPR measurement will pro-

The measuring time set on the Measure- ceed automatically. The measured values are
ment tab does not affect the total measur- assigned to the water layers based on the sink
ing time of the TPR curve but the mea- function determined by the calibration mea-
surement result. Short measuring times may surement.
result in noisy curves while long measuring
➔ At the end of the Continuous TPR measure-
times increase the uncertainty of the measur-
ment, the total measuring time will be com-
ing depth (approx. 0.075 mm per 50 ms).
pared with the current calibration measure-
ment and the measured values will be recali-
brated with these data.

146 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Workflow for Special Tasks

If the Continuous TPR measurement is paused, it

must be restarted from the beginning.

• To perform further measurements upon com-

pletion of the Continuous TPR measurement,
you can fill the PMMA tank to the correct water
level by clicking the Adjust Water Level button.

➔ The Adjust Water Level dialog will be dis-

played:

Figure IV-38: Adjust Water Level dialog

• Click the Adjust button.

➔ The measuring detector will be positioned at

the zero point, and water will be added until the
correct water level is reached.

➔ The following Adjust Water Level dialog will be

displayed:

Figure IV-39: Adjust Water Level dialog for

terminating the function

• To terminate filling of the tank, click the Finish

button.

D948.131.00/10 en 147
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Reference Curves

8 Reference Curves

In order to compare the current measurement 8.1 Loading Reference

visually with an existing measurement, you can
Curves
load reference curves before starting the mea-
surement. Reference curves can be loaded by either of the
following methods:
Reference curves can only be loaded when they
are in the MEPHYSTO MCC format (*.mcc). 1. Loading reference curves without measuring
parameters:
HINT
• Select menu File → Open Overlay Refer-
In order to compare the reference curves ence.
numerically with the currently measured
curves, you have to load all the curves in • Select a file from the standard Open dialog.
the DataAnalyze module and compare them ➔ The currently displayed measuring data
with the Compare function (by selecting menu and reference curves will be overwritten. If
Edit → Compared Scans) (refer to chapter XI the currently displayed measuring data are
"'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Mod- not yet saved, a message will be shown
ule" - 7 "Comparing Curves"). and you can save them if required.

➔ The reference curves will only be dis-

played.

➔ The currently set measuring parameters

(e. g., measuring program) will not be over-
written by the measuring parameters of the
loaded reference curves.

148 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Reference Curves

2. Loading reference curves with measuring 8.2 Measurements with

parameters:
Loaded Reference Curves
• Select menu File → Open Compare Refer-
ence. During the measurement, only the reference
curve of the curve type to measure will be dis-
• Select a file from the standard Open dialog. played, even if you have loaded reference curves
➔ The currently displayed measuring data of different curve types.
and reference curves will be overwritten. If
the currently displayed measuring data are Example:
not yet saved, a message will be shown If you measure a profile, the reference curves
and you can save them if required. shown are only profiles and not depth dose
curves.
➔ The reference curves will only be dis-
played. In order to compare curves with reference curves
➔ The currently set measuring parameters measured with different measuring parameters,
(e. g., measuring program) will be overwrit- an adjust measurement will be performed before
ten by the measuring parameters of the the actual measurement. Thus, the measurement
loaded reference curves and can be used will be independent of the measuring parameters.
for the subsequent measurements.
– If a depth dose curve is loaded, the adjust
➔ You cannot print, save, analyze, or modify the measurement will be performed at the depth of
reference curves. the maximum value of that curve.

➔ The reference curves remain valid until you – If only profiles are loaded, the adjust measure-
remove them or load new reference curves. ment will be performed at the depth of the max-
imum center value of all profiles.

HINT
The adjust measurement only affects the nor-
malization of the curves during the measure-
ment. When saving the data, the normalization
will be ignored.

D948.131.00/10 en 149
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Reference Curves

8.3 Comparing 8.4 Removing Reference

Measurements with the Curves
Reference Curves
• To remove the reference curves, select menu
You can load reference curves and compare them File → Close Overlay Reference.
with measured curves.
➔ The reference curves will immediately be
• Select menu Edit → Compare Scans. removed. The command does not require con-
firmation.
➔ The Compare edit window will open and the
result of the comparison will be displayed if
the following conditions are met. Otherwise, an
appropriate error message will be displayed.

– The pool of available curves contains at

least one measuring curve and a matching
reference curve that share all of the follow-
ing parameters:
– Modality
– Energy
– Curve type (PDD, profile, or FFF profile)
– Profile type (inplane or crossplane)
– Measuring depth
– Field size
– SSD
– Wedge filter

– The assignment of the matched curves

must be unique, i. e., each measuring curve
must be associated with exactly only one
reference curve and vice versa.

For further information on comparing curves, also

refer to section 11 "Analyzing and Editing the
Measurement Results" and chapter XI "'Scanned
Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module" - 7 "Com-
paring Curves").

150 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring
System - Verifying and Changing the Detector Settings at the Electrometer

9 Verifying and Changing the Detector Settings at the

Electrometer

• For verifying or changing the detector settings The dialog will also be displayed in the following
at the electrometer, select menu Measure- situations:
ment → Detector Settings.
– upon selection of a new detector

➔ The Detector Settings for Electrometer dialog – when starting a measurement if the high volt-
will be displayed. age and/or measuring range set at the elec-
trometer are different from the previously set
values

– during Auto Setup and when the first mea-

surement is started if this dialog has not been
called up before

1 2

10 11 12

Figure IV-40: Detector Settings for Electrometer dialog (e. g., before a measurement is started)

D948.131.00/10 en 151
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring
System - Verifying and Changing the Detector Settings at the Electrometer

1 Settings of the measuring detector CAUTION

2 Settings of the reference detector Improper handling when switching the
3 Selected detector BEAMSCAN hardware on or changing detec-
4 Nominal detector high voltage from the tors.
detector library Incorrect Measured Values!
5 High voltage currently set at the electrometer
Note that after switching on the BEAMSCAN
6 High voltage to be set at the electrometer hardware, the high voltage is set to 0 V by
7 Nominal measuring range of the detector default.
from the detector library
Also when changing a detector, the high volt-
8 Measuring range currently set at the elec- age currently adjusted may be unsuitable.
trometer
Be sure to check the high voltages and measur-
9 Measuring range to be set at the electrome-
ing ranges currently set at the electrometer for
ter
both channels (Current Electrometer HV and
10 Button to adjust the high voltage set at (6) Current Electrometer Range).
and the electrometer measuring range set at
(9) In the Selected HV and Selected Range list
boxes, the nominal detector voltage and the
11 Button to start the measurement (only for ver-
default measuring range from the detector
ifications before a measurement)
library are preset.
12 Button to apply the currently set values and
to exit the dialog To accept the preset values for high voltage
and measuring range, it is important to click
the Accept Selection button once. Otherwise,
the measurement will be performed with the
wrong high voltage and measuring range set-
tings (e.g., high voltage remains 0 V) and you
obtain incorrect measured values.

152 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring
System - Verifying and Changing the Detector Settings at the Electrometer

Nominal Detector HV and Detector Range Changing the High Voltage and the
Measuring Range at the Electrometer
The nominal high voltage of the detector and the
nominal measuring range are always taken from • From the appropriate list box, select the high
the detector library even if the measuring parame- voltage for the measuring detector and the ref-
ters have been adjusted by loading a stored mea- erence detector.
surement. The nominal high voltage of the detec-
tor and the nominal measuring range can only • From the appropriate list box, select the mea-
be modified in the detector library in the Detec- suring range for the measuring detector and
tor Library module (refer to chapter VIII "'Detector the reference detector.
Library' Module").
• Confirm the selection with the Accept Selec-
tion button.

➔ The selected high voltage and measuring

range will be set at the electrometer.

➔ The indication in the Current Electrometer HV

and Current Electrometer Range panes will be
adapted.

• Close the dialog with the OK button or start a

measurement with the Start Measurement but-
ton.

➔ If the selected high voltage and/or the selected

measuring range does not match the nominal
values in the detector library, a safety prompt
will be displayed.

• You can either use the set values without

another prompt in all subsequent measure-
ments or you can change the setting once
again.

D948.131.00/10 en 153
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring
System - Verifying and Changing the Detector Settings at the Electrometer

Applying the Currently Set Values at the Starting a Measurement

Electrometer
The Start Measurement button is only available
• Click the OK button. when the dialog is displayed during Auto-Setup or
when starting a measurement.
➔ If the selected high voltage and/or the selected
measuring range does not match the nominal • Start the measurement by clicking the Start
values in the detector library, a safety prompt Measurement button.
will be displayed.
➔ If the selected high voltage and/or the selected
• You can either use the set values without measuring range does not match the nominal
another prompt in all subsequent measure- values in the detector library, a safety prompt
ments or you can change the setting once will be displayed.
again.
• You can either use the set values without
➔ The Detector Settings for Electrometer dialog another prompt in all subsequent measure-
will be displayed again only when ments or you can change the setting once
again.
– a different detector is selected.
– the electrometer settings are changed. ➔ The measurement will be started with the
selected settings (Current Electrometer HV
– WaterTankScans is restarted.
and Current Electrometer Range).
– the dialog is called up via menu Measure-
ment → Detector Settings.

154 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring System -
Verifying the Water Level in the PMMA Tank of the BEAMSCAN Measuring System

10 Verifying the Water Level in the PMMA Tank of the

BEAMSCAN Measuring System

WARNING ➔ If the water sensor is not at the water sur-

face in this position, the measuring detector
Performing measurements without verifying
will be lowered in increments of 0.1 mm until it
the water level.
reaches the water surface.
Erroneous Measurements!
➔ The following Check water level dialog will be
Check the water level in the PMMA tank several
displayed:
times each day. The water level may change
due to evaporation or a defective valve, which
may lead to incorrect measurement results.

• For verification of the water level, select menu

Measurement → Check Water Level.
Figure IV-42: Check water level dialog with
➔ The Check water level dialog will be displayed: difference between actual and
correct water level

• To refill the PMMA tank to the correct water

level, click the Adjust button.

➔ The measuring detector is again positioned at

Figure IV-41: Check water level dialog the zero point, and water is added until the cor-
rect water level is reached.
• Start the verification by clicking the Check but-
ton.

➔ The measuring detector will be positioned at

the zero point.

D948.131.00/10 en 155
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring System -
Verifying the Water Level in the PMMA Tank of the BEAMSCAN Measuring System

➔ The following Check water level dialog will be

displayed:

Figure IV-43: Check water level dialog for ter-

minating the verification

• Terminate the verification by clicking the Finish

button.

• To cancel the verification and refilling of the

PMMA tank, click the appropriate Stop button.

HINT
When a measurement is started and the water
level has not been checked in the last two hours
with the Check water level function, a warning
will be displayed.
In menu Tools → Measurement Options on
the Advanced tab, the display of the warning
message can be enabled or disabled (refer to
section 12.4.3 "Advanced Tab").

156 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
Measuring System - Analyzing and Editing the Measurement Results

11 Analyzing and Editing the Measurement Results

WaterTankScans offers the following options for Comparing Curves

further processing or analyzing the measuring
data: By selecting menu Edit → Compared Scans, you
can compare curves. This can be done by either
of the following methods:
Analyzing Curves
• First load reference curves, then measure
By clicking the Analyze button or by selecting curves, and finally compare them with the
menu Edit → Analyze Information, the Analyze reference curves (also refer to section 8.3
window will open where you can analyze the "Comparing Measurements with the Refer-
selected curves (refer to chapter XI "'Scanned ence Curves").
Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module" - 8 "Ana-
lyzing Curves"). or

• Select two curves to compare from the dis-

Modifying Curves played curves. Check that the selected curves
are the same type.
By clicking the Process button or by select-
ing menu Edit → Process, the Process window For further information on comparing curves, refer
will open where you can modify the selected to chapter XI "'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAna-
curves (refer to chapter XI "'Scanned Data lyze) Module" - 7 "Comparing Curves".
Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module" - 9 "Modifying
Curves").

D948.131.00/10 en 157
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

12 Configuring WaterTankScans

12.1 General Information Additionally, you can switch to the Auto Setup
mode via menu Tools → Auto Setup (refer to
WaterTankScans is configured in the Tools menu. section 5.3 "Auto Setup").

In the Tools menu, you will find the following

dialogs:
– Options dialog:
for global module settings, such as the repre-
sentation of the graphics
All changes performed on the tabs of the
Options dialog will affect all modules of the
BEAMSCAN software (refer to chapter III
"Basic Functions").

– Step-By-Step Options dialog and Continuous

Options dialog:
to create and configure the parameter sets
(refer to section 12.2 "Setting Up Parameter
Sets")

– Task List dialog:

to create and edit task lists (refer to
section 12.3 "Working with Task Lists")

– Measurement Options dialog:

to define the measurement options (refer
to section 12.4 "Defining the Measurement
Options")

158 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

12.2 Setting Up Parameter WaterTankScans is delivered with the parame-

ter sets LOWRES, MEDRES, and HIGHRES. In
Sets
combination with the Semiflex 3D detector, they
should be sufficient for most measurements.
12.2.1 Step-By-Step Options Dialog
You are free to create custom parameter sets or
The settings in the Step-By-Step Options dialog modify existing sets for other detectors or for spe-
apply to all measurements with the Stepwise vs cial requirements; you can also delete parameter
Time and Stepwise vs Trigger measuring modes. sets. In these cases, PWT recommends perform-
ing multiple measurements with different settings
To optimize measuring tasks with respect to the (speeds and measuring steps). To identify the
position and duration of the measurement, you optimal settings for the parameter sets to create,
can select predefined parameter sets or create open these measurements together in the Data-
new parameter sets in the Step-By-Step Options Analyze module and compare them (also refer
dialog. to chapter XI "'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAna-
lyze) Module").
The Step-By-Step Options dialog (refer to
Figure IV-44) is opened via menu Tools → Step-
By-Step Options.

These are the settings defined in a parameter set:

– modality-dependent and energy-dependent

measuring steps for depth dose curves on the
PDD Steps tab

– modality-dependent measuring steps for pro-

files on the Profile Steps tab

– depth-dependent and detector-dependent

speeds and delay times on the Speeds and
Delay Times tabs

D948.131.00/10 en 159
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

12.2.1.1 PDD Steps Tab

5 6

7 8 9

Figure IV-44: Step-By-Step Options dialog - PDD Steps tab

1 Modality list box 6 Selection of the range limits and step inter-
2 Energy list box vals
3 Name of the selected parameter set 7 Button to copy a parameter set

4 List of all the parameter sets 8 Button to delete a parameter set

5 Selection of the type of measuring steps 9 Graphical representation of the range limits
and step intervals

160 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

On the PDD Steps tab, you specify the measuring Press the Ins key or select Insert new range from
steps for the measurement of depth dose curves the context menu to insert a new range (in the
for all modalities and all corresponding energies. table: above the selected range; on the graphic:
The modalities and energies shown depend on before the selected range).
what was defined in the Radiation unit Library
module, i. e., if a new energy is specified in this HINT
module for any of the radiation units, check the
A maximum of 9 ranges may be created.
settings in the Step-By-Step Options dialog, and
correct if necessary.
Press the Del key or select Delete selected range
You can choose between two types of measuring from the context menu to delete the selected
steps: range.

– Equidistant
The same step interval is used over the entire
measuring range.

– Along steps
The measuring points exactly reflect the
defined range limits and step intervals.

Range Limits and Step Intervals

You can adjust range limits both in the table and

in the graphic. The graphic and table adapt auto-
matically.
In the table, the starting points can be entered for
each range limit, and in the last row, the end point
can also be adjusted.

Click button to double the adjusted

step interval.
Click button to halve the adjusted
step interval.

D948.131.00/10 en 161
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

12.2.1.2 Profile Steps Tab

4 5 6

7 8 9 10

Figure IV-45: Step-By-Step Options dialog - Profile Steps tab

1 Modality list box 7 Button to copy a parameter set

2 Name of the selected parameter set 8 Button to delete parameter sets
3 List of all the parameter sets 9 Button to display the measuring steps for any
4 Reference field size field size and measuring depth
5 Selection of the type of measuring steps 10 Graphical representation of the range limits
and step intervals
6 Selection of the range limits and step inter-
vals

162 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

On the Profile Steps tab, you specify the measur- You can choose between two types of measuring
ing steps for the measurement of profiles for all steps:
modalities.
– Equidistant
The same step interval is used over the entire
For this, adjust a field size in the Reference Size
measuring range.
input box and define the appropriate range limits
and step intervals in the Ranges pane. – Fanlines
The step intervals can be set in cus-
To perform a measurement for another field size, tom-defined ranges.
it is not necessary to change the settings on the
Profile Steps tab, as the range limits will adapt For a parameter set, you can define both equidis-
automatically to the field size during the measure- tant measuring steps and fanlines.
ment (refer to Figure IV-46). The step intervals
between the range limits remain unchanged for all
the field sizes.

The adjusted range limits and step intervals

always refer to the depth adjusted in the mea-
suring module on the Linac tab at Fieldsize
defined at. If measurements are performed at
other depths, the range limits and the step inter-
vals are converted, using the Intercept theorem
(refer to Figure IV-47).

Range limits and step intervals are adjusted as

described in section 12.2.1.1 "PDD Steps Tab".

HINT
A maximum of 9 ranges may be created.

When the Symmetrize Ranges check box is

selected, range limits and step intervals of the
positive range are mirrored on the central axis.

D948.131.00/10 en 163
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

Figure IV-46: Range limits and step intervals for different field sizes

A Settings on the Profile Steps tab for a field size of 10 x 10 cm

Measurement with field size of 10 x 10 cm: measuring steps coincide with A
B Measurement with field size of 5 x 5 cm: in the middle of the range, the number of measuring steps is
reduced
C Measurement with field size of 15 x 15 cm: in the middle of the range, the number of measuring steps
is increased

Figure IV-47: Range limits and step intervals for different measuring depths

A Setting on the Profile Steps tab for the depth adjusted on the Linac tab of the measuring module
Measurement in the depth adjusted on the Linac tab of the measuring module: measuring steps coin-
cide with A
B Measurement in a greater depth: range limits and step intervals are adapted by using the Intercept
theorem

164 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

By clicking the Display for Any Size button, you

can display the Profile Steps for Any Size dialog
(refer to Figure IV-48). In this dialog, you can see
the adapted measurement steps as well as the
number of points to be measured for any field size
and measuring depth.

HINT
The points to be measured will be displayed
correctly only if the reference depth entered in
the Field size defined at depth and the source
surface distance SSD match the data on the
Linac tab of the measuring module.

1 5

2 6

3 7

Figure IV-48: Profile Steps for Any Size dialog

1 Input box for the field size to be checked 4 Number of points to be measured
2 Input box for the measuring depth to be 5 Input box for reference depth
checked 6 Button to update the graphic
3 Graphical representation of the adapted mea- 7 Input box for source surface distance (SSD)
surement steps

D948.131.00/10 en 165
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

12.2.1.3 Speeds Tab

5 6 7

Figure IV-49: Step-By-Step Options dialog - Speeds tab

1 Detector type list box 5 Button to copy a parameter set

2 Name of the selected parameter set 6 Button to delete parameter sets
3 List of all the parameter sets 7 Graphical representation of the range limits
4 Selection of the range limits and speeds and speeds

166 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

On the Speeds tab, you can specify depth-related

speeds for each detector type.

You can choose among the following detector

types:
– cylindrical detectors
– plane-parallel detectors
– LA48 (not supported in the BEAMSCAN mea-
suring system)

HINT
Both the conventional Markus chamber and the
plane-parallel chamber are treated as plane-
parallel detectors, all other single chambers are
considered as cylindrical detectors.

HINT
Irrespective of the settings on the Speeds
tab, the detector will always be moved to the
first measuring point with reduced speed and
reduced acceleration in order to reduce wave
formation.

Range limits and the depth-related speeds are

adjusted as described in section 12.2.1.1 "PDD
Steps Tab".

HINT
A maximum of 9 ranges may be created.

D948.131.00/10 en 167
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

12.2.1.4 Delay Times Tab

5 6 7

Figure IV-50: Step-By-Step Options dialog - Delay Times tab

1 Detector type list box 5 Button to copy a parameter set

2 Name of the selected parameter set 6 Button to delete parameter sets
3 List of all the parameter sets 7 Graphical representation of the range limits
4 Selection of the range limits and delay times and delay times

168 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

On the Delay Times tab, you can specify the 12.2.2 Continuous Options Dialog
delay times for each detector type (refer to
section 12.2.1.3 "Speeds Tab"). The delay time is The settings in the Continuous Options dialog
the time between the detector moving to the mea- apply to measurements in the Continuous Scans
suring point and the beginning of the measure- measuring mode.
ment.
To optimize measuring tasks with respect to the
This time interval depends on the detector type positions and duration of the measurement, you
and the measuring depth as well as on the speed can select predefined parameter sets or create
set for this depth. For an optimal adjustment, both new parameter sets in the Continuous Options
the speed and the delay times must be adapted. dialog.

Range limits and the delay times are adjusted as The Continuous Options dialog (refer to
described in section 12.2.1.1 "PDD Steps Tab". Figure IV-51) is opened via menu Tools → Con-
tinuous Options.
HINT
These are the settings defined in a parameter set:
A maximum of 9 ranges may be created.
– Measuring range and resolution for depth dose
curves in dependence of the modality and
energy on the PDD Range tab

– Measuring range and resolution for profiles

in dependence of the modality on the Profile
Range tab

– Energy- and depth-dependent scan speeds on

the PDD Speeds and Profile Speeds tabs

D948.131.00/10 en 169
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

WaterTankScan is delivered with the SPEED

parameter set. In combination with the Semi-
flex 3D detector, it should be sufficient for most
measurements.

You are free to create custom parameter sets or

modify existing sets for other detectors or for spe-
cial requirements; you can also delete parameter
sets. In these cases, PWT recommends perform-
ing multiple measurements with different settings
(speeds and measuring steps). To identify the
optimal settings for the parameter sets to create,
open these measurements together in the Data-
Analyze module and compare them (also refer
to chapter XI "'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAna-
lyze) Module").

170 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

12.2.2.1 PDD Range Tab

5 6

7 8 9

Figure IV-51: Continuous Options dialog - PDD Range tab

1 Modality list box 6 Adjustment of the measuring range and reso-

2 Energy list box lution of the depth dose curve
3 Name of the selected parameter set 7 Button to copy a parameter set

4 List of all the parameter sets 8 Button to delete a parameter set

5 Indication of the type of measuring steps 9 Graphical representation of the measuring
range and step intervals

D948.131.00/10 en 171
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

On the PDD Range tab, you specify the measur-

ing range and resolution of depth dose curves for
all modalities and all corresponding energies. The
modalities and energies shown depend on what
was defined in the Radiation unit Library module,
i. e., if a new energy is specified in this module for
any of the radiation units, check the settings in the
Continuous Options dialog, and correct if neces-
sary.

The scanning of the measuring steps is equidis-

tant, i. e., identical over the entire measuring
curve.

Measuring Range and Resolution

You can adjust the measuring range both in the

table in the Ranges pane and in the graphic. The
graphic and table adapt automatically.

You select the desired resolution from the list box

in the Ranges pane.

172 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

12.2.2.2 Profile Range Tab

4 5 6

7 8 9 10

Figure IV-52: Continuous Options dialog - Profile Range tab

1 Modality list box 7 Button to copy a parameter set

2 Name of the selected parameter set 8 Button to delete parameter sets
3 List of all the parameter sets 9 Button to display the measuring steps for any
4 Reference field size field size and measuring depth
5 Indication of the type of measuring steps 10 Graphical representation of the measuring
range and step intervals
6 Adjustment of the measuring range and reso-
lution of the profiles

D948.131.00/10 en 173
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

On the Profile Range tab, you specify the measur- Measuring Range and Resolution
ing range and resolution of profiles for all modal-
ities. You can adjust the measuring range both in the
table in the Ranges pane and in the graphic. The
The scanning of the measuring steps is equidis- graphic and table adapt automatically.
tant, i. e., identical over the entire measuring
curve. When the Symmetrize Ranges check box is
selected, the measuring range of the positive
range is mirrored on the central axis.
Reference Field Size
You select the desired resolution from the list box
Enter the desired reference field size in the Ref- in the Ranges pane.
erence Size input box.

To perform a measurement for another field size,

it is not necessary to change the settings on the
Profile Range tab, as the measuring range will
adapt automatically to the field size during the
measurement. The resolution is maintained for all
field sizes.

The adjusted measuring range always refers to

the depth adjusted on the Linac tab at Fieldsize
defined at. If measurements are performed at
other depths, the measuring range is converted,
using the Intercept theorem. The resolution is
maintained for all depths.

By clicking the Display for Any Size button, you

can display the Profile Steps for Any Size dialog.
In this dialog, you can see the adapted measure-
ment steps as well as the number of points to be
measured for any field size and measuring depth.

For further information, refer to section 12.2.1.2

"Profile Steps Tab".

174 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

12.2.2.3 PDD Speeds Tab

6 7 8

Figure IV-53: Continuous Options dialog - PDD Speeds tab

1 Modality list box 6 Button to copy a parameter set

2 Field for selection of FFF energies 7 Button to delete parameter sets
3 Name of the selected parameter set 8 Graphical representation of the range limits
4 List of all the parameter sets and speeds
5 Adjustment of the range limits and scan
speeds

D948.131.00/10 en 175
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

On the PDD Speeds tab, you can specify energy-

dependent scan speeds for each modality.

To create a parameter set for the FFF energy,

select the Energy FFF check box.

Range limits and the energy-dependent

scan speeds are adjusted as described in
section 12.2.1.1 "PDD Steps Tab".

On the Measurement tab in the Continuous Scans

mode, if you select the Energy dep. option for
the scan speed of depth dose curves, the energy-
dependent scan speeds set in this dialog will be
used.

176 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

12.2.2.4 Profile Speeds Tab

6 7 8

Figure IV-54: Continuous Options dialog - Profile Speeds tab

1 Modality list box 6 Button to copy a parameter set

2 Energy list box 7 Button to delete parameter sets
3 Name of the selected parameter set 8 Graphical representation of the range limits
4 List of all the parameter sets and scan speeds
5 Adjustment of the range limits and scan
speeds

D948.131.00/10 en 177
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

On the Profile Speeds tab, you can specify depth- 12.2.3 Creating a New Parameter Set
dependent scan speeds for each modality and
each energy. You create a new parameter set by copying an
existing set and editing the parameters.
Range limits and the depth-dependent scan
speeds are adjusted as described in • Select a parameter set.
section 12.2.1.1 "PDD Steps Tab".
• Click the Copy button.
On the Measurement tab in the Continuous Scans
mode, if you select the Depth dep. option for the ➔ In the list box, a new parameter set named
scan speed of profiles, the depth-dependent scan Copy of + set name will be displayed.
speeds set in this dialog will be used.
• Edit the set name in the Actual Set box and
adjust the parameters on the different tabs
according to sections 12.2.1.1 "PDD Steps
Tab" to 12.2.1.4 "Delay Times Tab" or accord-
ing to sections 12.2.2.1 "PDD Range Tab" to
12.2.2.4 "Profile Speeds Tab".

12.2.4 Deleting a Parameter Set

• Select the parameter set to delete.

• Click the Delete button.

➔ The parameter set will be removed from the list

box.

HINT
You can delete all parameter sets but one.

178 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

12.3 Working with Task Lists • Select the parameters to be measured by

selecting the appropriate check boxes.

12.3.1 Opening and Creating Task ➔ This will define multiple tasks at once, and
Lists these tasks differ only in one measuring para-
meter (e. g., wedge) (refer to Figure IV-56,
Task lists are created and edited in the Task List Queue 1).
dialog.
• Confirm by clicking the OK button.
The Task List dialog can be opened in two ways:
➔ A bar will be displayed on the right border of
1. By selecting menu Tools → Task List → Open/ the Linac tab and the empty Task List dialog
New: will be opened.

➔ A bar will be displayed on the right border of • Transfer the measuring tasks to the Task List
the Linac tab and the Task List dialog will be dialog by double-clicking the bar.
opened.
– With Open, a stored task list will be opened. You can modify the size and position of the dialog
– With New, an empty task list will be opened. by means of the Windows functions.

2. By selecting the MULTIPLE parameter setting:

On the Linac tab, you can choose the MULTI-

PLE parameter setting for the measuring para-
meters Energy, Applicator, Wedge, Block,
SSD, and Field.

➔ The Multiple Choice dialog will be displayed:

Figure IV-55: Multiple Choice dialog (e. g., for

the wedge filter)

D948.131.00/10 en 179
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

12.3.2 Editing a Task List You will find further options for editing the mea-
suring tasks and the task list in the Task List con-
To add measuring tasks to the list, you have text menu. Open the context menu by right-click-
to adjust the measuring parameters for a sin- ing the name of a measuring task or a measuring
gle measuring task on the Linac tab or select task queue.
the MULTIPLE setting for the desired measuring
parameter (refer to section 12.3.1 "Opening and
Creating Task Lists "). By double-clicking the bar,
the measuring tasks will be transferred to the Task
List dialog and appended to the existing list.

Use drag & drop to insert the measuring tasks in

a specific place in the task list. Click the bar and
drag the cursor to the task after which the new
task is to be inserted. Figure IV-57: Task List context menu

You can group the measuring tasks into measur- • Delete the highlighted measuring task with
ing task groups referred to as Queue. Delete Task or with the Del key.

• Create a new, empty measuring task queue

with New Queue.

• Delete the highlighted measuring task queue

with Delete Queue.

• Rename the highlighted measuring task queue

with Rename Queue. Edit the name. Then,
press the Enter key or click a measuring task
to apply the change.

• Sort the highlighted measuring task queue by

Energy, Wedge/Applicator, or Field Size with
Figure IV-56: Task List dialog with two mea- Sort Queue.
suring task queues

You can change the order of measuring tasks and

of measuring task queues using drag & drop.

180 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

• With Auto Save, you can specify the path 12.3.3 Modifying a Task List
where you want to save the measured curves
automatically after each task. On save, the • To modify a task list, highlight the name of a
default file name will be used (file name: refer measuring task and select the Modify Task List
to chapter III "Basic Functions" - 1 "Defini- context menu.
tions").
➔ The Modify area will open next to the Task List
• Open an existing task list with Open Task List. dialog as shown in Figure IV-58.

• Save the list shown in the Task List dialog with HINT
Save Task List As.
While the Modify area is displayed:

• Modify the task list with Modify Task List. – you cannot open the context menu
For further information, refer to section 12.3.3
– you cannot start a measurement from the
"Modifying a Task List".
Task List dialog.

• After having performed all the changes, you

should save the list. Otherwise, when you start
the measurements directly, the changes will
not be considered. You have two options for
saving:

– Select the Save Task List As context menu.

– Close the Task List dialog and save the

changes.

D948.131.00/10 en 181
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

2 3

4
1
5

8 9

Figure IV-58: Task List dialog with the Modify area

1 Highlighted measuring task in the selected 6 Button to apply the changes to all the mea-
measuring task queue suring task queues
2 Check box for activating or deactivating a 7 Button to reject the changes
modified parameter 8 Button to close the Modify area and save the
3 List of the modified parameters modified task list
4 Button to apply the changes to the high- 9 Button to close the Modify area and reject all
lighted measuring task applied changes
5 Button to apply the changes to the selected
measuring task queue

182 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

• Select the measuring task to change by click- • Click one of the following buttons to apply the
ing this task. changes:

– Selected Task:
➔ The Linac and Measurement tabs show the
applies the changes to the highlighted mea-
settings of the selected measuring task.
suring task
• Change the parameters as needed. – Selected Queue:
applies the changes to the selected mea-
HINT suring task queue
In this mode, the MULTIPLE parameter cannot – All Queues:
be selected. applies the changes to all the measuring
task queues
HINT
• Or, click the Skip button to reject the changes.
If you want to display a message before the
measurement starts, you can enter the com- ➔ The list of the modified parameters will be
mand "Msg:" followed by the text of the mes- emptied and the buttons for applying the
sage in the comment field on the Linac or Mea- changes will be disabled.
surement tab. For further information, refer to
section 6.1 "Linac Tab". • Save the modified task list by clicking the Save
As button.
• Transfer the modified parameters to the Task
List dialog by double-clicking the bar. • In the standard Save As dialog, enter a file
name and the directory. You can overwrite the
➔ The modified parameters will be listed in the existing task list or create a new task list.
Modified area and activated .

• If you do not want to apply the change to a

parameter, you can deactivate the parameter
concerned .

D948.131.00/10 en 183
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

HINT 12.3.4 Example of a Task List

Observe the following conditions for the Example of the measurement of depth dose
changes: curves for several field sizes
– You can only change the orientation of the
measuring system and the radiation unit • On the Measurement tab, select the PDD and
(Linac tab) independently of other parame- Profiles measuring program and select only
ters. These changes will always be applied the PDD check box.
to all the measuring task queues.
• Select the MULTIPLE entry from the Field
– You cannot change the measuring program. combo box on the Linac tab. In the Multiple
– The parameters on the Measurement tab Choice dialog, clear all options that are not
(e. g., measuring mode, curve type, etc.) required and confirm with OK.
will, in general, only be changed for the
• Then, double-click the bar on the Linac tab.
measuring tasks offering that setting.

➔ The measuring task queue will be added to the

task list (refer to Figure IV-59).

Figure IV-59: Task List for the measurement

of the depth dose curves for
several field sizes

184 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

• Right-click the name of the measuring task 12.3.5 Notes on the Measurement
queue and select the target directory for the Workflow with a Task List
automatic storage of the measured curves of
this measuring task queue. • In the Task List dialog, click the measuring task
to start (highlighted blue).
• Create further measuring task queues as
described above. • Click the Start button.

• For additional use of the task list, you can save ➔ The individual measuring tasks will be com-
it with the Save Task List As function of the pleted automatically one after other until the
context menu. end of the queue.

➔ If any of the parameters (Energy, Modality,

Wedge, Block, Field size, Gantry, Collimator,
or SSD) changes between measuring tasks,
a message will be displayed prompting you to
change the corresponding setting at the radia-
tion unit.
The next measurement starts after acknowl-
edgment of the message.
By clicking the Abort button, you will cancel the
measurement with a task list.

HINT
Before starting the first measurement of the
task list, check that the path for automatic sav-
ing of the measurements is set correctly.

HINT
The settings in the Continuous Options and
Step-By-Step Options dialogs are not associ-
ated with the measuring tasks of the task list.
When starting a measurement, the currently
adjusted parameter set is used.

During a measurement that is part of a task

list, you can open the Continuous Options or
Step-By-Step Options dialog to adapt the para-
meters to the measurement. This can be done
whenever the measurement is interrupted.

D948.131.00/10 en 185
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

12.3.6 Measurement of Basic Data Requirement:

using a Predefined Task List
In the Radiation unit Library module, you have
CAUTION performed the appropriate settings for the radia-
tion unit to check. PTW recommends copying an
Using the predefined task lists without checking
existing radiation unit and adapting it as needed.
its correctness and completeness.
For further information, refer to chapter VII "'Radi-
Erroneous Measurements! ation unit Library' Module".
The predefined task lists have been carefully
Primarily, verify that the settings for the following
compiled according to the manuals of the radi-
parameters are correct:
ation treatment planning systems (RTPS) valid
at the time of creation. The user is fully respon- – source isocenter distance (SID)
sible for checking the correctness of the task – radiation qualities, in particular energy and
lists or for adapting them to the actual require- nominal depth of the maximum dose
ments. PTW cannot be held liable for the valid-
ity of the task lists. – wedges

– axis designations and directions

You can find predefined task lists for different
radiation treatment planning systems. These tem-
plates are located in the following directory: Creating a Task List
'C:\Program Files (x86)\PTW\MEPHYSTO mcc\
• Select menu Tools → Task List → Open to
Data\Samples\WaterTankScans'.
open the desired predefined task list.
In order to quickly create custom task lists, PTW
• Save the task list with a new name, using the
recommends selecting a suitable predefined task
Save Task List As context menu.
list, saving it with a new name, and adapting it to
the actual requirements.

186 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

• Change the required parameters, using the • Perform further adjustments according to
Modify Task List context menu, according to section 12.3.2 "Editing a Task List" .
section 12.3.3 "Modifying a Task List".
– Delete measuring tasks that are not
– Radiation unit and orientation of the water needed.
phantom for all measuring tasks (All
– Change the order of the measuring tasks or
Queues button)
the measuring task queues.
– Energies for all measuring tasks (All
– Insert new measuring tasks.
Queues button)

– Further parameters, such as measur- • Save the changes with the Save As button.
ing detector, measuring time, measuring
depths, field sizes, SSD, etc. for an indi- • Define the path for the automatic saving of the
vidual measuring task (Selected Task but- measurements, using the Auto Save context
ton), for a measuring task queue (Selected menu.
Queue button), or for all measuring tasks
(All Queues button)
Performing a Measurement

HINT • Define the settings for measuring positions

When changing the energy, check that the and duration in the Continuous Options or
measuring programs use the correct measur- Step-By-Step Options dialog. For further infor-
ing depths. mation, refer to section 12.2 "Setting Up Para-
meter Sets".
The PDD and Profiles measuring program nor-
mally uses the nominal depth of the maximum Select menu Tools → Task List → Open to
•
dose dmax. When you change the energy in the open the task list.
task list, the appropriate value of dmax will be
automatically copied from the Radiation unit • Start the measurement of the basic data with
Library module. the first or any other measuring task.
In case of measuring depths with a fixed ref-
erence to dmax (e. g., dmax + 5 mm) or in case
Analyzing Measuring Data
of another measuring program, such as Plane
parallel to central beam, the measuring depths • By loading or copying the measuring data to
may have to be corrected manually. the DataAnalyze module, you can analyze or
edit them, even while another measurement
is in progress. For further information, refer to
chapter XI "'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAn-
alyze) Module".

D948.131.00/10 en 187
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

12.4 Defining the 12.4.1 Presets Tab

Measurement Options
In the Measurement Options dialog, you can
define basic settings.

Select menu Tools → Measurement Options to

open the Measurement Options dialog.

With the Apply button, you apply the changes and

adapt the display in the background without clos-
ing the dialog.

Figure IV-60: Measurement Options dialog -

Presets tab

Stop at Zero

In this pane, enter the minimum dose rate values

where the measurement is to be stopped. When
the entered value is 0 Gy/min, the measurement
will never stop.

The minimum dose rate values are separately

adjustable for electrons and other modalities.

Protons and Heavy Ions

In this pane, you can define whether the measur-

ing modes for spill measurements shall be dis-
played on the main screen on the Measurement
tab (refer to Figure IV-6).

188 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

12.4.2 Communication Tab HINT

To release the interface to the
control unit for use with other
programs, click the Clear button
(also refer to section 5.9 "Delet-
ing Measuring Data").

When using measuring systems without a water

pump, you can switch functions requiring a water
pump on and off on the Communication tab.

• If your measuring system has no water pump,

select the Water pump not available check
box.

Figure IV-61: Measurement Options dialog - ➔ The following functions will not be available in
Communication tab this case:

– TPR measurement, refer to section 7.3

The Communication tab shows the set interface "TPR Measurement"
to the control unit.
– Automatic water refill after verification of
• To select another interface or to change the the water level
settings, click the … button.

➔ The Connection Control Center dialog will

be displayed. For further information on data
transfer settings, please refer to section 12.5
"Settings for Data Transfer".

D948.131.00/10 en 189
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

12.4.3 Advanced Tab – Warn about missing Zero Adjustment

A warning will be displayed if the zero adjust-
ment has not been performed.

– Warn about missing Check Water Level mea-

surement
The water level in the PMMA tank of the
BEAMSCAN measuring system should be
checked regularly with the Check water level
function.
An appropriate warning will be displayed when
a measurement is started and the last water
level check is older than two hours.

– Show current detector position

When this check box is selected, the cur-
rent position of the measuring detector will be
displayed on the Measurement tab (refer to
section 6.2 "Measurement Tab") in pane (7).
Figure IV-62: Measurement Options dialog -
When this check box is cleared, the esti-
Advanced tab
mated total duration of the measurement will
be displayed on the Measurement tab (refer to
A number of options can be selected and dese-
section 6.2 "Measurement Tab") in pane (7).
lected on this tab:
This check box is cleared by default.
– Demo Mode
– Activate search dose max. for output factors
In demo mode, there will be no communica-
When this check box is selected, the func-
tion with the connected devices. The mea-
tion for determining the maximum dose will be
surement will be simulated. However, the dis-
available in the Output factors measuring pro-
played measuring positions correspond to the
gram.
measuring positions of a true measurement.

– Warn about controller limited profile length

A warning will be displayed if the curve length
to measure is longer than the maximum curve
length that can be measured. The maximum
curve length that can be measured depends
on the selected measuring system and the
adjusted limits.
If you accept the selected settings, a curve
with the maximum possible length will be mea-
sured.

190 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

– Show analysis result online 12.4.4 Predefined Depths Tab

When this check box is selected, a window
showing the analysis according to the last
selected protocol will be displayed automati-
cally on completion of each measurement. It
is not necessary to open the Analyze edit win-
dow in this case.
In the default settings, this window provides a
menu bar and a toolbar with the same func-
tions as in the Analyze edit window (refer to
chapter XI "'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAn-
alyze) Module" - 8 "Analyzing Curves"). By
selecting the Without menu check box, the
menu bar and the toolbar can be removed from
the display.

Figure IV-63: Measurement Options dialog -

Predefined Depths tab

PDD and Profiles

In the PDD and Profiles measuring program (refer

to section 6.7.1 "PDD and Profiles Measuring Pro-
gram"), you can use the Depths [mm] combo box
to define measuring depths Rxx that correspond
to the percentage dose values xx of the measured
depth dose curve (e. g., R100 for the depth of the
100% dose). On the Predefined Depths tab, you
define the selectable Rxx values in the PDD and
Profiles pane. The actual measuring depths will
be determined by means of the measured depth
dose curve.

D948.131.00/10 en 191
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

By clearing the Replace Rxx by [mm] after mea- Editing the Tables
surement check box, you choose to preserve the
depths Rxx displayed in the PDD and Profiles – If there are no data in the table, a blank row is
measuring program (refer to section 6.7.1 "PDD shown that can be edited.
and Profiles Measuring Program") in the Depths – Rows can be deleted with the Del key.
[mm] combo box after the measurement.
By selecting the Replace Rxx by [mm] after mea- – New rows can be added with the Ins key. When
surement check box, you choose to replace the all the rows have been deleted, you have to
depths Rxx by the actual measuring depths after click a column header before new rows can be
the measurement. With this option, it will not be added. Blank rows will be deleted when you
necessary to measure and calculate the measur- exit the table.
ing depths again for the subsequent measure-
ments.

In case of electron radiation, the measured ion

dose curve will be converted internally into an
energy dose curve in order to determine the actual
measuring depth with respect to the depth Rxx.
For this, select the conversion protocol from the
Protocol for Electrons list box. The measured ion
dose curve will be preserved.

Isodose with plane

In this pane, you can define the measuring depths

for the profiles, which are required for measur-
ing isodose distributions with the Plane paral-
lel to central beam measuring program (refer to
section 6.7.2 "Plane parallel to central beam Mea-
suring Program").

These measuring depths can be set separately for

each radiation quality.

When you add a new radiation quality in the Radi-

ation unit Library module, a new isodose depth
table will be created automatically on this tab.
Check whether the entered depths are correct.

192 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

12.5 Settings for Data Transfer

Data can be transferred to a BEAMSCAN measur-
ing system by the following communication chan-
nels:

– WLAN connection
– LAN direct connection

The WLAN connection and the LAN direct con-

nection will be referred to as "LAN connection" in
the following sections.

12.5.1 Connection Control Center

dialog

The current data transfer settings are displayed

in menu Tools → Measurement Options on the
Communication tab.

• To select the communication path for data

transfer and to set the parameters required in
each case, click the … button.

➔ The Connection Control Center dialog will be

displayed:

Figure IV-64: Connection Control Center dialog

D948.131.00/10 en 193
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

12.5.2 Searching for Existing • Click the BEAMSCAN measuring system.

Connections
• Click OK to accept the settings.
The easiest way to define data transfer settings is With Cancel, you reject the settings.
to search for existing connections with the Search
function. ➔ The settings of the LAN connection to the
BEAMSCAN measuring system are displayed
• In the Connection Control Center dialog, click in the Connection Control Center dialog.
the Search button.
For further information on troubleshooting
➔ The BEAMSCAN Devices dialog will be concerning the Search function, refer to
displayed. The BEAMSCAN Devices dialog section 12.5.4.6 "Troubleshooting - LAN Connec-
shows the BEAMSCAN measuring system tion".
connected via a LAN connection (refer to
Figure IV-65).

• As an alternative, it is possible to manually

adjust the data transfer parameters according
to sections 12.5.4.3 "Creating a New LAN Con-
nection" and 12.5.4.4 "Editing a LAN Connec-
tion".

Figure IV-65: BEAMSCAN Devices dialog

194 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

12.5.3 Selecting a Connection 12.5.4.2 Connecting via a LAN Direct

Connection
• In the Connection Control Center dialog, select
the desired connection. • Connect the device directly to the PC via a net-
work cable.
• Check the connection by clicking the Check For the connection, you can use the internal
button. network interface card of the PC or a second
network interface card.
• Confirm by clicking the OK button.
• Switch on the device.
➔ The connection is selected and displayed in
the Measurement Options dialog on the Com- ➔ When a LAN direct connection is used, the IP
munication tab. address of the BEAMSCAN measuring system
is 169.254.1.1.

12.5.4 LAN Connection • The device and the PC have to be in the same
subnet, i.e., their IP addresses have to be in
For detailed information on connecting the
the same range.
BEAMSCAN measuring system, please refer to
For this, either the network interface card of
the user manual of the BEAMSCAN measuring
the PC will assign itself an IP address in the
system.
range 169.254.x.x via AutoIP or you have to
configure the IP address of the network inter-
12.5.4.1 Connection via WLAN Connection face card manually.

When a WLAN connection is used, the

BEAMSCAN measuring system communicates
with the access point without any connection
cables.

The access point and the PC with the

BEAMSCAN software are in a separate network.

When a WLAN connection is used, the IP

address of the BEAMSCAN measuring system is
192.168.15.100.

D948.131.00/10 en 195
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

12.5.4.3 Creating a New LAN Connection 12.5.4.4 Editing a LAN Connection

• In the Connection Control Center dialog, click • In the Connection Control Center dialog, click
the New button. the connection to edit.

➔ The New Connection dialog will be displayed: • Click the Edit button.

➔ The Edit Connection dialog will be displayed:

Figure IV-66: New Connection dialog for LAN

connection
Figure IV-67: Edit Connection dialog for LAN
• Set the required parameters for the connec- connection
tion:
• Set the required parameters for the connection
Type: LAN
according to section 12.5.4.3 "Creating a New
Name: user-defined name of the con-
LAN Connection".
nection
IP_Address: device address in the network • Confirm the settings with OK.
IP_Port: fixed IP port 8123
➔ The Connection Control Center dialog will dis-
or play the connection with the edited settings.

• Search for an existing LAN connection

using the Search function as described in 12.5.4.5 Deleting a LAN Connection
section 12.5.2 "Searching for Existing Connec-
tions". • In the Connection Control Center dialog, click
the connection to delete.
• Check the connection by clicking the Check
button. • Click the Delete button.

• Confirm the settings with OK. ➔ After confirmation of the prompt, the connec-
tion will be deleted.
➔ The Connection Control Center dialog will dis-
play the new LAN connection.

196 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
BEAMSCAN Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

12.5.4.6 Troubleshooting - LAN 3. In case of a LAN direct connection, the IP

Connection addresses of the device and PC are not in the
same subnet (range 169.254.x.x).
The device is connected via a LAN connection, You have to configure the network interface
but it is not detected with the Search function: card of the PC manually.

1. The Windows firewall prevents the search for

the device (broadcast). In this case, an appro-
priate message will be displayed.
Unlock the Windows firewall for the network
requests of the BEAMSCAN software:

• Select the category view.

• Select Start → Control Panel → System
and Security → Windows Firewall.

• Select Turn Windows Firewall on or off.

• Switch the Windows firewall off.

HINT
Switching off the Windows firewall is only valid
for this session. After restarting the PC and
starting a new search with the Search func-
tion, you have to switch off the Windows fire-
wall again.

2. A communication problem exists after the

connection to the device (WLAN/LAN) was
changed or the device settings were config-
ured.
Restart the BEAMSCAN measuring system.

D948.131.00/10 en 197
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - General Information on WaterTankScans

V 'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for

the BEAMSCAN MR Measuring System

1 General Information on WaterTankScans

CAUTION WaterTankScans enables you to perform single

measuring tasks and series of measuring tasks
Measurement for monitor calibration.
(e. g., identical measuring task with different field
Incorrect Operation! sizes or energies). Task lists can be created for
this purpose (refer to section 9.3 "Working with
The measuring module WaterTankScans is
Task Lists").
no absolute dosemeter for monitor calibration
according to EN 60731 (IEC 60731).

WaterTankScans is a module of the BEAMSCAN

software and it is used for single-detector mea-
surements as well as for the graphical represen-
tation, evaluation, and storage of measuring data.

WaterTankScans can be used with the following

measuring systems:

– BEAMSCAN MR measuring system

– BEAMSCAN measuring system

For further information, refer to chapter IV
"'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Mod-
ule for the BEAMSCAN Measuring System".

– MP3, MP3-M/S/XS/T/P, MP2, MP1, MP1-S

For further information, refer to chapter VI
"'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Mod-
ule for the MP3, MP2, and MP1 Measuring
Systems".

198 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN MR Measuring System - Quick Start (Workflow)

2 Starting 3 Quick Start (Workflow)

WaterTankScans
Requirements:
WaterTankScans is started in MEPHYSTO Navi-
The complete measuring system is installed and
gator (also refer to chapter II "MEPHYSTO Navi-
all the components are connected. All the network
gator").
settings have been performed.
• In the Applications area, select the Relative
Dosimetry application group. Basic settings before starting the first
measurement:
• Select the desired measuring system and click
the appropriate measuring module. Edit the detector library via MEPHYSTO Navi-
•
gator → Toolbox area → Configuration appli-
➔ The WaterTankScans main screen will be dis-
cation group → Detector Library (refer to
played.
chapter VIII "'Detector Library' Module")

• Create radiation units via MEPHYSTO Naviga-

tor → Toolbox area → Configuration applica-
tion group → Radiation unit Library (refer to
chapter VII "'Radiation unit Library' Module")

• Start WaterTankScans

• Define the type of MRT radiation ther-

apy system on the Communication tab via
menu Tools → Measurement Options (refer
to section 9.4 "Defining the Measurement
Options")

• Set communication parameters on the Com-

munication tab via menu Tools → Measure-
ment Options (refer to section 9.4 "Defining the
Measurement Options")

• Create parameter sets in the Step-By-Step

Options dialog via menu Tools → Step-By-
Step Options (refer to section 9.2 "Setting Up
Parameter Sets")

• Perform settings for the graphical represen-

tation via menu Tools → Options (refer to
chapter III "Basic Functions")

D948.131.00/10 en 199
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN MR Measuring System - Quick Start (Workflow)

Zero adjustment: • Select parameter set:

menu Tools → Step-By-Step Options
• Perform zero adjustment:
Zero button • Perform a measurement:
– Start measurement:
Auto Setup: Start button (or F5)

– Pause measurement:
• Perform Auto Setup adjustments: Pause button (or F6)
Auto Setup, Linac, and Measurement tabs
– Resume measurement:
• Start Auto Setup: Resume button (or F7)
Start button – Select new scale for measurement graphic:
Graphics → Normalize Graphics (or F8)
• Switch off Auto Setup mode:
Auto Setup button • Save measuring data:
Save button

Measurements:
Evaluations:
• Perform settings for the radiation unit:
Linac tab • Analyze measuring data:
– Select radiation unit Analyze button
→ Name
• Modify measuring data:
– Define settings for current measuring task Process button
→ Modality, Energy, Orientation, etc.

• Perform settings for measurement:

Measurement tab • Exit WaterTankScans
– Set electrometer measuring ranges:
→ click electrometer picture

– Adjust corrections for detectors:

→ click detector picture

– Select measuring mode

– Select measuring program

200 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN MR Measuring System - Main Screen

4 Main Screen

Figure V-1: WaterTankScans main screen

1 Tabs for measurement configuration or for Auto Setup

2 Graphics window

D948.131.00/10 en 201
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN MR Measuring System - Main Screen

4.1 Explanation of the Display only profiles

Toolbar Icons
Open file Display only depth dose curves

Save data Display profiles and depth dose

curves

Toggle between Auto Setup mode Display 2D isodoses

and measuring mode

Delete displayed curves and share Display 3D isodoses

interface for control unit

Perform zero adjustment Show/hide discrete crosshairs

Start measurement (or press F5) Show/hide continuous crosshairs

Pause measurement (or press F6) Enlarge a section of the graphics

window

Resume measurement (or press Reset the graphics window to its

F7) standard size

Display Analyze edit window (refer Display the online help

to chapter XI "'Scanned Data
Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module")

Display Process edit window (refer The button functions can also be accessed from
to chapter XI "'Scanned Data the menus.
Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module")
For a more detailed description of the button func-
tions and menus, which are used in all modules
of the BEAMSCAN software, refer to chapter III
"Basic Functions".

202 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5 Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.1 Preparing the • Set up the measuring system (e. g., electrom-
eter) as required.
Measurement
• Align your measuring system in the radiation
CAUTION field. Adjust the source surface distance.
Electronic components near the radiation field.

Equipment Damage! Erroneous Measure- CAUTION

ments! Incorrect positioning of the reference detector.
Electronic components must never be placed Erroneous Measurements!
in the radiation field!
Check that the entire sensitive volume of the
Please also refer to the information given in the reference detector is within the useful beam.
corresponding user manuals.
• Place the detectors in the correct positions.
Before you can perform measurements with
WaterTankScans, set up the measuring system • Via the Detector Library module, adjust the
as follows: detector data in the detector library (refer to
section VIII "'Detector Library' Module").
• Install the measuring system and all its com-
ponents and put it into service. • In the Radiation unit Library module, create all
necessary radiation units (refer to chapter VII
• Make sure that all the required cables are con- "'Radiation unit Library' Module").
nected.
• Start WaterTankScans.
• Perform all the required network settings.
• In menu Tools → Measurement Options on the
HINT Communication tab, define the communication
settings (also refer to section 9.4 "Defining the
Closely follow the instructions given in the user
Measurement Options").
manuals of all the components of your measur-
ing system.

D948.131.00/10 en 203
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

• In menu Tools → Step-By-Step Options, cre- 5.2 Zero Adjustment

ate all the required parameter sets and select
the parameter set needed for the measure- CAUTION
ment (refer to section 9.2 "Setting Up Parame-
Zero adjustment with radiation switched on.
ter Sets").
Erroneous Measurements!
• In menu Tools → Options, perform the set-
Ensure that the zero adjustment is performed
tings for the graphical representation (refer to
without radiation.
chapter III "Basic Functions").

• On the touch panel of the BEAMSCAN MR After each restart of the system, you should per-
measuring system, enable the remote access form a zero adjustment before the first measure-
function (Remote Access, refer to the ment.
BEAMSCAN MR Hardware user manual).
• For this, click the Zero but-
ton or select menu Measure-
5.1.1 Preparing the Remote Access ment → Zero Electrometer.
Software
➔ The zero adjustment will be performed and an
For each firmware version of the BEAMSCAN appropriate message will be displayed.
MR measuring system, the MEPHYSTO Naviga-
tor provides a version of the Remote Access soft- If you start a measurement and you have not per-
ware. The version number of the Remote Access formed a zero adjustment before, an appropriate
software corresponds to the version number of the message will be displayed. By selecting menu
firmware. Tools → Measurement Options on the Advanced
tab, the display of the message can be enabled
To view only the required version of the Remote or disabled.
Access software in the MEPHYSTO Naviga-
tor, PTW recommends hiding all other ver-
sions. For further information, refer to chapter II
"MEPHYSTO Navigator" - 7 "Configuration
Mode".

204 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.3 Auto Setup with Elekta HINT

Systems Auto Setup is typically performed with a small-
volume ionization chamber (e. g., Semiflex 3D
Upon starting WaterTankScans, the main screen type 31021). Different detectors, however, are
will automatically be displayed in the Auto Setup used for the different measuring tasks. There-
mode. fore, the settings in the Auto Setup mode and
in the measuring mode are saved in separate
• The Auto Setup mode can be
data sets, and they are available for the next
switched on and off by click-
Auto Setup or for the next measurement.
ing the Auto Setup button or by
selecting menu Tools → Auto
Setup.

These are the tabs on the Auto Setup mode

screen:

– Auto Setup tab

for adjusting and viewing the Auto Setup func-
tions according to section 5.3.1 "Auto Setup
Tab"

– Linac tab
for adjusting the parameters of the radiation
unit
For more information on this tab, refer to
section 6.1 "Linac Tab".

– Measurement tab
for selection of the measurement components
and for defining the measurement parameters
For more information on this tab, refer to
section 6.2 "Measurement Tab".

D948.131.00/10 en 205
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.3.1 Auto Setup Tab

3
1

2
4

Figure V-2: Auto Setup tab

206 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

These are the elements of the Auto Setup tab: 5.3.2.1 Auto Field Alignment

1 Indication of the currently set field size and HINT

measuring depth
The Auto Field Alignment function can only
2 Selection, status, and correction values for the be performed with rectangular radiation fields.
Auto Field Alignment function Otherwise, the function cannot be used. PTW
recommends a square radiation field.
3 Button to open the Adjust Parameters dialog
for adjustment of the field size and measuring With this function, the rotation of the coordinate
depth system with respect to the radiation field is deter-
mined.
4 Area for indication of the correction values
Since the off-axis profiles are measured at 80%
5 Status of the field size, the maximum rotation that will be
corrected is limited at < |±5°|.
no indica- function not performed or
tion failed WaterTankScans measures two off-axis profiles
function successfully per- on the A-axis for the set field size and measur-
formed ing depth. The coordinates of the 50% dose are
determined for both profiles. The rotation angle
is calculated from these coordinates. The rota-
5.3.2 Auto Setup Functions tion angle is displayed and stored in the control
unit. During the measurement, the graphics win-
When using BEAMSCAN MR measuring systems dow displays the measuring data of the two pro-
for Elekta systems, only the Auto Field Align- files.
ment function can be performed in the Auto Setup
mode. All other functions are only available for the The accuracy of the displayed rotation angle is
BEAMSCAN measuring system. < 0.2°.

The radiation must be switched on for this mea-

surement.

Start the function by clicking the Start button.

The measurement can be suspended by clicking

the Pause button and resumed by clicking the
Resume button.

D948.131.00/10 en 207
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.3.3 Performing Auto Setup ➔ Once an Auto Setup function has been started,
a progress bar is displayed below the graphic.
WARNING
➔ Upon completion of the Auto Setup
Improper handling.
function, the status indication will be
Bodily Injury! updated, i. e., if the function was suc-
cessful, the green check mark will be
For controlling the water phantom from the PC
displayed.
in the control room: Check that no other oper-
ator is present in the treatment room.
➔ If adjustments must be performed at the radi-
ation unit or when the radiation must be switch
HINT on, appropriate messages will be displayed
The Auto Field Alignment function can be per- before the Auto Setup function starts.
formed only once. To check the success of the
rotation, proceed as follows: • Confirm these messages upon completion of
the adjustments and when the radiation unit
– Switch off the Auto Setup Mode. has stabilized.
– Measure two off-axis profiles that are sym-
metrical to the central axis.
• When all desired Auto Setup
– Check that the profiles are superimposed. functions have been completed,
switch off the Auto Setup mode
• On the Auto Setup tab, adjust the measuring by clicking the Auto Setup
parameters for the Auto Setup measurements. button or by selecting menu
For this, click the Edit button and adjust the Tools → Auto Setup.
field size and measuring depth in the Adjust
Parameters dialog. ➔ WaterTankScans is now ready to perform
measurements.
• On the Linac and Measurement tabs, adjust
the remaining measuring parameters for the
Auto Setup measurements (also refer to
section 6 "Setting Up the Measuring Parame-
ters").

• To start Auto Setup, click the Start button (or

press the F5 key) or select menu Measure-
ment → Start → from Beginning.

208 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.4 Auto Setup with ViewRay HINT

Systems Auto Setup is typically performed with a small-
volume ionization chamber (e. g., Semiflex 3D
Upon starting WaterTankScans, the main screen type 31021). Different detectors, however, are
will automatically be displayed in the Auto Setup used for the different measuring tasks. There-
mode. fore, the settings in the Auto Setup mode and
in the measuring mode are saved in separate
• The Auto Setup mode can be
data sets, and they are available for the next
switched on and off by click-
Auto Setup or for the next measurement.
ing the Auto Setup button or by
selecting menu Tools → Auto
Setup.

These are the tabs on the Auto Setup mode

screen:

– Auto Setup tab

for adjusting and viewing the Auto Setup func-
tions according to section 5.4.1 "Auto Setup
Tab"

– Linac tab
for adjusting the parameters of the radiation
unit
For more information on this tab, refer to
section 6.1 "Linac Tab".

– Measurement tab
for selection of the measurement components
and for defining the measurement parameters
For more information on this tab, refer to
section 6.2 "Measurement Tab".

D948.131.00/10 en 209
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.4.1 Auto Setup Tab

Figure V-3: Auto Setup tab

210 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

These are the elements of the Auto Setup tab: 5.4.2 Auto Setup Functions

1 Selection, status, and correction values for the The following functions can be performed in the
Beam Center Adjustment function Auto Setup mode:

2 Selection, status, and correction values for the

Auto Field Alignment function 5.4.2.1 Beam Center Adjustment

3 Area for indication of the correction values With this function, the offset of the coordinate sys-
tem with respect to the isocenter of the radiation
4 Status unit is determined.

no indica- function not performed or

tion failed 5.4.2.2 Auto Field Alignment
function successfully per-
formed HINT
The Auto Field Alignment function can only
be performed with rectangular radiation fields.
Otherwise, the function cannot be used. PTW
recommends a square radiation field.

With this function, the rotation of the coordinate

system with respect to the radiation field is deter-
mined.

Since the off-axis profiles are measured at 80%

of the field size, the maximum rotation that will be
corrected is limited at < |±5°|.

5.4.3 Performing Auto Setup

WARNING
Improper handling.

Bodily Injury!

For controlling the water phantom from the PC

in the control room: Check that no other oper-
ator is present in the treatment room.

D948.131.00/10 en 211
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

HINT Beam Center Adjustment

The Beam Center Adjustment and Auto Field WaterTankScans determines the center of the set
Alignment functions can only be performed field size by measuring an inplane and a cross-
once. For instructions on how to verify the suc- plane profile at the adjusted measuring depth. The
cess of the alignment and rotation operations, deviation in each axis direction results from the
refer to the user manual of the BEAMSCAN MR 50% dose values of the respective profile.
water phantom.
The accuracy of the displayed deviations is
< 0.6 mm.

Requirements: • Perform the following settings at the radiation

unit:
– The measuring detectors (and the reference
detector, if used) have been mounted and acti- – Gantry position 0°
vated. – SSD of 90 cm

– The PMMA tank has been filled with water up – Field size of 5 cm x 5 cm
to 260 mm.
• Turn on the radiation and wait until the radia-
– The zero point has been set to the center of tion unit has stabilized.
the tank.
• Click the Start button (or press the F5 key)
– The BEAMSCAN MR measuring system has or select menu Measurement → Start → from
been positioned at the center of the MR bore. Beginning.

– Leveling has been performed. ➔ The first measurements will be performed.

For further detailed information, please refer to the ➔ The graphics window will display the measur-
BEAMSCAN MR Hardware user manual. ing data of the two profiles.

➔ Upon completion of the measure-

General Settings ments, the status indication will be
updated, i. e., if the measurements
• On the Linac and Measurement tabs, adjust were successful, the green check
the measuring parameters for the Auto Setup mark will be displayed.
measurements (also refer to section 6 "Setting
Up the Measuring Parameters"). • Click the Next button.

• Select the desired Auto Setup functions by • At the radiation unit, set the gantry position to
selecting the appropriate check boxes. 270°.

• Click the Start button (or press the F5 key)

or select menu Measurement → Start → from
Beginning.

212 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

➔ The second measurements will be performed. Auto Field Alignment

➔ The graphics window will display the measur- WaterTankScans measures two off-axis profiles
ing data of the two profiles. on the A-axis for the set field size and measur-
ing depth. The coordinates of the 50% dose are
➔ Upon completion of the measure- determined for both profiles. The rotation angle is
ments, the status indication will be calculated from these coordinates.
updated, i. e., if the measurements
were successful, the green check The accuracy of the displayed rotation angle is
mark will be displayed. < 0.2°.

• Click the Next button. • Perform the following settings at the radiation
unit:
➔ The result of the Beam Center Adjustment
– Gantry position 0°
function will be displayed.
– SSD of 90 cm
Example:
– Field size of 10 cm x 10 cm

• Turn on the radiation and wait until the radia-

tion unit has stabilized.

• Click the Start button (or press the F5 key)

or select menu Measurement → Start → from
Beginning.

➔ The measurements will be performed.

➔ The graphics window will display the measur-

ing data of the two profiles.

• Click the Finish button. ➔ Upon completion of the measure-

ments, the status indication will be
➔ The Beam Center Adjustment is finished. updated, i. e., if the measurements
were successful, the green check
➔ The determined correction values will be trans- mark will be displayed.
ferred to the control unit of the BEAMSCAN
MR measuring system. ➔ The result of the Auto Field Alignment function
will be displayed and transferred to the control
unit of the BEAMSCAN MR measuring system.

D948.131.00/10 en 213
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

Pausing and Resuming a Measurement 5.5 Performing the

All measurements can be suspended by clicking
Measurement
the Pause button and resumed by clicking the
Resume button. WARNING
Improper handling.

Bodily Injury!
Terminating the Auto Setup mode
For controlling the water phantom from the PC
• When all desired functions have in the control room: Check that no other oper-
been completed, switch off the ator is present in the treatment room.
Auto Setup mode by clicking the
Auto Setup button or by select-
ing menu Tools → Auto Setup. Requirements:

➔ WaterTankScans is now ready to perform – The Auto Setup functions Beam Center Adjust-
measurements. ment and Auto Field Alignment should have
been performed according to section 5.3 "Auto
Setup with Elekta Systems" or section 5.4
"Auto Setup with ViewRay Systems". Other-
wise, an appropriate message will be dis-
played.

– The tank has been completely aligned with

the BEAMSCAN MR Remote Access software
(refer to the user manual of the BEAMSCAN
MR water phantom).

214 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.5.1 Setting parameters for the ➔ The scales of the measuring axes will be
measurement adjusted automatically. In addition, the vertical
scale of the graphic can be adjusted with the
• Configure all the measurement parameters on F8 key during the measurement.
the Linac tab according to section 6.1 "Linac
Tab". HINT
Configure all the measurement parameters on If the curves are always slightly too high,
•
the Measurement tab according to section 6.2 you can go to the Measurement tab (refer to
"Measurement Tab". section 6.2 "Measurement Tab") and select a
higher dose rate to optimize the scaling.

5.5.2 Starting the Measurement ➔ The measurement will start with the depth
dose curve, and then the module will switch
CAUTION automatically to the profile measurement.
Measurements with false measuring parame-
➔ A color will be assigned to each curve in the
ters.
graphic.
Erroneous Measurements!
➔ Depending on the selected display format, the
If you start a new measurement after loading
depth dose curve and/or all the profiles will be
old measuring data, the parameters of the old
displayed at the end of the measurement.
measurement will be applied to the new one.
The parameters may be different from the para-
➔ In the Points measuring program (refer to
meters currently stored in the Radiation unit
section 6.6.5 "Points Measuring Program"),
Library module.
only the list of measured values will be dis-
played.
• To start the measurement, click the Start but-
ton (or press the F5 key) or select menu Mea-
surement → Start → from Beginning.

➔ The measurements defined in the measuring

task will be completed.

D948.131.00/10 en 215
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.5.3 Stopping the Measurement • To resume a measurement from a particular

curve, first select the desired curve, and then
There are different ways of pausing the measure- select menu Measurement → Start → from
ment: Selected Curve.

• To stop the measurement immediately, click ➔ The measurement will continue from the first
the Pause button (or press the F6 key) or measuring point of the selected curve.
select menu Measurement → Stop → imme-
diately. or

• To stop the measurement after the cur- • To resume a measurement from a particular
rently measured curve, select menu Measure- measuring point, first mark the desired mea-
ment → Stop → after Curve. suring point with the discrete crosshairs. Then
select menu Measurement → Start → from
Crosshairs.
5.5.4 Resuming the Measurement
➔ The measurement will continue from the
There are different ways of resuming a measure- marked measuring point.
ment:
or
• To resume a measurement, click the Resume
button (or press the F7 button) or select menu • If you want to repeat the complete mea-
Measurement → Start → from Last Position surement, click the Start button (or press
(Resume). the F5 key) or select menu Measure-
ment → Start → from Beginning.
➔ The last three measuring points will be mea-
sured again, and then the measurement will ➔ The complete measurement will be repeated.
continue. The curves measured before will be discarded.

or

216 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.5.5 Repeating Individual If a repeat measurement is paused (refer to

Measurements section 5.5.3 "Stopping the Measurement"), the
following data will be displayed:
Individual measurements can be repeated in the
– all measurements not to be repeated
following measuring programs:
– PDD and Profiles – the measurements already repeated and the
– Plane parallel to central beam corresponding new measured values
– Plane perpendicular to central beam – the paused measurement in its current state
– Star Pattern
– the measurements to be repeated and the cor-
This function is not available in Auto Setup mode. responding old measured values

These are your options in this case:

Individual measurements can only be repeated • Resume the measurement as described in

after a task has been completed. section 5.5.4 "Resuming the Measurement".

• Make sure that the displayed information • Repeat individual measurements as described
matches the selected curve, i. e., display of above.
the profiles if profile measurements are to be
repeated or display of the depth dose curves
if measurements of depth dose curves are to
be repeated. HINT
If a depth dose curve is to be measured again
• Select the curves that you want to measure and the profile depths are to be determined
again. from this curve, e. g., at depth R50, the profile
measurements must be repeated as well.
• Select menu Measurement → Start → Mea-
suring Selected Curves.

➔ The selected curves will be removed from the

display, measured, and then displayed again.

D948.131.00/10 en 217
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.5.6 Level Indicator 5.5.7 Automatic Analysis

In WaterTankScans, you can directly analyze a

measurement and display the result without open-
1
ing the Analyze edit window.

The window in WaterTankScans that shows the

analysis result corresponds to the Analyze edit
2 3 window.

The analysis is performed with the most recent

Figure V-4: Level indicator settings in the Analyze edit window.

1 Measuring range that is set for measuring For more information on the Analyze edit
and reference detector window, refer to chapter XI "'Scanned Data
Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module" - 8 "Analyzing
2 Current at the last measured point for mea-
Curves".
suring and reference detector
3 Bar graph for measuring and reference The automatic analysis is available for the follow-
detector ing measuring programs:
– PDD and Profiles
– Plane parallel to central beam
Bar Graph for Measuring and Reference
– Plane perpendicular to central beam
Detector
– Star Pattern
– 100% of the display corresponds to the max-
This function is not available in Auto Setup mode.
imum measurable current for the connected
electrometer in the selected measuring range.

– dark green bars:

The measured current is within the measuring
range.

– bar on the right is red:

The measured current is very close to the
upper limit of the measuring range.

218 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

• In menu Tools → Measurement Options on The window with the analysis result will be closed
the Advanced tab, select the Show analysis in the following cases:
result online check box (refer to section 9.4.3
"Advanced Tab"). This check box is selected – Clicking the appropriate button in the title bar
by default. of the window

➔ When the measurement of a curve has been – Selecting menu Edit → Process, Edit → Ana-
completed, a window with the analysis result lyze Information or Edit → Compared Scans
of the measured curve will be displayed.
– Starting a new measurement with the Start
➔ When the measurement of the next curve has button
been completed, the window will display the
analysis result of the new curve. – Deleting all measurement data with the Clear
button
➔ When all measurements have been completed
or a measurement has been paused, you can
select one of the curves. Then, the window
will display the analysis result of the selected
curve. For profiles, it is possible to display the
analysis results of multiple, selected profiles.

In the default settings, this window provides a

menu bar and a toolbar with the same functions
as in the Analyze edit window. Thus, you can also
select the protocol for the analysis and edit the
parameters for the analysis in this window.

To display the window without menu bar and tool-

bar, go to menu Tools → Measurement Options
and select the Without menu check box on the
Advanced tab.

D948.131.00/10 en 219
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.5.8 Saving Measurement Data • Resume the measurement as described in

Automatically section 5.5.4 "Resuming the Measurement".

or
An interruption of a task, e. g., due to a sys-
tem crash, may cause the loss of measurement
• Repeat the entire task by clicking the Start but-
data acquired up to this point. To avoid this situ-
ton (or press the F5 key) or by selecting menu
ation, WaterTankScans saves the data automat-
Measurement → Start → from Beginning.
ically whenever the measurement of a curve or
point (for point measurements) has been com-
pleted. The settings and measurement data are
saved.

The automatic storage is not available for the fol-

lowing measurements:
– Measurements in Auto Setup mode
– BeamAdjust measuring mode

HINT
The target file for the automatically saved data
is always the same. After completion of a task,
the file will be overwritten the next time a task
is started.

• To resume an incomplete task, load the

automatically saved data by selecting menu
File → Open last measurement data.

➔ The measured curves or points will be dis-

played.

220 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.6 Selecting Curves 5.8 Saving Measuring Data

You select a curve in the graphics window by dou- • To save measuring data, click
ble-clicking. To select additional curves, press and the Save button or select menu
hold the Shift key down while double-clicking the File → Save As.
curves.
• In the standard Save As dialog, enter a file
By selecting menu Edit → Select All, you select name and the directory. You can overwrite
all the curves. With Invert Selection, you invert the existing files or create new files.
selection. With Discard Selection, you cancel the
For further information on the suggested file
selection of the curves.
names, refer to chapter III "Basic Functions" (1
"Definitions").
For further information on selecting curves, refer
to chapter III "Basic Functions" (3.1 "Selecting
➔ The measuring points of the curves will be
Curves").
saved unnormalized.

➔ Furthermore, all the settings on the Linac and

5.7 Curve Properties Measurement tabs will be saved and will, thus,
be available when the saved measuring data
• To display the properties of a curve, mark the
will be loaded.
desired curve and select menu Edit → Proper-
ties.
Measuring data of WaterTankScans will always
be saved in the MEPHYSTO MCC format (*.mcc).
➔ The Properties box will be displayed, showing
all the information available about the selected
curve.

For further information on the Properties box, refer

to chapter III "Basic Functions" (3.2 "Curve Prop-
erties").

D948.131.00/10 en 221
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.9 Loading Stored 5.10 Deleting Measuring Data

Measuring Data
• Click the Clear button or select
Files can only be loaded when they are in the menu Measurement → Clear to
MEPHYSTO MCC format (*.mcc) and when they remove the measured or loaded
contain data measured with WaterTankScans. data from the display.

• To load measuring data, click • To permanently remove complete measure-

the Open button or select menu ment files and directories, please use Win-
File → Open. dows Explorer.

• Select a file from the standard Open dialog. HINT

By clicking the Clear button, you also release
➔ The currently displayed data will be overwrit-
the interface to the control unit. Other programs
ten.
will then be able again to access the connected
devices.
➔ If the currently displayed data are not yet
saved, a message will be shown and you can
save them if required.

222 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6 Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.1 Linac Tab

1 4

2 5

Figure V-5: Linac tab

D948.131.00/10 en 223
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

On the Linac tab, you can set the following para- 4 Combo boxes and input boxes to adjust the
meters of the radiation unit: parameters of the radiation unit:

– Name:
1 Indication of the orientation of the measuring
name of the radiation unit used
system
Selection of a radiation unit created in the
2 Graphical representation of the field definition Radiation unit Library module (default set-
ting: "DEMO MR")
3 Comment field – Modality:
For each measurement, a comment can be Modality of the radiation
entered that will be saved with the result of the
measurement. This comment is shown on the – Energy:
Linac tab and on the Measurement tab. The Energy in the unit [MV]
comment can be edited on both tabs. – Wedge:
Alternatively, you can use the comment field wedge filter
to display a message before the measurement – Block:
starts. For this, enter the "Msg:" command Number of the block used
before the text.
After selecting a radiation unit created in
Example:
the Radiation unit Library module, the para-
If you want the user to select a specific para-
meters defined there (modality, energy,
meter set in the Step-By-Step Options dialog,
etc.) can be selected from the other combo
you could, e. g., write the following text in the
boxes.
comment field:
Msg: In the Step-By-Step Options dialog, To create your own radiation unit or edit an
select the XXX parameter set. existing unit, use the Radiation unit Library
The possibility of showing messages is partic- module (refer to chapter VII "'Radiation unit
ularly useful to inform the user of required set- Library' Module").
tings when working with measuring task lists.

224 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

5 Combo boxes and buttons for defining the irra-

diated field:

– Field size, inplane x crossplane

(in cm x cm), with two decimal places
– Shape of the field

– Reference depth of the field

SSD, SID, or used-defined depth

– Button to show and hide additional input

boxes for defining asymmetry
Depending on how the radiation unit is con-
figured, you can use either the Offset or the
X1X2 format.

6 Input boxes for the measurement setup

– Source surface distance

(SSD)
– Gantry angle

– Collimator angle

D948.131.00/10 en 225
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.2 Measurement Tab

1 9
2

4 10

11
6

7 12

Figure V-6: Measurement tab

226 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

On the Measurement tab, you select the mea- 5 Button to rotate the preview by 90°
suring components and determine the measuring
tasks. 6 Preview of the curves to measure as frontal
view and top view
1 Button to adjust the electrometer measuring
ranges 7 Indication of the current position of the mea-
The current settings will be displayed in the suring detector or indication of the estimated
form of a tooltip when you move the mouse total duration of the measurement
cursor over the picture. You can switch between the two indications
During the measurement, the level indicator in menu Tools → Measurement Options on
for the currents of the measuring detector and the Advanced tab (refer to section 9.4.3
the reference detector (refer to section 5.5.6 "Advanced Tab").
"Level Indicator") will be displayed instead.
8 Comment field (refer to section 6.1 "Linac
2 Field for input of the maximum dose rate for Tab")
scaling the graphic
9 Pane for selecting the measuring mode and
3 Button to adjust the corrections for the detec- adjusting the corresponding parameters
tors
The current settings for the selected detectors 10 Button to restore the default settings of the
will be displayed in the form of a tooltip when measuring parameters
you move the mouse cursor over the picture.
11 Pane for adjustment of the parameters for the
4 List box to select the measuring programs selected measuring program
– PDD and Profiles
12 List box for selection of the measuring medium
– Plane parallel to central beam
Water or Air
– Plane perpendicular to central beam
– Star Pattern
– Points
– BeamAdjust

D948.131.00/10 en 227
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.3 Adjusting the • To adjust the measuring ranges for the elec-
trometers, click the electrometer shown (refer
Electrometer
to Figure V-7).

➔ The PTW Electrometer Library dialog will be

1 displayed:

Figure V-7: Pane for adjusting the electrom-

eter

1 Button to adjust the electrometer

2 Field for input of the maximum dose rate for
scaling the graphic

Two TANDEM electrometers are permanently

installed in the BEAMSCAN MR measuring sys-
Figure V-8: PTW Electrometer Library
tem.
dialog

Measuring detector 1 and the reference detec-

tor are always connected to TANDEM 1 while
HINT
measuring detector 2 is always connected to The measuring ranges for the electrometers
TANDEM 2. For further information, please refer adjusted in the Auto Setup mode will not be
to the BEAMSCAN MR Hardware user manual. transferred to the measuring mode. For the
measuring mode, they have to be adjusted sep-
The measuring range set for the measuring detec- arately (also refer to section 5.3 "Auto Setup").
tor in WaterTankScans always applies to both
electrometers. • Define the desired measuring ranges for the
measuring detectors and the reference detec-
tor.

• Confirm the entries with OK.

228 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.4 Adjusting Corrections for • To adjust the corrections for the detectors, click
the detector shown (refer to Figure V-9).
Detectors
➔ The measuring and reference detectors set in
HINT the BEAMSCAN MR measuring system will
The detectors used in the BEAMSCAN MR be read and displayed in the PTW Detector
measuring system are selected either on the Library dialog (refer to Figure V-10).
touch panel of the measuring system or in the
BEAMSCAN MR Remote Access software. • If required, enter the air density correction val-
ues (refer to section 6.4.1 "Air Density Correc-
In the WaterTankScans measuring module,
tion") and/or a user-defined correction factor
only the corrections can be set.
(refer to section 6.4.2 "User-Defined Correc-
tion").
When performing a function for the first time in
Auto Setup, when starting a measurement, or • If you have selected a measurement with a ref-
when adjusting the corrections for the detectors, erence chamber, click the Reference Channel
the measuring and reference detectors set in the button.
BEAMSCAN MR measuring system are read and
displayed in the pane where the detectors are ➔ The PTW Detector Library dialog will be
adjusted. expanded by a pane for selection of the ref-
erence detector and the selected reference
detector will be displayed.

• Confirm the entries with OK.

1 The detectors and the associated parameters

(e. g., the calibration factors) are stored in the
detector library. The detector library can be edited
by means of the Detector Library module (refer
Figure V-9: Pane for adjusting the detectors
to chapter VIII "'Detector Library' Module"). If you
have not entered the calibration factor for a detec-
1 Button to adjust the detectors
tor in the detector library, the nominal value of
The picture shows the measuring detector.
the calibration factor will be used for the measure-
ment.

D948.131.00/10 en 229
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

Figure V-10: PTW Detector Library dialog

230 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.4.1 Air Density Correction ➔ The correction factor kTP for air density correc-
tion is calculated according to the following for-
HINT mula:
An air density correction can only be performed
for vented ionization chambers.

When using vented ionization chambers, the

Air density correction check box must be T temperature in measuring volume [°C]
selected in the detector library. P atmospheric pressure at measuring site
[hPa]
T0 reference temperature 20 °C or 22 °C
• Enter the current temperature and atmos-
P0 reference atmospheric pressure
pheric pressure of the measuring site in the
1013.25 hPa
appropriate input boxes.
With the default settings, the following input
ranges and defaults apply: The reference temperature is taken from the
detector library.
Temperature
Input range: (10 … 40) °C ➔ If the selected detectors are vented ioniza-
Default: 20 °C tion chambers, i. e., in the detector library, the
Atmospheric pressure Air density correction check box is selected,
Input range: (700 … 1060) hPa all further measurements will be corrected by
Default: 1013.25 hPa multiplication with this correction factor.

• When you select the Accept values outside

rated range of use check box, the following 6.4.2 User-Defined Correction
extended input range applies:
Irrespective of the air density correction, other cor-
Temperature: (5 … 45) °C rection factors can be taken into account, e. g., for
Atmospheric radiation quality, polarity effect, or saturation with
pressure: (540 … 1100) hPa ion recombination loss.

• If required, enter an additional correction factor

kUser.

Input range: 0.1 … 10

Default: 1

➔ All subsequent measurements will now be cor-

rected by multiplication with this correction fac-
tor.

D948.131.00/10 en 231
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.5 Selecting and Setting the 6.5.1 Stepwise vs Time Measuring

Measuring Mode Mode

In the Stepwise vs Time measuring mode, a mea-

surement will be performed at a measurement
1 point until the measuring time has elapsed.

• Enter the desired measuring time at Meas.

Time [s].

HINT
Figure V-11: Pane for selecting the measur- Adapt the measuring time to the dose rate to be
ing mode and adjusting the cor- measured and the detector used. Typical val-
responding parameters ues for semiflex chambers are 0.05 to 0.2 sec-
onds for the TANDEM electrometer.
1 Pane for selecting the measuring mode and
adjusting the corresponding parameters
In the Stepwise vs Time measuring mode, you
can perform measurements with and without ref-
erence detector.
• Using the list box (refer to Figure V-11), select
the appropriate measuring mode and adjust
the associated parameters.

232 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.6 Selecting and Adjusting HINT

the Measuring Program For all profile measurements, the measur-
ing depth can be set to the dose maximum
Dmax. The dose maximum Dmax depends on the
energy set on the Linac tab.

• For this, select the depth dmax in the

Depths [mm] combo box.

➔ The measuring depth used is the depth

Nominal dmax entered in the Radiation unit
Library module for the appropriate radiation
unit and the respective energy.

➔ The energy-dependent depths dmax will also

be transferred to the task list (refer to
section 9.3 "Working with Task Lists").

Figure V-12: Measurement tab, PDD and

Profiles view

• Using the list box (refer to Figure V-12), select

the desired measuring program and adjust the
associated parameters.

➔ The content of the Measurement tab will

change with the selected measuring program.

➔ The types of curves that can be measured

depend on the selected measuring system.

➔ The designations of the profiles correspond to

the axis designations defined in the Radiation
unit Library module for the selected radiation
unit.

D948.131.00/10 en 233
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.6.1 PDD and Profiles Measuring – Offset Offaxis [mm] referred to the center
Program axis of the measuring system

– If only halfsided profiles will be measured

With this measuring program, you can measure
(e. g., when the irradiated field is large),
a depth dose curve as well as inplane and cross-
select the halfsided Profiles check box.
plane profiles.

• Define the measuring depths Depths [mm].

You can combine the following options as
needed. The measuring depths have to be
separated with a blank.

– Measurement in user-defined measuring

depths

– Measurement in the dose maximum Dmax,

i. e., in the energy-dependent depth dmax

– Measurement in the Rxx depths that corre-

spond to the percentage dose values xx of
the depth dose curve

HINT
Define the possible Rxx depths by selecting
Figure V-13: Measurement tab, PDD and
menu Tools → Measurement Options on the
Profiles view
Predefined Depths tab (refer to section 9.4.4
• Define the type of curve to measure by select- "Predefined Depths Tab").
ing the appropriate check box.
• For measuring in the Rxx depths, select
• Define the measuring direction for the depth the desired Rxx depths in the Depths [mm]
dose curve combo box.
– from top to bottom
➔ The actual measuring depths will be deter-
– from bottom to top (recommended)
mined by means of the appropriate depth
• Define the measuring parameters for the pro- dose curve. This means that the depth dose
file measurements: curve will always be measured even if this
curve type is deactivated.
– Measuring direction:
– all profiles from left to right ➔ The Rxx depths will also be transferred to
– all profiles from right to left the task list.
– meandering (recommended)

– Measurement angle:
– diagonal
– angle referred to the axes of the mea-
suring system

234 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

Passing over the identifier Depths [mm] with the 6.6.2 Plane parallel to central beam
mouse displays a tooltip with all the entered mea- Measuring Program
suring depths.
With this measuring program, you can measure
➔ The step intervals for the depth dose curve and the inplane or crossplane profiles in a plane par-
the profiles will be copied from the selected allel to the central axis. By selecting or clearing
parameter set. the optimized check box, you determine whether
the distances between the profiles will be variable
or fixed.

1. Isodose Distribution:

When the optimized check box is selected, an

isodose distribution will be measured. The mea-
surement is adapted to the field distribution in the
depth.
To display isodoses, the measurement of a depth
dose curve is required. The profiles will be nor-
malized to that curve.

• Select the optimized check box (default set-

ting).

Figure V-14: Measurement tab, Plane

parallel to central beam view
- Plane optimized

D948.131.00/10 en 235
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

• Define the measuring direction for the depth 2. Matrix:

dose curve:
– from top to bottom When the optimized check box is cleared, a rec-
– from bottom to top (recommended) tangular matrix will be measured with the selected
step interval Resolution.
• Define the measuring parameters for the pro-
file measurements: • Clear the optimized check box.

– Type of profile:
– crossplane
– inplane

– Measuring direction:
– all profiles from left to right
– all profiles from right to left
– meandering (recommended)

– Measurement angle:
– diagonal
– angle referred to the axes of the mea-
suring system

– Offset Offaxis [mm] referred to the center

axis of the measuring system

– If only halfsided profiles will be measured Figure V-15: Measurement tab, Plane
(e. g., when the irradiated field is large), parallel to central beam view
select the halfsided Profiles check box.
• Define the measuring parameters for the pro-
➔ The step intervals for the depth dose curve and file measurements:
the profiles will be copied from the selected
– Type of profile:
parameter set.
– crossplane
– inplane
➔ The measuring depths for the profiles depend
on the set energy. They are copied from the – Measuring direction:
tables by selecting menu Tools → Measure- – all profiles from left to right
ment Options on the Predefined Depths tab. – all profiles from right to left
Passing over the identifier Depths [mm] with – meandering (recommended)
the mouse displays a tooltip with all the
entered measuring depths.

236 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

– Measurement angle: 6.6.3 Plane perpendicular to central

– diagonal beam Measuring Program
– angle referred to the axes of the mea-
suring system With this measuring program, you can measure
inplane or crossplane profiles in a plane perpen-
– Offset Offaxis [mm] referred to the center
dicular to the central axis. By selecting or clearing
axis of the measuring system
the optimized check box, you determine whether
– Step interval Resolution [mm] the distances between the profiles will be variable
or fixed.
– Overscan factor Overscan Factor:
All curves have the same length. The curve
length is determined by multiplying the 1. Optimized step interval:
overscan factor with the field size in the ref-
erence depth. When the optimized check box is selected, the
step intervals for the profiles will be copied from
• Define the measuring depths Depths [mm]: the selected parameter set.
– Range From … To and the step interval
Step • Select the optimized check box (default set-
ting).
– user-defined measuring depths or the
energy-dependent depths (energy dep.,
refer to the measurement of the isodose
distribution)
The measuring depths have to be sepa-
rated with a blank.
Passing over the identifier Depths [mm]
with the mouse displays a tooltip with all the
entered measuring depths.

Figure V-16: Measurement tab, Plane per-

pendicular to central beam view
- Plane optimized

D948.131.00/10 en 237
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

• Define the measuring parameters for the pro- 2. Fixed step interval:
file measurements:
When the optimized check box is cleared, the pro-
– Type of profile:
files will be measured with a fixed step interval
– crossplane
Resolution.
– inplane

– Measuring direction: • Clear the optimized check box.

– all profiles from left to right
– all profiles from right to left
– meandering (recommended)

• Define the measuring depth Depth [mm]:

– Measurement in user-defined measuring

depth

– Measurement in the dose maximum Dmax,

i. e., in the energy-dependent depth dmax

➔ The step intervals for the profiles will be copied

from the selected parameter set.

➔ The number of the profiles to be measured is

determined by the Step-by-Step parameter set
Figure V-17: Measurement tab, Plane
selected last.
perpendicular to central
beam view

• Define the measuring parameters for the pro-

file measurements:

– Type of profile:
– crossplane
– inplane

– Measuring direction:
– all profiles from left to right
– all profiles from right to left
– meandering (recommended)

238 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

– Step interval Resolution [mm]: 6.6.4 Star Pattern Measuring

The number of the profiles to be measured Program
is also determined by the step interval.
With this measuring program, you can measure
– Overscan factor Overscan Factor:
the inplane and crossplane profiles at specific
All curves have the same length. The curve
angles.
length is determined by multiplying the
overscan factor with the field size in the ref-
erence depth.

• Define the measuring depth Depth [mm]:

– Measurement in user-defined measuring

depth

– Measurement in the dose maximum Dmax,

i. e., in the energy-dependent depth dmax

Figure V-18: Measurement tab, Star Pattern

view

• Define the measuring parameters for the pro-

file measurements:

– Type of profile:
– crossplane
– inplane

– Measuring direction:
– all profiles from left to right
– all profiles from right to left
– meandering (recommended)

– Angular offset for each measurement

Angle Increment [°]

D948.131.00/10 en 239
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

– If you also want to measure the diagonal 6.6.5 Points Measuring Program
profiles, select the Diagonals check box.
With this measuring program, you can perform
– If only halfsided profiles will be measured
measurements at any selected point. The coor-
(e. g., when the irradiated field is large),
dinates to enter refer to the selected measur-
select the halfsided Profiles check box.
ing system and the adjusted orientation (refer to
Then, define the half of the profile to be
section 6.1 "Linac Tab").
measured:
0° … < 180° or 180° … < 360°.

• Define the measuring depth Depth [mm]:

– Measurement in user-defined measuring

depth

– Measurement in the dose maximum Dmax, i. e.,

in the energy-dependent depth dmax

➔ The step intervals for the profiles will be copied

from the selected parameter set.

Figure V-19: Measurement tab, Points view

240 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

• Create a list of all points where measurements

are to be made. For this, use the buttons Add,
Insert, Change, and Delete.

– Enter the coordinates of a point at X, -Z,

and Y. With Add, you append it to the list.

– To insert a point in the list, highlight the

point just below the point you want to insert,
edit the coordinates in the boxes for X, -Z,
and Y, and click the Insert button.

– To change the coordinates of a point in the

list, highlight the point, edit the coordinates
in the boxes for X, -Z, and Y, and click the
Change button.

– Click the Delete button to remove high-

lighted points from the list.

Stepwise vs Time Measuring Mode

When the Stepwise vs Time measuring mode is

selected, all the points will be measured automat-
ically according to the adjusted measuring time.

➔ After the measurement, you will see the results

in the Val column.

D948.131.00/10 en 241
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.6.6 BeamAdjust Measuring

Program

With this measuring program, you can continu-

ously measure profiles and analyze them auto-
matically in compliance with internationally recog-
nized dosimetry protocols. It is used for the adjust-
ment and verification of linear accelerators used
in medical applications.

Figure V-20: BeamAdjust measuring program

1 Linac or Measurement tab for adjusting the 4 Highlighted analyze parameter

measuring parameters 5 Dialog with the analyze parameters of the
2 Tolerance lines for the flattened region measured profile
3 Display of the measured profile

242 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

Adjusting the Measuring Parameters Notes on the Representation of the

Measurement Result
• Define the measuring parameters for the pro-
file measurements: – During the measurement, the profiles will be
normalized to the center value of the last pro-
– Type of profile:
file measured completely.
– crossplane
After the measurement, all the profiles will be
– inplane
normalized to their own center value.
– Measurement angle:
– diagonal – The measurement graphic will show two tol-
– angle referred to the axes of the mea- erance lines for the flattened region in the
suring system defined distance to 100% (e. g., tolerance lines
at 95% and 105% for a set tolerance range of
– Offset Offaxis [mm] referred to the center
±5%).
axis of the measuring system

– If the Show Analyze Parameter check box is

• Define the elements shown in the measure-
selected, these parameters will be shown in a
ment graphic:
separate dialog as soon as a profile has been
– Number of measured profiles Shown measured completely.
Curves The displayed analysis values always refer to
– Tolerance range Tolerance Area [+/-%] for the last profile measured completely.
the flattened region referred to 100% An analysis value is highlighted by clicking it.
To highlight another analysis value, click this
• Select the desired analysis protocol from the value.
Protocol list box and choose whether or not the
analyze parameters shall be displayed. – The measurement graphic will not show more
than the set number of profiles. The oldest
• Define the measuring depth Depth [mm]: measured profile will be deleted if another pro-
file is measured.
– Measurement in user-defined measuring
depth

– Measurement in the dose maximum Dmax,

i. e., in the energy-dependent depth dmax

➔ The step intervals for the profiles will be copied

from the selected parameter set.

D948.131.00/10 en 243
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.6.7 Output Factors Measuring

Program

With this measuring program, you can determine the output factors, i. e., the measured values in the central
axis depending on the field size and typically normalized to the field size of 10 cm x 10 cm. You can also
transfer the measurement of output factors to a task list.

Figure V-21: Output Factors measuring program

1 Button to change the display mode of the out- 4 Button to transfer the average of the mea-
put factor table sured values to the output factor table
2 Selected field size 5 Output factor table
3 Measurement result for a field size with 6 Selected field size in the output factor table
– Number of measured values 7 Graphical representation of the output factors
– Measured values
– Average of the measured value
– Maximum deviation of the measured val-
ues
– Standard deviation of the measured val-
ues

244 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.6.7.1 Configuring the Output Factor • Add new field sizes by entering the desired
Table field size in the empty cell at the end of the
table and confirming with the Enter key.
• To adapt the output factor table to the required
field sizes, select the table context menu Con- • Click the OK button to accept the changes.
figure Measurement. Click the Cancel button to discard the
changes.
➔ The Configure Measurement dialog will be dis-
played.

Figure V-22: Configure Measurement dia-

log

You have to set the size of the field separately for

the inplane and crossplane direction.

• Define whether you want to measure only

square fields by selecting the only square
fields check box. In case of a two-dimensional
representation, you can then select only the
square field sizes.

• Delete the field sizes not needed with the con-

text menu Delete.

• Change a field size by entering a new field size

and confirming with the Enter key.

D948.131.00/10 en 245
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.6.7.2 Performing a Measurement ➔ The equivalent square field size Eq. Square
[cm], i.e., the edge length of the equivalent
Only the Stepwise vs Time measuring mode is square field, will be displayed.
available for determination of output factors. In
The equivalent square field size is calculated
this measuring mode, each measurement con-
with the following formulas:
tinues until the set measuring time has elapsed.
Measurements will always be performed without
– Area a·b ≤ 16 cm²
a reference detector.
(in accordance with TRS 483):

• Enter the desired measuring time at Meas.

Time [s].
– Area a·b > 16 cm²
Check that the set measuring time is appropri- (in accordance with DIN 6809-6):
ate for the monitor units to be delivered.

• Enter the number of monitor units to be deliv-

ered at Monitor Units [MU]. • Start the measurement with the Start button.

➔ When the measuring system is ready, a mes-

HINT sage will be displayed to switch on the radia-
The input of the monitor units to deliver is for tion.
administrative purposes and for displaying the
measured values in the unit [cGy/MU]. This • Confirm the message with OK and switch on
input does not affect the measurement. the radiation.

Define the measuring depth Depth [mm]: ➔ The measurement will be performed.
•
– Measurement in user-defined measuring ➔ The first measured value will be displayed in
depth the Values [cGy/MU] field.
– Measurement in the dose maximum Dmax,
• If required, perform further measurements for
i. e., in the energy-dependent depth dmax
the same field size in order to obtain an aver-
age of the measured values.
• In the output factor table, click the first field size
to be measured (usually 10 cm x 10 cm).

246 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

➔ The average, the maximum deviation, and the 6.6.7.3 Selecting a Curve
standard deviation of the measured values will
automatically be calculated. A curve can be selected in two ways:

The standard deviation is calculated with the – by double-clicking the desired curve in the
following formula: graphical representation.

– by displaying a discrete crosshairs and click-

ing one of the measuring points of the desired
curve in the output factor table.
The empirical standard deviation is calculated
with the following formula: Exception:
The curve for the square field sizes can only be
selected by double-clicking.

• Transfer the measured value or the average of

the measured values to the output factor table
by clicking the Accept button.

• Perform further measurements for all the

desired field sizes.

➔ When you have measured all the fields of the

output factor table, the graphical representa-
tion comprises the following curves:

– one curve for each row of the two-dimen-

sional output factor table

– one curve for the diagonal of the two-

dimensional output factor table
A curve will be displayed if at least two mea-
sured values exist.

• Save the measurement according to

section 5.8 "Saving Measuring Data".

D948.131.00/10 en 247
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.6.7.4 Editing Output Factors 6.6.7.5 Changing the Display

Editing Measured Values Changing the Representation of the Output

Factor Table
If required, you can edit displayed measured val-
ues. The output factor table can be represented in two
ways:
• In the output factor table, click the output factor
to change. – two-dimensional representation according to
Figure V-21 (default setting)
• Then, click the desired measured value in the
table on the Measurement tab. – one-dimensional representation according to
Figure V-23
• Enter the desired measured value.

• Confirm the new value with the Enter key.

• Click the Accept button to accept all changes.

Deleting Measured Values

If required, you can delete displayed measured

values.

• To do this, click the desired measured value in

the table on the Measurement tab. Figure V-23: One-dimensional representation
of the output factor table
• Delete the measured value with the Del key.
• To toggle between the two-dimen-
• Click the Accept button to accept all changes. sional representation and the one-
dimensional representation, click the
button in the upper left corner of the
output factor table.

248 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

Normalization 6.7 Total Measurement

The output factor table and the graphical repre-
Duration
sentation of the output factors can be displayed
In the Stepwise vs Time measuring mode, the
in the following normalization modes by selecting
estimated total measurement duration can be dis-
menu Graphics → Normalize Graphics:
played with WaterTankScans.

– to Value
This total duration is shown on the Measurement
The measured values will be normalized to a
tab under the preview of the curves to be mea-
value determined by the user. For further infor-
sured (refer to Figure V-6, Pos. 7).
mation on this normalization mode, refer to
chapter III "Basic Functions". For this purpose, clear the Show current detec-
tor position check box in menu Tools → Mea-
– to Absolute Unit
surement Options on the Advanced tab (refer to
The measured values will be displayed unnor-
section 9.4.3 "Advanced Tab").
malized.
The time for moving to the first measuring point
– to Field 10x10 cm²
is not included in the calculation of the total dura-
All the measured values will be normal-
tion. Therefore, the expected total duration for a
ized to the measured value of the field size
measuring program may vary.
10 cm x 10 cm (default setting).
As soon as you have measured a value for the When working with task lists, only the total dura-
field size of 10 cm x 10 cm, all the measured tion of the currently selected task will be dis-
values will be normalized to that value. played. The total duration of the entire task list or
If no measured value is available for this field of a task group can be determined by summing up
size, all the measured values will be displayed the durations of each single task.
unnormalized.
When you change a measurement parameter, the
total duration will be recalculated and displayed.

After the measurement of a curve, the remain-

ing total duration for the curves left to be mea-
sured will be recalculated and displayed. The time
will also be recalculated when a measurement is
interrupted and resumed.

D948.131.00/10 en 249
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

It is not possible to calculate the total duration for

the following measuring programs and no reading
will be displayed:

– BeamAdjust

The accuracy of the displayed time is < 20%.

250 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN MR Measuring System - Reference Curves

7 Reference Curves

In order to compare the current measurement 7.1 Loading Reference

visually with an existing measurement, you can
Curves
load reference curves before starting the mea-
surement. Reference curves can be loaded by either of the
following methods:
Reference curves can only be loaded when they
are in the MEPHYSTO MCC format (*.mcc). 1. Loading reference curves without measuring
parameters:
HINT
• Select menu File → Open Overlay Refer-
In order to compare the reference curves ence.
numerically with the currently measured
curves, you have to load all the curves in • Select a file from the standard Open dialog.
the DataAnalyze module and compare them ➔ The currently displayed measuring data
with the Compare function (by selecting menu and reference curves will be overwritten. If
Edit → Compared Scans) (refer to chapter XI the currently displayed measuring data are
"'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Mod- not yet saved, a message will be shown
ule" - 7 "Comparing Curves"). and you can save them if required.

➔ The reference curves will only be dis-

played.

➔ The currently set measuring parameters

(e. g., measuring program) will not be over-
written by the measuring parameters of the
loaded reference curves.

D948.131.00/10 en 251
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN MR Measuring System - Reference Curves

2. Loading reference curves with measuring 7.2 Measurements with

parameters:
Loaded Reference Curves
• Select menu File → Open Compare Refer-
ence. During the measurement, only the reference
curve of the curve type to measure will be dis-
• Select a file from the standard Open dialog. played, even if you have loaded reference curves
➔ The currently displayed measuring data of different curve types.
and reference curves will be overwritten. If
the currently displayed measuring data are Example:
not yet saved, a message will be shown If you measure a profile, the reference curves
and you can save them if required. shown are only profiles and not depth dose
curves.
➔ The reference curves will only be dis-
played. In order to compare curves with reference curves
➔ The currently set measuring parameters measured with different measuring parameters,
(e. g., measuring program) will be overwrit- an adjust measurement will be performed before
ten by the measuring parameters of the the actual measurement. Thus, the measurement
loaded reference curves and can be used will be independent of the measuring parameters.
for the subsequent measurements.
– If a depth dose curve is loaded, the adjust
➔ You cannot print, save, analyze, or modify the measurement will be performed at the depth of
reference curves. the maximum value of that curve.

➔ The reference curves remain valid until you – If only profiles are loaded, the adjust measure-
remove them or load new reference curves. ment will be performed at the depth of the max-
imum center value of all profiles.

HINT
The adjust measurement only affects the nor-
malization of the curves during the measure-
ment. When saving the data, the normalization
will be ignored.

252 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN MR Measuring System - Reference Curves

7.3 Comparing 7.4 Removing Reference

Measurements with the Curves
Reference Curves
• To remove the reference curves, select menu
You can load reference curves and compare them File → Close Overlay Reference.
with measured curves.
➔ The reference curves will immediately be
• Select menu Edit → Compare Scans. removed. The command does not require con-
firmation.
➔ The Compare edit window will open and the
result of the comparison will be displayed if
the following conditions are met. Otherwise, an
appropriate error message will be displayed.

– The pool of available curves contains at

least one measuring curve and a matching
reference curve that share all of the follow-
ing parameters:
– Modality
– Energy
– Curve type (PDD, profile, or FFF profile)
– Profile type (inplane or crossplane)
– Measuring depth
– Field size
– SSD
– Wedge filter

– The assignment of the matched curves

must be unique, i. e., each measuring curve
must be associated with exactly only one
reference curve and vice versa.

For further information on comparing curves, also

refer to section 8 "Analyzing and Editing the Mea-
surement Results" and chapter XI "'Scanned Data
Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module" - 7 "Comparing
Curves").

D948.131.00/10 en 253
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN MR
Measuring System - Analyzing and Editing the Measurement Results

8 Analyzing and Editing the Measurement Results

WaterTankScans offers the following options for Comparing Curves

further processing or analyzing the measuring
data: By selecting menu Edit → Compared Scans, you
can compare curves. This can be done by either
of the following methods:
Analyzing Curves
• First load reference curves, then measure
CAUTION curves, and finally compare them with the
reference curves (also refer to section 7.3
Using the measuring data without taking the
"Comparing Measurements with the Refer-
influence of the magnetic field into account.
ence Curves").
Erroneous Analysis!
or
Measurements with WaterTankScans are influ-
enced by the magnetic field.
• Select two curves to compare from the dis-
The user is responsible for taking the influence played curves. Check that the selected curves
of the magnetic field into account when evalu- are the same type.
ating the measuring data.
For further information on comparing curves, refer
By clicking the Analyze button or by selecting to chapter XI "'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAna-
menu Edit → Analyze Information, the Analyze lyze) Module" - 7 "Comparing Curves".
window will open where you can analyze the
selected curves (refer to chapter XI "'Scanned
Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module" - 8 "Ana-
lyzing Curves").

Modifying Curves

By clicking the Process button or by select-

ing menu Edit → Process, the Process window
will open where you can modify the selected
curves (refer to chapter XI "'Scanned Data
Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module" - 9 "Modifying
Curves").

254 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

9 Configuring WaterTankScans

9.1 General Information Additionally, you can switch to the Auto Setup
mode via menu Tools → Auto Setup (refer to
WaterTankScans is configured in the Tools menu. section 5.3 "Auto Setup").

In the Tools menu, you will find the following

dialogs:
– Options dialog:
for global module settings, such as the repre-
sentation of the graphics
All changes performed on the tabs of the
Options dialog will affect all modules of the
BEAMSCAN software (refer to chapter III
"Basic Functions").

– Step-By-Step Options dialog:

to create and configure the parameter sets
(refer to section 9.2 "Setting Up Parameter
Sets")

– Task List dialog:

to create and edit task lists (refer to section 9.3
"Working with Task Lists")

– Measurement Options dialog:

to define the measurement options (refer
to section 9.4 "Defining the Measurement
Options")

D948.131.00/10 en 255
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

9.2 Setting Up Parameter WaterTankScans is delivered with the

BEAMSCAN_MR parameter set that should be
Sets
sufficient for most measurements. You are free,
however, to create custom parameter sets or edit
9.2.1 Step-By-Step Options Dialog and/or delete existing parameter sets.

The settings in the Step-By-Step Options dialog

apply to all measurements with the Stepwise vs
Time and Stepwise vs Trigger measuring modes.

To optimize measuring tasks with respect to the

position and duration of the measurement, you
can select predefined parameter sets or create
new parameter sets in the Step-By-Step Options
dialog.

The Step-By-Step Options dialog (refer to

Figure V-24) is opened via menu Tools → Step-
By-Step Options.

These are the settings defined in a parameter set:

– modality-dependent and energy-dependent

measuring steps for depth dose curves on the
PDD Steps tab

– modality-dependent measuring steps for pro-

files on the Profile Steps tab

– depth-dependent and detector-dependent

speeds and delay times on the Speeds and
Delay Times tabs

256 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

9.2.1.1 PDD Steps Tab

5 6

7 8 9

Figure V-24: Step-By-Step Options dialog - PDD Steps tab

1 Modality list box 6 Selection of the range limits and step inter-
2 Energy list box vals
3 Name of the selected parameter set 7 Button to copy a parameter set

4 List of all the parameter sets 8 Button to delete a parameter set

5 Selection of the type of measuring steps 9 Graphical representation of the range limits
and step intervals

D948.131.00/10 en 257
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

On the PDD Steps tab, you specify the measuring Press the Ins key or select Insert new range from
steps for the measurement of depth dose curves the context menu to insert a new range (in the
for all modalities and all corresponding energies. table: above the selected range; on the graphic:
The modalities and energies shown depend on before the selected range).
what was defined in the Radiation unit Library
module, i. e., if a new energy is specified in this HINT
module for any of the radiation units, check the
A maximum of 9 ranges may be created.
settings in the Step-By-Step Options dialog, and
correct if necessary.
Press the Del key or select Delete selected range
You can choose between two types of measuring from the context menu to delete the selected
steps: range.

– Equidistant
The same step interval is used over the entire
measuring range.

– Along steps
The measuring points exactly reflect the
defined range limits and step intervals.

Range Limits and Step Intervals

You can adjust range limits both in the table and

in the graphic. The graphic and table adapt auto-
matically.
In the table, the starting points can be entered for
each range limit, and in the last row, the end point
can also be adjusted.

Click button to double the adjusted

step interval.
Click button to halve the adjusted
step interval.

258 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

9.2.1.2 Profile Steps Tab

4 5 6

7 8 9 10

Figure V-25: Step-By-Step Options dialog - Profile Steps tab

1 Modality list box 7 Button to copy a parameter set

2 Name of the selected parameter set 8 Button to delete parameter sets
3 List of all the parameter sets 9 Button to display the measuring steps for any
4 Reference field size field size and measuring depth
5 Selection of the type of measuring steps 10 Graphical representation of the range limits
and step intervals
6 Selection of the range limits and step inter-
vals

D948.131.00/10 en 259
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

On the Profile Steps tab, you specify the measur- You can choose between two types of measuring
ing steps for the measurement of profiles for all steps:
modalities.
– Equidistant
The same step interval is used over the entire
For this, adjust a field size in the Reference Size
measuring range.
input box and define the appropriate range limits
and step intervals in the Ranges pane. – Fanlines
The step intervals can be set in cus-
To perform a measurement for another field size, tom-defined ranges.
it is not necessary to change the settings on the
Profile Steps tab, as the range limits will adapt For a parameter set, you can define both equidis-
automatically to the field size during the measure- tant measuring steps and fanlines.
ment (refer to Figure V-26). The step intervals
between the range limits remain unchanged for all
the field sizes.

The adjusted range limits and step intervals

always refer to the depth adjusted in the mea-
suring module on the Linac tab at Fieldsize
defined at. If measurements are performed at
other depths, the range limits and the step inter-
vals are converted, using the Intercept theorem
(refer to Figure V-27).

Range limits and step intervals are adjusted as

described in section 9.2.1.1 "PDD Steps Tab".

HINT
A maximum of 9 ranges may be created.

When the Symmetrize Ranges check box is

selected, range limits and step intervals of the
positive range are mirrored on the central axis.

260 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

Figure V-26: Range limits and step intervals for different field sizes

A Settings on the Profile Steps tab for a field size of 10 x 10 cm

Measurement with field size of 10 x 10 cm: measuring steps coincide with A
B Measurement with field size of 5 x 5 cm: in the middle of the range, the number of measuring steps is
reduced
C Measurement with field size of 15 x 15 cm: in the middle of the range, the number of measuring steps
is increased

Figure V-27: Range limits and step intervals for different measuring depths

A Setting on the Profile Steps tab for the depth adjusted on the Linac tab of the measuring module
Measurement in the depth adjusted on the Linac tab of the measuring module: measuring steps coin-
cide with A
B Measurement in a greater depth: range limits and step intervals are adapted by using the Intercept
theorem

D948.131.00/10 en 261
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

By clicking the Display for Any Size button, you

can display the Profile Steps for Any Size dialog
(refer to Figure V-28). In this dialog, you can see
the adapted measurement steps as well as the
number of points to be measured for any field size
and measuring depth.

HINT
The points to be measured will be displayed
correctly only if the reference depth entered in
the Field size defined at depth and the source
surface distance SSD match the data on the
Linac tab of the measuring module.

1 5

2 6

3 7

Figure V-28: Profile Steps for Any Size dialog

1 Input box for the field size to be checked 4 Number of points to be measured
2 Input box for the measuring depth to be 5 Input box for reference depth
checked 6 Button to update the graphic
3 Graphical representation of the adapted mea- 7 Input box for source surface distance (SSD)
surement steps

262 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

9.2.1.3 Speeds Tab

5 6 7

Figure V-29: Step-By-Step Options dialog - Speeds tab

1 Detector type list box 5 Button to copy a parameter set

2 Name of the selected parameter set 6 Button to delete parameter sets
3 List of all the parameter sets 7 Graphical representation of the range limits
4 Selection of the range limits and speeds and speeds

D948.131.00/10 en 263
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

On the Speeds tab, you can specify depth-related

speeds for each detector type.

You can choose among the following detector

types:
– cylindrical detectors
– plane-parallel detectors
– LA48 (not supported in the BEAMSCAN MR
measuring system)

HINT
Both the conventional Markus chamber and the
plane-parallel chamber are treated as plane-
parallel detectors, all other single chambers are
considered as cylindrical detectors.

HINT
Irrespective of the settings on the Speeds
tab, the detector will always be moved to the
first measuring point with reduced speed and
reduced acceleration in order to reduce wave
formation.

Range limits and the depth-related speeds are

adjusted as described in section 9.2.1.1 "PDD
Steps Tab".

HINT
A maximum of 9 ranges may be created.

HINT
The max. possible speed is 30 mm/s.

264 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

9.2.1.4 Delay Times Tab

5 6 7

Figure V-30: Step-By-Step Options dialog - Delay Times tab

1 Detector type list box 5 Button to copy a parameter set

2 Name of the selected parameter set 6 Button to delete parameter sets
3 List of all the parameter sets 7 Graphical representation of the range limits
4 Selection of the range limits and delay times and delay times

D948.131.00/10 en 265
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

On the Delay Times tab, you can specify the 9.2.2 Creating a New Parameter Set
delay times for each detector type (refer to
section 9.2.1.3 "Speeds Tab"). The delay time is You create a new parameter set by copying an
the time between the detector moving to the mea- existing set and editing the parameters.
suring point and the beginning of the measure-
ment. • Select a parameter set.

This time interval depends on the detector type • Click the Copy button.
and the measuring depth as well as on the speed
➔ In the list box, a new parameter set named
set for this depth. For an optimal adjustment, both
Copy of + set name will be displayed.
the speed and the delay times must be adapted.

• Edit the set name in the Actual Set box and

Range limits and the delay times are adjusted as
adjust the parameters on the different tabs
described in section 9.2.1.1 "PDD Steps Tab".
according to sections 9.2.1.1 "PDD Steps Tab"
to 9.2.1.4 "Delay Times Tab".
HINT
A maximum of 9 ranges may be created.
9.2.3 Deleting a Parameter Set

• Select the parameter set to delete.

• Click the Delete button.

➔ The parameter set will be removed from the list

box.

HINT
You can delete all parameter sets but one.

266 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

9.3 Working with Task Lists • Select the parameters to be measured by

selecting the appropriate check boxes.

9.3.1 Opening and Creating Task ➔ This will define multiple tasks at once, and
Lists these tasks differ only in one measuring para-
meter (e. g., wedge) (refer to Figure V-32,
Task lists are created and edited in the Task List Queue 1).
dialog.
• Confirm by clicking the OK button.
The Task List dialog can be opened in two ways:
➔ A bar will be displayed on the right border of
1. By selecting menu Tools → Task List → Open/ the Linac tab and the empty Task List dialog
New: will be opened.

➔ A bar will be displayed on the right border of • Transfer the measuring tasks to the Task List
the Linac tab and the Task List dialog will be dialog by double-clicking the bar.
opened.
– With Open, a stored task list will be opened. You can modify the size and position of the dialog
– With New, an empty task list will be opened. by means of the Windows functions.

2. By selecting the MULTIPLE parameter setting:

On the Linac tab, you can choose the MULTI-

PLE parameter setting for the measuring para-
meters Energy, Applicator, Wedge, Block,
SSD, and Field.

➔ The Multiple Choice dialog will be displayed:

Figure V-31: Multiple Choice dialog (e. g., for

the wedge filter)

D948.131.00/10 en 267
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

9.3.2 Editing a Task List You will find further options for editing the mea-
suring tasks and the task list in the Task List con-
To add measuring tasks to the list, you have text menu. Open the context menu by right-click-
to adjust the measuring parameters for a sin- ing the name of a measuring task or a measuring
gle measuring task on the Linac tab or select task queue.
the MULTIPLE setting for the desired measuring
parameter (refer to section 9.3.1 "Opening and
Creating Task Lists "). By double-clicking the bar,
the measuring tasks will be transferred to the Task
List dialog and appended to the existing list.

Use drag & drop to insert the measuring tasks in

a specific place in the task list. Click the bar and
drag the cursor to the task after which the new
task is to be inserted. Figure V-33: Task List context menu

You can group the measuring tasks into measur- • Delete the highlighted measuring task with
ing task groups referred to as Queue. Delete Task or with the Del key.

• Create a new, empty measuring task queue

with New Queue.

• Delete the highlighted measuring task queue

with Delete Queue.

• Rename the highlighted measuring task queue

with Rename Queue. Edit the name. Then,
press the Enter key or click a measuring task
to apply the change.

• Sort the highlighted measuring task queue by

Energy, Wedge/Applicator, or Field Size with
Figure V-32: Task List dialog with two mea- Sort Queue.
suring task queues

You can change the order of measuring tasks and

of measuring task queues using drag & drop.

268 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

• With Auto Save, you can specify the path 9.3.3 Modifying a Task List
where you want to save the measured curves
automatically after each task. On save, the • To modify a task list, highlight the name of a
default file name will be used (file name: refer measuring task and select the Modify Task List
to chapter III "Basic Functions" - 1 "Defini- context menu.
tions").
➔ The Modify area will open next to the Task List
• Open an existing task list with Open Task List. dialog as shown in Figure V-34.

• Save the list shown in the Task List dialog with HINT
Save Task List As.
While the Modify area is displayed:

• Modify the task list with Modify Task List. For – you cannot open the context menu
further information, refer to section 9.3.3 "Mod-
– you cannot start a measurement from the
ifying a Task List".
Task List dialog.

• After having performed all the changes, you

should save the list. Otherwise, when you start
the measurements directly, the changes will
not be considered. You have two options for
saving:

– Select the Save Task List As context menu.

– Close the Task List dialog and save the

changes.

D948.131.00/10 en 269
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

2 3

4
1
5

8 9

Figure V-34: Task List dialog with the Modify area

1 Highlighted measuring task in the selected 6 Button to apply the changes to all the mea-
measuring task queue suring task queues
2 Check box for activating or deactivating a 7 Button to reject the changes
modified parameter 8 Button to close the Modify area and save the
3 List of the modified parameters modified task list
4 Button to apply the changes to the high- 9 Button to close the Modify area and reject all
lighted measuring task applied changes
5 Button to apply the changes to the selected
measuring task queue

270 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

• Select the measuring task to change by click- • Click one of the following buttons to apply the
ing this task. changes:

– Selected Task:
➔ The Linac and Measurement tabs show the
applies the changes to the highlighted mea-
settings of the selected measuring task.
suring task
• Change the parameters as needed. – Selected Queue:
applies the changes to the selected mea-
HINT suring task queue
In this mode, the MULTIPLE parameter cannot – All Queues:
be selected. applies the changes to all the measuring
task queues
HINT
• Or, click the Skip button to reject the changes.
If you want to display a message before the
measurement starts, you can enter the com- ➔ The list of the modified parameters will be
mand "Msg:" followed by the text of the mes- emptied and the buttons for applying the
sage in the comment field on the Linac or Mea- changes will be disabled.
surement tab. For further information, refer to
section 6.1 "Linac Tab". • Save the modified task list by clicking the Save
As button.
• Transfer the modified parameters to the Task
List dialog by double-clicking the bar. • In the standard Save As dialog, enter a file
name and the directory. You can overwrite the
➔ The modified parameters will be listed in the existing task list or create a new task list.
Modified area and activated .

• If you do not want to apply the change to a

parameter, you can deactivate the parameter
concerned .

D948.131.00/10 en 271
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

HINT 9.3.4 Example of a Task List

Observe the following conditions for the Example of the measurement of depth dose
changes: curves for several field sizes
– You can only change the orientation of the
measuring system and the radiation unit • On the Measurement tab, select the PDD and
(Linac tab) independently of other parame- Profiles measuring program and select only
ters. These changes will always be applied the PDD check box.
to all the measuring task queues.
• Select the MULTIPLE entry from the Field
– You cannot change the measuring program. combo box on the Linac tab. In the Multiple
– The parameters on the Measurement tab Choice dialog, clear all options that are not
(e. g., measuring mode, curve type, etc.) required and confirm with OK.
will, in general, only be changed for the
• Then, double-click the bar on the Linac tab.
measuring tasks offering that setting.

➔ The measuring task queue will be added to the

task list (refer to Figure V-35).

Figure V-35: Task List for the measurement

of the depth dose curves for
several field sizes

272 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

• Right-click the name of the measuring task 9.3.5 Notes on the Measurement
queue and select the target directory for the Workflow with a Task List
automatic storage of the measured curves of
this measuring task queue. • In the Task List dialog, click the measuring task
to start (highlighted blue).
• Create further measuring task queues as
described above. • Click the Start button.

• For additional use of the task list, you can save ➔ The individual measuring tasks will be com-
it with the Save Task List As function of the pleted automatically one after other until the
context menu. end of the queue.

➔ If any of the parameters (Energy, Modality,

Wedge, Block, Field size, Gantry, Collimator,
or SSD) changes between measuring tasks,
a message will be displayed prompting you to
change the corresponding setting at the radia-
tion unit.
The next measurement starts after acknowl-
edgment of the message.
By clicking the Abort button, you will cancel the
measurement with a task list.

HINT
Before starting the first measurement of the
task list, check that the path for automatic sav-
ing of the measurements is set correctly.

HINT
The settings in the Continuous Options and
Step-By-Step Options dialogs are not associ-
ated with the measuring tasks of the task list.
When starting a measurement, the currently
adjusted parameter set is used.

During a measurement that is part of a task

list, you can open the Continuous Options or
Step-By-Step Options dialog to adapt the para-
meters to the measurement. This can be done
whenever the measurement is interrupted.

D948.131.00/10 en 273
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

9.3.6 Measurement of Basic Data Requirement:

using a Predefined Task List
In the Radiation unit Library module, you have
CAUTION performed the appropriate settings for the radia-
tion unit to check. PTW recommends copying an
Using the predefined task lists without checking
existing radiation unit and adapting it as needed.
its correctness and completeness.
For further information, refer to chapter VII "'Radi-
Erroneous Measurements! ation unit Library' Module".
The predefined task lists have been carefully
Primarily, verify that the settings for the following
compiled according to the manuals of the radi-
parameters are correct:
ation treatment planning systems (RTPS) valid
at the time of creation. The user is fully respon- – source isocenter distance (SID)
sible for checking the correctness of the task – radiation qualities, in particular energy and
lists or for adapting them to the actual require- nominal depth of the maximum dose
ments. PTW cannot be held liable for the valid-
ity of the task lists. – wedges

– axis designations and directions

You can find predefined task lists for different
radiation treatment planning systems. These tem-
plates are located in the following directory: Creating a Task List
'C:\Program Files (x86)\PTW\MEPHYSTO mcc\
• Select menu Tools → Task List → Open to
Data\Samples\WaterTankScans'.
open the desired predefined task list.
In order to quickly create custom task lists, PTW
• Save the task list with a new name, using the
recommends selecting a suitable predefined task
Save Task List As context menu.
list, saving it with a new name, and adapting it to
the actual requirements.

274 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

• Change the required parameters, using the • Perform further adjustments according to
Modify Task List context menu, according to section 9.3.2 "Editing a Task List" .
section 9.3.3 "Modifying a Task List".
– Delete measuring tasks that are not
– Radiation unit and orientation of the water needed.
phantom for all measuring tasks (All
– Change the order of the measuring tasks or
Queues button)
the measuring task queues.
– Energies for all measuring tasks (All
– Insert new measuring tasks.
Queues button)

– Further parameters, such as measur- • Save the changes with the Save As button.
ing detector, measuring time, measuring
depths, field sizes, SSD, etc. for an indi- • Define the path for the automatic saving of the
vidual measuring task (Selected Task but- measurements, using the Auto Save context
ton), for a measuring task queue (Selected menu.
Queue button), or for all measuring tasks
(All Queues button)
Performing a Measurement

HINT • Define the settings for measuring positions

When changing the energy, check that the and duration in the Continuous Options or
measuring programs use the correct measur- Step-By-Step Options dialog. For further infor-
ing depths. mation, refer to section 9.2 "Setting Up Para-
meter Sets".
The PDD and Profiles measuring program nor-
mally uses the nominal depth of the maximum Select menu Tools → Task List → Open to
•
dose dmax. When you change the energy in the open the task list.
task list, the appropriate value of dmax will be
automatically copied from the Radiation unit • Start the measurement of the basic data with
Library module. the first or any other measuring task.
In case of measuring depths with a fixed ref-
erence to dmax (e. g., dmax + 5 mm) or in case
Analyzing Measuring Data
of another measuring program, such as Plane
parallel to central beam, the measuring depths • By loading or copying the measuring data to
may have to be corrected manually. the DataAnalyze module, you can analyze or
edit them, even while another measurement
is in progress. For further information, refer to
chapter XI "'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAn-
alyze) Module".

D948.131.00/10 en 275
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

9.4 Defining the 9.4.1 Presets Tab

Measurement Options
In the Measurement Options dialog, you can
define basic settings.

Select menu Tools → Measurement Options to

open the Measurement Options dialog.

With the Apply button, you apply the changes and

adapt the display in the background without clos-
ing the dialog.

Figure V-36: Measurement Options dialog -

Presets tab

Stop at Zero

In the Other radiations input box, enter the min-

imum dose rate value where the measurement
is to be stopped. When the entered value is
0 Gy/min, the measurement will never stop.

276 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

9.4.2 Communication Tab • Select the virtual COM port for

WaterTankScans from the list box.

• In the BEAMSCAN MR Remote Access soft-

ware, select the other virtual COM port. For
further information on the BEAMSCAN MR
Remote Access software, refer to the BEAMS-
CAN MR Hardware user manual.

HINT
To streamline the operation for all users, PTW
recommends always selecting the virtual COM
port with the higher number in WaterTankScans
and the virtual COM port with the lower number
in the BEAMSCAN MR Remote Access soft-
ware.

Figure V-37: Measurement Options dialog - In the Accelerator pane, you can select the
Communication tab appropriate radio button to define the com-
bined MRT radiation therapy system where the
On the Communication tab, you set the virtual BEAMSCAN MR measuring system will be used.
COM port for communication between the PC and – Elekta
the BEAMSCAN MR measuring system. – ViewRay

HINT
The virtual COM ports are created with the
Eltima driver. HINT
If the Eltima driver is not yet installed, proceed To release the interface to the
as follows: control unit for use with other
programs, click the Clear button
• Exit WaterTankScans. (also refer to section 5.10 "Delet-
ing Measuring Data").
• Install the Eltima driver and create the
virtual COM ports. For further informa-
tion, refer to chapter I "Introduction to the
BEAMSCAN Software" - 4.3 "Notes on
Communication with the BEAMSCAN MR
Measuring System".

• Restart WaterTankScans.

D948.131.00/10 en 277
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

9.4.3 Advanced Tab – Warn about missing Zero Adjustment

A warning will be displayed if the zero adjust-
ment has not been performed.

– Show current detector position

When this check box is selected, the cur-
rent position of the measuring detector will be
displayed on the Measurement tab (refer to
section 6.2 "Measurement Tab") in pane (7).
When this check box is cleared, the esti-
mated total duration of the measurement will
be displayed on the Measurement tab (refer to
section 6.2 "Measurement Tab") in pane (7).
This check box is cleared by default.

– Show analysis result online

When this check box is selected, a window
showing the analysis according to the last
selected protocol will be displayed automati-
Figure V-38: Measurement Options dialog -
cally on completion of each measurement. It
Advanced tab
is not necessary to open the Analyze edit win-
dow in this case.
A number of options can be selected and dese-
In the default settings, this window provides a
lected on this tab:
menu bar and a toolbar with the same func-
– Demo Mode tions as in the Analyze edit window (refer to
In demo mode, there will be no communica- chapter XI "'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAn-
tion with the connected devices. The mea- alyze) Module" - 8 "Analyzing Curves"). By
surement will be simulated. However, the dis- selecting the Without menu check box, the
played measuring positions correspond to the menu bar and the toolbar can be removed from
measuring positions of a true measurement. the display.
– Warn about controller limited profile length
A warning will be displayed if the curve length
to measure is longer than the maximum curve
length that can be measured. The maximum
curve length that can be measured depends
on the selected measuring system and the
adjusted limits.
If you accept the selected settings, a curve
with the maximum possible length will be mea-
sured.

278 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

9.4.4 Predefined Depths Tab By clearing the Replace Rxx by [mm] after mea-
surement check box, you choose to preserve the
depths Rxx displayed in the PDD and Profiles
measuring program (refer to section 6.6.1 "PDD
and Profiles Measuring Program") in the Depths
[mm] combo box after the measurement.
By selecting the Replace Rxx by [mm] after mea-
surement check box, you choose to replace the
depths Rxx by the actual measuring depths after
the measurement. With this option, it will not be
necessary to measure and calculate the measur-
ing depths again for the subsequent measure-
ments.

Isodose with plane

In this pane, you can define the measuring depths

Figure V-39: Measurement Options dialog - for the profiles, which are required for measur-
Predefined Depths tab ing isodose distributions with the Plane paral-
lel to central beam measuring program (refer to
section 6.6.2 "Plane parallel to central beam Mea-
PDD and Profiles suring Program").

In the PDD and Profiles measuring program (refer These measuring depths can be set separately for
to section 6.6.1 "PDD and Profiles Measuring Pro- each radiation quality.
gram"), you can use the Depths [mm] combo box
to define measuring depths Rxx that correspond When you add a new radiation quality in the Radi-
to the percentage dose values xx of the measured ation unit Library module, a new isodose depth
depth dose curve (e. g., R100 for the depth of the table will be created automatically on this tab.
100% dose). On the Predefined Depths tab, you Check whether the entered depths are correct.
define the selectable Rxx values in the PDD and
Profiles pane. The actual measuring depths will
be determined by means of the measured depth
dose curve.

D948.131.00/10 en 279
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System - Configuring WaterTankScans

Editing the Tables

– If there are no data in the table, a blank row is

shown that can be edited.
– Rows can be deleted with the Del key.

– New rows can be added with the Ins key. When

all the rows have been deleted, you have to
click a column header before new rows can be
added. Blank rows will be deleted when you
exit the table.

280 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2, and
MP1 Measuring Systems - General Information on WaterTankScans

VI 'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for

the MP3, MP2, and MP1 Measuring Systems

1 General Information on WaterTankScans

CAUTION Furthermore, WaterTankScans is used for sin-

gle-detector measurements in the TPR (tissue
Measurement for monitor calibration.
phantom ratio) mode. When used with MP3 mea-
Incorrect Operation! suring systems, the TPR option is required.
The measuring module WaterTankScans is
WaterTankScans enables you to perform single
no absolute dosemeter for monitor calibration
measuring tasks and series of measuring tasks
according to EN 60731 (IEC 60731).
(e. g., identical measuring task with different field
sizes or energies). Task lists can be created for
WaterTankScans is a module of the BEAMSCAN this purpose (refer to section 11.3 "Working with
software and it is used for single-detector mea- Task Lists").
surements as well as for the graphical represen-
tation, evaluation, and storage of measuring data.

WaterTankScans can be used with the following

measuring systems:

– MP3, MP3-M/S/XS/T/P, MP2, MP1, MP1-S

These measuring systems will be referred to
as "MP3 measuring systems" in the following
chapters.

– BEAMSCAN measuring system

For further information, refer to chapter IV
"'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Mod-
ule for the BEAMSCAN Measuring System".

– BEAMSCAN MR measuring system

For further information, refer to chapter V
"'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Mod-
ule for the BEAMSCAN MR Measuring Sys-
tem".

D948.131.00/10 en 281
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3,
MP2, and MP1 Measuring Systems - Quick Start (Workflow)

2 Starting 3 Quick Start (Workflow)

WaterTankScans
Requirements:
WaterTankScans is started in MEPHYSTO Navi-
The complete measuring system is installed and
gator (also refer to chapter II "MEPHYSTO Navi-
all the components are connected. All the network
gator").
settings have been performed.
• In the Applications area, select the Relative
Dosimetry application group. Basic settings before starting the first
measurement:
• Select the desired measuring system and click
the appropriate measuring module. Edit the detector library via MEPHYSTO Navi-
•
gator → Toolbox area → Configuration appli-
➔ The WaterTankScans main screen will be dis-
cation group → Detector Library (refer to
played.
chapter VIII "'Detector Library' Module")

• Create radiation units via MEPHYSTO Naviga-

tor → Toolbox area → Configuration applica-
tion group → Radiation unit Library (refer to
chapter VII "'Radiation unit Library' Module")

• Start WaterTankScans

• Set communication parameters on the Com-

munication tab via menu Tools → Measure-
ment Options (refer to section 11.4 "Defining
the Measurement Options")

• Create parameter sets in the Continuous

Options dialog via menu Tools → Continuous
Options and in the Step-By-Step Options dia-
log via menu Tools → Step-By-Step Options
(refer to section 11.2 "Setting Up Parameter
Sets")

• Perform settings for the graphical represen-

tation via menu Tools → Options (refer to
chapter III "Basic Functions")

282 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3,
MP2, and MP1 Measuring Systems - Quick Start (Workflow)

Zero adjustment: • Select parameter set:

menu Tools → Continuous Options
• Perform zero adjustment: and
Zero button menu Tools → Step-By-Step Options

• Perform a measurement:
Auto Setup:
– Start measurement:
• Perform Auto Setup adjustments: Start button (or F5)
Auto Setup, Linac, and Measurement tabs – Pause measurement:
Pause button (or F6)
• Start Auto Setup:
Start button – Resume measurement:
Resume button (or F7)
• Switch off Auto Setup mode:
– Select new scale for measurement graphic:
Auto Setup button
Graphics → Normalize Graphics (or F8)

• Save measuring data:

Measurements:
Save button
• Perform settings for the radiation unit:
Linac tab
Evaluations:
– Select radiation unit
→ Name • Analyze measuring data:
Analyze button
– Define settings for current measuring task
→ Modality, Energy, Orientation, etc. • Modify measuring data:
Process button
• Perform settings for measurement:
Measurement tab
– Select and adjust electrometer:
→ click electrometer picture • Exit WaterTankScans

– Select and adjust detectors:

→ click detector picture

– Select measuring mode

– Select measuring program

D948.131.00/10 en 283
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2, and MP1 Measuring Systems - Main Screen

4 Main Screen

Figure VI-1: WaterTankScans main screen

1 Tabs for measurement configuration or for Auto Setup

2 Graphics window

284 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2, and MP1 Measuring Systems - Main Screen

4.1 Explanation of the Display only profiles

Toolbar Icons
Open file Display only depth dose curves

Save data Display profiles and depth dose

curves

Toggle between Auto Setup mode Display 2D isodoses

and measuring mode

Delete displayed curves and share Display 3D isodoses

interface for control unit

Perform zero adjustment Show/hide discrete crosshairs

Start measurement (or press F5) Show/hide continuous crosshairs

Pause measurement (or press F6) Enlarge a section of the graphics

window

Resume measurement (or press Reset the graphics window to its

F7) standard size

Display Analyze edit window (refer Display the online help

to chapter XI "'Scanned Data
Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module")

Display Process edit window (refer The button functions can also be accessed from
to chapter XI "'Scanned Data the menus.
Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module")
For a more detailed description of the button func-
tions and menus, which are used in all modules
of the BEAMSCAN software, refer to chapter III
"Basic Functions".

D948.131.00/10 en 285
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5 Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.1 Preparing the • Set up the measuring system (e. g., electrom-
eter) as required.
Measurement

CAUTION CAUTION
Selection of the false measuring setup in
Electronic components near the radiation field.
WaterTankScans.
Equipment Damage! Erroneous Measure-
Erroneous Measurements!
ments!
Before starting a measurement, check that the
Due to their radiation sensitivity, electronic
position of the water phantom corresponds to
components (e. g., electrometers and control
the position displayed on the Linac tab.
pendants) should be positioned as far as pos-
sible from the radiation field.
• Align your measuring system in the radiation
Electronic components must never be placed field. Adjust the source surface distance.
in the radiation field!

Please also refer to the information given in the CAUTION

corresponding user manuals. Incorrect positioning of the reference detector.

Erroneous Measurements!
Before you can perform measurements with
WaterTankScans, set up the measuring system Check that the entire sensitive volume of the
as follows: reference detector is within the useful beam.

• Install the measuring system and all its com- • Place the detectors in the correct positions.
ponents and put it into service.
• For TPR measurements, also refer to
• Make sure that all the required cables are con- section 7.2 "TPR Measurement".
nected.

• Perform all the required network settings.

HINT
Closely follow the instructions given in the user
manuals of all the components of your measur-
ing system.

286 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Measurements with WaterTankScans

• Via the Detector Library module, adjust the 5.2 Zero Adjustment
detector data in the detector library (refer to
section VIII "'Detector Library' Module"). CAUTION
• In the Radiation unit Library module, create all Zero adjustment with radiation switched on.
necessary radiation units (refer to chapter VII Erroneous Measurements!
"'Radiation unit Library' Module").
Ensure that the zero adjustment is performed
• Start WaterTankScans. without radiation.

• In menu Tools → Measurement Options on the After each restart of the system, you should per-
Communication tab, define the communication form a zero adjustment before the first measure-
settings (also refer to section 11.4 "Defining ment.
the Measurement Options").
• For this, click the Zero but-
• In menu Tools → Continuous Options and in ton or select menu Measure-
menu Tools → Step-By-Step Options, create ment → Zero Electrometer.
all the required parameter sets and select the
parameter set needed for the measurement ➔ The zero adjustment will be performed and an
(refer to section 11.2 "Setting Up Parameter appropriate message will be displayed.
Sets").
If you start a measurement and you have not per-
• In menu Tools → Options, perform the set- formed a zero adjustment before, an appropriate
tings for the graphical representation (refer to message will be displayed. By selecting menu
chapter III "Basic Functions"). Tools → Measurement Options on the Advanced
tab, the display of the message can be enabled
or disabled.

D948.131.00/10 en 287
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.3 Auto Setup HINT

Auto Setup is typically performed with a small-
HINT volume ionization chamber (e. g., Semiflex 3D
This function is not available for the MP2, MP1, type 31021) and photon radiation. Different
MP1-S measuring systems. detectors and different modalities, however,
are used for the different measuring tasks.
Upon starting WaterTankScans, the main screen Therefore, the settings in the Auto Setup mode
will automatically be displayed in the Auto Setup and in the measuring mode are saved in sep-
mode. arate data sets, and they are available for the
next Auto Setup or for the next measurement.
• The Auto Setup mode can be
switched on and off by click-
ing the Auto Setup button or by
selecting menu Tools → Auto
Setup.

These are the tabs on the Auto Setup mode

screen:

– Auto Setup tab

for adjusting and viewing the Auto Setup func-
tions according to section 5.3.2 "Auto Setup
Tab"

– Linac tab
for adjusting the parameters of the radiation
unit
For more information on this tab, refer to
section 6.1 "Linac Tab".

– Measurement tab
for selection of the measurement components
and for defining the measurement parameters
For more information on this tab, refer to
section 6.2 "Measurement Tab".

288 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.3.1 Applying the Measurement

Parameters

By selecting the Use settings for non Auto Setup

measurements check box on the Measurement
tab, you can perform the subsequent non Auto
Setup measurements with the following measure-
ment parameters:

– Radiation unit
– Energy

– Applicator or wedge filter

– Block

– Measuring detector and the corresponding

settings

– Selected electrometer

– Reference detector and the corresponding set-

tings

– Measuring mode and the corresponding para-

meters

– Maximum dose rate

The check box is cleared by default whenever the

Auto Setup mode is opened and must be explicitly
selected.

You are not prompted when leaving the Auto

Setup mode.

D948.131.00/10 en 289
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.3.2 Auto Setup Tab

3
1

2
4

Figure VI-2: Auto Setup tab

290 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Measurements with WaterTankScans

These are the elements of the Auto Setup tab: 5.3.3 Auto Setup Functions

1 Indication of the currently set field size and With MP3 measuring systems, only the Beam
measuring depth Center Adjustment function is available in the
Auto Setup mode. All other functions are only
2 Selection, status, and correction values for the available for the BEAMSCAN measuring system.
Beam Center Adjustment function

3 Button to open the Adjust Parameters dialog 5.3.3.1 Beam Center Adjustment
for adjustment of the field size and measuring
depth With this function, the offset of the coordinate sys-
tem with respect to the central axis is determined.
4 Area for indication of the correction values
WaterTankScans determines the center of the set
5 Status field size by measuring an inplane and a cross-
plane profile at the adjusted measuring depth. The
no indica- function not performed or deviation in each axis direction results from the
tion failed 50% dose values of the respective profile. The
function successfully per- deviations are displayed and stored in the control
formed unit. During the measurement, the graphics win-
dow displays the measuring data of the two pro-
files.

The accuracy of the displayed deviations is

< 0.2 mm.

The radiation must be switched on for this mea-

surement.

Start the function by clicking the Start button.

A message will be displayed instructing the user

to adjust the radiation unit and to switch on the
radiation. Confirm this message upon completion
of the adjustments and when the radiation unit has
stabilized.

The measurement can be suspended by clicking

the Pause button and resumed by clicking the
Resume button.

D948.131.00/10 en 291
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.3.4 Performing Auto Setup ➔ Once an Auto Setup function has been started,
a progress bar is displayed below the graphic.
WARNING
➔ Upon completion of the Auto Setup
Improper handling.
function, the status indication will be
Bodily Injury! updated, i. e., if the function was suc-
cessful, the green check mark will be
For controlling the water phantom from the PC
displayed.
in the control room: Check that no other oper-
ator is present in the treatment room.
➔ If adjustments must be performed at the radi-
ation unit or when the radiation must be switch
• On the Auto Setup tab, adjust the measuring on, appropriate messages will be displayed
parameters for the Auto Setup measurements. before the Auto Setup function starts.
For this, click the Edit button and adjust the
field size and measuring depth in the Adjust • Confirm these messages upon completion of
Parameters dialog. the adjustments and when the radiation unit
has stabilized.
• On the Linac and Measurement tabs, adjust
the remaining measuring parameters for the • If necessary, individual Auto Setup functions
Auto Setup measurements (also refer to can be restarted.
section 6 "Setting Up the Measuring Parame-
ters").
• When all desired Auto Setup
• To start Auto Setup, click the Start button (or functions have been completed,
press the F5 key) or select menu Measure- switch off the Auto Setup mode
ment → Start → from Beginning. by clicking the Auto Setup
button or by selecting menu
Tools → Auto Setup.

➔ WaterTankScans is now ready to perform

measurements.

292 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.4 Performing the 5.4.1 Setting parameters for the

Measurement measurement

• Configure all the measurement parameters on

WARNING the Linac tab according to section 6.1 "Linac
Improper handling. Tab".
Bodily Injury!
• Configure all the measurement parameters on
For controlling the water phantom from the PC the Measurement tab according to section 6.2
in the control room: Check that no other oper- "Measurement Tab".
ator is present in the treatment room.
As an alternative, you can apply the measure-
ment parameters of the Auto Setup mode by
selecting the Use settings for non Auto Setup
Requirements:
measurements check box on the Measure-
– The Auto Setup function Beam Center Adjust- ment tab in the Auto Setup mode. For further
ment should have been performed according information, refer to section 5.3 "Auto Setup".
to section 5.3 "Auto Setup". Otherwise, an
appropriate message will be displayed. It is
5.4.2 Starting the Measurement
possible, however, to perform measurements.

CAUTION
Measurements with false measuring parame-
ters.

Erroneous Measurements!
If you start a new measurement after loading
old measuring data, the parameters of the old
measurement will be applied to the new one.
The parameters may be different from the para-
meters currently stored in the Radiation unit
Library module.

• To start the measurement, click the Start but-

ton (or press the F5 key) or select menu Mea-
surement → Start → from Beginning.

D948.131.00/10 en 293
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Measurements with WaterTankScans

➔ For measurements with the TANDEM elec- 5.4.3 Stopping the Measurement
trometer, you can request a check of the
adjusted high voltage. This option can be There are different ways of pausing the measure-
set by selecting menu Tools → Measurement ment:
Options on the HV and Presets tab (refer to
section 11.4.1 "HV and Presets Tab"). • To stop the measurement immediately, click
the Pause button (or press the F6 key) or
➔ The measurements defined in the measuring select menu Measurement → Stop → imme-
task will be completed. diately.

➔ The scales of the measuring axes will be • To stop the measurement after the cur-
adjusted automatically. In addition, the vertical rently measured curve, select menu Measure-
scale of the graphic can be adjusted with the ment → Stop → after Curve.
F8 key during the measurement.

5.4.4 Resuming the Measurement

HINT
If the curves are always slightly too high, HINT
you can go to the Measurement tab (refer to
When resuming measurements in the Contin-
section 6.2 "Measurement Tab") and select a
uous Scans measuring mode, only complete
higher dose rate to optimize the scaling.
profiles can be measured.

➔ The measurement will start with the depth

There are different ways of resuming a measure-
dose curve, and then the module will switch
ment:
automatically to the profile measurement.

• To resume a measurement, click the Resume

➔ A color will be assigned to each curve in the
button (or press the F7 button) or select menu
graphic.
Measurement → Start → from Last Position
➔ Depending on the selected display format, the (Resume).
depth dose curve and/or all the profiles will be
➔ The last three measuring points will be mea-
displayed at the end of the measurement.
sured again, and then the measurement will
➔ In the Points and Output Factors measuring continue.
programs (refer to section 6.7.5 "Points Mea-
or
suring Program"), only the list of measured val-
ues will be displayed.

294 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Measurements with WaterTankScans

• To resume a measurement from a particular 5.4.5 Repeating Individual

curve, first select the desired curve, and then Measurements
select menu Measurement → Start → from
Selected Curve. Individual measurements can be repeated in the
following measuring programs:
➔ The measurement will continue from the first – PDD and Profiles
measuring point of the selected curve. – Plane parallel to central beam
– Plane perpendicular to central beam
or – Star Pattern

• To resume a measurement from a particular This function is not available in Auto Setup mode.
measuring point, first mark the desired mea-
suring point with the discrete crosshairs. Then
select menu Measurement → Start → from
Crosshairs. Individual measurements can only be repeated
after a task has been completed.
➔ The measurement will continue from the
marked measuring point. • Make sure that the displayed information
matches the selected curve, i. e., display of
or the profiles if profile measurements are to be
repeated or display of the depth dose curves
• If you want to repeat the complete mea- if measurements of depth dose curves are to
surement, click the Start button (or press be repeated.
the F5 key) or select menu Measure-
ment → Start → from Beginning. • Select the curves that you want to measure
again.
➔ The complete measurement will be repeated.
The curves measured before will be discarded. • Select menu Measurement → Start → Mea-
suring Selected Curves.

➔ The selected curves will be removed from the

display, measured, and then displayed again.

D948.131.00/10 en 295
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Measurements with WaterTankScans

If a repeat measurement is paused (refer to 5.4.6 Level Indicator

section 5.4.3 "Stopping the Measurement"), the
following data will be displayed: When measuring with the TANDEM or the
TANDEM XDR, the Measurement tab (refer to
– all measurements not to be repeated
Figure VI-5) will display the level indicator.
– the measurements already repeated and the
corresponding new measured values

– the paused measurement in its current state 1

– the measurements to be repeated and the cor-

responding old measured values

These are your options in this case: 2 3

• Resume the measurement as described in

section 5.4.4 "Resuming the Measurement". Figure VI-3: Level indicator

• Repeat individual measurements as described 1 Measuring range that is set for measuring
above. and reference detector
2 Current at the last measured point for mea-
suring and reference detector

HINT 3 Bar graph for measuring and reference

detector
If a depth dose curve is to be measured again
and the profile depths are to be determined
from this curve, e. g., at depth R50, the profile Bar Graph for Measuring and Reference
measurements must be repeated as well. Detector

– 100% of the display corresponds to the max-

imum measurable current for the connected
electrometer in the selected measuring range.

– dark green bars:

The measured current is within the measuring
range.

– bar on the right is red:

The measured current is very close to the
upper limit of the measuring range.

296 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.4.7 Automatic Analysis • In menu Tools → Measurement Options on

the Advanced tab, select the Show analysis
In WaterTankScans, you can directly analyze a result online check box (refer to section 11.4.4
measurement and display the result without open- "Advanced Tab"). This check box is selected
ing the Analyze edit window. by default.

The window in WaterTankScans that shows the ➔ When the measurement of a curve has been
analysis result corresponds to the Analyze edit completed, a window with the analysis result
window. of the measured curve will be displayed.

The analysis is performed with the most recent ➔ When the measurement of the next curve has
settings in the Analyze edit window. been completed, the window will display the
analysis result of the new curve.
For more information on the Analyze edit
window, refer to chapter XI "'Scanned Data ➔ When all measurements have been completed
Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module" - 8 "Analyzing or a measurement has been paused, you can
Curves". select one of the curves. Then, the window
will display the analysis result of the selected
The automatic analysis is available for the follow- curve. For profiles, it is possible to display the
ing measuring programs: analysis results of multiple, selected profiles.
– PDD and Profiles
– Plane parallel to central beam In the default settings, this window provides a
– Plane perpendicular to central beam menu bar and a toolbar with the same functions
– Star Pattern as in the Analyze edit window. Thus, you can also
select the protocol for the analysis and edit the
This function is not available in Auto Setup mode. parameters for the analysis in this window.

To display the window without menu bar and tool-

bar, go to menu Tools → Measurement Options
and select the Without menu check box on the
Advanced tab.

D948.131.00/10 en 297
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Measurements with WaterTankScans

The window with the analysis result will be closed 5.4.8 Saving Measurement Data
in the following cases: Automatically

– Clicking the appropriate button in the title bar An interruption of a task, e. g., due to a sys-
of the window tem crash, may cause the loss of measurement
data acquired up to this point. To avoid this situ-
– Selecting menu Edit → Process, Edit → Ana- ation, WaterTankScans saves the data automat-
lyze Information or Edit → Compared Scans ically whenever the measurement of a curve or
point (for point measurements) has been com-
– Starting a new measurement with the Start pleted. The settings and measurement data are
button saved.

– Deleting all measurement data with the Clear The automatic storage is not available for the fol-
button lowing measurements:
– Measurements in Auto Setup mode
– Continuous TPR Measurement measuring
mode
– Stationary Scans measuring mode
– BeamAdjust measuring mode

HINT
The target file for the automatically saved data
is always the same. After completion of a task,
the file will be overwritten the next time a task
is started.

• To resume an incomplete task, load the

automatically saved data by selecting menu
File → Open last measurement data.

➔ The measured curves or points will be dis-

played.

298 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Measurements with WaterTankScans

• Resume the measurement as described in 5.5 Selecting Curves

section 5.4.4 "Resuming the Measurement".
You select a curve in the graphics window by dou-
or
ble-clicking. To select additional curves, press and
• Repeat the entire task by clicking the Start but- hold the Shift key down while double-clicking the
ton (or press the F5 key) or by selecting menu curves.
Measurement → Start → from Beginning.
By selecting menu Edit → Select All, you select
all the curves. With Invert Selection, you invert the
selection. With Discard Selection, you cancel the
selection of the curves.

For further information on selecting curves, refer

to chapter III "Basic Functions" (3.1 "Selecting
Curves").

5.6 Curve Properties

• To display the properties of a curve, mark the
desired curve and select menu Edit → Proper-
ties.

➔ The Properties box will be displayed, showing

all the information available about the selected
curve.

For further information on the Properties box, refer

to chapter III "Basic Functions" (3.2 "Curve Prop-
erties").

D948.131.00/10 en 299
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.7 Saving Measuring Data 5.8 Loading Stored

Measuring Data
• To save measuring data, click
the Save button or select menu Files can only be loaded when they are in the
File → Save As. MEPHYSTO MCC format (*.mcc) and when they
contain data measured with WaterTankScans.
• In the standard Save As dialog, enter a file
name and the directory. You can overwrite • To load measuring data, click
existing files or create new files. the Open button or select menu
For further information on the suggested file File → Open.
names, refer to chapter III "Basic Functions" (1
• Select a file from the standard Open dialog.
"Definitions").

➔ The currently displayed data will be overwrit-

➔ The measuring points of the curves will be
ten.
saved unnormalized.

➔ If the currently displayed data are not yet

➔ Furthermore, all the settings on the Linac and
saved, a message will be shown and you can
Measurement tabs will be saved and will, thus,
save them if required.
be available when the saved measuring data
will be loaded.

Measuring data of WaterTankScans will always

be saved in the MEPHYSTO MCC format (*.mcc).

300 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Measurements with WaterTankScans

5.9 Deleting Measuring Data

• Click the Clear button or select
menu Measurement → Clear to
remove the measured or loaded
data from the display.

• To permanently remove complete measure-

ment files and directories, please use Win-
dows Explorer.

HINT
By clicking the Clear button, you also release
the interface to the control unit. Other programs
will then be able again to access the connected
devices.

D948.131.00/10 en 301
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6 Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.1 Linac Tab

2 5

3 6

Figure VI-4: Linac tab

302 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

On the Linac tab, you can set the following para- 4 Comment field
meters of the radiation unit: For each measurement, a comment can be
entered that will be saved with the result of the
1 Slider to select the orientation of the measur- measurement. This comment is shown on the
ing system Linac tab and on the Measurement tab. The
The options depend on the measuring system comment can be edited on both tabs.
that was selected at the time the module was
Alternatively, you can use the comment field
started in MEPHYSTO Navigator.
to display a message before the measurement
Make sure that the coordinate system refers to
starts. For this, enter the "Msg:" command
the currently selected radiation unit. The direc-
before the text.
tion of the coordinate system determines the
Example:
offset direction (asymmetry) and the off-axis
If you want the user to select a specific para-
values.
meter set in the Step-By-Step Options dialog,
2 Indication of the orientation of the measuring you could, e. g., write the following text in the
system (e. g., MP3 measuring system) comment field:
Msg: In the Step-By-Step Options dialog,
3 Graphical representation of the field definition select the XXX parameter set.
The possibility of showing messages is partic-
ularly useful to inform the user of required set-
tings when working with measuring task lists.

D948.131.00/10 en 303
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

5 Combo boxes and input boxes to adjust the 6 Combo boxes and buttons for defining the irra-
parameters of the radiation unit: diated field:

– Name: – Field size, inplane x crossplane

name of the radiation unit used (in cm x cm), with two decimal places
Selection of a radiation unit created in the
– Shape of the field
Radiation unit Library module (default set-
tings: "DEMO LINAC" and "STANDARD") – Reference depth of the field
SSD, SID, or used-defined depth
– Modality:
Modality of the radiation – Button to show and hide additional input
boxes for defining asymmetry
– Energy:
Depending on how the radiation unit is con-
Energy in the unit [MV] or [MeV]
figured, you can use either the Offset or the
– Applicator / Wedge: X1X2 format.
Applicator (in case of electron radiation) or
wedge filter (in case of photon radiation) 7 Input boxes for the measurement setup

– Block: – Source surface distance

Number of the block used (SSD)

After selecting a radiation unit created in – Gantry angle

the Radiation unit Library module, the para- – Collimator angle
meters defined there (modality, energy,
etc.) can be selected from the other combo The measurement of the curves follows the
boxes. collimator and the gantry angles. If the
mechanical design of the measuring device
To create your own radiation unit or edit an does not allow the measurement of the angle
existing unit, use the Radiation unit Library (e. g., MP2 or MP1), these values cannot be
module (refer to chapter VII "'Radiation unit entered.
Library' Module").

304 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.2 Measurement Tab

2 9

4 10

11
6

7 12

Figure VI-5: Measurement tab

D948.131.00/10 en 305
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

On the Measurement tab, you select the mea- 5 Button to rotate the preview by 90°
suring components and determine the measuring
tasks. 6 Preview of the curves to measure as frontal
view and top view
1 Button to select and adjust the electrometer
The current settings for the selected electrom- 7 Indication of the current position of the mea-
eter will be displayed in the form of a tooltip suring detector or indication of the estimated
when you move the mouse cursor over the pic- total duration of the measurement
ture. You can switch between the two indications
During the measurement, the level indicator in menu Tools → Measurement Options on
for the currents of the measuring detector and the Advanced tab (refer to section 11.4.4
the reference detector (refer to section 5.4.6 "Advanced Tab").
"Level Indicator") will be displayed instead.
8 Comment field (refer to section 6.1 "Linac
2 Field for input of the maximum dose rate for Tab")
scaling the graphic
9 Pane for selecting the measuring mode and
3 Button to select and adjust the detectors adjusting the corresponding parameters
The current settings for the selected detectors
will be displayed in the form of a tooltip when 10 Button to restore the default settings of the
you move the mouse cursor over the picture. measuring parameters

4 List box to select the measuring programs 11 Pane for adjustment of the parameters for the
– PDD and Profiles selected measuring program
– Plane parallel to central beam
12 List box for selection of the measuring medium
– Plane perpendicular to central beam
Water or Air
– Star Pattern
– Points
– Continuous TPR Measurement
– Step-By-Step TPR Measurement
– BeamAdjust
– Beam Inclination
– Output Factors
– Stationary Scans
– TG51 Lead Foil Distance

The selectable measuring programs depend

on the selected measuring system.

306 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.3 Adjusting the • Select the appropriate electrometer.

Electrometer Define the desired measuring ranges for the
•
measuring detector and the reference detec-
tor.
1 For the electrometers TANDEM and
TANDEM XDR, you can also select the auto-
2
matic determination of the measuring range.
– autoselect for max. dose rate:
The optimal measuring range for the mea-
Figure VI-6: Pane for selecting and adjusting suring detector will be determined by
the electrometer means of the set maximum dose rate (refer
to Figure VI-6) and the selected detector.
1 Button to select and adjust the electrometer
– autoselect by measurement:
2 Field for input of the maximum dose rate for The optimal measuring range for the refer-
scaling the graphic ence detector will be determined automati-
cally at the start of the measurement.

• Confirm the entries with OK.

• To adjust the electrometer, click the electrom-
eter shown (refer to Figure VI-6).

➔ The PTW Electrometer Library dialog will be

displayed:

Figure VI-7: PTW Electrometer Library

dialog

D948.131.00/10 en 307
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.4 Selecting Detectors • If you use a reference chamber for the mea-
surement, click the Reference Channel button.

➔ The PTW Detector Library dialog will be

expanded by a pane for selection of the refer-
ence detector.
1
• Select the desired reference detector by
selecting the appropriate check box.

Figure VI-8: Pane for selecting and adjusting • If the reference detector is not required any
the detectors longer, you can deselect it. For this, press and
hold the Ctrl key while clearing the appropriate
1 Button to select and adjust the detectors check box.
The picture shows the measuring detector.
• Confirm the entries with OK.

The selectable detectors and the associated para-

• To select detectors, click the detector shown meters (e. g., the calibration factors) are stored
(refer to Figure VI-8). in the detector library. The detector library can be
edited by means of the Detector Library module
➔ The PTW Detector Library dialog for selec- (refer to chapter VIII "'Detector Library' Module").
tion of the detectors will be displayed (refer to If you have not entered the calibration factor for a
Figure VI-9). detector in the detector library, the nominal value
of the calibration factor will be used for the mea-
• Select the desired measuring detector by
surement.
selecting the appropriate check box.

• If required, enter the air density correction val-

ues (refer to section 6.4.1 "Air Density Correc-
tion") and/or a user-defined correction factor
(refer to section 6.4.2 "User-Defined Correc-
tion").

308 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

Figure VI-9: PTW Detector Library dialog

D948.131.00/10 en 309
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.4.1 Air Density Correction ➔ The correction factor kTP for air density correc-
tion is calculated according to the following for-
HINT mula:
An air density correction can only be performed
for vented ionization chambers.

When using vented ionization chambers, the

Air density correction check box must be T temperature in measuring volume [°C]
selected in the detector library. P atmospheric pressure at measuring site
[hPa]
T0 reference temperature 20 °C or 22 °C
• Enter the current temperature and atmos-
P0 reference atmospheric pressure
pheric pressure of the measuring site in the
1013.25 hPa
appropriate input boxes.
With the default settings, the following input
ranges and defaults apply: The reference temperature is taken from the
detector library.
Temperature
Input range: (10 … 40) °C ➔ If the selected detectors are vented ioniza-
Default: 20 °C tion chambers, i. e., in the detector library, the
Atmospheric pressure Air density correction check box is selected,
Input range: (700 … 1060) hPa all further measurements will be corrected by
Default: 1013.25 hPa multiplication with this correction factor.

• When you select the Accept values outside

rated range of use check box, the following 6.4.2 User-Defined Correction
extended input range applies:
Irrespective of the air density correction, other cor-
Temperature: (5 … 45) °C rection factors can be taken into account, e. g., for
Atmospheric radiation quality, polarity effect, or saturation with
pressure: (540 … 1100) hPa ion recombination loss.

• If required, enter an additional correction factor

kUser.

Input range: 0.1 … 10

Default: 1

➔ All subsequent measurements will now be cor-

rected by multiplication with this correction fac-
tor.

310 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.5 Selecting and Setting the 6.5.1 Continuous Scans Measuring

Measuring Mode Mode

Requirements:

– TBA CONTROL UNIT with firmware version

1.30 or higher

– The measuring device is a TANDEM or a

TANDEM XDR whose amplifier range time con-
stants are known (refer to section 11.4.3 "TAN-
DEM TC Tab").
1
– The measuring device is connected via the
TBA CONTROL UNIT.
Figure VI-10: Pane for selecting the measur- – A baud rate of 38400 is set at the measuring
ing mode and adjusting the cor- device.
responding parameters

1 Pane for selecting the measuring mode and

adjusting the corresponding parameters • In menu Tools → Measurement Options,
on the Communication tab, select the TBA
CU with Continuous Mode option (also refer
to section 11.4 "Defining the Measurement
• Using the list box (refer to Figure VI-10), select Options").
the appropriate measuring mode and adjust
the associated parameters. ➔ The Continuous Scans measuring mode can
now be selected.

• In menu Tools → Measurement Options, on

the TANDEM TC tab, select the appropriate
settings (also refer to section 11.4 "Defining
the Measurement Options").

D948.131.00/10 en 311
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

For the Continuous Scans measuring mode, In the Continuous Scans measuring mode, the
observe the following restrictions: detector moves continuously while the measure-
ments are being performed.
– You can only select scan angles that are mul-
tiples of 45°.
The distance between the resulting measurement
– Diagonals are only possible in square fields. points is preset to a resolution Res. of 1 mm and
cannot be changed.
– You can only set gantry angles that are multi-
ples of 90°.
• From the PDD list box, select the scan speed
– You can only set collimator angles that are for depth dose curve measurements.
multiples of 45°.
When you select the Energy dep. option,
the energy-dependent scan speeds set in the
Continuous Options dialog will be used.

• From the Profiles list box, select the scan

speed for profile measurements.

When you select the Depth dep. option, the

depth-dependent speeds set in the Continu-
ous Options dialog will be used.

➔ The current settings of the scan speeds will

be displayed in the form of a tooltip when you
move the mouse cursor over the area.

In the Continuous Scans measuring mode, you

can perform measurements with and without ref-
erence detector.

For further information on the Continuous Options

dialog, refer to section 11.2 "Setting Up Parameter
Sets".

312 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.5.2 Stepwise vs Time Measuring 6.5.3 Stepwise vs Trigger

Mode Measuring Mode

In the Stepwise vs Time measuring mode, a mea- In the Stepwise vs Trigger measuring mode,
surement will be performed at a measurement the measurement is controlled by the number of
point until the measuring time has elapsed. external trigger signals at the electrometer. The
measurement starts with the next signal and ends
• Enter the desired measuring time at Meas. after the set number of signals. In this measuring
Time [s]. mode, you will always measure without a refer-
ence detector.
HINT
The measurement graphic of trigger measure-
Adapt the measuring time to the dose rate
ments is always scaled to 1 cGy/MU.
to be measured and the detector used. Typi-
cal values for semiflex chambers are 0.05 to
• Enter the desired number of monitor pulses at
0.2 seconds for the TANDEM electrometer and
Monitor Pulses.
0.5 seconds for all the other electrometers.
• Click the … button.
In the Stepwise vs Time measuring mode, you
can perform measurements with and without ref- ➔ The Monitor Trigger dialog will be displayed:
erence detector. The selection of a reference
detector is only available for electrometers with • Adjust the appropriate parameters:
two detector inputs. – Timeout:
If the number of trigger signals is not
reached before the timeout expires, the
measurement will be aborted.

– Edge:
With Rising Edge, the measurement will be
controlled by the rising edge of the trigger
signal, and with Falling Edge, it will be con-
trolled by the falling edge.

D948.131.00/10 en 313
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.5.4 Manual Start/Stop Measuring 6.6 Measuring Modes for

Mode Spill Measurements
In the Manual Start/Stop measuring mode, each
measurement must be started and stopped man- HINT
ually. Some radiation units, e. g., for protons and
heavy particles, deliver the radiation in the form
The Manual Start/Stop measuring mode is only of spills. Beam pauses - periods without radia-
available in the Points, Output Factors, and Sta- tion - interrupt the spills.
tionary Scans measuring programs.
By default, the measuring modes for spill mea-
For further information, refer to the descrip-
surements will not be displayed. To display these
tion of the measuring programs Points (refer to
measuring modes, select menu Tools → Mea-
section 6.7.5 "Points Measuring Program"), Out-
surement Options, and on the HV and Presets
put Factors (refer to section 6.7.8 "Output Fac-
tab, select the Show measurement presets for
tors Measuring Program"), and Stationary Scans
spills option (refer to section 11.4.1 "HV and Pre-
(refer to section 6.7.9 "Stationary Scans Measur-
sets Tab").
ing Program").

6.6.1 Spill Start/Stop Measuring

Mode

In the Spill Start/Stop measuring mode, the mea-

surement is controlled by the number of external
trigger signals at the electrometer. The measure-
ment starts with the next signal and ends after the
set number of signals. In this measuring mode,
you will always measure with the reference detec-
tor.

• Enter the desired number of trigger signals at

Number of Triggers.

• Click the … button.

➔ The Spill Start/Stop dialog will be displayed.

314 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

• Adjust the appropriate parameters: 6.6.2 Spill by Time Measuring Mode

– Timeout:
In the Spill by Time measuring mode, the mea-
If the number of trigger signals is not
surement is carried out in a defined time window
reached before the timeout expires, the
within the spill. It is ensured that the existing signal
measurement will be aborted.
is above the adjusted threshold. In this measuring
– Edge: mode, you will always measure with the reference
With Rising Edge, the measurement will be detector.
controlled by the rising edge of the trigger
signal, and with Falling Edge, it will be con- • Enter the desired time window at Meas. Time
trolled by the falling edge. [s].

Example: • Click the … button.

Number of Triggers = 2 and Rising Edge
➔ The Spill by Time dialog will be displayed.

• Adjust the appropriate parameters:

1
– Threshold:
Threshold (current) for the measurement
2
– Pause Time:
3 Interval between the spills without radiation

– Timeout:
Figure VI-11: Spill Start/Stop measuring If no valid measured value is available
mode before the timeout expires, the measure-
ment will be aborted.
1 Spills
2 Trigger signal HINT
3 Measuring interval To make sure that radiation is always present
during a measurement, the measuring time
must be shorter than the pause time.

D948.131.00/10 en 315
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

Example: The entered measuring time results in 6.6.4 Software Trigger Measuring
three measuring points. Mode

If a trigger signal is not available from the radiation

device, triggering can be done by means of the
1
reference detector. For this, the measurement is
2 controlled by the current in the reference channel
in the Software Trigger measuring mode. In this
3 mode, the measurement starts when the current
in the reference channel exceeds the set thresh-
old. The measurement ends after the number of
Figure VI-12: Spill by Time measuring mode set trigger signals when the current in the refer-
ence channel is below the threshold. In this mea-
1 Spill suring mode, measurements will thus always be
2 Threshold performed with the reference detector.
3 Measuring intervals
• Enter the desired number of trigger signals at
Triggers.
6.6.3 Accumulated Charge
• Click the … button.
Measuring Mode
➔ The Software trigger dialog will be displayed.
In the Accum. Charge measuring mode, a mea-
surement will be performed at a measurement
• Adjust the appropriate parameters:
point until the accumulated charge in the refer-
ence channel reaches the set value. In this mea- – Threshold:
suring mode, you will always measure with the ref- Threshold (current) for the reference chan-
erence detector. nel

– Timeout:
• Enter the charge to be accumulated in the ref-
If no valid measured value is available
erence channel at Charge [C].
before the timeout expires, the measure-
ment will be aborted.
• Click the … button.

➔ The Accumulated Charge dialog will be dis-

played.

• Adjust the appropriate parameters:

– Timeout:
If the specified charge is not reached in
the reference channel before the timeout
expires, the measurement will be aborted.

316 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

Example: 6.7 Selecting and Adjusting

Number of Triggers = 2
the Measuring Program

Figure VI-13: Software Trigger measuring

mode

1 Spills
2 Threshold
3 Measuring interval

Figure VI-14: Measurement tab, PDD and

Profiles view

• Using the list box (refer to Figure VI-14), select

the desired measuring program and adjust the
associated parameters.

➔ The content of the Measurement tab will

change with the selected measuring program.

➔ The types of curves that can be measured

depend on the selected measuring system.

➔ The designations of the profiles correspond to

the axis designations defined in the Radiation
unit Library module for the selected radiation
unit.

D948.131.00/10 en 317
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

HINT 6.7.1 PDD and Profiles Measuring

Program
For all profile measurements, the measur-
ing depth can be set to the dose maximum With this measuring program, you can measure
Dmax. The dose maximum Dmax depends on the a depth dose curve as well as inplane and cross-
energy set on the Linac tab. plane profiles.

• For this, select the depth dmax in the

Depths [mm] combo box.

➔ The measuring depth used is the depth

Nominal dmax entered in the Radiation unit
Library module for the appropriate radiation
unit and the respective energy.

➔ The energy-dependent depths dmax will also

be transferred to the task list (refer to
section 11.3 "Working with Task Lists").

Figure VI-15: Measurement tab, PDD and

Profiles view

• Define the type of curve to measure by select-

ing the appropriate check box.

• Define the measuring direction for the depth

dose curve
– from top to bottom
– from bottom to top (recommended)

• Define the measuring parameters for the pro-

file measurements:

– Measuring direction:
– all profiles from left to right
– all profiles from right to left
– meandering (recommended)

– Measurement angle:
– diagonal
– angle referred to the axes of the mea-
suring system

318 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

– Offset Offaxis [mm] referred to the center Passing over the identifier Depths [mm] with the
axis of the measuring system mouse displays a tooltip with all the entered mea-
suring depths.
– If only halfsided profiles will be measured
(e. g., when the irradiated field is large),
➔ The step intervals for the depth dose curve and
select the halfsided Profiles check box.
the profiles will be copied from the selected
parameter set.
• Define the measuring depths Depths [mm].
You can combine the following options as
needed. The measuring depths have to be
separated with a blank.

– Measurement in user-defined measuring

depths

– Measurement in the dose maximum Dmax,

i. e., in the energy-dependent depth dmax

– Measurement in the Rxx depths that corre-

spond to the percentage dose values xx of
the depth dose curve

HINT
Define the possible Rxx depths by selecting
menu Tools → Measurement Options on the
Predefined Depths tab (refer to section 11.4.5
"Predefined Depths Tab").

• For measuring in the Rxx depths, select

the desired Rxx depths in the Depths [mm]
combo box.

➔ The actual measuring depths will be deter-

mined by means of the appropriate depth
dose curve. This means that the depth dose
curve will always be measured even if this
curve type is deactivated.

➔ The Rxx depths will also be transferred to

the task list.

D948.131.00/10 en 319
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.7.2 Plane parallel to central beam • Define the measuring direction for the depth
Measuring Program dose curve:
– from top to bottom
With this measuring program, you can measure – from bottom to top (recommended)
the inplane or crossplane profiles in a plane par-
allel to the central axis. By selecting or clearing • Define the measuring parameters for the pro-
the optimized check box, you determine whether file measurements:
the distances between the profiles will be variable
– Type of profile:
or fixed.
– crossplane
– inplane
1. Isodose Distribution: – Measuring direction:
– all profiles from left to right
When the optimized check box is selected, an – all profiles from right to left
isodose distribution will be measured. The mea- – meandering (recommended)
surement is adapted to the field distribution in the
depth. – Measurement angle:
To display isodoses, the measurement of a depth – diagonal
dose curve is required. The profiles will be nor- – angle referred to the axes of the mea-
malized to that curve. suring system

– Offset Offaxis [mm] referred to the center

• Select the optimized check box (default set- axis of the measuring system
ting).
– If only halfsided profiles will be measured
(e. g., when the irradiated field is large),
select the halfsided Profiles check box.

➔ The step intervals for the depth dose curve and

the profiles will be copied from the selected
parameter set.

➔ The measuring depths for the profiles depend

on the set energy. They are copied from the
tables by selecting menu Tools → Measure-
ment Options on the Predefined Depths tab.
Passing over the identifier Depths [mm] with
the mouse displays a tooltip with all the
entered measuring depths.

Figure VI-16: Measurement tab, Plane

parallel to central beam view
- Plane optimized

320 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

2. Matrix: – Measurement angle:

– diagonal
When the optimized check box is cleared, a rec- – angle referred to the axes of the mea-
tangular matrix will be measured with the selected suring system
step interval Resolution.
– Offset Offaxis [mm] referred to the center
• Clear the optimized check box. axis of the measuring system

– Step interval Resolution [mm]

– Overscan factor Overscan Factor:

All curves have the same length. The curve
length is determined by multiplying the
overscan factor with the field size in the ref-
erence depth.

• Define the measuring depths Depths [mm]:

– Range From … To and the step interval

Step
– user-defined measuring depths or the
energy-dependent depths (energy dep.,
refer to the measurement of the isodose
distribution)
Figure VI-17: Measurement tab, Plane The measuring depths have to be sepa-
parallel to central beam view rated with a blank.
Passing over the identifier Depths [mm]
• Define the measuring parameters for the pro- with the mouse displays a tooltip with all the
file measurements: entered measuring depths.
– Type of profile:
– crossplane
– inplane

– Measuring direction:
– all profiles from left to right
– all profiles from right to left
– meandering (recommended)

D948.131.00/10 en 321
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.7.3 Plane perpendicular to central • Define the measuring parameters for the pro-
beam Measuring Program file measurements:

– Type of profile:
With this measuring program, you can measure
– crossplane
inplane or crossplane profiles in a plane perpen-
– inplane
dicular to the central axis. By selecting or clearing
the optimized check box, you determine whether – Measuring direction:
the distances between the profiles will be variable – all profiles from left to right
or fixed. – all profiles from right to left
– meandering (recommended)

1. Optimized step interval: • Define the measuring depth Depth [mm]:

When the optimized check box is selected, the – Measurement in user-defined measuring
step intervals for the profiles will be copied from depth
the selected parameter set. – Measurement in the dose maximum Dmax,
i. e., in the energy-dependent depth dmax
• Select the optimized check box (default set-
ting). ➔ The step intervals for the profiles will be copied
from the selected parameter set.

➔ The number of the profiles to be measured is

determined by the Step-by-Step parameter set
selected last.

Figure VI-18: Measurement tab, Plane per-

pendicular to central beam view
- Plane optimized

322 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

2. Fixed step interval: – Step interval Resolution [mm]:

The number of the profiles to be measured
When the optimized check box is cleared, the pro- is also determined by the step interval.
files will be measured with a fixed step interval
– Overscan factor Overscan Factor:
Resolution.
All curves have the same length. The curve
• Clear the optimized check box. length is determined by multiplying the
overscan factor with the field size in the ref-
erence depth.

• Define the measuring depth Depth [mm]:

– Measurement in user-defined measuring

depth

– Measurement in the dose maximum Dmax,

i. e., in the energy-dependent depth dmax

Figure VI-19: Measurement tab, Plane

perpendicular to central
beam view

• Define the measuring parameters for the pro-

file measurements:

– Type of profile:
– crossplane
– inplane

– Measuring direction:
– all profiles from left to right
– all profiles from right to left
– meandering (recommended)

D948.131.00/10 en 323
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.7.4 Star Pattern Measuring – If you also want to measure the diagonal
Program profiles, select the Diagonals check box.

– If only halfsided profiles will be measured

With this measuring program, you can measure
(e. g., when the irradiated field is large),
the inplane and crossplane profiles at specific
select the halfsided Profiles check box.
angles.
Then, define the half of the profile to be
measured:
0° … < 180° or 180° … < 360°.

HINT
When measuring two halfsided star profiles
with shifting of the water tank, you have to
select the option 0.. <= 180 for the first mea-
surement of the halfsided profiles and the
option 180.. <= 360 for the second measure-
ment. Then, you can merge the halfsided pro-
files to complete profiles by selecting menu
Edit → Create → Merged Halfsided Profiles
(refer to chapter XI "'Scanned Data Analy-
sis' (DataAnalyze) Module").

Figure VI-20: Measurement tab, Star Pattern

• Define the measuring depth Depth [mm]:
view
– Measurement in user-defined measuring
• Define the measuring parameters for the pro-
depth
file measurements:
– Measurement in the dose maximum Dmax, i. e.,
– Type of profile:
in the energy-dependent depth dmax
– crossplane
– inplane
➔ The step intervals for the profiles will be copied
– Measuring direction: from the selected parameter set.
– all profiles from left to right
– all profiles from right to left
– meandering (recommended)

– Angular offset for each measurement

Angle Increment [°]

HINT
In the Continuous Scans measuring
mode, the angular offset is fixed at 45°.

324 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.7.5 Points Measuring Program • Create a list of all points where measurements
are to be made. For this, use the buttons Add,
With this measuring program, you can perform Insert, Change, and Delete.
measurements at any selected point. The coor-
– Enter the coordinates of a point at A, B, and
dinates to enter refer to the selected measur-
C. With Add, you append it to the list.
ing system and the adjusted orientation (refer
to section 6.1 "Linac Tab"). Depending on the – To insert a point in the list, highlight the
selected measuring system, not all coordinate point just below the point you want to insert,
directions are available, e. g., for the MP1, only edit the coordinates in the boxes for A, B,
the depth direction (coordinate C) can be set. and C, and click the Insert button.

– To change the coordinates of a point in the

list, highlight the point, edit the coordinates
in the boxes for A, B, and C, and click the
Change button.

– Click the Delete button to remove high-

lighted points from the list.

Stepwise vs Time Measuring Mode

When the Stepwise vs Time measuring mode is

selected, all the points will be measured automat-
ically according to the adjusted measuring time.

➔ After the measurement, you will see the results

in the Val column.

Figure VI-21: Measurement tab, Points view

D948.131.00/10 en 325
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

Manual Start/Stop Measuring Mode

When the Manual Start/Stop measuring mode

is selected, you have to start and stop each
point measurement separately. In this measuring
mode, you will always measure without a refer-
ence detector.

• Enter the number of monitor units to be deliv-

ered at Monitor Units [MU].

HINT
The input of the monitor units to deliver is for
administrative purposes and for displaying the
measured values in the unit [cGy/MU]. This
input does not affect the measurement.

• Start the measurement of the first point by

clicking the Start button.

• End the measurement of the first point by click-

ing the Pause button.

➔ The first measured value will be displayed in

the Val column.

• Start the measurement of the next point by

clicking the Resume button.

• End the measurement of the next point by

clicking the Pause button.

➔ The next measured value will be displayed in

the Val column.

• Repeat these steps until all the desired points

have been measured.

326 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.7.6 BeamAdjust Measuring

Program

With this measuring program, you can continu-

ously measure profiles and analyze them auto-
matically in compliance with internationally recog-
nized dosimetry protocols. It is used for the adjust-
ment and verification of linear accelerators used
in medical applications.

Figure VI-22: BeamAdjust measuring program

1 Linac or Measurement tab for adjusting the 4 Highlighted analyze parameter

measuring parameters 5 Dialog with the analyze parameters of the
2 Tolerance lines for the flattened region measured profile
3 Display of the measured profile

D948.131.00/10 en 327
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

Adjusting the Measuring Parameters Notes on the Representation of the

Measurement Result
• Define the measuring parameters for the pro-
file measurements: – During the measurement, the profiles will be
normalized to the center value of the last pro-
– Type of profile:
file measured completely.
– crossplane
After the measurement, all the profiles will be
– inplane
normalized to their own center value.
– Measurement angle:
– diagonal – The measurement graphic will show two tol-
– angle referred to the axes of the mea- erance lines for the flattened region in the
suring system defined distance to 100% (e. g., tolerance lines
at 95% and 105% for a set tolerance range of
– Offset Offaxis [mm] referred to the center
±5%).
axis of the measuring system

– If the Show Analyze Parameter check box is

• Define the elements shown in the measure-
selected, these parameters will be shown in a
ment graphic:
separate dialog as soon as a profile has been
– Number of measured profiles Shown measured completely.
Curves The displayed analysis values always refer to
– Tolerance range Tolerance Area [+/-%] for the last profile measured completely.
the flattened region referred to 100% An analysis value is highlighted by clicking it.
To highlight another analysis value, click this
• Select the desired analysis protocol from the value.
Protocol list box and choose whether or not the
analyze parameters shall be displayed. – The measurement graphic will not show more
than the set number of profiles. The oldest
• Define the measuring depth Depth [mm]: measured profile will be deleted if another pro-
file is measured.
– Measurement in user-defined measuring
depth

– Measurement in the dose maximum Dmax,

i. e., in the energy-dependent depth dmax

➔ The step intervals for the profiles will be copied

from the selected parameter set.

328 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.7.7 Beam Inclination Measuring 6.7.7.1 Determining and Applying the

Program Inclination Angles of the Useful
Beam
With this measuring program, you can verify the
perpendicularity of the beam with respect to the PDD and profile measurements should always be
water surface. For this purpose, you measure an performed along the useful beam, particularly in
inplane and a crossplane profile at two depths. the case of small fields.
The inclination angles of these profiles will be cal-
culated on the basis of the 50% field limits in the The inclination of the useful beam with respect
inplane and crossplane directions and will be dis- to a perpendicular beam may be inplane and/
played. An automatic correction at the measuring or crossplane. With WaterTankScans, you can
system is not performed. determine the inclination angles. The measure-
ment positions of the subsequent PDD and profile
measurements will be adjusted accordingly. The
center of the rotation is located at the depth of the
last Beam Center Adjustment measurement.

HINT
Performing any function in Auto Setup mode
will automatically reset the application of the
inclination angles.

• Perform the Beam Center Adjustment function

in Auto Setup mode if not already done.

• Start the measurement by clicking the Start

button.
Figure VI-23: Measurement tab, Beam Incli-
➔ The measurements will be performed. The
nation view
graphics window will display the measuring
Define the two measuring depths Depths [mm] data of the profiles.
•
➔ The step intervals for the profiles will be copied ➔ Once all profiles have been measured, the
from the selected parameter set. inplane and crossplane inclination angles will
be calculated and displayed.

D948.131.00/10 en 329
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

➔ The Set Beam Inclination button will be acti- ➔ Inclination angles cannot be applied with
vated. asymmetric collimators or a gantry angle ≠ 0.

HINT ➔ When you exit WaterTankScans, the inclina-

tion angles will be discarded.
PTW recommends saving the measuring data.
The determined inclination angles will be saved
at the same time and you can reload them later. 6.7.7.2 Loading and Applying the
Inclination Angles of the Useful
• If you want to perform the subsequent PDD Beam
and profile measurements with the inclination
angles, click the Set Beam Inclination button. CAUTION
Applying the inclination angles with modified
➔ In the measuring programs that use the incli-
Auto Setup settings.
nation angle, the Linac and Measurement tabs
will be displayed with an orange frame and an Erroneous Measurements!
appropriate label.
The inclination angles always refer to the depth
of the Beam Center Adjustment measurement
performed last in Auto Setup mode. Check that
this depth is still valid. Otherwise, the measure-
ment results may be incorrect.
➔ The inclination angles can be applied in the fol-
lowing measuring programs:
As an alternative, you can load a Beam Inclination
– PDD and Profiles
measurement saved before and use the inclina-
– Plane parallel to central beam
tion angles of this measurement.
– Plane perpendicular to central beam
– Star Pattern
– Continuous TPR Measurement
– Step-By-Step TPR Measurement
– BeamAdjust
– TG51 Lead Foil Distance

➔ The Set Beam Inclination button label will

change to Reset Beam Inclination.

➔ The inclination angles remain valid until reset

with the Reset Beam Inclination button.

330 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.7.8 Output Factors Measuring

Program

With this measuring program, you can determine the output factors, i. e., the measured values in the central
axis depending on the field size and typically normalized to the field size of 10 cm x 10 cm. You can also
transfer the measurement of output factors to a task list.

Figure VI-24: Output Factors measuring program

1 Button to change the display mode of the out- 4 Button to transfer the average of the mea-
put factor table sured values to the output factor table
2 Selected field size 5 Output factor table
3 Measurement result for a field size with 6 Selected field size in the output factor table
– Number of measured values 7 Graphical representation of the output factors
– Measured values
– Average of the measured value
– Maximum deviation of the measured val-
ues
– Standard deviation of the measured val-
ues

D948.131.00/10 en 331
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.7.8.1 Configuring the Output Factor • Add new field sizes by entering the desired
Table field size in the empty cell at the end of the
table and confirming with the Enter key.
• To adapt the output factor table to the required
field sizes, select the table context menu Con- • Click the OK button to accept the changes.
figure Measurement. Click the Cancel button to discard the
changes.
➔ The Configure Measurement dialog will be dis-
played.

Figure VI-25: Configure Measurement dia-

log

You have to set the size of the field separately for

the inplane and crossplane direction.

• Define whether you want to measure only

square fields by selecting the only square
fields check box. In case of a two-dimensional
representation, you can then select only the
square field sizes.

• Delete the field sizes not needed with the con-

text menu Delete.

• Change a field size by entering a new field size

and confirming with the Enter key.

332 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.7.8.2 Performing a Measurement ➔ The equivalent square field size Eq. Square
[cm], i.e., the edge length of the equivalent
Only the Manual Start/Stop measuring mode is square field, will be displayed.
available for the determination of output factors.
The equivalent square field size is calculated
In this measuring mode, each measurement must
with the following formulas:
be started and stopped manually. Measurements
will always be performed without a reference
– Area a·b ≤ 16 cm²
detector.
(in accordance with TRS 483):

To ensure a measurement of the output factors

in the central beam at the maximum dose for
– Area a·b > 16 cm²
small fields, we recommend using the function for
(in accordance with DIN 6809-6):
determination of the maximum dose as described
in section 6.7.8.4 "Determining and Applying the
Maximum Dose".
• Start the measurement by clicking the Start
• Enter the number of monitor units to be deliv- button.
ered at Monitor Units [MU].
• Stop the measurement by clicking the Pause
HINT button.

The input of the monitor units to deliver is for

➔ The first measured value will be displayed in
administrative purposes and for displaying the
the Values [cGy/MU] field.
measured values in the unit [cGy/MU]. This
input does not affect the measurement. • If required, perform further measurements for
the same field size in order to obtain an aver-
• Define the measuring depth Depth [mm]: age of the measured values.
– Measurement in user-defined measuring
➔ The average, the maximum deviation, and the
depth
standard deviation of the measured values will
– Measurement in the dose maximum Dmax, automatically be calculated.
i. e., in the energy-dependent depth dmax
The standard deviation is calculated with the
following formula:
• In the output factor table, click the first field size
to be measured (usually 10 cm x 10 cm).

The empirical standard deviation is calculated

with the following formula:

D948.131.00/10 en 333
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

• Transfer the measured value or the average of 6.7.8.4 Determining and Applying the
the measured values to the output factor table Maximum Dose
by clicking the Accept button.
The Output Factors measuring program provides
• Perform further measurements for all the a function for determining the maximum dose
desired field sizes. (maximum signal at the level of the measuring
depth). This function determines the actually set
➔ When you have measured all the fields of the field size and the offset of the field from the cur-
output factor table, the graphical representa- rent zero point. This is of particular importance for
tion comprises the following curves: small fields to ensure a measurement of the out-
– one curve for each row of the two-dimen- put factors in the central beam at the maximum
sional output factor table dose.

– one curve for the diagonal of the two- • In menu Tools → Measurement Options on
dimensional output factor table the Advanced tab, select the Activate search
A curve will be displayed if at least two mea- dose max. for output factors option (refer to
sured values exist. section 11.4.4 "Advanced Tab").

• Save the measurement according to ➔ On the Measurement tab, the Search max but-
section 5.7 "Saving Measuring Data". ton will be displayed to determine the maxi-
mum dose:

6.7.8.3 Selecting a Curve

A curve can be selected in two ways:

– by double-clicking the desired curve in the

graphical representation.

– by displaying a discrete crosshairs and click-

ing one of the measuring points of the desired
curve in the output factor table.

Exception:
The curve for the square field sizes can only be
selected by double-clicking.

Figure VI-26: Output Factors measuring pro-

gram with option for determin-
ing the maximum dose

334 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

• Define the measuring depth Depth [mm] (refer ➔ The measurement will be performed:
to section 6.7.8.2 "Performing a Measure-
– WaterTankScans determines the center of
ment").
the set field size by measuring an inplane
and a crossplane profile at the adjusted
• In the output factor table, click the desired field
measuring depth.
size.
– The deviation in each axis direction results
• Click the Search max button. from the 50% dose values of the respective
profile.
➔ On the Measurement tab, the BeamCenterAd-
justment measuring program will be displayed: – During the measurement, the graphics win-
dow displays the measuring data of both
profiles.

➔ The following information will be displayed at

the end of the measurement:

– the determined field size

– the square field size equivalent to the deter-

mined field size (the formula is given in
section 6.7.8 "Output Factors Measuring
Program")

– the offset values in inplane and crossplane

direction from the current zero point

HINT
If at least one offset value is greater
Figure VI-27: BeamCenterAdjustment mea- than 0.2 mm, the measurement must be
suring program repeated to verify the determined offset val-
ues. An appropriate message will be dis-
• Check the measuring mode and the corre-
played.
sponding settings.
For the second measurement, the center is
• Start the measurement by clicking the Start shifted by the previously determined offset
button. values.

The offset value displayed after the second

measurement is the sum of both measure-
ments, i.e., the offset value referred to the
zero point.

D948.131.00/10 en 335
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

➔ After a successful measurement, the Accept

button will be activated.

Figure VI-29: Output Factors measuring pro-

gram with determined maximum
dose
Figure VI-28: BeamCenterAdjustment mea-
suring program with the deter- • Measure the required output factors as
mined values described in section 6.7.8.2 "Performing a
Measurement".
• Import the determined values into the Out-
put Factors measuring program by clicking the ➔ The determined offset values will now be
Accept button. applied to all measurements of output factors
With the Cancel button, you return to the Out- for all field sizes.
put Factors measuring program without setting
an offset between the field and the zero point. ➔ The offset values remain valid until reset with
the Reset max button.
➔ In the Output Factors measuring program,
the determined field size will be displayed at ➔ You can use the Search max button at any time
FWHM (Full Width at Half Maximum). The to determine a new offset value for any other
Search max button label changes to Reset field size.
max.
HINT
When the Search max. function is performed at
a particular field size, the determined field size
is automatically added to the comment.

336 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

HINT 6.7.8.5 Editing Output Factors

The determined offset values are not trans-

ferred to the control unit but only to the Out- Editing Measured Values
put Factors measuring program. When you
select another measuring program or exit If required, you can edit displayed measured val-
WaterTankScans, the offset values will be dis- ues.
carded.
• In the output factor table, click the output factor
to change.

• Then, click the desired measured value in the

table on the Measurement tab.

• Enter the desired measured value.

• Confirm the new value with the Enter key.

• Click the Accept button to accept all changes.

Deleting Measured Values

If required, you can delete displayed measured

values.

• To do this, click the desired measured value in

the table on the Measurement tab.

• Delete the measured value with the Del key.

• Click the Accept button to accept all changes.

D948.131.00/10 en 337
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.7.8.6 Changing the Display Normalization

The output factor table and the graphical repre-

Changing the Representation of the Output sentation of the output factors can be displayed
Factor Table in the following normalization modes by selecting
menu Graphics → Normalize Graphics:
The output factor table can be represented in two
ways: – to Value
The measured values will be normalized to a
– two-dimensional representation according to value determined by the user. For further infor-
Figure VI-24 (default setting) mation on this normalization mode, refer to
chapter III "Basic Functions".
– one-dimensional representation according to
Figure VI-30 – to Absolute Unit
The measured values will be displayed unnor-
malized.

– to Field 10x10 cm²

All the measured values will be normal-
ized to the measured value of the field size
10 cm x 10 cm (default setting).
As soon as you have measured a value for the
field size of 10 cm x 10 cm, all the measured
values will be normalized to that value.
If no measured value is available for this field
size, all the measured values will be displayed
Figure VI-30: One-dimensional representation unnormalized.
of the output factor table

• To toggle between the two-dimen-

sional representation and the one-
dimensional representation, click the
button in the upper left corner of the
output factor table.

338 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.7.9 Stationary Scans Measuring • In the Measurement Presets pane, define the
Program measurement settings:

– Movement direction Movement:

With this measuring program, you can perform
– Table
continuous measurements without the motor-dri-
– Gantry Other
ven movement of the detector.
This will, for instance, be used for the QA and – Measurement with two detectors
ATP of TomoTherapy for the following measuring Connect the second detector to the refer-
tasks: ence channel of the electrometer.
In the measuring mode pane, select the
– measuring profiles in a slab phantom with
with Reference check box, and in the Mea-
movement of the treatment table
surement Presets pane, select the Dual
– measuring with a detector and continuous Scan Mode check box.
gantry movement
– For the representation of the measurement
Measurements can only be performed in the Man- graphic, enter the approximate duration of
ual Start/Stop measuring mode. In this mode, the measurement at Auto Scale Preset X
each measurement must be started and stopped [s].
manually. – Enter the movement speed at Speed [mm/
s].
This input is used for converting measuring
times to measuring positions, as the mea-
suring system needs the measuring posi-
tions in [mm] and not in [s].
When selecting the movement direction
Other, a fixed speed of 1 mm/s will be used.

• Enter the measuring depth at Depth [mm].

• Start the measurement by clicking the Start

button.

• End the measurement by clicking the Pause

button.

➔ One measuring curve will be displayed or, in

Dual Scan Mode, two curves.

Figure VI-31: Measurement tab, Stationary

Scans view

D948.131.00/10 en 339
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

CAX Correction 6.7.10 TG51 Lead Foil Distance

Measuring Program
When the Table movement direction is selected,
you can CAX-correct the profile or the profiles With this measuring program, you can measure a
after the measurement. depth dose curves when using a lead foil (photon
radiation only).
• Define the dose values between which the
center value CAX Deviation shall be calcu-
lated.

• Click the Shift button.

• The profile will be shifted by the calculated

center value CAX Deviation.

Figure VI-32: Measurement tab, TG51 Lead

Foil Distance view

• Define the measuring direction for the depth

dose curve:
– from top to bottom
– from bottom to top (recommended)

• Enter the distance between the water phantom

and the lead foil at Phantom Foil Distance.

➔ The step intervals for the depth dose curve will

be copied from the selected parameter set.

340 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Setting Up the Measuring Parameters

6.8 Total Measurement For the Continuous TPR-Measurement measur-

ing program, it is not possible to calculate the total
Duration
duration of the TPR measurement in advance.
In the Continuous Scans and Stepwise vs This value is determined by the "Flow Speed Cal-
Time measuring modes, the estimated total ibration" measurement and is then available for
measurement duration can be displayed with the TPR measurement. The time is counted down
WaterTankScans. during the TPR measurement so that the remain-
ing time is permanently visible.
This total duration is shown on the Measurement
tab under the preview of the curves to be mea- It is not possible to calculate the total duration for
sured (refer to Figure VI-5, Pos. 7). the following measuring programs and no reading
will be displayed:
For this purpose, clear the Show current detec- – BeamAdjust
tor position check box in menu Tools → Mea-
surement Options on the Advanced tab (refer to – Output Factors
section 11.4.4 "Advanced Tab"). – Stationary Scans

The time for moving to the first measuring point – Step-By-Step TPR Measurement
is not included in the calculation of the total dura-
The accuracy of the displayed time is < 20%.
tion. Therefore, the expected total duration for a
measuring program may vary.

When working with task lists, only the total dura-

tion of the currently selected task will be dis-
played. The total duration of the entire task list or
of a task group can be determined by summing up
the durations of each single task.

When you change a measurement parameter, the

total duration will be recalculated and displayed.

After the measurement of a curve, the remain-

ing total duration for the curves left to be mea-
sured will be recalculated and displayed. The time
will also be recalculated when a measurement is
interrupted and resumed.

D948.131.00/10 en 341
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3,
MP2, and MP1 Measuring Systems - Workflow for Special Tasks

7 Workflow for Special Tasks

7.1 Small Field Dosimetry 7.2 TPR Measurement

In the measurement of small fields, it is particu- For TPR measurements, only one depth dose
larly important that the zero point of the measur- curve, i. e., a TPR curve (Tissue Phantom Ratio)
ing field is always in the central beam. is measured. With this measurement, the distance
between source and detector remains constant
WaterTankScans offers the following functions to but the water layers above the detector vary.
assist you:
The following two measuring programs are avail-
– When measuring output factors, you can able:
determine the maximum dose (maximum sig-
nal at the level of the measuring depth) for – Continuous TPR Measurement
each field size. The measurement will then be With this measuring program, measurements
performed at this maximum dose. are performed continuously and the measured
values are assigned to the corresponding
For further information, refer to section 6.7.8
water layers
"Output Factors Measuring Program".
– Step-By-Step TPR Measurement
– The Beam Inclination measuring program can
With this measuring program, water is drained
be used to check the useful beam for an incli-
from the tank according to each adjusted water
nation. The determined inclination angle can
layer, and then a measurement is performed.
then be applied in subsequent measurements.

For further information, refer to section 6.7.7 The SDD value (Source Detector Distance) is
"Beam Inclination Measuring Program". entered on the Measurement tab and the SSD
value (Source Surface Distance) on the Linac tab.
All other measuring parameters correspond to the
PDD and Profiles program.

342 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3,
MP2, and MP1 Measuring Systems - Workflow for Special Tasks

HINT 7.2.1 Continuous TPR

Measurement
TPR measurements can only be performed if
the gantry angle is 0°. Requirements:
Due to backscattering, which varies with the – TBA CONTROL UNIT with firmware ver-
water level, a minimum distance of 150 mm sion 1.20 or higher
between the reference detector and water sur-
face must be ensured. – TANDEM must be connected via the TBA
CONTROL UNIT
Also, ensure that the limit point for TPR mea-
surements is as far as possible above the water
surface, i. e., if the zero point is at the water
surface, the limit point has to be set to the max-
imum possible distance in direction B.

Do not operate the water pump by hand during

the measurement. The pump will be controlled
by the measuring system.

For further measurements with other SSD

values, i.e., different water layers, the entire
procedure must be repeated (set zero point
again!).

Figure VI-33: Measurement tab, Continuous

TPR Measurement view

• Prepare the TPR measurement according to

section 7.2.3 "Preparing the TPR Measure-
ment".

HINT
The measuring time set on the Measure-
ment tab does not affect the total measur-
ing time of the TPR curve but the mea-
surement result. Short measuring times may
result in noisy curves while long measuring
times increase the uncertainty of the measur-
ing depth (approx. 0.06 mm per 50 ms).

D948.131.00/10 en 343
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3,
MP2, and MP1 Measuring Systems - Workflow for Special Tasks

• Measure the detector sensor distance DSD ➔ The Continuous TPR measurement will pro-
according to section 7.2.4 "Measuring the ceed automatically. The measured values are
Detector Sensor Distance". assigned to the water layers based on the sink
function determined by the calibration mea-
• Perform a calibration measurement to deter- surement.
mine the sink function of the water.
➔ At the end of the Continuous TPR measure-
HINT ment, the total measuring time will be com-
A calibration measurement must be per- pared with the current calibration measure-
formed before the first measurement and ment and the measured values will be recali-
after each change of the SSD (Source Sur- brated with these data.
face Distance) or of the altitude of the water
tank. If the Continuous TPR measurement is paused, it
The calibration measurement is performed must be restarted from the beginning.
without radiation.

– Start the "Flow Speed Calibration" mea-

surement by clicking the Calibrate button.
➔ The calibration measurement will proceed
automatically and at the end, the initial
water level (zero point) will be restored

➔ Date and time of the last calibration mea-

surement will be displayed.

If the calibration measurement is paused, it

must be restarted from the beginning.

• Now, start the Continuous TPR measurement.

344 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3,
MP2, and MP1 Measuring Systems - Workflow for Special Tasks

7.2.2 Step-By-Step TPR 7.2.3 Preparing the TPR

Measurement Measurement

• Check that all the cables required for a

TPR measurement are connected. For this,
observe the user manuals of all the compo-
nents of the measuring system.

• Fill the tank with water until the water surface

is at an SSD (source surface distance) that
is equivalent to the source detector distance
minus the maximum thickness of the water
layer.

Example:
Source detector distance of 100 cm, water
layer between 0 and 25 cm result in an SSD
value of 75 cm.
Figure VI-34: Measurement tab, Step-By-
Step TPR Measurement view
source

• Prepare the TPR measurement according to

section 7.2.3 "Preparing the TPR Measure- SSD SDD
ment".

• Measure the detector sensor distance DSD

according to section 7.2.4 "Measuring the
max. water
Detector Sensor Distance". level
tw
• Enter the thickness of the water layers in menu
Tools → Step-By-Step Options on the PDD
Steps tab. The entered step intervals corre-
detector
spond to the thickness of the water layers.

• Now, start the Step-By-Step TPR measure-

ment.

➔ The Step-By-Step TPR measurement will pro- Figure VI-35: TPR measurement
ceed automatically. SDD (Source Detector Dis-
tance) and SSD (Source Sur-
The Step-By-Step TPR measurement can be face Distance)
paused and resumed according to section 5.4
"Performing the Measurement ".

D948.131.00/10 en 345
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3,
MP2, and MP1 Measuring Systems - Workflow for Special Tasks

• On the Measurement tab, enter the correct 7.2.4 Measuring the Detector
SDD value (Source Detector Distance) and on Sensor Distance
the Linac tab the SSD value (Source Surface
Distance). The detector sensor distance DSD (Detector Sen-
sor Distance) is the vertical distance between
the measuring detector reference point and the
sensor, which defines the water surface level.
This value must be measured before the first
TPR measurement is performed. The system will
save this value. However, the value needs to be
redetermined after each repair and each sensor
replacement. As a general rule, we recommend
measuring this value from time to time to obtain
exact TPR readings.

HINT
Before each measurement of the detector sen-
sor distance, check that the reference point of
the measuring detector is at the water surface.

Before initiating the automatic distance measure-

ment, you will have to set up the system as fol-
lows:

• Fill the water tank to the maximum level (i.e.,

the maximum level suitable for the subsequent
TPR measurements).

• Position the measuring detector reference

point at the water surface and at the center of
the field.

• The zero point must be at the water surface.

346 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3,
MP2, and MP1 Measuring Systems - Workflow for Special Tasks

• Start the automatic measurement by clicking

the Measure DSD button.

➔ The measurement is completed when the

detector sensor distance is displayed in the
dialog.

• If the automatic measurement is interrupted

with the Pause button, you will have to set up
the system again as described above before
starting the next measurement.

➔ After the distance measurement,

WaterTankScans will restore the original water
level in the tank. To check this, you can posi-
tion the sensor at the zero point, i.e., the water
surface, using the control pendant.

D948.131.00/10 en 347
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2, and MP1 Measuring Systems - Reference Curves

8 Reference Curves

In order to compare the current measurement 8.1 Loading Reference

visually with an existing measurement, you can
Curves
load reference curves before starting the mea-
surement. Reference curves can be loaded by either of the
following methods:
Reference curves can only be loaded when they
are in the MEPHYSTO MCC format (*.mcc). 1. Loading reference curves without measuring
parameters:
HINT
• Select menu File → Open Overlay Refer-
In order to compare the reference curves ence.
numerically with the currently measured
curves, you have to load all the curves in • Select a file from the standard Open dialog.
the DataAnalyze module and compare them ➔ The currently displayed measuring data
with the Compare function (by selecting menu and reference curves will be overwritten. If
Edit → Compared Scans) (refer to chapter XI the currently displayed measuring data are
"'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Mod- not yet saved, a message will be shown
ule" - 7 "Comparing Curves"). and you can save them if required.

➔ The reference curves will only be dis-

played.

➔ The currently set measuring parameters

(e. g., measuring program) will not be over-
written by the measuring parameters of the
loaded reference curves.

348 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2, and MP1 Measuring Systems - Reference Curves

2. Loading reference curves with measuring 8.2 Measurements with

parameters:
Loaded Reference Curves
• Select menu File → Open Compare Refer-
ence. During the measurement, only the reference
curve of the curve type to measure will be dis-
• Select a file from the standard Open dialog. played, even if you have loaded reference curves
➔ The currently displayed measuring data of different curve types.
and reference curves will be overwritten. If
the currently displayed measuring data are Example:
not yet saved, a message will be shown If you measure a profile, the reference curves
and you can save them if required. shown are only profiles and not depth dose
curves.
➔ The reference curves will only be dis-
played. In order to compare curves with reference curves
➔ The currently set measuring parameters measured with different measuring parameters,
(e. g., measuring program) will be overwrit- an adjust measurement will be performed before
ten by the measuring parameters of the the actual measurement. Thus, the measurement
loaded reference curves and can be used will be independent of the measuring parameters.
for the subsequent measurements.
– If a depth dose curve is loaded, the adjust
➔ You cannot print, save, analyze, or modify the measurement will be performed at the depth of
reference curves. the maximum value of that curve.

➔ The reference curves remain valid until you – If only profiles are loaded, the adjust measure-
remove them or load new reference curves. ment will be performed at the depth of the max-
imum center value of all profiles.

HINT
The adjust measurement only affects the nor-
malization of the curves during the measure-
ment. When saving the data, the normalization
will be ignored.

D948.131.00/10 en 349
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2, and MP1 Measuring Systems - Reference Curves

8.3 Comparing 8.4 Removing Reference

Measurements with the Curves
Reference Curves
• To remove the reference curves, select menu
You can load reference curves and compare them File → Close Overlay Reference.
with measured curves.
➔ The reference curves will immediately be
• Select menu Edit → Compare Scans. removed. The command does not require con-
firmation.
➔ The Compare edit window will open and the
result of the comparison will be displayed if
the following conditions are met. Otherwise, an
appropriate error message will be displayed.

– The pool of available curves contains at

least one measuring curve and a matching
reference curve that share all of the follow-
ing parameters:
– Modality
– Energy
– Curve type (PDD, profile, or FFF profile)
– Profile type (inplane or crossplane)
– Measuring depth
– Field size
– SSD
– Wedge filter

– The assignment of the matched curves

must be unique, i. e., each measuring curve
must be associated with exactly only one
reference curve and vice versa.

For further information on comparing curves, also

refer to section 10 "Analyzing and Editing the
Measurement Results" and chapter XI "'Scanned
Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module" - 7 "Com-
paring Curves").

350 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2, and MP1 Measuring
Systems - Verifying and Changing the High Voltage Set at the Electrometer

9 Verifying and Changing the High Voltage Set at the

Electrometer

When performing measurements with TANDEM

or TANDEM XDR, you can check the high volt-
age set at the electrometer and adapt it if
required. This option can be set by selecting menu
Tools → Measurement Options on the HV and
Presets tab (refer to section 11.4.1 "HV and Pre-
sets Tab").

The following modes are available:

1. off:
The high voltage setting will not be checked.
Default setting

2. if TANDEM internal HV differs from detector

HV:
The high voltage setting will be checked. The
HV Settings dialog will only be displayed if the
nominal high voltage of the detector is different
from the currently set high voltage.

3. before every start of measurement:

The high voltage setting will be checked. The
HV Settings dialog will always be displayed.

D948.131.00/10 en 351
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2, and MP1 Measuring
Systems - Verifying and Changing the High Voltage Set at the Electrometer

1 2

7 8 9

Figure VI-36: Detector Settings for Electrometer dialog (e. g., before a measurement is started)

1 Settings of the measuring detector 7 Button to set the high voltage at the electrom-
2 Settings of the reference detector eter
3 Selected detector 8 Button to start the measurement

4 Nominal detector high voltage from the 9 Button to abort the running measurement
detector library
5 High voltage currently set at the electrometer
6 High voltage to be set at the electrometer

352 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2, and MP1 Measuring
Systems - Verifying and Changing the High Voltage Set at the Electrometer

Nominal Detector HV Changing the High Voltage at the

Electrometer
The nominal high voltage of the detector is always
taken from the detector library even if the mea- HINT
suring parameters have been adjusted by loading
Setting the high voltage at TANDEM or
a stored measurement. The nominal high voltage
TANDEM XDR is only possible in the range of
of the detector can only be modified in the detec-
(- 400 … + 400) V. If the detector requires a
tor library in the Detector Library module (refer to
different high voltage (e. g., 800 V for the PTW
chapter VIII "'Detector Library' Module").
detector microLion Type 31018), an appropri-
ate message will be displayed.
HINT
The high voltage adjusted at the electrometer • From the appropriate list box, select the high
will not be checked and the HV Settings dialog voltage for the measuring detector and the ref-
will not be displayed if erence detector.
– a nominal high voltage is not entered in the
detector library. • Confirm the selected high voltage with the
Accept Selection button.
– the nominal high voltage in the
detector library is outside the range ➔ The selected high voltage is set at the elec-
(- 400 … + 400) V. trometer.

➔ The value displayed for the Current Electrom-

HINT
eter HV is updated accordingly.
If the electrometer is switched to an external
high voltage source, the high voltage cannot be
checked. In this case, the high voltage adjusted Starting a Measurement
internally at the electrometer will be displayed
and not the effective external high voltage. • Start the measurement by clicking the Start
Measurement button.

➔ The measurement will be started with the high

voltage shown at Current Electrometer HV.

D948.131.00/10 en 353
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2, and MP1
Measuring Systems - Analyzing and Editing the Measurement Results

10 Analyzing and Editing the Measurement Results

WaterTankScans offers the following options for Comparing Curves

further processing or analyzing the measuring
data: By selecting menu Edit → Compared Scans, you
can compare curves. This can be done by either
of the following methods:
Analyzing Curves
• First load reference curves, then measure
By clicking the Analyze button or by selecting curves, and finally compare them with the
menu Edit → Analyze Information, the Analyze reference curves (also refer to section 8.3
window will open where you can analyze the "Comparing Measurements with the Refer-
selected curves (refer to chapter XI "'Scanned ence Curves").
Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module" - 8 "Ana-
lyzing Curves"). or

• Select two curves to compare from the dis-

Modifying Curves played curves. Check that the selected curves
are the same type.
By clicking the Process button or by select-
ing menu Edit → Process, the Process window For further information on comparing curves, refer
will open where you can modify the selected to chapter XI "'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAna-
curves (refer to chapter XI "'Scanned Data lyze) Module" - 7 "Comparing Curves".
Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module" - 9 "Modifying
Curves").

354 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

11 Configuring WaterTankScans

11.1 General Information Additionally, you can switch to the Auto Setup
mode via menu Tools → Auto Setup (refer to
WaterTankScans is configured in the Tools menu. section 5.3 "Auto Setup").

In the Tools menu, you will find the following

dialogs:
– Options dialog:
for global module settings, such as the repre-
sentation of the graphics
All changes performed on the tabs of the
Options dialog will affect all modules of the
BEAMSCAN software (refer to chapter III
"Basic Functions").

– Step-By-Step Options dialog and Continuous

Options dialog:
to create and configure the parameter sets
(refer to section 11.2 "Setting Up Parameter
Sets")

– Task List dialog:

to create and edit task lists (refer to
section 11.3 "Working with Task Lists")

– Measurement Options dialog:

to define the measurement options (refer
to section 11.4 "Defining the Measurement
Options")

D948.131.00/10 en 355
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

11.2 Setting Up Parameter WaterTankScans is delivered with the parame-

ter sets LOWRES, MEDRES, and HIGHRES.
Sets
In combination with the semiflex chamber type
31010, they should be sufficient for most mea-
11.2.1 Step-By-Step Options Dialog surements.

The settings in the Step-By-Step Options dialog You are free to create custom parameter sets or
apply to all measurements with the Stepwise vs modify existing sets for other detectors or for spe-
Time and Stepwise vs Trigger measuring modes. cial requirements; you can also delete parameter
sets. In these cases, PWT recommends perform-
To optimize measuring tasks with respect to the ing multiple measurements with different settings
position and duration of the measurement, you (speeds and measuring steps). To identify the
can select predefined parameter sets or create optimal settings for the parameter sets to create,
new parameter sets in the Step-By-Step Options open these measurements together in the Data-
dialog. Analyze module and compare them (also refer
to chapter XI "'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAna-
The Step-By-Step Options dialog (refer to lyze) Module").
Figure VI-37) is opened via menu Tools → Step-
By-Step Options.

These are the settings defined in a parameter set:

– modality-dependent and energy-dependent

measuring steps for depth dose curves on the
PDD Steps tab

– modality-dependent measuring steps for pro-

files on the Profile Steps tab

– depth-dependent and detector-dependent

speeds and delay times on the Speeds and
Delay Times tabs

356 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

11.2.1.1 PDD Steps Tab

5 6

7 8 9

Figure VI-37: Step-By-Step Options dialog - PDD Steps tab

1 Modality list box 6 Selection of the range limits and step inter-
2 Energy list box vals
3 Name of the selected parameter set 7 Button to copy a parameter set

4 List of all the parameter sets 8 Button to delete a parameter set

5 Selection of the type of measuring steps 9 Graphical representation of the range limits
and step intervals

D948.131.00/10 en 357
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

On the PDD Steps tab, you specify the measuring Press the Ins key or select Insert new range from
steps for the measurement of depth dose curves the context menu to insert a new range (in the
for all modalities and all corresponding energies. table: above the selected range; on the graphic:
The modalities and energies shown depend on before the selected range).
what was defined in the Radiation unit Library
module, i. e., if a new energy is specified in this HINT
module for any of the radiation units, check the
A maximum of 9 ranges may be created.
settings in the Step-By-Step Options dialog, and
correct if necessary.
Press the Del key or select Delete selected range
You can choose between two types of measuring from the context menu to delete the selected
steps: range.

– Equidistant
The same step interval is used over the entire
measuring range.

– Along steps
The measuring points exactly reflect the
defined range limits and step intervals.

Range Limits and Step Intervals

You can adjust range limits both in the table and

in the graphic. The graphic and table adapt auto-
matically.
In the table, the starting points can be entered for
each range limit, and in the last row, the end point
can also be adjusted.

Click button to double the adjusted

step interval.
Click button to halve the adjusted
step interval.

358 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

11.2.1.2 Profile Steps Tab

4 5 6

7 8 9 10

Figure VI-38: Step-By-Step Options dialog - Profile Steps tab

1 Modality list box 7 Button to copy a parameter set

2 Name of the selected parameter set 8 Button to delete parameter sets
3 List of all the parameter sets 9 Button to display the measuring steps for any
4 Reference field size field size and measuring depth
5 Selection of the type of measuring steps 10 Graphical representation of the range limits
and step intervals
6 Selection of the range limits and step inter-
vals

D948.131.00/10 en 359
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

On the Profile Steps tab, you specify the measur- You can choose between two types of measuring
ing steps for the measurement of profiles for all steps:
modalities.
– Equidistant
The same step interval is used over the entire
For this, adjust a field size in the Reference Size
measuring range.
input box and define the appropriate range limits
and step intervals in the Ranges pane. – Fanlines
The step intervals can be set in cus-
To perform a measurement for another field size, tom-defined ranges.
it is not necessary to change the settings on the
Profile Steps tab, as the range limits will adapt For a parameter set, you can define both equidis-
automatically to the field size during the measure- tant measuring steps and fanlines.
ment (refer to Figure VI-39). The step intervals
between the range limits remain unchanged for all
the field sizes.

The adjusted range limits and step intervals

always refer to the depth adjusted in the mea-
suring module on the Linac tab at Fieldsize
defined at. If measurements are performed at
other depths, the range limits and the step inter-
vals are converted, using the Intercept theorem
(refer to Figure VI-40).

Range limits and step intervals are adjusted as

described in section 11.2.1.1 "PDD Steps Tab".

HINT
A maximum of 9 ranges may be created.

When the Symmetrize Ranges check box is

selected, range limits and step intervals of the
positive range are mirrored on the central axis.

360 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

Figure VI-39: Range limits and step intervals for different field sizes

A Settings on the Profile Steps tab for a field size of 10 x 10 cm

Measurement with field size of 10 x 10 cm: measuring steps coincide with A
B Measurement with field size of 5 x 5 cm: in the middle of the range, the number of measuring steps is
reduced
C Measurement with field size of 15 x 15 cm: in the middle of the range, the number of measuring steps
is increased

Figure VI-40: Range limits and step intervals for different measuring depths

A Setting on the Profile Steps tab for the depth adjusted on the Linac tab of the measuring module
Measurement in the depth adjusted on the Linac tab of the measuring module: measuring steps coin-
cide with A
B Measurement in a greater depth: range limits and step intervals are adapted by using the Intercept
theorem

D948.131.00/10 en 361
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

By clicking the Display for Any Size button, you

can display the Profile Steps for Any Size dialog
(refer to Figure VI-41). In this dialog, you can see
the adapted measurement steps as well as the
number of points to be measured for any field size
and measuring depth.

HINT
The points to be measured will be displayed
correctly only if the reference depth entered in
the Field size defined at depth and the source
surface distance SSD match the data on the
Linac tab of the measuring module.

1 5

2 6

3 7

Figure VI-41: Profile Steps for Any Size dialog

1 Input box for the field size to be checked 4 Number of points to be measured
2 Input box for the measuring depth to be 5 Input box for reference depth
checked 6 Button to update the graphic
3 Graphical representation of the adapted mea- 7 Input box for source surface distance (SSD)
surement steps

362 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

11.2.1.3 Speeds Tab

5 6 7

Figure VI-42: Step-By-Step Options dialog - Speeds tab

1 Detector type list box 5 Button to copy a parameter set

2 Name of the selected parameter set 6 Button to delete parameter sets
3 List of all the parameter sets 7 Graphical representation of the range limits
4 Selection of the range limits and speeds and speeds

D948.131.00/10 en 363
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

On the Speeds tab, you can specify depth-related

speeds for each detector type.

You can choose among the following detector

types:
– cylindrical detectors
– plane-parallel detectors
– LA48

HINT
Both the conventional Markus chamber and the
plane-parallel chamber are treated as plane-
parallel detectors, all other single chambers are
considered as cylindrical detectors.

HINT
Irrespective of the settings on the Speeds
tab, the detector will always be moved to the
first measuring point with reduced speed and
reduced acceleration in order to reduce wave
formation.

Range limits and the depth-related speeds are

adjusted as described in section 11.2.1.1 "PDD
Steps Tab".

HINT
A maximum of 9 ranges may be created.

364 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

11.2.1.4 Delay Times Tab

5 6 7

Figure VI-43: Step-By-Step Options dialog - Delay Times tab

1 Detector type list box 5 Button to copy a parameter set

2 Name of the selected parameter set 6 Button to delete parameter sets
3 List of all the parameter sets 7 Graphical representation of the range limits
4 Selection of the range limits and delay times and delay times

D948.131.00/10 en 365
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

On the Delay Times tab, you can specify the 11.2.2 Continuous Options Dialog
delay times for each detector type (refer to
section 11.2.1.3 "Speeds Tab"). The delay time is The settings in the Continuous Options dialog
the time between the detector moving to the mea- apply to measurements in the Continuous Scans
suring point and the beginning of the measure- measuring mode.
ment.
To optimize measuring tasks with respect to the
This time interval depends on the detector type positions and duration of the measurement, you
and the measuring depth as well as on the speed can select predefined parameter sets or create
set for this depth. For an optimal adjustment, both new parameter sets in the Continuous Options
the speed and the delay times must be adapted. dialog.

Range limits and the delay times are adjusted as The Continuous Options dialog (refer to
described in section 11.2.1.1 "PDD Steps Tab". Figure VI-44) is opened via menu Tools → Con-
tinuous Options.
HINT
These are the settings defined in a parameter set:
A maximum of 9 ranges may be created.
– Measuring range and resolution for depth dose
curves in dependence of the modality and
energy on the PDD Range tab

The resolution is set to 1 mm and cannot be

changed.

– Measuring range and resolution for profiles

in dependence of the modality on the Profile
Range tab

The resolution is set to 1 mm and cannot be

changed.

– Energy- and depth-dependent scan speeds on

the PDD Speeds and Profile Speeds tabs

366 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

WaterTankScan is delivered with the SPEED

parameter set. In combination with the semiflex
chamber type 31010, it should be sufficient for
most measurements.

You are free to create custom parameter sets or

modify existing sets for other detectors or for spe-
cial requirements; you can also delete parameter
sets. In these cases, PWT recommends perform-
ing multiple measurements with different settings
(speeds and measuring steps). To identify the
optimal settings for the parameter sets to create,
open these measurements together in the Data-
Analyze module and compare them (also refer
to chapter XI "'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAna-
lyze) Module").

D948.131.00/10 en 367
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

11.2.2.1 PDD Range Tab

5 6

7 8 9

Figure VI-44: Continuous Options dialog - PDD Range tab

1 Modality list box 6 Adjustment of the measuring range and reso-

2 Energy list box lution of the depth dose curve
3 Name of the selected parameter set 7 Button to copy a parameter set

4 List of all the parameter sets 8 Button to delete a parameter set

5 Indication of the type of measuring steps 9 Graphical representation of the measuring
range and step intervals

368 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

On the PDD Range tab, you specify the measur-

ing range and resolution of depth dose curves for
all modalities and all corresponding energies. The
modalities and energies shown depend on what
was defined in the Radiation unit Library module,
i. e., if a new energy is specified in this module for
any of the radiation units, check the settings in the
Continuous Options dialog, and correct if neces-
sary.

The scanning of the measuring steps is equidis-

tant, i. e., identical over the entire measuring
curve.

Measuring Range and Resolution

You can adjust the measuring range both in the

table in the Ranges pane and in the graphic. The
graphic and table adapt automatically.

The resolution is set to 1 mm and cannot be

changed.

D948.131.00/10 en 369
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

11.2.2.2 Profile Range Tab

4 5 6

7 8 9 10

Figure VI-45: Continuous Options dialog - Profile Range tab

1 Modality list box 7 Button to copy a parameter set

2 Name of the selected parameter set 8 Button to delete parameter sets
3 List of all the parameter sets 9 Button to display the measuring steps for any
4 Reference field size field size and measuring depth
5 Indication of the type of measuring steps 10 Graphical representation of the measuring
range and step intervals
6 Adjustment of the measuring range and reso-
lution of the profiles

370 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

On the Profile Range tab, you specify the measur- Measuring Range and Resolution
ing range and resolution of profiles for all modal-
ities. You can adjust the measuring range both in the
table in the Ranges pane and in the graphic. The
The scanning of the measuring steps is equidis- graphic and table adapt automatically.
tant, i. e., identical over the entire measuring
curve. When the Symmetrize Ranges check box is
selected, the measuring range of the positive
range is mirrored on the central axis.
Reference Field Size
The resolution is set to 1 mm and cannot be
Enter the desired reference field size in the Ref- changed.
erence Size input box.

To perform a measurement for another field size,

it is not necessary to change the settings on the
Profile Range tab, as the measuring range will
adapt automatically to the field size during the
measurement. The resolution is maintained for all
field sizes.

The adjusted measuring range always refers to

the depth adjusted on the Linac tab at Fieldsize
defined at. If measurements are performed at
other depths, the measuring range is converted,
using the Intercept theorem. The resolution is
maintained for all depths.

By clicking the Display for Any Size button, you

can display the Profile Steps for Any Size dialog.
In this dialog, you can see the adapted measure-
ment steps as well as the number of points to be
measured for any field size and measuring depth.

For further information, refer to section 11.2.1.2

"Profile Steps Tab".

D948.131.00/10 en 371
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

11.2.2.3 PDD Speeds Tab

6 7 8

Figure VI-46: Continuous Options dialog - PDD Speeds tab

1 Modality list box 6 Button to copy a parameter set

2 Field for selection of FFF energies 7 Button to delete parameter sets
3 Name of the selected parameter set 8 Graphical representation of the range limits
4 List of all the parameter sets and speeds
5 Adjustment of the range limits and scan
speeds

372 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

On the PDD Speeds tab, you can specify energy-

dependent scan speeds for each modality.

To create a parameter set for the FFF energy,

select the Energy FFF check box.

Range limits and the energy-dependent

scan speeds are adjusted as described in
section 11.2.1.1 "PDD Steps Tab".

On the Measurement tab in the Continuous Scans

mode, if you select the Energy dep. option for
the scan speed of depth dose curves, the energy-
dependent scan speeds set in this dialog will be
used.

D948.131.00/10 en 373
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

11.2.2.4 Profile Speeds Tab

6 7 8

Figure VI-47: Continuous Options dialog - Profile Speeds tab

1 Modality list box 6 Button to copy a parameter set

2 Energy list box 7 Button to delete parameter sets
3 Name of the selected parameter set 8 Graphical representation of the range limits
4 List of all the parameter sets and scan speeds
5 Adjustment of the range limits and scan
speeds

374 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

On the Profile Speeds tab, you can specify depth- 11.2.3 Creating a New Parameter Set
dependent scan speeds for each modality and
each energy. You create a new parameter set by copying an
existing set and editing the parameters.
Range limits and the depth-dependent scan
speeds are adjusted as described in • Select a parameter set.
section 11.2.1.1 "PDD Steps Tab".
• Click the Copy button.
On the Measurement tab in the Continuous Scans
mode, if you select the Depth dep. option for the ➔ In the list box, a new parameter set named
scan speed of profiles, the depth-dependent scan Copy of + set name will be displayed.
speeds set in this dialog will be used.
• Edit the set name in the Actual Set box and
adjust the parameters on the different tabs
according to sections 11.2.1.1 "PDD Steps
Tab" to 11.2.1.4 "Delay Times Tab" or accord-
ing to sections 11.2.2.1 "PDD Range Tab" to
11.2.2.4 "Profile Speeds Tab".

11.2.4 Deleting a Parameter Set

• Select the parameter set to delete.

• Click the Delete button.

➔ The parameter set will be removed from the list

box.

HINT
You can delete all parameter sets but one.

D948.131.00/10 en 375
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

11.3 Working with Task Lists • Select the parameters to be measured by

selecting the appropriate check boxes.

11.3.1 Opening and Creating Task ➔ This will define multiple tasks at once, and
Lists these tasks differ only in one measuring para-
meter (e. g., wedge) (refer to Figure VI-49,
Task lists are created and edited in the Task List Queue 1).
dialog.
• Confirm by clicking the OK button.
The Task List dialog can be opened in two ways:
➔ A bar will be displayed on the right border of
1. By selecting menu Tools → Task List → Open/ the Linac tab and the empty Task List dialog
New: will be opened.

➔ A bar will be displayed on the right border of • Transfer the measuring tasks to the Task List
the Linac tab and the Task List dialog will be dialog by double-clicking the bar.
opened.
– With Open, a stored task list will be opened. You can modify the size and position of the dialog
– With New, an empty task list will be opened. by means of the Windows functions.

2. By selecting the MULTIPLE parameter setting:

On the Linac tab, you can choose the MULTI-

PLE parameter setting for the measuring para-
meters Energy, Applicator, Wedge, Block,
SSD, and Field.

➔ The Multiple Choice dialog will be displayed:

Figure VI-48: Multiple Choice dialog (e. g., for

the wedge filter)

376 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

11.3.2 Editing a Task List You will find further options for editing the mea-
suring tasks and the task list in the Task List con-
To add measuring tasks to the list, you have text menu. Open the context menu by right-click-
to adjust the measuring parameters for a sin- ing the name of a measuring task or a measuring
gle measuring task on the Linac tab or select task queue.
the MULTIPLE setting for the desired measuring
parameter (refer to section 11.3.1 "Opening and
Creating Task Lists "). By double-clicking the bar,
the measuring tasks will be transferred to the Task
List dialog and appended to the existing list.

Use drag & drop to insert the measuring tasks in

a specific place in the task list. Click the bar and
drag the cursor to the task after which the new
task is to be inserted. Figure VI-50: Task List context menu

You can group the measuring tasks into measur- • Delete the highlighted measuring task with
ing task groups referred to as Queue. Delete Task or with the Del key.

• Create a new, empty measuring task queue

with New Queue.

• Delete the highlighted measuring task queue

with Delete Queue.

• Rename the highlighted measuring task queue

with Rename Queue. Edit the name. Then,
press the Enter key or click a measuring task
to apply the change.

• Sort the highlighted measuring task queue by

Energy, Wedge/Applicator, or Field Size with
Figure VI-49: Task List dialog with two mea- Sort Queue.
suring task queues

You can change the order of measuring tasks and

of measuring task queues using drag & drop.

D948.131.00/10 en 377
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

• With Auto Save, you can specify the path 11.3.3 Modifying a Task List
where you want to save the measured curves
automatically after each task. On save, the • To modify a task list, highlight the name of a
default file name will be used (file name: refer measuring task and select the Modify Task List
to chapter III "Basic Functions" - 1 "Defini- context menu.
tions").
➔ The Modify area will open next to the Task List
• Open an existing task list with Open Task List. dialog as shown in Figure VI-51.

• Save the list shown in the Task List dialog with HINT
Save Task List As.
While the Modify area is displayed:

• Modify the task list with Modify Task List. – you cannot open the context menu
For further information, refer to section 11.3.3
– you cannot start a measurement from the
"Modifying a Task List".
Task List dialog.

• After having performed all the changes, you

should save the list. Otherwise, when you start
the measurements directly, the changes will
not be considered. You have two options for
saving:

– Select the Save Task List As context menu.

– Close the Task List dialog and save the

changes.

378 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

2 3

4
1
5

8 9

Figure VI-51: Task List dialog with the Modify area

1 Highlighted measuring task in the selected 6 Button to apply the changes to all the mea-
measuring task queue suring task queues
2 Check box for activating or deactivating a 7 Button to reject the changes
modified parameter 8 Button to close the Modify area and save the
3 List of the modified parameters modified task list
4 Button to apply the changes to the high- 9 Button to close the Modify area and reject all
lighted measuring task applied changes
5 Button to apply the changes to the selected
measuring task queue

D948.131.00/10 en 379
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

• Select the measuring task to change by click- • Click one of the following buttons to apply the
ing this task. changes:

– Selected Task:
➔ The Linac and Measurement tabs show the
applies the changes to the highlighted mea-
settings of the selected measuring task.
suring task
• Change the parameters as needed. – Selected Queue:
applies the changes to the selected mea-
HINT suring task queue
In this mode, the MULTIPLE parameter cannot – All Queues:
be selected. applies the changes to all the measuring
task queues
HINT
• Or, click the Skip button to reject the changes.
If you want to display a message before the
measurement starts, you can enter the com- ➔ The list of the modified parameters will be
mand "Msg:" followed by the text of the mes- emptied and the buttons for applying the
sage in the comment field on the Linac or Mea- changes will be disabled.
surement tab. For further information, refer to
section 6.1 "Linac Tab". • Save the modified task list by clicking the Save
As button.
• Transfer the modified parameters to the Task
List dialog by double-clicking the bar. • In the standard Save As dialog, enter a file
name and the directory. You can overwrite the
➔ The modified parameters will be listed in the existing task list or create a new task list.
Modified area and activated .

• If you do not want to apply the change to a

parameter, you can deactivate the parameter
concerned .

380 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

HINT 11.3.4 Example of a Task List

Observe the following conditions for the Example of the measurement of depth dose
changes: curves for several field sizes
– You can only change the orientation of the
measuring system and the radiation unit • On the Measurement tab, select the PDD and
(Linac tab) independently of other parame- Profiles measuring program and select only
ters. These changes will always be applied the PDD check box.
to all the measuring task queues.
• Select the MULTIPLE entry from the Field
– You cannot change the measuring program. combo box on the Linac tab. In the Multiple
– The parameters on the Measurement tab Choice dialog, clear all options that are not
(e. g., measuring mode, curve type, etc.) required and confirm with OK.
will, in general, only be changed for the
• Then, double-click the bar on the Linac tab.
measuring tasks offering that setting.

➔ The measuring task queue will be added to the

task list (refer to Figure VI-52).

Figure VI-52: Task List for the measurement

of the depth dose curves for
several field sizes

D948.131.00/10 en 381
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

• Right-click the name of the measuring task 11.3.5 Notes on the Measurement
queue and select the target directory for the Workflow with a Task List
automatic storage of the measured curves of
this measuring task queue. • In the Task List dialog, click the measuring task
to start (highlighted blue).
• Create further measuring task queues as
described above. • Click the Start button.

• For additional use of the task list, you can save ➔ The individual measuring tasks will be com-
it with the Save Task List As function of the pleted automatically one after other until the
context menu. end of the queue.

➔ If any of the parameters (Energy, Modality,

Wedge, Block, Field size, Gantry, Collimator,
or SSD) changes between measuring tasks,
a message will be displayed prompting you to
change the corresponding setting at the radia-
tion unit.
The next measurement starts after acknowl-
edgment of the message.
By clicking the Abort button, you will cancel the
measurement with a task list.

HINT
Before starting the first measurement of the
task list, check that the path for automatic sav-
ing of the measurements is set correctly.

HINT
The settings in the Continuous Options and
Step-By-Step Options dialogs are not associ-
ated with the measuring tasks of the task list.
When starting a measurement, the currently
adjusted parameter set is used.

During a measurement that is part of a task

list, you can open the Continuous Options or
Step-By-Step Options dialog to adapt the para-
meters to the measurement. This can be done
whenever the measurement is interrupted.

382 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

11.3.6 Measurement of Basic Data Requirement:

using a Predefined Task List
In the Radiation unit Library module, you have
CAUTION performed the appropriate settings for the radia-
tion unit to check. PTW recommends copying an
Using the predefined task lists without checking
existing radiation unit and adapting it as needed.
its correctness and completeness.
For further information, refer to chapter VII "'Radi-
Erroneous Measurements! ation unit Library' Module".
The predefined task lists have been carefully
Primarily, verify that the settings for the following
compiled according to the manuals of the radi-
parameters are correct:
ation treatment planning systems (RTPS) valid
at the time of creation. The user is fully respon- – source isocenter distance (SID)
sible for checking the correctness of the task – radiation qualities, in particular energy and
lists or for adapting them to the actual require- nominal depth of the maximum dose
ments. PTW cannot be held liable for the valid-
ity of the task lists. – wedges

– axis designations and directions

You can find predefined task lists for different
radiation treatment planning systems. These tem-
plates are located in the following directory: Creating a Task List
'C:\Program Files (x86)\PTW\MEPHYSTO mcc\
• Select menu Tools → Task List → Open to
Data\Samples\WaterTankScans'.
open the desired predefined task list.
In order to quickly create custom task lists, PTW
• Save the task list with a new name, using the
recommends selecting a suitable predefined task
Save Task List As context menu.
list, saving it with a new name, and adapting it to
the actual requirements.

D948.131.00/10 en 383
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

• Change the required parameters, using the • Perform further adjustments according to
Modify Task List context menu, according to section 11.3.2 "Editing a Task List" .
section 11.3.3 "Modifying a Task List".
– Delete measuring tasks that are not
– Radiation unit and orientation of the water needed.
phantom for all measuring tasks (All
– Change the order of the measuring tasks or
Queues button)
the measuring task queues.
– Energies for all measuring tasks (All
– Insert new measuring tasks.
Queues button)

– Further parameters, such as measur- • Save the changes with the Save As button.
ing detector, measuring time, measuring
depths, field sizes, SSD, etc. for an indi- • Define the path for the automatic saving of the
vidual measuring task (Selected Task but- measurements, using the Auto Save context
ton), for a measuring task queue (Selected menu.
Queue button), or for all measuring tasks
(All Queues button)
Performing a Measurement

HINT • Define the settings for measuring positions

When changing the energy, check that the and duration in the Continuous Options or
measuring programs use the correct measur- Step-By-Step Options dialog. For further infor-
ing depths. mation, refer to section 11.2 "Setting Up Para-
meter Sets".
The PDD and Profiles measuring program nor-
mally uses the nominal depth of the maximum Select menu Tools → Task List → Open to
•
dose dmax. When you change the energy in the open the task list.
task list, the appropriate value of dmax will be
automatically copied from the Radiation unit • Start the measurement of the basic data with
Library module. the first or any other measuring task.
In case of measuring depths with a fixed ref-
erence to dmax (e. g., dmax + 5 mm) or in case
Analyzing Measuring Data
of another measuring program, such as Plane
parallel to central beam, the measuring depths • By loading or copying the measuring data to
may have to be corrected manually. the DataAnalyze module, you can analyze or
edit them, even while another measurement
is in progress. For further information, refer to
chapter XI "'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAn-
alyze) Module".

384 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

11.4 Defining the 11.4.1 HV and Presets Tab

Measurement Options
In the Measurement Options dialog, you can
define basic settings.

Select menu Tools → Measurement Options to

open the Measurement Options dialog.

With the Apply button, you apply the changes and

adapt the display in the background without clos-
ing the dialog.

Figure VI-53: Measurement Options dialog -

HV and Presets tab

Stop at Zero

In this pane, enter the minimum dose rate values

where the measurement is to be stopped. When
the entered value is 0 Gy/min, the measurement
will never stop.

The minimum dose rate values are separately

adjustable for electrons and other modalities.

Protons and Heavy Ions

In this pane, you can define whether the mea-

suring modes for spill measurements shall be
displayed on the Measurement tab (refer to
Figure VI-5).

D948.131.00/10 en 385
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

HV Control before Measurement with 11.4.2 Communication Tab

TANDEM

In this pane, you can define whether the high volt-

age adjusted at TANDEM or TANDEM XDR shall be
checked before a measurement.

The following modes can be adjusted:

– off:
The high voltage setting will not be checked.
Default setting

– if TANDEM internal HV differs from detector

HV:
The high voltage setting will be checked. The
HV Settings dialog (refer to Figure VI-36) will
only be displayed if the nominal high voltage of
the detector is different from the currently set
high voltage. Figure VI-54: Measurement Options dialog -
Communication tab
– before every start of measurement:
The high voltage setting will be checked. The On the Communication tab, you can set the COM
HV Settings dialog (refer to Figure VI-36) will port of your PC where the TBA CONTROL UNIT
always be displayed. and the electrometer are connected.

If the electrometer is not directly connected to the

PC but rather to the TBA CONTROL UNIT, you
have to select the appropriate option button.

The available COM ports will be displayed auto-

matically.
You can select a COM port from the list or enter
a COM port manually.

386 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

HINT 11.4.3 TANDEM TC Tab

To release the interface to the
control unit for use with other
programs, click the Clear button
(also refer to section 5.9 "Delet-
ing Measuring Data").

Continuous Measurement

When using a TBA CONTROL UNIT with firmware

version ≥ 1.30, you can perform continuous mea-
surements.

• Connect the electrometer to the TBA CON-

TROL UNIT.

• Select the TBA CU with Continuous Mode

Figure VI-55: Measurement Options dialog –
option.
TANDEM TC tab
➔ The TANDEM TC tab will be displayed where
you can set the time constants of the TANDEM CAUTION
amplifier ranges (also refer to section 11.4.3 Using an unsuitable TANDEM.
"TANDEM TC Tab").
Erroneous Measurements!

For continuous measurements, use only a

TANDEM whose amplifier range time con-
stants are known.

On the TANDEM TC tab, enter the time con-

stants of the TANDEM amplifier ranges. These
data need to be entered only for continuous mea-
surements.

When retrofitting the device for continuous mea-

surements, the time constants were determined
at PTW, and they are indicated on the device.

D948.131.00/10 en 387
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

The data need to be entered only once if you 11.4.4 Advanced Tab
always work with the same TANDEM in combi-
nation with the PC running the software. When
using another TANDEM or another PC, you need
to check the time constants and enter the correct
values if applicable.

Figure VI-56: Measurement Options dialog -

Advanced tab

A number of options can be selected and dese-

lected on this tab:

– Demo Mode
In demo mode, there will be no communica-
tion with the connected devices. The mea-
surement will be simulated. However, the dis-
played measuring positions correspond to the
measuring positions of a true measurement.

– Warn about controller limited profile length

A warning will be displayed if the curve length
to measure is longer than the maximum curve
length that can be measured. The maximum
curve length that can be measured depends
on the selected measuring system and the
adjusted limits.
If you accept the selected settings, a curve
with the maximum possible length will be mea-
sured.

388 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

– Warn about missing Zero Adjustment 11.4.5 Predefined Depths Tab

A warning will be displayed if the zero adjust-
ment has not been performed.

– Show current detector position

When this check box is selected, the cur-
rent position of the measuring detector will be
displayed on the Measurement tab (refer to
section 6.2 "Measurement Tab") in pane (7).
When this check box is cleared, the esti-
mated total duration of the measurement will
be displayed on the Measurement tab (refer to
section 6.2 "Measurement Tab") in pane (7).
This check box is cleared by default.

– Activate search dose max. for output factors

When this check box is selected, the func-
tion for determining the maximum dose will be
available in the Output factors measuring pro-
gram. Figure VI-57: Measurement Options dialog -
Predefined Depths tab
– Show analysis result online
When this check box is selected, a window
showing the analysis according to the last PDD and Profiles
selected protocol will be displayed automati-
cally on completion of each measurement. It In the PDD and Profiles measuring program (refer
is not necessary to open the Analyze edit win- to section 6.7.1 "PDD and Profiles Measuring Pro-
dow in this case. gram"), you can use the Depths [mm] combo box
In the default settings, this window provides a to define measuring depths Rxx that correspond
menu bar and a toolbar with the same func- to the percentage dose values xx of the measured
tions as in the Analyze edit window (refer to depth dose curve (e. g., R100 for the depth of the
chapter XI "'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAn- 100% dose). On the Predefined Depths tab, you
alyze) Module" - 8 "Analyzing Curves"). By define the selectable Rxx values in the PDD and
selecting the Without menu check box, the Profiles pane. The actual measuring depths will
menu bar and the toolbar can be removed from be determined by means of the measured depth
the display. dose curve.

D948.131.00/10 en 389
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the MP3, MP2,
and MP1 Measuring Systems - Configuring WaterTankScans

By clearing the Replace Rxx by [mm] after mea- Editing the Tables
surement check box, you choose to preserve the
depths Rxx displayed in the PDD and Profiles – If there are no data in the table, a blank row is
measuring program (refer to section 6.7.1 "PDD shown that can be edited.
and Profiles Measuring Program") in the Depths – Rows can be deleted with the Del key.
[mm] combo box after the measurement.
By selecting the Replace Rxx by [mm] after mea- – New rows can be added with the Ins key. When
surement check box, you choose to replace the all the rows have been deleted, you have to
depths Rxx by the actual measuring depths after click a column header before new rows can be
the measurement. With this option, it will not be added. Blank rows will be deleted when you
necessary to measure and calculate the measur- exit the table.
ing depths again for the subsequent measure-
ments.

In case of electron radiation, the measured ion

dose curve will be converted internally into an
energy dose curve in order to determine the actual
measuring depth with respect to the depth Rxx.
For this, select the conversion protocol from the
Protocol for Electrons list box. The measured ion
dose curve will be preserved.

Isodose with plane

In this pane, you can define the measuring depths

for the profiles, which are required for measur-
ing isodose distributions with the Plane paral-
lel to central beam measuring program (refer to
section 6.7.2 "Plane parallel to central beam Mea-
suring Program").

These measuring depths can be set separately for

each radiation quality.

When you add a new radiation quality in the Radi-

ation unit Library module, a new isodose depth
table will be created automatically on this tab.
Check whether the entered depths are correct.

390 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Radiation unit Library' Module - Starting the Radiation unit Library Module

VII 'Radiation unit Library' Module

1 General Information 2 Starting the Radiation

on the Radiation unit unit Library Module
Library Module
The Radiation unit Library module is started
in MEPHYSTO Navigator (refer to chapter II
With the Radiation unit Library module, you can
"MEPHYSTO Navigator").
edit the library of radiation units, i. e., you can
manage the radiation units and their parameters.
• In the Toolbox area, select the Configuration
application group.
Pick lists are created for most of the parameters,
e. g., for radiation qualities, field sizes, or SSD
• Click the module for editing the radiation units.
(source surface distance). These pick lists can be
used in other PTW programs to facilitate entries. ➔ The main screen of the Radiation unit Library
module will be displayed.
The BEAMSCAN software is delivered with three
preregistered radiation units: Select the desired language for the user inter-
•
– DEMO LINAC face (refer to section 10.1 "Changing the Lan-
– STANDARD guage").
– DEMO MR (for combined MRT radiation ther-
apy systems)

HINT
Based on these templates, you can create your
own radiation units.

The library of radiation units is an SQLite data-

base. The database can be stored locally or on the
network. You can select the database to be used
with the Device Database Selection module. For
further information, refer to chapter IX "'Device
Database Selection' Module".

D948.131.00/10 en 391
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Radiation unit Library' Module - Main Screen

3 Main Screen

Figure VII-1: Radiation unit Library main screen

1 List box showing all available radiation units

2 Selected tab
3 Tabs to set the radiation unit parameters
4 Options selected on the open tab

392 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Radiation unit Library' Module - Adding New Radiation Units

4 Adding New Radiation Units

The following options are available for adding new Create a Radiation Unit from Scratch
radiation units:
• Select menu Edit → Add new radiation unit.

Copy a Radiation Unit ➔ In the list box, a new radiation unit named New
entry will be added.
• Select a radiation unit from the list box as a
template. • Enter the desired name for the new radiation
unit.
• Select menu Edit → Copy radiation unit.
• Adjust the desired parameters according to
➔ The list box will show a copy of the selected sections 5 "Editing the Parameters" and 5.1
radiation unit. "Adjustable Parameters".

• Enter the desired name for the new radiation

unit.

• Adjust the desired parameters according to

sections 5 "Editing the Parameters" and 5.1
"Adjustable Parameters".

D948.131.00/10 en 393
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Radiation unit Library' Module - Editing the Parameters

5 Editing the Parameters

When you open the Radiation unit Library module, – If you want to use a parameter for one of the
the last edited radiation unit will be displayed. radiation units, select the appropriate check
box in column Used.
A radiation unit is selected from the list box
(Figure VII-1, pos. 1). – You can add further parameters with the button
New, which will add new lines in the table.
Observe the following rules for editing the radia-
The new parameters will be visible for all radi-
tion unit parameters:
ation units.

– You can delete parameters with the button

Text Fields
Delete, which will remove the corresponding
Free text, e. g., the name of the radiation unit, can lines.
be entered in the text fields. The parameters will be removed for all radia-
tion units.

List Boxes ▼ – The TAB key is used to move between cells in

the table.
Drop-down list boxes offer a number of options
from which you can choose. It is not possible to – Double-click a cell or click and press the Space
enter text. key to activate the edit mode for a specific cell
in the table.

Tables – When you make an entry in the table and press

the TAB key, the entry will appear formatted.
HINT
– To sort data in the table, click the respective
Changes in tables always affect all radiation
column header.
units.

The BEAMSCAN software is delivered with pre-

configured tables that contain the most important
parameters for linear accelerators.

The configured parameters are visible for all radi-

ation units.

394 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Radiation unit Library' Module - Editing the Parameters

5.1 Adjustable Parameters In the lower part you can define the axis des-
ignations and the axis directions for the inplane
and the crossplane axes. The direction of the
5.1.1 General Tab depth axis is fixed (“downward”) and cannot be
changed.
In the upper part of the General tab you can set
the global data of the radiation unit: The free definition of the axes in the BEAMSCAN
software allows you to adapt the representation of
– name of the radiation unit measuring curves to a custom coordinate system.
You are thus able to compare the measurements
– radiation unit type:
directly with the standards established by radi-
e. g., Linear accelerator, Cobalt, Synchrotron,
ation unit manufacturers or with treatment data
Cyclotron, Tomotherapy
from radiation treatment planning systems.

– Source Collimator Distance (SCD) in [cm]

You can alter the axis configuration any time.
The SCD is only an administrative parameter.
Please note that a change of the axis directions
It has no effect on any calculation.
will affect the offsets, the offaxis values as well
as the curve directions in the graphic. This means
– source isocenter cistance (SID) in [cm]
that the curves may appear mirrored after you
– isocenter height in [cm] reload the radiation unit.

– flattening filter free, fixed or removable flatten- HINT

ing filter Before you define the axis designations and
axis directions, you should first decide whether
– gantry rotation direction: to use the designations of the radiation unit
clockwise or counter-clockwise axes, of the therapy planning system, or of
an established standard. In order to obtain a
– gantry upright position:
uniform orientation of the curves, users of the
0° or 180°
BEAMSCAN software may prefer to continue
working with the present coordinate system.
– Linac asymmetry:
Offset or X1X2

D948.131.00/10 en 395
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Radiation unit Library' Module - Editing the Parameters

HINT 5.1.2 Quality Tab

If axis designations or directions are modi- On the Quality tab, you will find the radiation qual-
fied upon completion of a measurement and ities. Each radiation quality is defined by the fol-
you load the measurement later on, the dis- lowing characteristics:
played name of the radiation unit will change
to <name>(2), indicating that the settings have – modality:
changed. For this reason, it is recommended photons, electrons, cobalt, neutrons, protons,
not to change the axis designations and direc- 12-C ions, or heavy particles
tions.
– radiation energy in [MV] or [MeV]

FFF energies are defined by selection of the

appropriate check box in the FFF column.

– nominal depth of the maximum dose

Radiation qualities are grouped for each modality.

HINT
The BEAMSCAN software is delivered with
the most common radiation qualities preregis-
tered. They form the basis for the preconfigured
parameter sets of the measuring modules (see
chapter IV "'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankS-
cans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring
System" - 12.2 "Setting Up Parameter Sets").
When you delete a preset radiation quality, the
corresponding settings for the parameter sets
will also be lost.

396 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Radiation unit Library' Module - Editing the Parameters

5.1.3 Collimator Tab 5.1.6 Wedge Tab

On the Collimator tab, you will find the different On the Wedge tab, you will find the wedge filters.
collimator types. Each collimator is defined by the Each wedge filter is defined by the following char-
following characteristics: acteristics:

– designation of the collimator type – designation of the wedge filter

– number of lamellae – angle in [°]

– lamella width in [cm] – wedge filter type:

dynamic or fixed
– lamella direction:
inplane or crossplane
5.1.7 Applicator tab

5.1.4 SSD Tab On the Applicator tab, you will find the applicators.
Each applicator is defined by the following char-
On the SSD tab, you will find the SSD value acteristics:
(source surface distance).
– designation of the applicator
The SSD is entered in [cm].
– shape of the applicator:
square, rectangular, round, or irregular
5.1.5 Field Tab
– inplane size in [cm]
On the Field tab, you will find the definitions for
the possible radiation fields. Each field is defined – crossplane size in [cm]
by the following characteristics:

– inplane field size in [cm] 5.1.8 Accessory Tab

– crossplane field size in [cm] On the Accessory tab, you can enter the acces-
sories available at the radiation unit. The default
– shape of the field: setting is an empty table.
square, rectangular, round, or irregular

D948.131.00/10 en 397
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Radiation unit Library' Module - Editing the Parameters

5.1.9 EPID Tab 5.1.11 Manufacturer Tab

On the EPID tab, you can enter the EPID sys- On the Manufacturer tab, you can select the name
tems. Each EPID system is defined by the follow- of the radiation unit manufacturer from the list box.
ing characteristics:
On the Manufacturer tab, you will find the follow-
– designation of the EPID ing manufacturer data
– address
– source distance in [cm]
– fax and telephone numbers
The default setting is an empty table.
– e-mail address

– website
5.1.10 MV imaging system Tab
On the Manufacturer tab, you can edit the man-
On the MV imaging system tab, you can enter ufacturer data, create new manufacturers, and
the MV imaging systems. The default setting is an delete manufacturers.
empty table.

Each MV imaging system is defined by a unique Edit Manufacturer Data

designation.
• Edit the desired manufacturer data.

Create New Manufacturer

• Click the New button.

➔ A new manufacturer will be created.

• Enter the desired data in the input boxes for

the manufacturer data.

Delete Manufacturer

• Select the manufacturer to delete from the list

box.

• Click the Delete button.

➔ The manufacturer will be removed from the

display.

398 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Radiation unit Library' Module - Saving Changes

5.1.12 Comment Tab 6 Deleting Radiation

On the Comment tab, you can enter a comment Units
concerning the radiation unit.

• Select the radiation unit to delete from the list

box.

• Select menu Edit → Remove selected radia-

tion unit.

➔ The radiation unit will be removed from the list

box.

7 Saving Changes

• To save modified parameters, added

or deleted radiation units, select menu
File → Save.

The changes cannot be saved and appropriate

error messages will be displayed when:

– the database is write-protected.

– there is no communication with the database

server.

– input boxes are not filled out correctly.

D948.131.00/10 en 399
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Radiation unit Library' Module - Importing Radiation Units from MEPHYSTO mc²

8 Creating a Data Backup 9 Importing Radiation

Units from
To prevent data loss, you can create a backup of MEPHYSTO mc²
the radiation unit library on the local computer.

• For this, select menu File → Local backup. If you created your radiation units in the appro-
priate library of MEPHYSTO mc², you can import
• In the standard dialog for saving files, enter a these "legacy" radiation units.
file name and select a directory. You can over-
write an existing library or create a new library.
• Select menu File → Import from MEPHYSTO
➔ The backup of the radiation unit library will be mc².
created.
• In the standard Open dialog, select the XLIN
• If you want to work with the backup version files of the radiation units to import from the
of the radiation unit library, you can select it 'Settings\Linacs' directory of your data backup.
in the Device Database Selection module. For
further information, refer to chapter IX "'Device ➔ The settings configured in MEPHYSTO mc²
Database Selection' Module". will be adjusted on all tabs of the Radiation
unit Library module, and the appropriate check
boxes in column Used will be selected.

➔ If a radiation unit with the same name already

exists in the database, the import will be
aborted and an appropriate error message will
be displayed.

• Save the database with the imported radiation

units.

400 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Radiation unit Library' Module - Settings in the Radiation unit Library Module

10 Settings in the
Radiation unit Library
Module

10.1 Changing the Language

The menus, dialogs, and messages can be dis-
played in different languages.

The following languages can be selected:

– German
– English
– French
– Spanish

• To change the language, select menu

Tools → Language → <Language>.

➔ A message will inform you that a restart is

required before the change becomes effective.

• Restart the Radiation unit Library module.

➔ The menus, dialogs, and messages will be dis-

played in the selected language.

D948.131.00/10 en 401
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Library' Module - General Information on the Detector Library Module

VIII 'Detector Library' Module

1 General Information on the Detector Library Module

With the Detector Library module, you can edit the CAUTION
detector library, i.e., you can manage detectors
Use in combination with unsuitable detectors.
and their parameters. The detector library allows
the program user to access the different detectors Incorrect Operation!
and parameters quickly and easily from the mea-
Using detectors from other manufacturers with
surement and analysis modules.
PTW products is the sole responsibility of the
user. PTW does not offer holders for detec-
Upon delivery of the software, the detector library
tors from other manufacturers for use with PTW
already contains the most important PTW detec-
water phantoms.
tors and the corresponding default parameters.
When using PTW TRUFIX holders with detec-
You can add more detectors and delete detectors tors from other manufacturers, the user is
from the library. responsible for the correct positioning in the
effective point of measurement.
The detector library is an SQLite database. The
database can be stored locally or on the network.
You can select the database to be used with the
Device Database Selection module. For further
information, refer to chapter IX "'Device Database
Selection' Module".

402 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Library' Module - Starting the Detector Library Module

2 Starting the Detector Library Module

The Detector Library module is started in

MEPHYSTO Navigator (refer to chapter II
"MEPHYSTO Navigator").

• In the Toolbox area, select the Configuration

application group.

• Click the module for editing the detector library.

➔ The main screen of the Detector Library mod-

ule will be displayed.

• Select the desired language for the user inter-

face (refer to section 10.1 "Changing the Lan-
guage").

D948.131.00/10 en 403
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Library' Module - Main Screen

3 Main Screen

1 2

6 7

Figure VIII-1: Detector Library main screen

1 Global detector parameters 5 Template list of all PTW detectors used

2 Activated group of detector parameters 6 Picture of the highlighted detector
3 List of all available detectors 7 Buttons for activating and deactivating the
4 Highlighted detector groups of detector parameters

404 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Library' Module - Adding New Detectors

4 Adding New Detectors

The following options are available for adding new Create a Detector from Scratch
detectors:
• Select context menu Create detector from
scratch.
Create a Detector from a Template
➔ The Create new detector dialog will be dis-
• In the templates area (Figure VIII-1, pos. 5), played.
select the desired detector.
• In the Create new detector dialog, enter a
• Select context menu Create new detector from unique combination of detector name and ser-
template. ial number.

➔ In the list of the user-defined detectors • Confirm with OK.

(Figure VIII-1, pos. 3), a copy of the selected
detector will be displayed. To differentiate ➔ In the list of the user-defined detectors
between the original and the copy, (1) will be (Figure VIII-1, pos. 3), the new detector will be
added to the name. displayed.

• Adjust the appropriate detector parameters. • Adjust the detector parameters. For more
For more information, refer to sections 5.2 information, refer to sections 5.2 "Editing the
"Editing the Detector Parameters" and 5.3 Detector Parameters" and 5.3 "Adjustable
"Adjustable Parameters". Parameters".

Copy a Detector

• In the area with the user-defined detectors

(Figure VIII-1, pos. 3), select the desired
detector.

• Select context menu Copy and rename

selected detector.

➔ In the list of the user-defined detectors

(Figure VIII-1, pos. 3), a copy of the selected
detector will be displayed. To differentiate
between the original and the copy, (1) will be
added to the name.

• Adjust the appropriate detector parameters.

For more information, refer to sections 5.2
"Editing the Detector Parameters" and 5.3
"Adjustable Parameters".

D948.131.00/10 en 405
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Library' Module - Editing the Detector Parameters

5 Editing the Detector Parameters

5.1 Modifying the Screen 5.2 Editing the Detector

Display Parameters
The screen display settings will be reset to the HINT
default settings when you exit the Detector Library
The detector parameters of the templates
module.
(Figure VIII-1, pos. 5) cannot be edited.

Detectors You select a detector for editing by clicking the

corresponding row in the table.
The list of the user-defined detectors
(Figure VIII-1, pos. 3) and the list of templates Observe the following rules for editing the detector
(Figure VIII-1, pos. 5) can be shown and hidden parameters:
by clicking the header text.

General Information
Detector Parameters
Double-click a field or click and press the Space
The detector parameters are divided into groups. key to activate the edit mode for a specific field.

The group of global detector parameters Once you have made an entry and pressed the
(Figure VIII-1, pos. 1) is always shown. Enter or Tab key, the entry will appear formatted.

Further groups of detector parameters can be If an input does not meet the requirements, it will
shown in addition. Activate or deactivate the dis- not be saved. A red frame identifies the input box.
play of a particular group by setting the corre- When moving the mouse cursor over the input
sponding button in the area Show additional para- box, an appropriate message will be displayed.
meters (Figure VIII-1, pos. 7) to the appropriate
position.
Text Fields

Width of Table Columns Free text can be entered in the text fields, such as
Description.
You can adjust the column width by shifting the
lines separating the columns.

406 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Library' Module - Editing the Detector Parameters

List Boxes

Drop-down list boxes only allow the selection of

an option. It is not possible to enter text.

Picture of the Detector

• Select context menu Change picture.

• In the standard Open dialog, select the desired

picture.
The following formats are supported:
– *.jpg
– *.png
– *.bmp
– *.gif

➔ The selected picture will automatically be

copied to the database.

D948.131.00/10 en 407
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Library' Module - Editing the Detector Parameters

5.3 Adjustable Parameters

5.3.1 Global Parameters

Parameter Description
detector will be displayed in the detector selection boxes of other
PTW software programs

detector will not be displayed in the detector selection boxes of other

PTW software programs
Name designation of the detector
Type number type number of the detector
SN serial number of the detector

5.3.2 Detector details

Parameter Description
Description brief description of the detector
Nominal measuring volume refer to the user manual of the detector
[cm³]
Measurement volume applies only to cylindrical chambers, refer to the user manual of the detec-
radius [cm] tor
Central electrode radius applies only to cylindrical chambers, refer to the user manual of the detec-
[cm] tor
Measuring volume depth applies only to plane-parallel chambers, refer to the user manual of the
[cm] detector
Nominal HV [V] nominal detector voltage, refer to the user manual of the detector
Nominal cal. factor N [Gy/ nominal calibration factor; this calibration factor is used when the detector
C] library contains no value for ND,WCo
Range for BEAMSCAN this is the proposed measuring range for measurements with the
BEAMSCAN hardware

408 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Library' Module - Editing the Detector Parameters

Parameter Description
Air density correction for absolute dosimetry, the detector requires an air density correction

the detector does not require an air density correction

Detector design detector design, refer to the user manual of the detector

HINT
Select the detector design Other only for detectors other than air-filled
ionization chambers.

Type subcode type subcode

HINT
The Detector design and the Type subcode are necessary to calcu-
late the conversion of ion dose to energy dose for electron depth dose
curves.

Purpose selection for use in absolute or relative dosimetry

Irradiation direction preferred direction of incidence, refer to the user manual of the detector
TG-51 kecal photon-electron conversion factor

5.3.3 Chamber voltage / polarity

Parameter Description
Polarity refer to the user manual of the detector
Max. bias voltage [V] refer to the user manual of the detector
Min. useful bias voltage [V] refer to the user manual of the detector
Max. useful bias voltage refer to the user manual of the detector
[V]

D948.131.00/10 en 409
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Library' Module - Editing the Detector Parameters

5.3.4 Calibration

Parameter Description
Reference temperature reference temperature for calibration, refer to calibration certificate
[°C]
Calibration Factor N [Gy/C] calibration factor, refer to calibration certificate
Measured quantity calibrated measured quantity, refer to calibration certificate
Calibration Date date of the last calibration, refer to calibration certificate

5.3.5 Comment

Parameter Description
Comment any comment concerning the detector

5.3.6 Manufacturer

Parameter Description
Manufacturer name of the detector manufacturer

410 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Library' Module - Editing the Detector Parameters

5.3.7 Parameters for the

BEAMSCAN Measuring
System

CAUTION
Use in combination with unsuitable detectors.

Incorrect Operation!

To prevent damage of detectors from other

manufacturers, users themselves need to
determine potential scan reductions for
BEAMSCAN and enter them in the Detector
Library module at BEAMSCAN.

Parameter Description
Scan reductions BEAMS- The purpose of entering the BEAMSCAN scan reduction is to prevent the col-
CAN lision of the detector mounted on the slide with the walls of the BEAMSCAN
PMMA tank.

The scan reduction is defined for the negative and the positive travel direc-
tions of all three motion axes A, B, and C horizontally and vertically in depen-
dence of the mounting orientation.
TRUFIX horizontal For horizontal mounting, the appropriate TRUFIX holder and TRUFIX
stop thimble are available.

TRUFIX components for horizontal mounting are not available.

TRUFIX vertical For vertical mounting, the appropriate TRUFIX holder and TRUFIX
stop thimble are available.

TRUFIX components for vertical mounting are not available.

D948.131.00/10 en 411
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Library' Module - Editing the Detector Parameters

5.4 Editing the Detector Edit Manufacturer Data

Manufacturers Edit the desired manufacturer data.
•
With menu Edit → Edit manufacturers you display
• Close the dialog with the Close button.
the Edit Manufacturers dialog:
➔ The changes will be saved.

Create New Manufacturer

• Click the New button.

➔ A new manufacturer will be created.

• Enter the desired data in the input boxes for

the manufacturer data.

• Close the dialog with the Close button.

Figure VIII-2: Edit Manufacturers dialog ➔ The new manufacturer and the associated
manufacturer data will be saved.
In the Edit Manufacturers dialog, you will find the
following manufacturer data
Delete Manufacturer
– address

– fax and telephone numbers • Select the manufacturer to delete from the list
box.
– e-mail address

– website • Click the Delete button.

In the Edit Manufacturers dialog, you can edit ➔ The manufacturer will be removed from the
the manufacturer data, create new manufactur- display.
ers, and delete manufacturers.
• Close the dialog with the Close button.

➔ The manufacturer will be deleted.

412 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Library' Module - Saving Changes

6 Deleting Detectors 7 Saving Changes

HINT • To save modified detector parameters, added

or deleted detectors, select menu File → Save.
The templates (Figure VIII-1, pos. 5) cannot be
deleted. The changes cannot be saved and appropriate
error messages will be displayed when:
• From the detector list (Figure VIII-1, pos. 3),
– two or more detectors with the same name and
select the detector to delete.
with identical serial numbers were created.
• Select context menu Delete selected detector – a detector without a name or serial number
or press the Del key. was created.

➔ The detector will be removed from the list. – some of the inputs are invalid.

D948.131.00/10 en 413
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Library' Module - Exporting and Copying the Detector Library

8 Exporting and Copying the Detector Library

8.1 Copying the Detector 8.2 Exporting the Detector

Library to the Clipboard Library to a CSV File
You can copy the entire detector library to the Clip- You can export the entire detector library to a CSV
board. The operation includes all detectors, tem- file. The operation includes all detectors, tem-
plates, and associated parameters. From the Clip- plates, and associated parameters. A CSV file can
board, the data can be pasted to another program be opened directly with a spreadsheet program.
(e.g., a spreadsheet program or an editor).
• Select menu File → Export to CSV.
• Select context menu Copy all detectors to the
clipboard. ➔ The entire detector library will be exported to
a CSV file.
➔ The entire detector library will be copied to the
Clipboard. ➔ The columns are tab-separated.

➔ The columns are tab-separated. ➔ The representation of numbers corresponds to

the setting in the operating system.
➔ The representation of numbers corresponds to
the setting in the operating system.

414 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Library' Module - Exporting and Copying the Detector Library

8.3 Exporting the Detector 8.4 Creating a Data Backup

Library to an Excel File
To prevent data loss, you can create a backup of
the detector library on the local computer.
HINT
Microsoft Excel must be installed on the PC if • For this, select menu File → Backup.
you want to export the data to an Excel file.
• In the standard dialog for saving files, enter a
You can export the entire detector library to an file name and select a directory. You can over-
Excel file. The operation includes all detectors, write an existing detector library or create a
templates, and associated parameters. new detector library.

• Select menu File → Export to Excel. ➔ The backup of the detector library will be cre-
ated.
➔ The entire detector library will be exported to
an Excel file. • If you want to work with the backup version
of the detector library, you can select it in the
➔ The representation of numbers corresponds to Device Database Selection module. For fur-
the setting in the operating system. ther information, refer to chapter IX "'Device
Database Selection' Module".

D948.131.00/10 en 415
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Library' Module - Importing the Detector Library from MEPHYSTO mc²

9 Importing the Detector Library from MEPHYSTO mc²

If you created your detectors already in the – If a "legacy" detector cannot be assigned to
MEPHYSTO mc² detector library, you can import any of the templates by means of the type
this "legacy" detector library. number, the detector will be imported with
the "legacy" parameters. In this case, the
• For this, select menu File → Import from missing parameters must be added.
Mephysto mc².
• Save the detector library with the imported
• In the standard dialog for selection of a direc- detectors.
tory, select the 'Settings' directory of your data
backup in MEPHYSTO mc².

➔ The detectors of the "legacy" detector library

that are located in a subdirectory of the 'Set-
tings' directory will be imported as described
below:

– If the "legacy" detector library includes

detectors with the same names and serial
numbers, the "legacy" detectors will not be
imported. This prevents overwriting of pre-
viously created detectors.

– If the name of a "legacy" detector begins

with a PTW type number, the program will
search the templates of the "new" detec-
tor library for a detector with the same
type number. If a corresponding detec-
tor is found, the "legacy" detector will be
imported. The missing detector parameters
will be supplied by the corresponding data
of the template.

416 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Library' Module - Settings in the Detector Library Module

10 Settings in the Detector Library Module

10.1 Changing the Language

The menus, dialogs, and messages can be dis-
played in different languages.

The following languages can be selected:

– German
– English
– French
– Spanish

• To change the language, select menu

Tools → Change language → <Language>.

➔ A message will inform you that a restart is

required before the change becomes effective.

• Restart the Detector Library module.

➔ The menus, dialogs, and messages will be dis-

played in the selected language.

D948.131.00/10 en 417
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Device Database Selection' Module - Starting the Device Database Selection Module

IX 'Device Database Selection' Module

1 General Information on 2 Starting the Device

the Device Database Database Selection
Selection Module Module

Via the Device Database Selection module, the The Device Database Selection module is started
global PTW database for radiation units and in MEPHYSTO Navigator (refer to chapter II
detectors is selected for all modules accessing "MEPHYSTO Navigator").
this global PTW database. The global PTW data-
base can be stored in the following locations: • In the Toolbox area, select the Configuration
application group.
– on the local PC

– on a network server • Click the module for selection of the global

PTW database.
For settings of the global PTW database, use the
Radiation unit Library and the Detector Library ➔ The main screen of the Device Database
modules. Selection module will be displayed (refer to
Figure IX-1).
If the database located on the network server is
to be used, the corresponding Windows service
must be installed on the server during installation
of the BEAMSCAN software. For further informa-
tion, refer to chapter I "Introduction to the BEAMS-
CAN Software" - 4 "Installing, Starting, and Exit-
ing the BEAMSCAN Software".

418 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Device Database Selection' Module - Selecting the Global PTW Database

3 Selecting the Global PTW Database

The main screen of the Device Database Selection will be displayed:

Figure IX-1: Device Database Selection main screen

Database on Local PC • Save the settings and exit the Device Data-
base Selection module by clicking the Save
• Select the database on the local PC by select- button.
ing the Local option button.
• To reject the settings and exit the Device Data-
The global PTW database consists of the file
base Selection module, click the Cancel but-
'Detectors.sqlite3' for the detectors and of the
ton.
file 'Accelerators.sqlite3' for the radiation units.
By default, these files are stored in the direc-
tory '<PTW application files>\Database'.

• If required, click the … button to select

another database.

Database on a Network Server

• Select the database on a network server by

selecting the Remote option button.

• Enter the URL of the server and the port num-

ber of the Windows service.

D948.131.00/10 en 419
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Positioning' Module (BeamDose Positioning) - Starting BeamDose Positioning

X 'Detector Positioning' Module (BeamDose

Positioning)

1 General Information on 2 Starting BeamDose

BeamDose Positioning Positioning

BeamDose Positioning is used to position detec- BeamDose Positioning is started in MEPHYSTO

tors in PTW water phantoms. Navigator (refer to chapter II "MEPHYSTO Navi-
gator").
BeamDose Positioning can read the detector
parameters required for the positioning operation • In the Applications area, select the Relative
from the detector library. Dosimetry or the Absolute Dosimetry applica-
tion group.
The module and the measuring system communi-
cate via RS232 or TCP/IP. • Click the module for positioning of the detec-
tors.
BeamDose Positioning can be used with the fol-
lowing measuring systems: ➔ The main screen of BeamDose Positioning will
be displayed.
– BEAMSCAN measuring system

– MP3, MP3-M/S/XS, MP2, MP1, MP1-S • Select the desired language for the user inter-
These measuring systems will be referred to face (refer to section 8.1 "Changing the Lan-
as "MP3 measuring systems" in the following guage").
chapters.

420 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Positioning' Module (BeamDose Positioning) - Quick Start (Workflow)

3 Quick Start (Workflow)

Requirements:

The complete measuring system is installed and

all the components are connected. All the network
settings have been performed.

• Start BeamDose Positioning

• Select components:
– Select measuring system:
Water phantom button

– Select detector:
Detector button

• Adjust desired detector position

• Position detector:
Move button

• Move detector to zero point:

Goto NP button

• Exit BeamDose Positioning

D948.131.00/10 en 421
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Positioning' Module (BeamDose Positioning) - Main Screen

4 Main Screen

4.1 Explanation of the Icons

4.1.1 General Toolbar

Select detector in the detector library

1
Select measuring system and set up
connection

2
4.1.2 Positioning Toolbar

Move detector to set position

3 Move detector to zero point

Cancel detector positioning

4

5
4.1.3 Miscellaneous Icons
Figure X-1: BeamDose Positioning main Display additional information
screen

1 Indication of the detector data

2 Settings for position correction
3 Positioning settings
4 Positioning toolbar
5 Status bar with indication of the connected
measuring system

422 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Positioning' Module (BeamDose Positioning) -
Selecting the Measuring System and Setting Up the Connection

5 Selecting the Measuring System and Setting Up the

Connection

CAUTION ➔ The Select water phantom dialog will be dis-

played:
Using the BEAMSCAN measuring system with-
out running Auto Setup.

Measuring Error!
Before using the BEAMSCAN measuring sys-
tem with BeamDose Positioning, the Auto
Setup routine must be executed with the
BEAMSCAN software. The correction val-
ues for the functions Leveling, Beam Center
Adjustment, and Auto Field Alignment deter-
mined during Auto Setup are saved in the
BEAMSCAN control unit. Then they are also
available in BeamDose Positioning.

For further information on Auto Setup, refer to

chapter IV "'Water Tank Scans' (WaterTankS-
cans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Measuring
System". Figure X-2: Select water phantom dialog

• From the list box, select the desired measuring

• To select the measuring system, click
system:
the Water phantom button or select
menu Devices → Water phantom. – BEAMSCAN measuring system

– MP3 measuring system

– Demo measuring system

When the demo measuring system is
selected, there will be no communica-
tion with the connected device. BeamDose
Positioning will simulate the positioning.

– no measuring system

D948.131.00/10 en 423
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Positioning' Module (BeamDose Positioning) -
Selecting the Measuring System and Setting Up the Connection

• Select the desired connection for communica-

tion with the measuring system by selecting
the appropriate check box.

HINT
No connections exist when BeamDose
Positioning is started for the first time. In
this case, create at least one connection for
communication with the measuring system
according to section 9 "Settings for Data
Transfer".

• Confirm the selection with OK.

➔ After the successful initialization of the mea-

suring system, the status bar (5) will indicate
the selected measuring system.

424 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Positioning' Module (BeamDose Positioning) - Selecting the Detector and Defining the Mounting Direction

6 Selecting the Detector and Defining the Mounting

Direction

• To select a detector, click the ➔ If the selected detector is a cylindrical and

Detector button or select menu vented ionization chamber, the Position cor-
Devices → Detector. rection input box in the position correction
pane (2) will automatically indicate half of the
➔ The PTW Detector Library dialog will be dis- radius of the chamber volume with a negative
played (refer to Figure X-3). sign.

• Select the desired detector by selecting the • Determine the horizontal or vertical mounting
appropriate check box. direction suitable for the measuring setup by
clicking the appropriate option button.
• Confirm the selection with OK.

➔ In the pane of the detector data (1), the pic-

ture of the detector, the detector name, and the
serial number will be displayed. The detector
description will be displayed in the form of a
tooltip when you move the mouse cursor over
the area.

Figure X-3: PTW Detector Library dialog

D948.131.00/10 en 425
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Positioning' Module (BeamDose Positioning) - Positioning the Measuring Detector

7 Positioning the Measuring Detector

CAUTION 7.1 Random Positioning of

Incorrect positioning of the measuring detector. the Measuring Detector
Erroneous Measurements! • In the detector positioning pane (3), define the
A condition for the correct positioning is desired position for each movement direction.
the attachment of the measuring detector by – If the selected measuring system does not
means of the TRUFIX precision attachment support all movement directions, the corre-
system. sponding input boxes will be deactivated.
The use of the TRUFIX precision attachment – If you enter a value outside the input range,
system ensures that the effective point of mea- the input box is marked red and an appro-
surement (EPOM) of the detector always cor- priate message will be displayed. The input
responds with the set measuring position. ranges for the three directions of movement
are not fixed. They depend on the following
HINT parameters:
When working with a BEAMSCAN measuring – selected measuring system
system, to prevent the collision of the detec-
– with the BEAMSCAN measuring sys-
tor mounted on the slide with the walls of the
tem:
PMMA tank, the scan reduction values stored
scan reductions for the detector and the
in the detector library are read and automati-
mounting position
cally transferred to the BEAMSCAN measuring
system. – with MP3 measuring systems:
set limit points of the movement axes

426 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Positioning' Module (BeamDose Positioning) - Positioning the Measuring Detector

• In the detector positioning pane (3), define the 7.2 Moving the Measuring
desired speed for positioning of the measuring
Detector to the Zero Point
detector.

Input range: (2 … 50) mm/s • In the detector positioning pane (3), define the
Step interval: 1 mm/s speed for positioning of the measuring detec-
tor (see also section 7.1 "Random Positioning
The setting is saved in the non-volatile mem-
of the Measuring Detector").
ory.
• To move the measuring detector to the
• To position the measuring detector,
zero point, click the Goto NP button.
click the Move button.

➔ After successfully moving the mea-

➔ After the successful positioning of the
suring detector to the zero point, the
measuring detector, the input boxes
input boxes of the available directions
of the available directions of move-
of movement will have a green check
ment will have a green check mark.
mark.

• To cancel the positioning, click the

• To cancel the movement to the zero
Stop button.
point, click the Stop button.

D948.131.00/10 en 427
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Positioning' Module (BeamDose Positioning) - Positioning the Measuring Detector

7.3 Position Correction

HINT
The position correction can only be used when
the selected detector is a cylindrical ionization
chamber and the mounting direction Mounted
horizontally has been selected.

7.3.1 Positioning the EPOM at the

Measuring Position

The standard DIN 6800-2 requires cylindrical ion-

ization chambers to be positioned in such a way
that their EPOM corresponds with the set measur-
ing position. The EPOM of a cylindrical ionization
chamber is the half of the radius above the cham-
ber axis. When the TRUFIX precision attachment
system is used and the Positioning on chamber
axis check box is cleared, this requirement is ful-
filled.

Example:
Positioning at the water surface, i. e., the EPOM
is at a measuring depth of 0 mm.

➔ The measuring depth indicated in BeamDose

Positioning and at the manual controller is
0 mm.

water surface
r/2

Figure X-4: Positioning the EPOM at the measuring position

428 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Positioning' Module (BeamDose Positioning) - Positioning the Measuring Detector

7.3.2 Positioning with EPOM Shift • Select the Positioning on chamber axis check
box.
After selection of a cylindrical ionization chamber,
the Position correction input box in the position ➔ In the positioning pane (3), the input box B will
correction pane (2) will automatically indicate half be labeled Meas. depth. Half the radius of the
of the radius of the chamber volume with a nega- chamber volume will be added to the current
tive sign. measuring depth.

Example:
Protocols, such as IAEA 398 or AAPM TG-51
The current measuring depth is 0 mm.
request that the point of measurement of cylindri-
cal ionization chambers be the chamber axis. To ➔ BeamDose Positioning will now indicate a
reach this position, the ionization chamber must measuring depth of r/2 mm.
be moved upward (negative direction) by half the
➔ The measuring depth indicated on the man-
radius of the chamber volume during positioning.
ual controller will remain 0 mm.
Positioning on the chamber axis is achieved with
the Positioning on chamber axis option. ➔ The measuring detector will always be moved
upward by r/2 mm with respect to the desired
measuring depth.

➔ The value indicated in BeamDose Positioning

will always be greater than on the manual con-
troller.

r/2
water surface

Figure X-5: Positioning with EPOM Shift

D948.131.00/10 en 429
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Positioning' Module (BeamDose Positioning) - Positioning the Measuring Detector

7.3.3 Positioning with Random

Position Correction

• Select the Positioning on chamber axis check

box.

• In the Position correction input box in the Posi-

tion Correction pane (2), enter the desired
value x mm.

➔ In the positioning pane (3), the input box B will

be labeled Meas. depth. The entered value will
be added to the current measuring depth.

Example:
The current measuring depth is 0 mm.
➔ BeamDose Positioning will now indicate a
measuring depth of x mm.

➔ The measuring depth indicated on the man-

ual controller will remain 0 mm.

➔ The measuring detector will always be moved

upward by x mm with respect to the desired
measuring depth.

➔ The value indicated in BeamDose Positioning

will always be greater than on the manual con-
troller.

430 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Positioning' Module (BeamDose Positioning) - BeamDose Positioning Settings

8 BeamDose Positioning Settings

8.1 Changing the Language

The menus, dialogs, and messages can be dis-
played in different languages.

The following languages can be selected:

– German
– English
– French
– Spanish

• To change the language, select menu

Tools → Language → <Language>.

➔ A message will inform you that a restart is

required before the change becomes effective.

• Restart the BeamDose Positioning module.

➔ The menus, dialogs, and messages will be dis-

played in the selected language.

D948.131.00/10 en 431
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Positioning' Module (BeamDose Positioning) - Settings for Data Transfer

9 Settings for Data Transfer

Depending on the measuring system, data can be • To select the communication channel
transferred by the following communication chan- for the data transfer to the water phan-
nels: tom, click the Water phantom but-
ton or select menu Devices → Water
Measuring Sys- Communication Channel phantom.
tem
➔ The Select water phantom dialog will be dis-
BEAMSCAN WLAN connection
played (refer to Figure X-2).
LAN direct connection
• To create a new connection, click the
MP3 RS232 direct connection
New button.

The WLAN connection and the LAN direct con-

• To edit an existing connection, click
nection will be referred to as LAN connection in
the appropriate Edit connection but-
the following sections.
ton.

For information on connecting the measuring sys-

• To delete an existing connection,
tem, refer to the user manual of the measuring
click the appropriate Delete connec-
system.
tion button.

432 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Positioning' Module (BeamDose Positioning) - Settings for Data Transfer

9.1 LAN Connection 9.1.2 Connecting via a LAN Direct

Connection
For detailed information on connecting the
BEAMSCAN measuring system, please refer to • Connect the device directly to the PC via a net-
the user manual of the BEAMSCAN measuring work cable.
system. For the connection, you can use the internal
network interface card of the PC or a second
network interface card.
9.1.1 Connection via WLAN
Connection • Switch on the device.

When a WLAN connection is used, the ➔ When a LAN direct connection is used, the IP
BEAMSCAN measuring system communicates address of the BEAMSCAN measuring system
with the access point without any connection is 169.254.1.1.
cables.
• The device and the PC have to be in the same
The access point and the PC with the subnet, i.e., their IP addresses have to be in
BEAMSCAN software are in a separate network. the same range.
For this, either the network interface card of
When a WLAN connection is used, the IP the PC will assign itself an IP address in the
address of the BEAMSCAN measuring system is range 169.254.x.x via AutoIP or you have to
192.168.15.100. configure the IP address of the network inter-
face card manually.

D948.131.00/10 en 433
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Positioning' Module (BeamDose Positioning) - Settings for Data Transfer

9.1.3 Setting a LAN Connection • Search for an existing LAN connection using
Manually the Search function as described in section 9.3
"Searching for Existing Connections".
• To create a new connection, click the In this case, the Devices dialog will only display
New button. the devices connected via the Ethernet inter-
face.
• To edit an existing connection, click
the appropriate Edit connection but- • Check the connection by clicking the Check
ton. button.

➔ The New Connection dialog will be displayed: • Confirm the settings with OK.

➔ The settings of the LAN connection will be dis-

played in the Select water phantom dialog.

Figure X-6: New Connection dialog for LAN

connection

• Set the required parameters for the connec-

tion:
Type: LAN
Name: user-defined name of the con-
nection
IP_Address: device address in the network
IP_Port: fixed IP port 8123

or

434 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Positioning' Module (BeamDose Positioning) - Settings for Data Transfer

9.1.4 Troubleshooting - LAN 3. In case of a LAN direct connection, the IP

Connection addresses of the device and PC are not in the
same subnet (range 169.254.x.x).
The device is connected via a LAN connection, You have to configure the network interface
but it is not detected with the Search function: card of the PC manually.

1. The Windows firewall prevents the search for

the device (broadcast). In this case, an appro-
priate message will be displayed.
Unlock the Windows firewall for the network
requests of the BEAMSCAN software:

• Select the category view.

• Select Start → Control Panel → System
and Security → Windows Firewall.

• Select Turn Windows Firewall on or off.

• Switch the Windows firewall off.

HINT
Switching off the Windows firewall is only valid
for this session. After restarting the PC and
starting a new search with the Search func-
tion, you have to switch off the Windows fire-
wall again.

2. A communication problem exists after the

connection to the device (WLAN/LAN) was
changed or the device settings were config-
ured.
Restart the BEAMSCAN measuring system.

D948.131.00/10 en 435
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Positioning' Module (BeamDose Positioning) - Settings for Data Transfer

9.2 RS232 Connection • Set the required parameters for the connec-
tion:

Type: RS232
9.2.1 Connecting via RS232
Name: user-defined name of the con-
Connect the device directly to the PC via an nection
•
RS232 cable. COM: COM port used
Baudrate: The baud rate depends on the
The RS232 cable needed is included in the deliv- selected device.
ery of the device. Handshake: 1 = ON
0 = OFF
The setting depends on the
9.2.2 Setting an RS232 Connection selected device.
Manually
or
• To create a new connection, click the
New button. • Search for an existing RS232 connection
using the Search function as described in
• To edit an existing connection, click section 9.3 "Searching for Existing Connec-
the appropriate Edit connection but- tions".
ton. In this case, the Devices dialog will only display
the devices connected via the RS232 inter-
➔ The New Connection dialog will be displayed: face.

• Check the connection by clicking the Check

button.

• Confirm the settings with OK.

➔ The settings of the RS232 connection will be

displayed in the Select water phantom dialog.

Figure X-7: New Connection dialog for

RS232 connection

436 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Detector Positioning' Module (BeamDose Positioning) - Settings for Data Transfer

9.3 Searching for Existing For further information on troubleshooting con-

cerning the Search function, refer to section 9.1.4
Connections
"Troubleshooting - LAN Connection".
An easy way to define data transfer settings is to
search for existing connections with the Search
function.

• In the New Connection dialog, click the Search

button.

➔ The Devices dialog will be displayed. The

Devices dialog will list all devices available for
the selected communication channel.

• Click the desired device.

• Click OK to accept the selection.

With Cancel, you reject the selection.

➔ The settings of the selected device will be dis-

played in the New Connection dialog.

Figure X-8: Devices dialog

D948.131.00/10 en 437
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Starting DataAnalyze

XI 'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module

1 General Information on 2 Starting DataAnalyze

DataAnalyze
DataAnalyze is started in MEPHYSTO Navigator
(refer to chapter II "MEPHYSTO Navigator").
DataAnalyze is used to edit, compare, and ana-
lyze previously measured and stored curves.
• In the Applications area, select the Relative
Compared with the measuring modules, it offers
Dosimetry application group.
advanced methods of comparing and summariz-
ing curves. The display of the relevant parame- Select the subgroup Data Analysis and click
•
ters can be configured, which affords a quick the module for analyzing measured data.
overview of the loaded curves. DataAnalyze can
be opened at the same time as other modules, ➔ The DataAnalyze main screen will be dis-
allowing curves to be analyzed during a measure- played.
ment.

HINT
DataAnalyze is a module for processing of
MEPHYSTO MCC files (*.mcc), which may
contain different types of curves, were mea-
sured with any detector, were extracted from
any loaded grayscale distribution. Depending
on the types of curves loaded, not all DataAn-
alyze functions will be available or applicable.

438 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Quick Start (Workflow)

3 Quick Start (Workflow)

• Start DataAnalyze – Depth correction with film inclination angle:

Inclination button
• Select options: – Shift along depth axis:
menu Tools → Options Shift button
– Depth-related correction:
• Open a file: f(x) button
Open button – Dose correction:
f(y) button
• Open a second file:
– Create equidistant measuring points:
menu File → Add
Equidistant button
– Edit individual measuring points:
• Edit administrative curve data:
Edit button
menu Edit → Administrative Data
– Noise reduction:
• Create curves: Denoise button
menu Edit → Create – Convert ion dose curves into energy dose
– Add curves: curves:
→ Added Scan Convert button
– Average curves: – Mirror depth dose curves:
→ Average Scan Reverse button
– Interpolate profiles: – Convert profiles to a different SSD:
→ Interpolated Profile ConvertSSD button
– Merge half-sides profiles: – Deconvolve photon profiles:
→ Merged Halfsided Profiles Deconvolve button
– Extract cross profiles: – Symmetrize profiles:
→ Cross Profiles Symmetrize button
– Add matrices: – Shift profiles:
→ Added Matrices Shift button
– Mirror profiles:
• Compare curves: Mirror button
menu Edit → Compared Scans – Halve profiles:
Halve button
• Analyze curves:
Analyze button • Save curves:
Select and edit protocols and analysis para- Save button
meters
• Save isodoses:
• Modify curves: menu File → Save Isodose Matrix
Process button
– Smooth curves: • Exit DataAnalyze
Smooth button
– Subtract values:
Subtract button

D948.131.00/10 en 439
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Main Screen

4 Main Screen

Figure XI-1: DataAnalyze main screen

440 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Main Screen

4.1 Explanation of the Enlarge a section of the graphics

window
Toolbar Icons
Open file Reset graphics window to its stan-
dard size

Close file Display the online help

Save data
The button functions can also be accessed from
the menus.

Display Analyze edit window For a more detailed description of the button func-
tions and menus, which are used in all mod-
ules of the BEAMSCAN software, please refer to
Display Process edit window chapter III "Basic Functions".

Display profiles

Display depth dose curves

Display profiles and depth dose

curves

Display 2D isodoses

Display 3D isodoses

Fill isodose ranges with colors

Show/hide discrete crosshairs

Show/hide continuous crosshairs

D948.131.00/10 en 441
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Opening and Saving Data and Curves

5 Opening and Saving Data and Curves

5.1 Opening Files HINT

By clicking the name of a parameter in the
Files can only be opened when they are in
table, the curves will be sorted by this para-
the MEPHYSTO MCC format (*.mcc) or in the
meter. By clicking the name again, the sort
MEPHYSTO export format (*.exp) and when they
sequence will be reversed.
contain curves.

• To open a file, click the Open

button or select File → Open.

• Select one or several files from the dialog.

➔ The existing data will be overwritten. If the

existing data are not yet saved, a warning
will be displayed and you can save them if
required.

• With File → Add, you can add data to existing

data.

• Instead of opening files, you can also insert

data or MCC files with drag & drop, refer
to chapter III "Basic Functions" - 8 "Data
Exchange".

• By double-clicking a MEPHYSTO MCC file

(*.mcc) or a MEPHYSTO export file (*.exp),
DataAnalyze will be started and the appro-
priate file will be opened. For this, you first
have to associate the MEPHYSTO MCC for-
mat (*.mcc) or the MEPHYSTO export for-
mat (*.exp) with DataAnalyze via the Windows
Explorer.

442 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Opening and Saving Data and Curves

5.2 Saving Curves 5.3 Saving Isodoses

To save curves, click the Save but- Open the desired file and show the
ton or select File → Save As or isodoses by clicking the Isodoses
→ Save Selected Scans As. button or by selecting View → Iso-
doses.
With the Save button or File → Save As, all dis-
played curves will be saved unnormalized. In the To save isodoses, select File → Save Isodose
standard "Save As" dialog, enter a file name and Matrix.
the directory. You can overwrite existing files or
create new files. In the standard "Save As" dialog, enter a file name
and the directory. You can overwrite existing files
With the Save Selected Scans As command, you or create new files.
save only the selected curves without normaliza-
tion in the MEPHYSTO MCC format (*.mcc). Isodoses can be saved as text files (*.txt) or as
PTW image files (*.img) and can be processed,
e.g., with the PTW software VeriSoft.

5.4 Deleting Curves

To delete curves, select them and use the com-
mand Edit → Delete Selected Scans. The curves
will be removed from the display. To delete the
curve from the file, you will have to save the mod-
ified file.

To completely remove a file with curves from the

PC, use the Windows Explorer functions.

D948.131.00/10 en 443
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Opening and Saving Data and Curves

5.5 Closing a File

Click the Close button or select
File → Close to clear the data and
curves from the screen.

If the existing data are not yet saved, a warning

will be displayed and you can save them.

5.6 Display of the File Name

When a file is loaded, the file name is displayed
on the right side of the status bar. Since this name
may be longer than the space available, you can
view the complete name by moving the mouse
cursor over this area.

In order to indicate a modification (Process, Cre-

ate, Delete etc.) of the loaded data, an asterisk *
is appended to the file name until the file is saved
again.

444 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Generating Curves

6 Generating Curves

6.1 Adding Curves 6.2 Averaging Curves

For curves to be added, they must be of the same For curves to be averaged, they must be of the
type, i.e., depth dose curves or profiles. same type, i.e., depth dose curves or profiles.

• Select all curves to add. • Select the curves to average.

• Select Edit → Create → Added scan. • Select Edit → Create → Average Scans.

➔ The Add Scans dialog will be displayed: ➔ The Average Scans dialog will be displayed:

Figure XI-2: Add Scans dialog Figure XI-3: Average Scans dialog

• Enter a weighting factor for each curve to add. • Enter a weighting factor for each of the curves.

• Using in the Scan column, select the curve • Using in the Scan column, select the curve
whose administrative data you want to assign whose administrative data you want to assign
to the added curve and confirm with OK. to the averaged curve and confirm with OK.

➔ The added curve will be generated and ➔ The averaged curve will be generated and
appears in the table and in the graphics win- appears in the table and in the graphics win-
dow. dow.

D948.131.00/10 en 445
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Generating Curves

6.3 Interpolating Profiles • Enter the depth or the off-axis value where the
profile is to be interpolated and confirm with
Interpolated profiles can be obtained if the follow- OK.
ing conditions are met:

– There must be a minimum of two profiles.

HINT
The depth or off-axis value must be within the
– The administrative data of all profiles must be
depths or off-axis values of the existing profiles.
identical (except for the date).

• Select Edit → Create → Interpolated Profile: ➔ The interpolated profile will be generated and
appears in the table and in the graphics win-
➔ For profiles at different depths, the Depth of dow.
interpolated Profile dialog will be displayed:
The measuring points of the interpolated profile
are calculated as follows:

– The new profile has all the measuring points of

the two adjacent profiles.

– The measuring points of a profile that are out-

Figure XI-4: Depth of interpolated Profile
side the area of the other profiles are assigned
dialog
the value of the last measuring point within the
area.
➔ For off-axis profiles at the same depth, the
Offaxis of interpolated Profile dialog will be dis-
Except for the depth, the administrative data of the
played:
interpolated profile are identical with those of the
other profiles.

Figure XI-5: Offaxis of interpolated Profile

dialog

446 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Generating Curves

6.4 Merging Half-Sided If at least one profile exists, which could not
be merged, an appropriate message will be dis-
Profiles
played. Then, the user can merge without these
Via Edit → Create → Merged halfsided Profiles, profiles or abort the merge.
all loaded left-sided and right-sided profiles will be
After merging is completed, the memory contains
merged into full profiles.
only full profiles.

HINT For further information on setting the parame-

A half-sided profile can be merged if the first ters for measuring half-sided profiles (e. g., star
(or last) measuring point is located in the cen- profiles with water phantom shifted in a paral-
ter. For profiles without a center value, exactly lel direction), please refer to chapter IV "'Water
1 measuring point has to be located beyond the Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
center. BEAMSCAN Measuring System".

Merging is possible if the following parameters of

the curves agree: 6.5 Extracting Cross Profiles
– same energy
For a set of loaded inplane (crossplane) pro-
– same measuring depth
files, the corresponding crossplane (inplane) pro-
– same modality
files are generated by selecting Edit → Cre-
– same profile type
ate → Cross Profiles.
– identical measuring angle
Extracting cross profiles is only possible if all
If several profiles are loaded, matching half-pro-
loaded profiles were measured with identical
files whose correspondence is unambiguous will
steps in a plane perpendicular to the central axis.
be merged.
Extracting cross profiles is not achieved by cal-
The administrative parameters will not be
culating values but rather by simply linking the
checked. The measuring points of the left-sided
measuring points in the direction of the orthogo-
curve will be added to the points of the right-sided
nal plane.
curve.

For the merge procedure, the measuring points

of the left half-profile will be multiplied with a fac-
tor so that the left and right half-side match at the
center. This factor will be calculated by dividing
the curve values in the center.

D948.131.00/10 en 447
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Generating Curves

6.6 Adding Matrices ➔ For matrices perpendicular to the central axis,

the following Add Matrices dialog will be dis-
Only compatible matrices can be added. This played:
means that they must have been measured in the
same plane and they must overlap at least par-
tially.

Compatible matrices are obtained by measuring

isodoses in a plane parallel to the central axis with
a wedge filter 0 and by repeating the measure-
ment with a different wedge filter, leaving all other
measuring parameters unchanged. Figure XI-7: Add Matrices dialog for matri-
ces perpendicular to the central
• Select Edit → Create → Added Matrices. (This
axis
function is only active when isodoses are dis-
played.) • Enter a weighting factor for each matrix to add.

➔ For matrices parallel to the central axis, the fol- • Enter the following parameters for the calcula-
lowing Add Matrices dialog will be displayed: tion of the resulting profiles:
– distance of measuring points along profiles
– distance of profiles in the direction of the
depth axis for matrices parallel to the cen-
tral axis or
– distance of profiles in the direction of the
off-axis for matrices perpendicular to the
central axis

Figure XI-6: Add Matrices dialog for matri- • Confirm with OK.
ces parallel to the central axis
➔ The added matrix and the corresponding pro-
files will be generated and appear in the table
and in the graphics window. The administra-
tive data of the new matrix and its profiles are
those of the first matrix.

448 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Comparing Curves

7 Comparing Curves

HINT Curves can be compared by either of the following

methods:
The results of the compare function depend on
the selected normalization mode. 1. Comparing two selected curves
Since the essential factor in relative dosimetry • Load any number of curves by clicking
is the shape of the curve (flatness, symmetry, the Open button or by selecting menu
penumbra, noise, etc.), you should select the File → Open.
To CAX normalization mode in this case (menu
Graphics → Normalize Graphics → To CAX). • Select two curves to compare.
To view the differences as percentages or • Mark the curve to be used as reference
absolute values, select another normalization curve by selecting the appropriate check
mode. box in the Ref column.

The result of the comparison in the graphics

windows is adjusted to the selected normaliza-
tion mode. The status bar indicates the normal-
ization mode.

To calculate the analysis values in the table,

the To CAX normalization mode is always used
for profiles and the To Maximum normalization
mode for depth dose curves.

D948.131.00/10 en 449
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Comparing Curves

2. Simultaneous comparison of multiple curves ➔ The Compare edit window will open if the
following conditions are met. Otherwise, an
• Load all curves by clicking the Open button
appropriate error message will be displayed.
or by selecting menu File → Open.
– When selecting two curves, they must be of
• Mark the curves to be used as reference
the same type.
curves by selecting the appropriate check
boxes in the Ref column. – The pool of loaded curves contains at least
one measuring curve and a matching ref-
HINT erence curve that share all of the following
You may load different numbers of measur- parameters:
ing curves and reference curves. – Modality
– Energy
or
– Curve type (PDD, profile, or FFF profile)
• Load the measuring curves by clicking – Profile type (inplane or crossplane)
the Open button or by selecting menu – Measuring depth
File → Open. – Field size
– SSD
• Load the reference curves by selecting
– Wedge filter
menu File → Add Reference.
– Measurement angle
➔ In the table, the check boxes in the Ref col- – Diagonal profile
umn of the loaded reference curves will be
– The assignment of the matched curves
selected.
must be unique, i. e., each measuring curve
• Select menu Edit → Compare Scans. must be associated with exactly only one
reference curve and vice versa.

450 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Comparing Curves

1
4

5
3
6

Figure XI-8: Compare edit window

1 Table with comparison data 5 Adjusted criteria for the "1D-Gamma-index

2 Graphics window with the curves to compare Method" compare mode
3 Graphics window with the resulting curves 6 Limit for passing the adjusted criteria for the
"1D-Gamma-index Method" compare mode
4 Summary of the comparison in the "1D-
– Measuring points above this line do not
Gamma-index Method" compare mode
pass the criteria (failed)
– Measuring points below this line pass the
criteria (passed)

D948.131.00/10 en 451
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Comparing Curves

7.1 Explanation of the The button functions can also be accessed from
the menus.
Toolbar Icons in the
Compare Edit Window For a more detailed description of the button func-
tions and menus, which are used in all mod-
Calculate the difference between
ules of the BEAMSCAN software, please refer to
the curves to compare
chapter III "Basic Functions".

Compare curves using the 1D-

Gamma-index method

Display profiles

Display depth dose curves

Display FFF profiles

Show/hide discrete crosshairs in

active graphics window

Show/hide continuous crosshairs

in active graphics window

Enlarge a section of the active

graphics window

Reset active graphics window to

its standard size

Close Compare edit window and

return to module

Display the online help

452 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Comparing Curves

7.2 General Information on – The most important analysis data for the dis-
played curve type and the deviation between
the Compare Edit Window
analysis values of the measuring curve and of
In the Compare edit window, a distinction is made the reference curve
between three curve types: depth dose curves, For more information on the analysis data,
profiles, and FFF profiles. refer to section 8 "Analyzing Curves".

Only the comparison of one curve type is dis-

played at a time. The comparison of another curve Graphics Window with the Curves to
type can be displayed by clicking the appropriate Compare and the Resulting Curves
button.
The resulting curve only comprises the identical
The curves of a matched pair are displayed with area of the two compared curves.
the same color.
The crosshairs buttons and the mouse-operated
functions to change the display format are avail-
Table with Comparison Data able in the active pane. You activate a pane
by clicking anywhere in that pane. For a more
In the table, the measuring and reference curves detailed description of these functions, please
are always displayed beneath one another. The refer to chapter III "Basic Functions".
reference curve is identified as such.
The status bar displays the normalization mode of
The table provides the following information for the curves to compare.
each matched curve pair:

– The most important administrative data

– Result for the "1D-Gamma-index Method"

compare mode
– Total:
Total number of measuring points on a
curve
– Evaluated:
Number of evaluated measuring points
– Passed:
Percentage of evaluated measuring points
that meet the criteria (displayed value is
rounded)
If this value is below the Passing rate set
in the Options dialog (refer to section 7.6
"Compare Edit Window Options"), the dis-
played value is red.

D948.131.00/10 en 453
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Comparing Curves

Summary for Comparison 7.3 Selecting the Compare

Only in the "1D-Gamma-index Method" compare
Mode
mode
• Select the mode for comparing the curves:

The number of compared curves that meet the cri- – Click this button or select
teria are indicated for each curve type (passed). menu Compare → Differ-
ence to calculate the devia-
– Green indicator:
tion between the two curves.
All curves meet the criteria.

– Red indicator: – Click this button or select

At least one of the curves does not meet the menu Compare → 1D-
criteria. Gamma to compare the
curves by means of the 1D-
– Gray indicator:
Gamma-index Method.
There are no curves of this type.
➔ The displayed resulting curve will automati-
cally be updated.

454 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Comparing Curves

7.4 'Difference' Compare 7.5 Printing Compared

Mode Curves
In the 'Difference' compare mode, all measure- By selecting Compare → Print, you will obtain the
ment positions of the measuring and reference printout, or by selecting Compare → Print Pre-
curves are compared. If no measured value exists view, you will obtain the print preview of the dis-
at the measuring position on one of the curves, it played curves and associated data.
will be determined by interpolation.
For a more detailed description of the print func-
The result of the comparison is calculated with the tion, please refer to chapter III "Basic Functions".
following formulas:

Absolute values:

Normalized values:

where
Mx Value of the measuring
curve
Rx Value of the reference
curve

D948.131.00/10 en 455
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Comparing Curves

7.6 Compare Edit Window – % Passing Rate:

This value indicates the minimum percentage
Options
of the evaluated measuring points required to
Select Tools → Options to display the Options dia- meet the criteria. If this is the case, the entire
log of the Compare edit window. curve fulfills the criteria of the "1D-Gamma-
index Method" and is marked passed.

– Suppress Dose below:

You can determine not to perform the Gamma
calculation if the dose values of the reference
curve are below a defined dose threshold.
For this, select the appropriate check box and
enter a threshold value as a percentage (%) of
the maximum dose.

– Ignore Build-up Region for PDDs/TPRs:

You can determine to ignore the dose build-up
region for gamma calculation. For this, select
the appropriate check box and specify the
Figure XI-9: Options dialog
desired region in millimeters (mm).
In the Options dialog, you can define the following
calculation parameters for the "1D-Gamma-index
Method" compare mode:

– mm Distance-To-Agreement:
accepted spatial deviation

– % Dose Difference With Reference to:

accepted percentage dose deviation

– Reference value for the accepted percentage

dose deviation:

– Local Dose:
dose at the corresponding position of the
reference curve

– Max. Dose:
maximum dose of the reference curve

456 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Analyzing Curves

8 Analyzing Curves

With the Analyze button or by

selecting Edit → Analyze Informa-
tion, you open the Analyze edit win-
dow. This edit window shows the
curves selected in the module as
well as a table with the correspond-
ing analysis data.

Figure XI-10: Analyze edit window

1 List box for the selection of the curve analysis

protocol
2 Table with
analysis data, black
administrative data, blue
3 Graphics window showing the curves

D948.131.00/10 en 457
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Analyzing Curves

8.1 Explanation of the The button functions can also be accessed from
the menus.
Toolbar Icons in the
Analyze Edit Window For a more detailed description of the button func-
tions and menus, which are used in all mod-
Open the Edit protocols and para-
ules of the BEAMSCAN software, please refer to
meters dialog
chapter III "Basic Functions".

Detailed view of a curve

Visual symmetry check

Split screen horizontally

Split screen vertically

Show/hide discrete crosshairs

Show/hide continuous crosshairs

Enlarge a section of the graphics

window

Reset the graphics window to its

standard size

Close Analyze edit window and

return to module

Export the displayed measure-

ment and analysis data to the
Track-it database

Display the online help

458 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Analyzing Curves

8.2 General Information on 8.3 Analyzing the Measuring

the Analyze Edit Window Data of the BEAMSCAN
MR Measuring System
The selected normalization mode is retained in
the Analyze edit window. In Details mode (also
CAUTION
refer to section 8.5 "Details Mode"), the profiles
are normalized to the center value and depth dose Using the measuring data, disregarding the
curves are normalized to the maximum. influence of the magnetic field.

Erroneous Analysis!
Only a single curve can be selected at a time in
the Analyze edit window. You select a curve by Measurements with WaterTankScans are influ-
double-clicking the graph or by clicking in the cor- enced by the magnetic field.
responding table row. You reset the selection via The user is responsible for taking the influence
the Discard Selection context menu. of the magnetic field into account when evalu-
ating the measuring data.
Via the Copy Analyze Parameters (data of the
selected curve) context menu or Copy All Analyze
Parameters (data of all curves), the analysis data
in the table can be copied to the Clipboard and
pasted to another program (e.g., Excel or any edi-
tor program).

D948.131.00/10 en 459
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Analyzing Curves

8.4 Analyzing Detector Array 8.5 Details Mode

Measurements
If the Analyze edit window shows
Curves measured with a detector array do not only one curve, that curve will
contain information about modality, energy, field always be displayed in the Details
length, field width, and source surface distance mode. If multiple curves are shown,
(SSD). you can use the Details button or
select View → Show Details to dis-
Since these administrative data are required for play a selected curve in the Details
analysis or modification of the curves, the follow- mode.
ing dialog appears before the Analyze or Process
edit window can be displayed. The colors of analysis details can be set by select-
ing menu Tools → Options (refer to section 8.12
"Analyze Edit Window Options").

Photon and Electron Profiles

For profiles in the Details mode, blue dashed lines

are used to show the penumbra.

The flattened region is a green line through the

mean value of Dmax and Dmin.

Figure XI-11: Insert administrative Parame- Furthermore, blue arrows point to the maximum
ters dialog and minimum dose (Dmax and Dmin) in the flattened
region and the dose values are shown.
• Enter the administrative data and confirm with
OK. The mean value is calculated as follows:

➔ The Analyze or Process edit window will be

displayed.

460 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Analyzing Curves

FFF Photon Profiles Bragg Peak Curves

In the Details mode, the penumbra of FFF pho- For Bragg Peak curves in the Details mode, blue
ton profiles are represented by blue dashes lines, dashed lines are used to show the Ra,x and Rb,y
while Field Region and Field Size are represented ranges and a green dashed line is used to show
by green dashed lines. the practical range Rp.

Blue dot and dash lines represent Slope Left and

Slope Right. Blue circles mark the corresponding 8.6 Visual Symmetry Check
points and the peak position.
In the Details mode you can check the symmetry
When the Unflatness analysis mode is selected, visually by superimposing the left half of the curve
the analysis parameters of the selected option will on the right half of the curve.
be represented by blue dashed lines.
• For this, click the Symme-
try button or select the menu
Electron Depth Dose Curves View → Symmetry.

For electron depth dose curves in the Details

mode, a green line indicates the X-ray back-
ground (extrapolated for a depth of 0) and a
blue tangent is shown on the curve where the
downslope is linear.

Photon Depth Dose Curves

There is no Details mode for photon depth dose

curves.

D948.131.00/10 en 461
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Analyzing Curves

8.7 Changing the • Confirm the entries with OK.

Normalization of Bragg ➔ The analysis data will be recalculated and the
Peak Curves display will be updated accordingly.

By default, the normalization is always performed • Reset the normalization to the default setting
to the maximum dose. When a Bragg Peak curve by selecting the Set normalization back to data
is loaded, the 100% value can be assigned to any points maximum option and confirm with OK.
depth and the associated analysis values can be
calculated.

• For this, select Graphics → Renormalize

Data.

➔ The Renormalize Data dialog will be dis-

played:

Figure XI-12: Renormalize Data dialog

• To change the normalization to any depth,

select the Renormalize Data option.

• Enter the depth for the normalization:

➔ If the entered depth is not a measuring

point, the associated dose value will be
determined on the basis of the neighboring
measuring points by linear interpolation.

• The value for the normalization can also be

calculated on the basis of the values in a range
around the entered depth. For this, enter the
desired range.

➔ The value will be determined by averaging

of all measuring values in this range.

462 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Analyzing Curves

8.8 Printing Analysis Data 8.9 Curve Analysis Protocols

You can select the protocol for analysis of the
8.8.1 Printing curves from the list box.

By selecting the menu Analyze → Print, you will

HINT
get the printout or by selecting the menu Ana-
lyze → Print Preview you will get the print preview The protocol must be selected separately for
of the displayed curves and appropriate analysis each curve type. You can choose one of these
data. curve types:
– Electron profiles
If the Details mode is selected, the graph on the – Photon profiles
printout or in the print preview will also be shown – FFF photon profiles
in Details mode. – Electron depth dose curves
– Photon depth dose curves
For a more detailed description of the print func- – Bragg peak curves
tion, please refer to chapter III "Basic Functions".
You can choose the following protocols:

8.8.2 True-to-Scale Printing – standardized protocols:

AAPM-TG51, AERBFFF, AFSSAPS No. 93,
HINT DIN 6800-2 (2008), IAEA398, IEC 60976,
True-to-scale printing is not possible when the IPEMB, and NACP
displayed curves are zoomed. An asterisk identifies the standardized proto-
cols.
By selecting Analyze → Print Designer, you will
get a true-to-scale printout of the displayed curves – accelerator protocols:
and associated analysis data. Elekta, Siemens, Varian, and PTW-Bragg-
Peak
For more information on true-to-scale printing,
refer to section III "Basic Functions". – user-defined protocols

Analysis definitions are not available for all curve

types in all protocols. If you select a protocol that
does not have an analysis definition for the actual
curve type, the hint Parameters not defined will
be displayed instead of the table with the analysis
data.

D948.131.00/10 en 463
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Analyzing Curves

Follow these steps to change the order in which 8.9.1 Edit protocols and parameters
analysis parameters are displayed in the table: Dialog
with the left mouse button select the parameter to
change and, holding the left mouse button down, You can edit the protocols in the Edit protocols and
drag it to its new position. parameters dialog:

– When you choose one of the standardized pro-

tocols, you can only edit the display format,
i.e., the analysis parameters to be displayed in
the table. You cannot edit the parameters and
equations.
– When you choose an accelerator protocol, you
can edit the display format as well as the para-
meters and equations.

– It is also possible to create user-defined proto-

cols.

The standardized and accelerator protocols use

different designations for the analysis parame-
ters. In the sections below we will use the desig-
nations from the standardized protocols.

• To open the Edit protocols

and parameters dialog, click
the Edit button or select menu
Edit → Edit Protocols.

464 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Analyzing Curves

4 5 6 7 8 9

Figure XI-13: Edit protocols and parameters dialog

1 Name of the selected protocol 5 Button to delete the selected protocol

2 List of all protocols 6 Button to restore the default settings of the
3 Six tabs for the following curve types: selected protocol
PH Profile: photon profiles 7 Analysis parameters available for the curve
EL Profile: electron profiles type
PH PDD: photon depth dose curves Checked parameters will be displayed in the
EL PDD: electron depth dose curves analysis table.
PH FFF Profile: FFF photon profiles 8 Highlighted analysis parameter (on yellow
Bragg Peak: Bragg Peak curves background)
When you open the dialog, the program will
9 Values of the highlighted analysis parameter
automatically display the tab matching the
The caption and unit are displayed as head-
selected profile type.
ers in the analysis table.
4 Button to copy the selected protocol

D948.131.00/10 en 465
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Analyzing Curves

8.9.2 General Information on the Homog. or Homogeneity, the calculation

Edit protocols and parameters Flatness method is selectable.
Dialog Symmetry The calculation method is selec-
table.
When the Edit protocols and parameters dialog
is displayed all available protocols as well as all Point Distance Distance between two positions
tabs for all curve types will be shown. Thus, all for the left and right halves of the
protocols can be edited simultaneously. profile corresponding to any dose
values.
HINT default: 90 % and 50 %
(for electron profiles only)
In case of standardized protocols, only a part
of the tabs will be displayed, i.e., the tabs of the Wedge Angle Wedge filter angle
curve types for which the analysis is defined. (for photon profiles only)

Max. Dose The maximum dose ratio accord-

Ratio ing to AFSSAPS No. 93 is the
8.9.3 Analysis Parameters for
ratio of the maximum dose Dmax to
Profiles
the dose on the central axis D0.
The following analysis parameters are available: Flattened The calculation method is selec-
Region table.
CAX Dev. (Central Axis Deviation), devia-
tion of the center of the field from Field Size at Field size at isocenter
the central axis (CAX), calculated SID
from the field size. F80 / F90 Max. distance between the posi-
Field Size Distance between the left and tions of the 80 % or 90 % dose
right positions for the same dose values and the geometrical field.
value (50 % dose in most cases).
For more details on equations and default analy-
Pen. Left/RightPenumbra, distance between the sis parameter settings, please refer to Appen-
positions of the 80 % and 20 % dix B "Analysis Parameters for Profiles" of this
dose values. user manual.
Dmax/Dmin Max./min. percentage of the dose
in the flattened region.

Dave Average percentage of the dose

in the flattened region.

466 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Analyzing Curves

8.9.4 Analysis Parameters for FFF The analysis on the basis of the inflection points
Photon Profiles is performed as follows:

(FFF = Flattening-Filter-Free) 1. New data points are added to the existing mea-
suring points by linear interpolation so that
FFF photon profiles can be analyzed either by equidistant data points are obtained.
renormalization or on the basis of the inflection
In a next step, the curve is smoothed. The
points.
smoothing operation blurs the penumbra but
The analysis by renormalization follows the its effect on the X-values of the inflection points
papers published by A. Fogliata et al. in Medical (position) is negligible.
Physics 39 (10) in October 2012, 43 (1) in Janu-
2. The first derivative of the smoothed curve is
ary 2016, and 47 (8) in August 2020 (refer to sec-
calculated.
tion "Literature"). These papers will be referred
to as "Fogliata 2012", "Fogliata 2016", and "Fogli- A brute force search is employed to search for
ata 2020" hereinafter. For renormalization, the for- the global maximum of the first derivative.
mula from the papers and the corresponding fit
In order to eliminate the effect of noise, all
parameters for 6 MV FFF and 10 MV FFF are
neighboring points of this maximum are con-
applied.
sidered whose derivative exceeds a threshold
(e. g., half the maximum) and that provide a
CAUTION weighted average of their X-values.
Using the default fit parameters without verifi-
cation. 3. The X-values (positions) of the left and right
inflection point are determined.
Erroneous Analysis!
The corresponding Y-values are calculated
The fit parameters on which the renormal-
from the original curve by linear interpolation,
ization is based were derived from measure-
with the Y-values of the left and right inflection
ment data obtained with Elekta Versa HD
point not necessarily being the same. Then,
and VARIAN True Beam accelerators. Verify
the two Y-values are averaged.
the analysis when using these fit parameters
for the renormalization of FFF photon profiles The X-values (positions) are corrected (by lin-
of other radiation equipment manufacturers. ear interpolation) so that they correspond to
Adapt the fit parameters if necessary. the averaged Y-value.

For the analysis according to Fogliata 2012

and Fogliata 2016, different fit parameters are
used. See also the information given in Appen-
dix C "Analysis Parameters for FFF Photon
Profiles".

D948.131.00/10 en 467
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Analyzing Curves

HINT Field Size Distance between the left and

right positions with identical dose
If the profile was measured for an FFF energy,
values (50% dose in most cases)
the analysis will automatically be performed
of the renormalized profile (renor-
with the "Analysis parameters for FFF photon
malization) or distance between
profiles".
the inflection points (inflection
For field sizes smaller than 10 cm x 10 cm, the points)
standardized protocol AERBFFF demands the
Pen. Left/RightPenumbra, distance between the
analysis according to the standardized protocol
positions of the 80% and 20%
IEC 60976. This is not done automatically; the
dose values of the renormal-
FFF as FF check box must be selected to set
ized profile (renormalization) or
this function.
distance of the defined region
Only the energies 6.0 MV FFF and around the inflection points
10.0 MV FFF will be analyzed. (inflection points)

Symmetry The calculation method is selec-

table.

The following analysis parameters are available: Unflatness Ratio of the CAX dose and the
dose at a given distance from the
Renorm. Value Selection of the analysis mode central axis (renormalization) or
or Evaluation The selected analysis mode distance between the positions
mode automatically changes the setting to the right and left of the 100%
in the following analysis parame- dose for the dose values 90%,
ters. 75%, and 60% (inflection points)
Renormalization
Slope Left/ Slope of a line passing through
The FFF photon profile will be
Right two fixed points on the profile.
renormalized before analysis.
The points are located at 1/3 and
Inflection Points
2/3 of the left and right half of the
The analysis will be performed on
field, respectively.
the basis of the inflection points

CAX Dev. (Central Axis Deviation), devia-

tion of the center of the field
from the central axis (CAX), cal-
culated from the field size (renor-
malization) or between the inflec-
tion points (inflection points)

468 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Analyzing Curves

Peak Pos. Peak position, off-axis position of 8.9.5 Analysis Parameters for
the intersection of the left and Electron Depth Dose Curves
right slope.
The following analysis parameters are available:
Off Axis Ratio Relative dose values at fixed
in/out or Off positions (e.g., 3 cm and 4 cm) R100 depth of the maximum dose, the
Axis Ratio to the right and left of the central calculation method is selectable
3/4cm axis
Rp practical range, i.e., depth at the
For more details on equations and default analy- intersection of X-ray background
sis parameter settings, please refer to Appendix C line and best fit line on the steep
"Analysis Parameters for FFF Photon Profiles". sloping section of the curve

R50 depth of the 50% dose

R90 depth of the 90% dose

Rq position of the intersection of the

tangent at the inflection point of
the curve and the best fit line on
the steep sloping section of the
curve

Rx depth of any selected percentage

dose value
Rt therapeutic range(also referred
to as R80 or, in the AFSSAPS
No. 93 protocol, as R85)

Ds percentage dose at the sur-

face(also referred to as D0)
IEC 60976 defines the surface
dose as the dose at a depth of
0.5 mm.
Dx percentage dose at any selected
depth

D948.131.00/10 en 469
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Analyzing Curves

X-Ray Bck. X-ray background as a percent- 8.9.6 Analysis Parameters for

age of the maximum dose Photon Depth Dose Curves
G0 normalized dose gradient (mea-
The following analysis parameters are available:
sure of the slope of the descend-
ing curve segment) R100 depth of the maximum dose, the
Ep0 most probable energy at the calculation method is selectable
phantom surface R80 depth of the 80% dose
E0 (mean) mean energy at the phantom R50 depth of the 50% dose
surface
Rx depth of any selected percentage
J2/J1 Ratio ion dose ratio to AFSSAPS
dose value
No. 93
Ds percentage dose at the sur-
HINT face(also referred to as D0)
IEC 60976 defines the surface
An electron depth dose curve will be correctly
dose as the dose at a depth of
analyzed only when the maximum depth is not
0.5 mm.
less than Rp + 20 mm (for fields ≤ 3 cm x 3 cm:
Rp + 40 mm). D100 percentage dose at a depth of
100 mm (referred to as %dd(10)x
For more details on formulas and default analy- in the AAPM-TG51 protocol)
sis parameter settings, please refer to Appendix D D200 percentage dose at a depth of
"Analysis Parameters for Electron Depth Dose 200 mm
Curves" of this user manual.
Dx percentage dose at any selected
depth

Qi quality index

NAP nominal accelerator potential

For more details on formulas and default analy-

sis parameter settings, please refer to Appen-
dix E "Analysis Parameters for Photon Depth
Dose Curves" of this user manual.

470 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Analyzing Curves

8.9.7 Analysis Parameters for 8.9.8 Modifying Protocol Settings

Bragg Peak Curves
• Open the Edit protocols and parameters dia-
CAUTION log.

Selection of several Bragg Peak curves at the Click the desired protocol in the list of proto-
•
same time. cols.
Erroneous Analysis!
• Define the analysis of a curve type by selecting
Only one Bragg Peak curve may be analyzed the check box in the header of the appropriate
at a time. tab.

The following analysis parameters are available: • Activate the analysis parameters to be shown
in the Analyze edit window by selecting the
Ranges proximal depth Ra,x and appropriate check boxes.
distal depth Rb,y for selectable
dose values • Edit the parameters and the calculation formu-
las for the analysis parameters.
Zref reference depth, i. e., depth in
the middle of the respective
value pair Ra,x and Rb,y
HINT
The following settings of the standardized pro-
Peak Width peak width, i.e., positive differ-
tocols cannot be modified:
ence of Ra,x and Rb,y
– analysis definitions for the curve types
Rp practical range, i.e., the distal
depth for a selectable dose – analysis parameters

Rres residual range, i.e., Rp - Zref

• To accept all changes click the OK button.
Plateau Level normalized dose for the first The changes will be discarded by clicking the
measuring point or a user- Cancel button.
defined position

Rmax depth of the maximum dose, the

calculation method is selectable

For more details on formulas and default analy-

sis parameter settings, please refer to Appendix F
"Analysis Parameters for Bragg Peak Curves" of
this user manual.

D948.131.00/10 en 471
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Analyzing Curves

8.9.9 Creating a New Protocol 8.9.10 Deleting Protocols

You create a new protocol by copying an existing • Open the Edit protocols and parameters dia-
protocol and editing the analysis parameters. log.

• Open the Edit protocols and parameters dia- • Click the protocol to delete in the list of proto-
log. cols.

• Click the protocol to copy in the list of proto- • Click the Delete button.
cols.
➔ The protocol will be removed from the list of
• Click the Copy button. protocols.

➔ In the list box a new protocol named Copy of + • To accept all changes click the OK button.
protocol name will be displayed. The changes will be discarded by clicking the
Cancel button.
• Change the protocol name in input box (1).
HINT
• Define the analysis of a curve type by selecting
the check box in the header of the appropriate The standardized protocols cannot be deleted.
tab.

• Activate the analysis parameters to be shown

in the Analyze edit window by selecting the
appropriate check boxes.

• Edit the parameters and the calculation formu-

las for the analysis parameters.

• To accept all changes click the OK button.

The changes will be discarded by clicking the
Cancel button.

472 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Analyzing Curves

8.9.11 Loading Default Protocol Deleted protocols can be restored at any time:
Settings
• Open the Edit protocols and parameters dia-
HINT log.

Loading default protocol settings is only possi- Create a new protocol:

•
ble for standardized protocols and accelerator
protocols. • Click the protocol to copy in the list of pro-
tocols.
The default settings of modified protocols can be • Click the Copy button.
restored at any time:
➔ In the list box a new protocol named Copy
of + protocol name will be displayed.
• Open the Edit protocols and parameters dia-
log.
• Rename this new protocol with the name of the
deleted protocol.
• Click the desired protocol in the list of proto-
cols.
• Click the Load Default button.

• Click the Load Default button.

➔ The selected protocol will be reset to default
settings.
➔ The selected protocol will be reset to default
settings.
• To accept all changes click the OK button.
The changes will be discarded by clicking the
• To accept all changes click the OK button.
Cancel button.
The changes will be discarded by clicking the
Cancel button.

D948.131.00/10 en 473
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Analyzing Curves

8.10 Export to the Track-it 8.11 Warning Messages in

Database Analyze Edit Window

HINT If an analysis parameter cannot be analyzed or

if the conditions for calculation are not met, the
Before data can be exported to the Track-it
corresponding analysis parameter is marked red.
database, the following software must be
Moving the mouse cursor over this area or dou-
installed:
ble-clicking the cell displays the corresponding
– Track-it warning message.
For further information, refer to the Track-it
user manual. For the conditions required for the analysis,
please refer to the appendix of this user manual:
– Track-it Import Client
For further information, refer to section 4.2 – Appendix B "Analysis Parameters for Profiles"
"Installation" and to the Track-it Import
Client user manual. – Appendix D "Analysis Parameters for Electron
Depth Dose Curves"
• Using Track-it Import Configuration, config-
ure the settings for the export to the Track-it – Appendix E "Analysis Parameters for Photon
database. For further information, refer to the Depth Dose Curves"
Track-it Import Client user manual.
– Appendix F "Analysis Parameters for Bragg
• To export the currently dis- Peak Curves"
played measurement and
analysis data to the Track-it
database, click the Track-it
button or select menu Ana-
lyze → Export to Track-it.

HINT
You may be prompted to first log in with your
user name and Track-it password. For further
information on the login procedure, refer to the
Track-it user manual.

➔ The data will be exported to the Track-it data-

base and an appropriate message will be dis-
played.

474 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Analyzing Curves

8.12 Analyze Edit Window

Options
By selecting menu Tools → Options, you will dis-
play the Options dialog for the Analyze edit win-
dow.

1 2

3 4

Figure XI-14: Options dialog

1 Button for the selection of the color of analy-

sis details from the standard Windows color
dialog
2 Thickness of artificial line of analysis details
3 Button to restore the default settings
4 Button to apply the changes and adapt the
display in the background without closing the
dialog

D948.131.00/10 en 475
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Modifying Curves

9 Modifying Curves

With the Process button or by

selecting Edit → Process, you open
the Process edit window. In this
edit window you can modify the
curves selected in the module.
The selected normalization mode
is retained in the Process edit win-
dow.

Figure XI-15: Process edit window

476 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Modifying Curves

9.1 Explanation of the Smooth all curves

Toolbar Icons in the
Process Edit Window
Subtract dose values from the
Show/hide discrete crosshairs measuring points of all curves

Depth correction with film inclina-

tion angle (only available for film
Show/hide continuous crosshairs
data)

Shift all curves along the depth

Accept the performed modifica- axis
tions
Depth-related correction of all
Reject the modifications that have curves by means of a correction
not yet been accepted table of the DataFit module

Dose correction of all curves by

Enlarge a section of the graphics means of a correction table of the
window FilmCal module
Create curves with equidistant
Reset graphics window to its stan-
measuring points
dard size

Modify individual measuring points

Accept all modifications, close the
of the selected curve in the Edit
Process edit window, and return to
Dose Values window
the module
Noise reduction for all curves
Transfer the modified curves
as additional curves, close the
Process edit window, and return to
Convert ion dose curves into
the module
energy dose curves
Reject all modifications, close the
Process edit window, and return to Mirror all depth dose curves
the module

Display the online help

D948.131.00/10 en 477
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Modifying Curves

Convert all profiles to a different 9.2 General Information on

SSD
the Process Edit Window
Deconvolve all profiles In this section, the modifications of curves refer to
the subsequent editing and smoothing of curves
as well as to corrections that are required due to
Symmetrize all profiles the physical properties of the measuring devices
(detectors, film). Each modified curve is anno-
tated to identify the modifications performed. This
Shift all profiles annotation is saved together with the curve and
can be reviewed via the Properties box.

Profiles and depth dose curves can be modified

Mirror all profiles on the central
simultaneously in the Process edit window.
axis

The modifications performed in the Process edit

Halve all profiles
window are always simultaneously applied to all
curves of the same type (all curves, all depth
dose curves, or all profiles). If you want to mod-
The button functions can also be accessed from ify only one profile or only one depth dose curve,
the menus. make sure that only that curve is displayed in the
Process edit window.
For a more detailed description of the button func-
tions and menus, which are used in all mod- Exception: All → Edit Dose Values (Edit button).
ules of the BEAMSCAN software, please refer to This function can only be applied to a single curve.
chapter III "Basic Functions". You select the curve by double-clicking it. You
reset the selection via the Discard Selection con-
text menu.

In the Process edit window, the profiles and depth

dose curves are displayed with the same color as
in the module.

478 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Modifying Curves

Once modified, the original curves are displayed 9.3 Modifying Detector Array
gray and the modified curves are displayed with
Measurements
the respective color.
In order to modify curves measured with a PTW
With the Accept Last button or by
detector array, you first have to enter the required
selecting Process → Accept Last
administrative data according to section 8.4 "Ana-
Corrections, you accept all modifi-
lyzing Detector Array Measurements".
cations performed and delete the
gray curves.

With the Undo Last button or by 9.4 Smoothing

selecting Process → Undo Last
Corrections, you reject the mod- Click the Smooth button or select
ifications that have not yet been menu All → Smooth to smooth all
accepted. profiles and depth dose curves.

With the Accept button or via The curves are smoothed by means of an SMA
Process → Accept, you close the filter (SMA = Simple Moving Average). Smooth-
Process edit window and display ing of a curve or curve segment can be performed
the modified curve in the module. repeatedly.
Modifications can only be saved in
the module.
Smoothing Operation
With the Insert button or via
Process → Insert, you close the PTW recommends defining the region to
Process edit window and transfer be smoothed by means of two crosshairs
the modified curves to the mod- (crosshairs, refer to chapter III "Basic Functions").
ule as additional curves. Additional If no region is defined, an appropriate message
curves can only be saved in the will be displayed. You can continue the smoothing
module. operation, i. e., smooth the entire curve, or cancel
it.
For an explanation of the Graphics menu but-
tons (crosshairs and mouse-operated functions
to change the display format), please refer to
HINT
chapter III "Basic Functions". Regions where the dose gradient is high should
not be smoothed if possible as, depending
on the size of the smoothing window, this
might alter the gradient slope (e. g., penumbra
regions), leading to a slope different from the
original measurement.

D948.131.00/10 en 479
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Modifying Curves

– The measuring data are first interpolated: Example:

– The increments for interpolation are always

A profile measurement is to be smoothed to
10% of the minimum increment (resolu-
reduce the high noise amplitude.
tion) within the region selected with the
crosshairs or the entire curve. The resolution within the region defined with the
– The interpolated data points are added to crosshairs is 3 mm.
the measuring data.
– The measuring data are first interpolated with
➔ All the data points are now equidistant. a spacing of 0.3 mm (10 % of 3 mm).

– The data are subsequently smoothed by – Then, all the data points are smoothed in a
means of the SMA filter. smoothing window of 30 x 0.3 mm = 9 mm.

– The interpolated data points are removed – Eventually, the interpolated data points are
again. removed.

The smoothing window for the SMA filter can

be adjusted in menu Tools → Options (refer to
section 9.15 "Process Edit Window Options").
The smoothing window can be specified rela-
tive to the minimum increment or as an absolute
value.
Make sure that the smoothing window is smaller
than the region to be smoothed that was defined
with the two crosshairs.

When you move the mouse cursor over the

Smooth button, the current smoothing window
width will be displayed in the form of a tooltip.

480 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Modifying Curves

9.5 Subtracting Dose Values 9.6 Depth Correction with

Film Inclination Angle
Click the Subtract button or select
menu All → Subtract Value to sub-
HINT
tract a normalized dose value from
all profiles and depth dose curves. This function is only available for film data.

➔ The Subtract Value dialog will be displayed: Click the Inclination button or select
All → Film Inclination to apply a
depth correction on the basis of the
film inclination angle to all profiles
and depth dose curves.

➔ The Film Inclination dialog will be displayed:

Figure XI-16: Subtract Value dialog

• Enter the desired value. The maximum value

of all curves is displayed for information pur-
poses.
Figure XI-17: Film Inclination dialog
• By selecting the check box, you can set the
resulting negative dose values to zero.
➔ The film inclination angle saved together with
the curves is displayed.
This function is primarily used to correct film data,
e.g., to subtract an optical background density
• Confirm with OK.
from all measuring values.
➔ All profile depths and all measuring positions
of the depth dose curves are multiplied with the
cosine of the film inclination angle.

D948.131.00/10 en 481
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Modifying Curves

9.7 Shifting Curves along the 9.8 Depth-Related Correction

Depth Axis
Click the f(x) button or select
Click the Shift button or select menu All → Apply Correction Func-
menu All → Shift along depth axis tion f (Position) to apply a depth-
to shift all profiles and depth dose related correction to all profiles and
curves in the direction of the depth depth dose curves, using correc-
axis. tion tables.

➔ The Shift Scans along Depth Axis dialog will ➔ The dialog for selecting the correction table for
we displayed: the depth-related correction will be displayed:

Figure XI-18: Shift Scans along Depth Axis Figure XI-19: Correction Function f(Position)
dialog dialog

• Enter the desired value. When you enter a pos- Click the … button to display the Open
•
itive value, the curves are shifted in the posi- File dialog where you can select the correction
tive direction; with a negative value, they are table.
shifted in the negative direction.
In the correction table, you will find the correc-
tion values for the different measuring depths.
All measuring values will be multiplied with
the respective correction factors. For measuring
depths whose correction factor is not available,
the correction factor of the minimum or maximum
depth found in the table is used.

482 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Modifying Curves

Correction tables are created with the DataFit 9.9 Dose Correction
module (refer to chapter XIII "'Correction Tables'
Module (DataFit)"). Click the f(y) button or select menu
All → Apply Correction Function f
Data acquired with water phantoms and films can (Dose) to apply a dose correction to
be corrected. all profiles and depth dose curves,
using correction tables.
In the case of electron radiation, a depth-related
correction can also be performed according to a ➔ The dialog for selecting the correction table for
dosimetry protocol, refer to section 9.13.1 "Con- the dose correction will be displayed:
verting an Ion Dose Curve to an Energy Dose
Curve".

Figure XI-20: Correction Function f(Dose) dia-

log

• Click the … button to display the Open

File dialog where you can select the correction
table.

Each measuring value will be replaced with the

corresponding value from the table. For measur-
ing values whose nominal value is not available,
the nominal value corresponding to the minimum
or maximum measuring value found in the table
is used.

Correction tables are created with the FilmCal

module (see FilmCal user manual).

This function is primarily used to correct film data,

e.g., to convert optical density into dose values.

D948.131.00/10 en 483
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Modifying Curves

9.10 Creating Equidistant HINT

Measuring Points The same range for all scans option is only
available if all the curves are of the same type
Click the Equidistant button or (profiles or depth dose curves).
select menu All → Create equidis-
tant points to create profiles and
• If the same range for all scans option is
depth dose curves with equidistant
selected and the range limits are outside the
measuring points.
first/last measuring point, additional points will
be entered (extrapolated). For this, you have
➔ The Create equidistant points dialog will be
to choose an extrapolation mode (refer to
displayed:
Figure XI-22):

– set to zero
The values outside the first/last measuring
point are set to 0.

– set to last available value

The values outside the first/last measuring
point are set to the last available value.
– extrapolate to 0 at begin/end of the region
The values at the range limits are set to
0 and the remaining values are calculated
along the straight line between the first/last
Figure XI-21: Create equidistant points dialog measuring point and the range limit.

• Enter the distance between points in [mm] in

the Distance input box.

• Enter the range for creating equidistant points:

– maximum range of each scan

Equidistant points are created over the
complete measuring range of each curve.

– same range for all scans

Equidistant points are created over the
specified range. The default range is the
measuring range of the longest curve.

484 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Modifying Curves

• Confirm with OK.

➔ The equidistant measuring points will be cre-

ated.
– In the case of depth dose curves, equidis-
tant points will be created beginning with
the first measuring point.

– In the case of profiles, equidistant points

will be created to the left and to the right
beginning at position 0.

– If the measuring range is not a multiple

of the entered distance between points, a
warning will be displayed, stating that the
last measuring points will be cut. You can
cancel the modification at this point.

D948.131.00/10 en 485
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Modifying Curves

original profile
extrapolated values
range limit

Figure XI-22: Extrapolation modes

A - set to zero
B - set to last available value
C - extrapolate to 0 at begin/end of the region

486 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Modifying Curves

9.11 Editing Individual

Measuring Points
Click the Edit button or select menu
All → Edit Dose Values to open the
Edit Dose Values window where
individual measuring points of a
selected curve can be modified,
i.e.,

– positions or dose values can be changed

– measuring points can be interpolated
– measuring points can be added
– measuring points can be deleted

Figure XI-23: Edit Dose Values window

D948.131.00/10 en 487
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Modifying Curves

9.11.1 Explanation of the Toolbar 9.11.2 General Information on the

Icons in the Edit Dose Values Edit Dose Values Window
Window
Discrete crosshairs are automatically displayed
Update the graphics window con- when you open the Edit Dose Values window.
tent This allows you to select measuring points in the
graphics window.
Change dose values with the
mouse (with discrete crosshairs All functions in the two panes of the Edit Dose
only) Values window can be executed from the context
menus (click the right mouse button to display the
Show/hide discrete crosshairs context menus).

When the graph is modified, these changes will

Show/hide continuous crosshairs automatically be applied to the table, and vice-
versa.

Accept all changes, close the Edit With the Refresh button, you can
Dose Values window (also refer update the graph if required.
to section 9.2 "General Informa-
tion on the Process Edit Win-
dow"), and return to the Process 9.11.3 Selecting Data
edit window
You can select values (position, dose value) in the
Reject changes, close the Edit
table by clicking them. A box then identifies the
Dose Values window, and return
selected value.
to the Process edit window

Display the online help You select a measuring point by clicking the cor-
responding table row or by clicking the measur-
ing point on the graph (with discrete crosshairs
only). You select additional measuring points (a
The button functions can also be accessed from
sequence of measuring points) by holding the
the menus.
Shift key down and clicking the other measuring
points.
For a more detailed description of the button func-
tions and menus, which are used in all mod-
To select all measuring points, use the Select All
ules of the BEAMSCAN software, please refer to
context menu in the table.
chapter III "Basic Functions".

488 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Modifying Curves

9.11.4 Changing Positions or Dose – A new measuring point is added by interpo-

Values lation between two selected measuring points
with the Insert between points context menu.
Selected values (position, dose) displayed in a
selection frame can be edited, i.e., they can be – Dose values copied from another program can
overwritten with new values. Confirm the new be pasted with the Paste context menu in the
entered value with the Enter key, with the TAB key, table.
or by clicking any other value.
HINT
With the Change button, you can
Dose values can only be pasted if the copied
change the dose values in the
range (number of measuring points) is identical
graph by moving the correspond-
with the target range.
ing measuring point with the mouse
(with discrete crosshairs only). You
have to confirm the change via an – Measuring points can be added in the graph-
appropriate dialog. ics window by copying the data in another pro-
gram and pasting them with the Paste all data
points context menu of the graphic display.
9.11.5 Interpolating Measuring
Points HINT
All existing measuring points will be deleted
Use the Interpolate Val. context menu to obtain
and replaced with the new measuring points
the selected measuring point by linear interpola-
(two at minimum).
tion between the preceding and the subsequent
measuring point.
9.11.7 Deleting Measuring Points
9.11.6 Adding Measuring Points
Use the Delete selected points context menu in
the table or the Del key to delete all selected mea-
There are different methods for adding measuring
suring points.
points:

Use the Delete all data points context menu of the

– A blank row is inserted above the selected
graphic display to delete all measuring points.
measuring point with the Insert context menu
or with the Insert key. Position and dose
value are entered manually or by interpolation
(refer to section 9.11.5 "Interpolating Measur-
ing Points").

D948.131.00/10 en 489
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Modifying Curves

9.12 Noise Reduction 9.13 Modifying Depth Dose

Curves
The Denoise function for noise reduction is based
on a "Convolutional Neural Network". The PTW
approach employs a U-Net-like architecture, refer 9.13.1 Converting an Ion Dose Curve
to U-Net: Convolutional Networks for Biomed- to an Energy Dose Curve
ical Image Segmentation.
This function is available for ion dose curves only
The function was implemented using the Tensor- (electron radiation).
Flow open source platform, refer to www.tensor-
flow.org. Ion dose curves are converted to energy dose
curves by multiplication with the ratio of the mass
Noise reduction is only possible if the loaded collision stopping power values for air and phan-
depth dose curves or profiles were measured with toms, i.e., the sw,a values.
a PTW microDiamond detector type 60019. These sw,a values are either listed in a table or
given in formulas used by the protocols.
The formulas in the protocols are based on the R50
values, which can only be determined correctly
With the Denoise button or via
when the curves are measured under the refer-
menu All → Denoise, you can
ence conditions required by the protocols. For the
reduce the influence of noise arti-
reference conditions of the individual protocols,
facts on all loaded curves to a min-
please refer to Appendix Appendix D "Analysis
imum. The function does not alter
Parameters for Electron Depth Dose Curves" of
the curve shape.
this user manual.
If noise reduction is not possible, the Denoise but-
This conversion to a depth energy dose curve is a
ton will be disabled, e. g., when a different detec-
prerequisite for many radiation treatment planning
tor or a modality other than photons or electrons
systems.
is used. When moving the mouse cursor over the
Denoise button, an appropriate tooltip will be dis- Click the Dose Convert button or
played. select PDD → Convert PDI to
PDD to convert all ion dose curves
shown in the Process edit window
to energy dose curves on the basis
of a dosimetry protocol.

490 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Modifying Curves

You can select the dosimetry protocol to HINT

be applied for the conversion by selecting
Make sure that the correct type codes, sec-
Tools → Options (refer to section 9.15 "Process
ondary type codes, and radii are entered in the
Edit Window Options").
Detector Library module for all detectors.
The standard ionization chamber for the Before performing the measurement, check
BEAMSCAN measuring system is the Semiflex that the correct detector has been selected.
3D chamber type 31021. The dosimetry proto-
cols DIN 6800-2 and IAEA TRS398 do not provide The conversion of ion dose to energy dose is per-
any correction factors for this ionization cham- formed according to literature references [6] to [9].
ber. When starting the conversion, an appropriate
message will be displayed. You can perform the
conversion with PTW correction factors or cancel
it.
The same applies to the Advanced Markus cham-
ber type 34045 and the dosimetry protocol IAEA
TRS398.

Furthermore, you can define that a dialog for

entering the R50 values shall be displayed (refer
to section "R50 Values for Conversion dialog")
if the measurements have not been performed
under reference conditions. For this, select the
appropriate check box via Tools → Options (refer
to section 9.15 "Process Edit Window Options").
Otherwise, all curves, even those not measured
under reference conditions, will be converted
without any further confirmation.

To be able to convert ion dose curves (obtained

with air ionization chambers) to energy dose
curves, the dosimetry protocols require detec-
tor-specific parameters from the detector library.

D948.131.00/10 en 491
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Modifying Curves

R50 Values for Conversion Dialog

The R50 Values for Conversion dialog (refer to

Figure XI-24) will be displayed if the appropriate
check box is selected via Tools → Options and
none of the selected measurements has been
performed under reference conditions for at least
one energy.

R50 values not determined under reference condi-

tions are highlighted yellow in the R50 Ion for con-
version column and can be modified before the
conversion.

Furthermore, you can also check the other R50

values in the R50 Ion for conversion column and
modify them before the conversion if needed.

3 4 5 6

Figure XI-24: R50 Values for Conversion dialog

1 Protocol selected for the conversion 5 R50 value calculated from the measuring val-
2 Reference conditions for determining the R50 ues
values 6 R50 value for the conversion
3 Nominal energy of the measurement 7 R50 value of a measurement not performed
4 Measurement conditions under reference conditions (highlighted yel-
low)

492 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Modifying Curves

Conversion of the Associated Profiles 9.13.2 Mirroring Depth Dose Curves

To also convert the associated profiles, select Click the Reverse button or select
Tools → Options (refer to section 9.15 "Process PDD → Reverse to mirror all depth
Edit Window Options"), and then select the Con- dose curves shown in the Process
vert matching profiles option. edit window at their “mean depth
dose coordinate”.
HINT
Example:
The conversion of profiles is only possible
when a depth dose curve with the same energy
exists. Drel(%)
If profile(s) and several depth dose curves (with
the same energy) were loaded, the first depth
dose curve (in the order of the loaded curves)
is used for conversion.

If this curve was not measured under refer-

ence conditions and the appropriate check box
is selected via Tools → Options, the R50 Val-
d (mm)
ues for Conversion dialog will be displayed
where the R50 values for reference conditions
original depth dose curve
can be entered. Otherwise, the curves will be
mirrored depth dose curve
converted without any further confirmation.

Figure XI-25: Mirrored depth dose curve

If profiles of the same measurement cycle are

loaded, these profile depths are also mirrored at
the mean coordinate of the depth dose curve.

depth dose curve from 0 to 300 mm

profiles with profile depths of 50 mm and 200 mm
The mean depth dose coordinate is 150 mm.
After mirroring of the depth dose curve, the profile
depths are at 100 mm and 250 mm.

D948.131.00/10 en 493
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Modifying Curves

9.14 Modifying Profiles With the ConvertSSD button or by

selecting Profile → ConvertSSD,
you can convert all profiles to a
9.14.1 Converting Profiles to a different SDD (source surface dis-
Different SSD tance).

With a BEAMSCAN measuring system, fields of ➔ The Scale Profile dialog will be displayed:
40 cm x 40 cm with an SSD of 90 cm can be
measured up to a depth of approx. 250 mm. If
you need to measure profiles at greater depths,
you can shift the entire water phantom to mea-
sure partial profiles and then add these partial
profiles. Alternatively, you can measure profiles Figure XI-26: Scale Profile dialog
at a shorter SSD and then convert them to the
required SSD. The conversion, however, will lead • Enter the desired SSD in the Convert to SSD
to minor inaccuracies in the penumbra region, [cm] input box in [cm].
which depend on the detector used and on the
backscatter from the accelerator head and water • Confirm with OK.
phantom.
➔ All profiles are converted geometrically
according to the Intercept theorem, i. e., new
Example: coordinates are assigned to the measured val-
ues.
In measurements with a Semiflex 3D chamber
type 31021, a field size of 40 cm x 40 cm, and
an SSD of 80 cm that was converted to an SSD
of 100 cm, an enlargement of the penumbra by
approx. 1 mm was observed. For a field mea-
sured with an SSD of 90 cm, the enlargement was
still approx. 0.5 mm. The field sizes differed by
approx. 0.2 mm, and the overall congruence of the
profile shapes was very good.

HINT
Check the detector used, the radiation unit, and
the measurement setup to determine whether
the data measured with a different SSD and
converted subsequently satisfy the require-
ments.

494 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Modifying Curves

9.14.2 Deconvolving Photon Profiles HINT

The Deconvolve function for deconvolution of For a representative sample size of profile
photon profiles is based on a "Convolutional measurements, the effect of the measuring dis-
Neural Network". The PTW approach employs a tance in the penumbra on the deconvolution
U-Net-like architecture, refer to U-Net: Convo- quality was analyzed. For the analyzed exam-
lutional Networks for Biomedical Image Seg- ples, it was possible to reduce the granular-
mentation. ity to 1.2 mm without any significant change
of the deconvolution results compared to the
The function was implemented using the Tensor- reference deconvolution (with a granularity of
Flow open source platform, refer to www.tensor- 0.3 mm) (maximum deviation < 2 %). There-
flow.org. fore, PTW recommends performing measure-
ments with the PTW detector Semiflex 3D in
Deconvolution is only possible if the loaded pho- the region of the penumbra in the continuous
ton profiles were measured with a PTW Semiflex measuring mode with a resolution of ≤ 1 mm
3D detector type 31021. and in the step-by-step mode with a resolution
of ≤ 1.2 mm.

Click the Deconvolve button or

select menu Profile → Deconvolve
to deconvolve all photon profiles.
The deconvolution is used to cor-
rect the volume effect of detectors.

If deconvolution is not possible, the Deconvolve

button is disabled, e. g., in the case of electron
profiles, if a different detector or measurement
setup is used, or if the detector orientation differs.
When moving the mouse cursor over the Decon-
volve button, an appropriate tooltip will be dis-
played.

D948.131.00/10 en 495
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Modifying Curves

9.14.3 Symmetrizing Profiles Shift all profiles along their CAX-Deviation

between inflection points
Click the Symmetrize button or
select Profile → Symmetrize to Each profile is shifted to a position where the
symmetrize all profiles, i.e., one inflection points are equidistant from the central
side of the curve is superimposed beam.
on the other side and the average
is calculated. If one half of the curve
is longer than the other one, the Shift all profiles along their CAX-Deviation
longer half is used for the sym- between xx% values
metrizing procedure.
The deviation from the central axis (CAX Devia-
tion) is determined based on the entered % dose
9.14.4 Shifting Profiles values. Subsequently the profiles are shifted by
the negative CAX deviation value.
Click the Shift button or select Pro-
file → Shift to shift all profiles.
Shift all profiles by

The Shift profiles dialog will be displayed where In this case, the coordinates are shifted by the
you can choose between the following options: value entered in mm. If the value is positive, the
profiles are shifted in the positive direction of the
abscissa. If it is negative, they will shift in the neg-
ative direction.

Figure XI-27: Shift profiles dialog

Shift all profiles along their CAX-Deviation

between 50% values

The deviation from the central axis (CAX Devia-

tion) is determined based on the 50% dose val-
ues. Subsequently the profiles are shifted by the
negative CAX deviation value.

496 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Modifying Curves

9.14.5 Mirroring Profiles 9.15 Process Edit Window

Click the Mirror button or select
Options
Profile → Mirror to mirror all pro-
Select Tools → Options to display the Options dia-
files: D(x) is converted to D(-x) for
log of the Process edit window. In the Options dia-
all coordinates.
log, you will find the General and PDI/PDD Con-
version tabs.
If the profiles were measured in a plane that is
perpendicular to the central axis (possibly includ-
ing cross profiles), the off-axis values as well as
the cross profile will be mirrored. This means that
profiles in a plane perpendicular to the central axis
are mirrored symmetrical to the origin of coordi-
nates.

9.14.6 Halving Profiles

Click the Halve button or select Pro-

file → Halve to create half-sided
profiles from all profiles.
Figure XI-28: General tab of the Options dia-
Whether the right or left half is created can be log
selected via Tools → Options (refer to section 9.15
"Process Edit Window Options"). These are the options on the General tab:

– Choosing the appropriate option button in the

Create half-sided profiles pane, you determine
whether right or left halves of half-sided pro-
files will be created.

– In the Smoothing window pane, you define

the window around the measuring point where
smoothing will be applied:

– absolute size
default setting: 3 mm

– factor for multiplication of the minimum

interpolation increment
default:
30 x increment

D948.131.00/10 en 497
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Modifying Curves

Figure XI-29: PDI/PDD Conversion tab of the

Options dialog

These are the options on the PDI/PPD Conver-

sion tab:

– selection of the dosimetry protocol for

the conversion. Available protocols are
DIN 6800-2 (2008), IAEA398, NACP, AAPM
TG51, and IPEMB.

– When you select the Convert depths of match-

ing profiles check box, the corresponding pro-
files will also be converted.

– enter safety margins for determination of the

X-ray background line
default:
20 mm for field sizes of > 3 cm x 3 cm
40 mm for field sizes of ≤ 3 cm x 3 cm

– When you select the Ask for R50 under ref-

erence conditions option, the R50 Values for
Conversion dialog will be displayed if none
of the selected measurements has been per-
formed under reference conditions for at least
one energy.

498 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Working on Output Factors

10 Working on Output Factors

When you load a file with output factors in Data-

Analyze, the DataAnalyze main screen looks like
the following figure:

HINT
It is not possible to load several files with output
factors at the same time. It is also not possible
to load files with curves and files with output
factors at the same time.

4
6
5

Figure XI-30: DataAnalyze main screen with loaded output factors

1 Table with the administrative data of the 4 Selected curve in the output factor table
loaded output factor curves 5 Output factor table
2 Selected curve in the table 6 Graphic representation of the output factors
3 Button to change the display mode of the out-
put factor table

D948.131.00/10 en 499
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Working on Output Factors

10.1 Field Size 10.2 Changing the Display

For each field size, the equivalent square field
size Eq. Square [cm], i. e., the edge length of the 10.2.1 Changing the Display of the
equivalent square field, is additionally displayed Output Factor Table
(refer, for instance, to Figure XI-31).
The output factor table can be represented in two
The equivalent square field size is calculated with ways:
the following formulas:
– two-dimensional representation according to
– Area a·b ≤ 16 cm² Figure XI-30
(in accordance with TRS 483):
– one-dimensional representation according to
Figure XI-31

– Area a·b > 16 cm²

(in accordance with DIN 6809-6):

Figure XI-31: One-dimensional representation

of the output factor table

• To toggle from two-dimensional rep-

resentation to one-dimensional rep-
resentation and vice-versa, click the
button in the upper left corner of the
output factor table.

500 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Working on Output Factors

10.2.2 Normalization 10.3 Selecting Output Factors

The output factor table and the graphic repre- Each curve in the graphic is assigned to a row in
sentation of the output factors can be displayed the output factor table (in the case of two-dimen-
in the following normalization modes via Graph- sional representation).
ics → Normalize Graphics:
A curve can be selected in different ways:
– to Value
The measured values will be normalized to – by double-clicking the desired curve in the
a value determined by the user. For further graphic representation.
information on this normalization mode, please
refer to chapter III "Basic Functions". – by clicking the appropriate row of the output
factor table or the row in the table with the
– to Absolute Unit administrative data.
The measured values will be displayed unnor-
malized. – by displaying a discrete crosshairs and click-
ing one of the measuring points of the desired
– to Field 10x10 cm² curve in the output factor table.
All measured values will be normalized to the
measured value of field size 10 cm x 10 cm Exception:
(default setting). The curve for the square field sizes can only be
If no measured value is available for this field selected by double-clicking it.
size, all the measured values will be displayed
unnormalized. For further information on selecting curves,
please refer to chapter III "Basic Functions".

D948.131.00/10 en 501
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Working on Output Factors

10.4 Editing Output Factors • If required, change the equivalent square field
size.
HINT
• If required, change one of the measured val-
Editing output factors is only possible if they are ues.
displayed unnormalized. For this, select Graph-
ics → Normalize Graphics → to Absolute Unit. ➔ The average, the maximum deviation, and the
standard deviation of the measured values will
• Click in the output factor table and select con- automatically be recalculated and displayed.
text menu Edit.
• Click the OK button to accept the changes.
➔ The Edit Values dialog will be displayed: Click the Cancel button to discard the
changes.

Figure XI-32: Edit Values dialog

• In the output factor table, click the output factor

to change.

➔ The Edit Values dialog shows all data of the

output factor (refer to Figure XI-32).

502 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Administrative Data

11 Administrative Data

Select Edit → Administrative Data to display the On the Linac tab, you can enter the following data
administrative data corresponding to the opened (refer to Figure XI-33):
curves.
1 orientation of the water phantom

2 radiation unit data

1 2
– radiation unit name
– modality
– energy
– applicator (for electrons) or wedge (for pho-
tons)
– block

3 visual representation of the irradiated field

adapts to reflect changes

4 definition of the irradiated field:

– field size
– offset and offset dimensions
– field shape
– reference depth of the field

5 input boxes for the measurement setup

– source-surface distance
(SSD)
– gantry angle
– collimator angle

HINT
For more information about entering adminis-
trative data, refer to the chapters related to the
'Water Tank Scans' module (WaterTankScans),
3 4 5
e. g., chapter IV "'Water Tank Scans' (Water-
TankScans) Module for the BEAMSCAN Mea-
Figure XI-33: Linac tab of the Administrative suring System".
Data dialog

D948.131.00/10 en 503
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - Administrative Data

The Measurement tab (refer to Figure XI-34) pro-

vides the following data:
1 2 3 4 5

1 selected detector

2 selected measuring device

3 indication of whether the curve was measured

with or without reference

4 measuring mode

5 defined measuring time

6 comment

The measuring device, measuring time, and ref-

erence data are for information only. They cannot
be edited.

The detector can be changed. When this is done,

you will be informed that only the entry in the
administrative data will change (serial number,
etc.) and that the measurement data will not be
converted to the new detector.

For film data, the measuring device, measuring

time, reference, and detector boxes are deacti-
vated.
6
If all loaded curves have the same comment, it will
be displayed and can be edited.
Figure XI-34: Measurement tab of the Admin-
If the comments are different, the comment for the
istrative Data dialog
first curve will be displayed dimmed and cannot be
edited. The Change comment for all scans check
box will be displayed. If you want to enter one
comment for all curves, select this check box.

504 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAnalyze) Module - DataAnalyze Options

12 DataAnalyze Options

By selecting Graphics → Lines or > Click to move categories selected in the

Tools → Options, you display the Options dialog. left window to the right window.
>> Click to move all categories to the right
On the Table View tab, you will find the Data- window.
Analyze options. For more information on the << Click to move all categories to the left
Isodoses, Graphics, and Advanced tabs of the window.
Options dialog, please refer to chapter III "Basic < Click to move categories selected in the
Functions". right window to the left window.

Follow these steps to determine the order of cat-

egories: first, move all categories to the right win-
dow, and then move the categories one by one
and in the correct order back to the left window.

As an alternative, you can determine the order

directly in the table. To do so, click the category to
move and, while holding the mouse button down,
drag it to its new position.

Figure XI-35: Table View tab of the Options

dialog

On the Table View tab of the Options dialog, you

determine the categories of administrative data to
be included in the table.

The window on the left shows all available cate-

gories, the window on the right shows the cate-
gories actually included in the table. Use the but-
tons between the two windows to move the cate-
gories.

D948.131.00/10 en 505
 BEAMSCAN Software
'TPR/TMR and OCR Table Generator' Module (TableGenerator) - Quick Start (Workflow)

XII 'TPR/TMR and OCR Table Generator' Module

(TableGenerator)

1 General Information on 3 Quick Start (Workflow)

TableGenerator
• Start TableGenerator
TableGenerator is used to create dose tables from
• Load data:
measured curves. In most cases, the tables list
Open button
data as a function of measuring position and field
size. Additional rows and columns can be interpo- Normalize values:
•
lated and added to the table. menu Scans → Normalize

If the measuring data are percentage depth dose

curves, TableGenerator can convert them into
HINT
TPR curves using the BJR Supplement 25 proto- For interpolation or extrapolation, the loaded
col (refer to section "Literature"). original values will always be used.

If you want to perform an interpolation or an

extrapolation of normalized values, you first
have to save the normalized values and load
2 Starting TableGenerator them again.

TableGenerator is started in MEPHYSTO Naviga- • Interpolate values:

tor (refer to chapter II "MEPHYSTO Navigator"). menu Scans → Interpolate

• In the Toolbox area, select the Tools applica- • Extrapolate values:

tion group. menu Scans → Extrapolate

• Click the module for generating dose tables. • Convert percentage depth dose curves to TPR
curves:
➔ The TableGenerator main screen will be dis- menu Scans → Convert
played. In this operation, the currently displayed val-
ues will always be converted.

• Save values:
Save button

• Exit TableGenerator

506 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'TPR/TMR and OCR Table Generator' Module (TableGenerator) - Main Screen

4 Main Screen

Figure XII-1: TableGenerator main screen

1 Data bar
2 Dose table

D948.131.00/10 en 507
 BEAMSCAN Software
'TPR/TMR and OCR Table Generator' Module (TableGenerator) - Main Screen

4.1 Explanation of the 4.2 Data Bar

Toolbar Icons
The data bar shows the following administrative
Open file to load data data:

– Table Type
current table type
Close file
– Energy
radiation energy / nominal potential of the radi-
Save data ation unit with the measurement unit MeV / MV

– SSD
source-surface distance
Print table
– Field Size defined at
the reference depth of the field size

Interpolate columns The administrative data are only displayed if they

are identical for all curves.

Interpolate rows

Interpolate values at any position

Convert PDD to TPR

Extrapolate

Display the online help

508 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'TPR/TMR and OCR Table Generator' Module (TableGenerator) - Modifying the Display

5 Loading Data 6 Modifying the Display

The data to load must be available in the • Modify the column widths either with menu
MEPHYSTO MCC format (*.mcc) or in the View → Autosize Columns Width or with the
MEPHYSTO export format (*.exp), and they usu- mouse.
ally contain several curves.
• To modify the column widths of all columns,
• To load data, click the Open but- select Autosize Columns Width. The width
ton or select menu File → Open. depends of the caption length.

• To modify the column width of single columns,

• Select the file from the dialog. click the border between two captions and
hold the mouse button down. Then, move
➔ Existing data will be overwritten. If the existing
the mouse to change the column width and
data are unsaved, a warning will be displayed
release the mouse button.
and you can save them.

• Instead of loading data, you can insert data

from other programs (refer to chapter III "Basic
Functions").

HINT
Make sure the data to load are consistent and
that the corresponding radiation parameters
(energy, SSD, wedge, radiation unit, etc.) are
identical. The variable parameter is the field
size or – in the case of profiles – the profile
depth.
TableGenerator expects only data belonging to
square fields.

TableGenerator will load data belonging to rec-

tangular fields, but only the field length will be
interpolated.

• Depending on the type of data, you may

be able to select different table presentation
modes from the Table Type list box.

D948.131.00/10 en 509
 BEAMSCAN Software
'TPR/TMR and OCR Table Generator' Module (TableGenerator) - Normalizing

7 Highlighting Data 8 Normalizing

All selected columns, rows, or values are high- • To normalize the curves or to cancel the nor-
lighted blue. Only adjacent columns, rows, or malization, open menu Scans → Normalize →
values can be highlighted. Additionally, selected and select to Individual Maximum, to Absolute
cells and regions of data have a yellow border. Maximum, to Position, to Value, or None.

• To highlight one column, click the caption of the

column. Highlight further columns by pressing To Individual Maximum
the Shift key and clicking the captions.
Each column (curve) is normalized to the individ-
• To highlight one row, click a cell of the row. ual maximum value in the column (proportional
Highlight further rows by pressing the Shift key display).
and clicking the rows.

• To select a single cell, click the table cell and To Absolute Maximum
hold the mouse button down. Then, move the
All columns (curves) are normalized to the maxi-
mouse pointer within the cell and release the
mum value of all columns.
mouse button.

• A region of data (not complete columns or

To Position
rows) is highlighted as follows:

– click one edge (cell) of the region and hold Each column (curve) is normalized to the selected
the mouse button down. depth or measuring position.

– Then, move the mouse pointer to the diag- ➔ The Normalization to Position dialog will be
onally opposite edge (cell) and release the displayed.
mouse button.

Figure XII-2: Normalization to Position dialog

• Choose the position either according to

section 7 "Highlighting Data" or enter the posi-
tion in the dialog and confirm with OK.

510 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'TPR/TMR and OCR Table Generator' Module (TableGenerator) - Interpolation

To Value 9 Interpolation
All columns (curves) are normalized to a given
value. TableGenerator can create additional columns
and rows by linear interpolation. Interpolated data
➔ The Normalization to Value dialog will be dis-
are shown in blue. If the loaded data are not con-
played.
sistent (e.g., curves belonging to different ener-
gies), interpolated columns will use administrative
data of one of the adjacent columns.

HINT
For interpolation, the loaded original values will
Figure XII-3: Normalization to Value dialog always be used.

• Choose the value either according to section 7 If you want to perform an interpolation of nor-
"Highlighting Data" or enter the value in the malized values, you first have to save the nor-
dialog and confirm with OK. malized values and load them again.

• To interpolate, open menu Scans → Interpo-

None late and select Columns, Rows, or Complete
Values at any Position.
With this function, you toggle between the normal-
ized and the unnormalized values.
HINT
TableGenerator only interpolates between two
HINT
existing values.
If the data are first normalized and then con-
verted to TPR, the conversion is based on the
normalized data. Columns
If the data are first normalized and then stored,
With the Columns function, you
the normalized data will be stored.
add a specific column or several
columns between a lower and an
upper limit to the table by linear
interpolation.

D948.131.00/10 en 511
 BEAMSCAN Software
'TPR/TMR and OCR Table Generator' Module (TableGenerator) - Interpolation

➔ The Interpolate Columns dialog will be dis- The Interpolate Column from … to … step inter-
played. polation is performed as follows:

– If the columns from and to do not exist, they

will first be created as described for Interpolate
Column at.

– If the two columns from and to already exist,

they will be filled by linear interpolation in col-
umn direction.
Filling means: for positions for which a value
exists only in one column, the missing values
of the other column will be interpolated.
Figure XII-4: Interpolate Columns dialog – All existing columns of the appropriate incre-
ments will be filled in column direction.
• Click Interpolate column at in the dialog or
Interpolate columns from … to … step and – Finally, the new columns will be interpolated
enter the values. for the appropriate increments.

Example:
Rows
Adding columns from 5 cm² to 20 cm² with incre-
ments of 5 cm² will create columns with field sizes
With the Rows function, you add
of 5 cm x 5 cm, 10 cm x 10 cm, 15 cm x 15 cm, and
a specific row or several rows
20 m x 20 cm (captions 5x5 cm², 10x10 cm² etc.).
between a lower and an upper limit.
The Interpolate column at interpolation is per-
➔ The Interpolate Rows dialog will be displayed.
formed as follows:

– At first, the two neighboring columns are filled

by linear interpolation in column direction as
far as possible (the new values are not dis-
played).
Filling means: for positions for which a value
exists only in one column, the missing values
of the other column will be interpolated.

– The desired column will be interpolated

between the two filled columns, and the new
column will be displayed in the table. Figure XII-5: Interpolate Rows dialog

512 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'TPR/TMR and OCR Table Generator' Module (TableGenerator) - Extrapolation

• Click Interpolate row at or Interpolate rows 10 Extrapolation

from … to … step and enter the values.

Example: TableGenerator can extrapolate additional

Adding rows from 0 mm to 300 mm with incre- columns. Note that extrapolation is not always
ments of 10 mm will create positions from 0 cm to available.
30 cm with 1 cm increments.
HINT
The interpolation of rows is performed in the same
way as for columns. For extrapolation, the loaded original values
will always be used.

If you want to perform an extrapolation of nor-

Complete Values at any Position
malized values, you first have to save the nor-
malized values and load them again.
This function fills gaps in the
table by interpolation in the column
direction without creating additional
Extrapolate to 0x0 cm² or Extrapolate to 0 cm
rows or columns.
This function depends on the table
HINT type.
The interpolation is not performed in the row
direction.
Extrapolate to 0x0 cm²

– The menu item Extrapolate to 0x0 cm² is only

available when the columns are sorted by field
size (table types ′… vs. Field size′).

– This function generates a column for the field

size of 0 cm x 0 cm by linear extrapolation of
the two smallest field sizes in the table.

– Extrapolation is only performed if the values for

the two smallest field sizes really exist or if it is
possible to interpolate them.

D948.131.00/10 en 513
 BEAMSCAN Software
'TPR/TMR and OCR Table Generator' Module (TableGenerator) - Converting PDD to TPR

– Depth dose curves for field size zero are 11 Converting PDD to TPR
needed for some radiation treatment planning
systems.
TableGenerator converts percentage depth dose
– To obtain accurate values, make sure the table curves (PDD) to tissue phantom ratios (TPR) in
contains two field sizes near zero, (e. g., 2 cm accordance with "BJR Supplement 25 Protocol"
x 2 cm and 5 cm x 5 cm) with data. (refer to section "Literature").

In this operation, the currently displayed values

Extrapolate to 0 cm
will always be converted.

– The menu item Extrapolate to 0 cm is only

BJR accounts for scatter contributions dependent
available when the columns are sorted by pro-
upon the field size and the measuring depth.
file depth (table type ′OCR vs. Depth′).
As a consequence, the algorithm needs depth
dose curves for various field sizes to convert
– This function creates a profile for a depth of
a specific curve, i.e., the table must contain at
zero.
least two depth dose curves for two different field
– This may be useful if profiles have been mea- sizes. TableGenerator extrapolates the original
sured at shallow depths to avoid water waves, table data internally to field size zero to obtain
but data for a depth of zero are needed. enough depth dose curves for small field sizes. To
obtain accurate data, make sure sufficient small
field sizes are available for the extrapolation. Also
refer to menu item Extrapolate.

If you want to create a TPR table starting at field

sizes greater than the smallest PDD field size, first
convert the table to TPR, and then delete the irrel-
evant field sizes. This procedure avoids the use of
extrapolated data and is, therefore, usually more
accurate.

514 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'TPR/TMR and OCR Table Generator' Module (TableGenerator) - Converting PDD to TPR

If the field size is defined at the isocenter, the The use of peak scatter factors is optional. Peak
field size range of the PDD data must exceed the scatter tables are ASCII files that you can create
desired field size range of TPR data. If you want to yourself, using BJR_Table54.psf as a template.
generate TPR data from 10 cm x 10 cm to 30 cm This file is delivered with TableGenerator and lists
x 30 cm, the PDD data should include field sizes the field sizes in mm and the associated peak
of 5 cm x 5 cm and 35 cm x 35 cm. scatter factors for each energy. You may also cre-
ate an extra file for each energy. Note that the field
size range in the peak scatter table must exceed
Conversion the desired field size range of the TPR table if the
field sizes are defined at the isocenter.
• Click the PDD to TPR button or
select Scans → Convert → PDD Make sure the field size definition for the peak
to TPR. scatter factors is the same as for the scanned
data, i.e., the field size must be defined at SSD or
➔ The Convert from PDD to TPR dialog will be
at the isocenter for all types of data.
displayed.

HINT
If the data are first normalized and then con-
verted to TPR, the conversion is based on the
normalized data.

Figure XII-6: Convert from PDD to TPR dia-

log

• Enter the following data in the dialog:

– depth zref to which the TPR data shall be

normalized

– depth zm at which the field size is defined

D948.131.00/10 en 515
 BEAMSCAN Software
'TPR/TMR and OCR Table Generator' Module (TableGenerator) - Saving Data

12 Saving Data With the Create HTML File command, the data of
the table will be saved in an HTML file.

• To save data, click the Save but- • In the standard dialog for saving files, enter a
ton or select File → Save As or file name and the directory.
→ Create HTML File.
HINT
With the Save button and with File → Save As, all An HTML file only stores the table and not the
data will be saved just as they are currently dis- administrative data.
played, e. g., with normalization, interpolation, or
any other modification of the values.

• In the standard dialog for saving files, enter a

file name and the directory. You can overwrite
existing files or create new files.

➔ The data are saved in tabular format in

a MEPHYSTO MCC file (*.mcc) or in a
MEPHYSTO export file (*.exp).

➔ Before data are saved in a MEPHYSTO export

file, values in tables with TPR data or with nor-
malized data are converted as follows:
The maximum value is set to 10,000 and all
other data are normalized to this value.
This operation is necessary because the
MEPHYSTO export format does not allow dec-
imal values.

516 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'TPR/TMR and OCR Table Generator' Module (TableGenerator) - TableGenerator Options

13 Deleting Data 16 TableGenerator Options

• To delete data, you highlight the columns, Select Tools → Options to display the Options dia-
rows, or cells and press the Delete key on the log.
keyboard.

➔ The data will be deleted directly. There is no

prompt to confirm the delete command.

14 Printing Data

• To print data, click the Print but-

ton or select File → Print.

➔ The currently displayed table will be printed

Figure XII-7: Options dialog
with the last print settings.
The Options dialog contains a check box that
Select File → Print Preview to display a preview
allows you to select or deselect the display of a
of the data.
descriptive text for the icons in the toolbar.

Select File → Page Setup to change the print set-

tings.

15 Closing a File

Click the Close button or select

File → Close to clear the data and
curves from the screen. If data from
the original file were changed but
not saved, a warning will be dis-
played and you can save them if
required.

D948.131.00/10 en 517
 BEAMSCAN Software
'TPR/TMR and OCR Table Generator' Module (TableGenerator) - Error Messages

17 Error Messages

Message Cause/Remedy
Inconsistent data – Loaded data belong to different Administrative data of loaded curves are inconsis-
beam parameters: tent.
Curve Type Inconsistent data are listed (e. g., Curve Type).
Interpolate columns will use parameters of an adja- The corresponding field in the data bar is blank.
cent column.
Incomplete peak scatter values! Can’t convert all The peak scatter factors do not cover the complete
current scans into TPR. Please make sure, that range of the converted field sizes.
peak scatter factors for field size 0 cm x 0 cm and Check the peak scatter factors.
for a field size larger than the maximum field size
are available.
Do you want to continue anyway?
Peak scatter factors for energy 6.00 MeV do not The peak scatter factors for the energy (from the
exist. Do you want to use the peak scatter factors Energy field) do not exist. The nearest existing fac-
for the energy 5.00 MeV instead? tors are for energy x.xx MeV. You can use these
values or cancel the function.
Converted table incomplete. Missing measuring TableGenerator is not able to create a complete
data! TPR table. You will obtain an incomplete table.
For a complete conversion, the following six posi-
tions have to be filled with measured values:
Field size 4.00 cm, Depth 1.50 cm.
…
In addition, depth dose measurements at field size
larger than the desired maximum TPR field size
are required.

518 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Correction Tables' Module (DataFit) - General Information on DataFit

XIII 'Correction Tables' Module (DataFit)

1 General Information on DataFit

DataFit is used to create correction tables for

the depth-related correction of profiles and depth-
dose curves for electron and photon radiation.

Correction tables may prove useful, for example,

in situations where polarity effects of a detec-
tor irradiated with electrons must be corrected.
For this purpose, two depth dose curves mea-
sured with different HV polarities are divided by
each other. The result is a depth-related correc-
tion table that can be loaded immediately after the
measurement or in DataAnalyze in the Process
edit window with the f(x) button or via All → Apply
Correction Function f(Position).

Correction tables are saved as *.cal files.

There are two methods of obtaining the data

points for the correction table:
– by entering them via the keyboard or pasting
them from other programs → table edit mode

– by calculating the quotient of the dose values

of two loaded curves → Auto Fill mode

D948.131.00/10 en 519
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Correction Tables' Module (DataFit) - Quick Start (Workflow)

2 Starting DataFit 3 Quick Start (Workflow)

DataFit is started in MEPHYSTO Navigator (refer Table Edit Mode

to chapter II "MEPHYSTO Navigator").
• Load correction table:
• In the Toolbox area, select the Calibration Open table button
application group.
• Edit data points in the correction table
• Click the module for creating correction tables.
• Enable or disable spline interpolation:
➔ DataFit will be displayed in Table Edit Mode. Spline Off button

• Save correction table:

Save Table button

Auto Fill Mode

• Load curves: Auto Fill check box

• Select first curve:

Select Scan 1 button

• Select second curve:

Select Scan 2 button

• Choose quotient calculation mode

• Enable or disable spline interpolation:

Spline Off button

• Save correction table:

Save Table button

HINT
The interpolation mode is saved together with
the correction table and directly affects the
depth-related correction.

520 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Correction Tables' Module (DataFit) - DataFit Edit Modes

4 DataFit Edit Modes

4.1 Table Edit Mode

4
2

3 5

6 7

Figure XIII-1: DataFit - Table Edit Mode

1 Refresh button to sort the table and update 5 Slide control to set the curve smoothing level
the graph 6 Data point currently highlighted in the table
2 Table with data points or when a crosshairs is displayed: position of
left column = depth crosshairs
right column = correction value 7 Low and high limits of the correction table
3 Comment concerning the table
4 Graphic representation of the correction table

D948.131.00/10 en 521
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Correction Tables' Module (DataFit) - DataFit Edit Modes

4.1.1 Explanation of the Toolbar Select menu Edit → Delete or select the Delete
Icons command from the context menu to delete:

– individual values after selecting the corre-

Open correction table
sponding value
– table rows after selecting the entire row
Clear table and remove graph
You can copy correction tables created with other
programs and paste them to DataFit by selecting
Edit → Paste or with the Paste command of the
Save correction table
context menu. In addition, you can copy values
from DataFit by selecting Edit → Copy or with the
Copy command of the context menu and paste
Show/hide discrete crosshairs
them to other programs.
(refer to chapter III "Basic Func-
tions") Click the Refresh button or select Graph-
Enable or disable spline interpola- ics → Refresh to sort the table and
tion update the graph.

Display the online help • Enable or disable spline interpolation (Spline

Off button or Graphics → Spline Off).

HINT
The interpolation mode is saved together with
4.1.2 Working in Table Edit Mode
the correction table and directly affects the
• Click the Open Table button or select depth-related correction.
File → Open Table to open an existing correc-
tion table. • Save the correction table by clicking the Save
Table button or by selecting File → Save Table
➔ Existing data will be overwritten. If the existing As. In the standard dialog for saving files, enter
data are unsaved, a warning will be displayed a file name and the directory. You can over-
and you can save them. write existing files or create new files.

• Modify the data points of the correction table

or enter new data points.

Follow these steps to add a table row:

– within the table, press the Insert key or select

the Insert command from the context menu or,

– at the end of the table, press the Enter key.

522 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Correction Tables' Module (DataFit) - DataFit Edit Modes

4.2 Auto Fill Mode

5
2
6

8 9 10 11

Figure XIII-2: DataFit - Auto Fill Mode

1 Check box for Auto Fill Mode 6 Low and high limits of the correction table
2 Table with data points 7 List of all currently loaded curves
left column = depth 8 Graphic representation of the loaded curves
right column = correction value
9 Button to select curve 1
3 Comment concerning the table
10 Button to select curve 2
4 Graphic representation of the correction table
11 Option buttons to select the mode for calcula-
5 Slide control to set the curve smoothing level tion of the correction values

D948.131.00/10 en 523
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Correction Tables' Module (DataFit) - DataFit Edit Modes

4.2.1 Explanation of the Toolbar • Select the second curve and click the
Icons Select Scan 2 button.

Clear table and remove graph ➔ The second curve will be displayed green. The
correction table and the corresponding graphs
will be displayed on the screen.
Save correction table
• Select the mode for calculation of the quotient
by clicking the appropriate option button:
Load additional curves or

➔ The correction table and the graphic represen-

Show/hide discrete crosshairs
tation will automatically be adapted.
(refer to chapter III "Basic Func-
tions") • Enable or disable spline interpolation (Spline
Enable or disable spline interpola- Off button or Graphics → Spline Off).
tion
HINT
Display the online help The interpolation mode is saved together with
the correction table and directly affects the
depth-related correction.

4.2.2 Working in Auto Fill Mode • Save the correction table by clicking the Save
Table button or by selecting File → Save Table
• Select the check box to enable the Auto Fill As. Choose the table edit mode if additional
mode. changes are required.

➔ The standard dialog for opening files will be

displayed.

• Select a file.

• If required, open a second file by clicking the

Add Scans button or by selecting File → Add
Scans.

• Select the first curve (by double-clicking the

graph or by clicking the respective row in the
curve list) and click the Select Scan 1 button.

➔ The first curve will be displayed red on the

graph and in the table.

524 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Correction Tables' Module (DataFit) - DataFit Edit Modes

4.3 Low and High Limits of 4.4 Curve Smoothing Level

the Correction Table
A slide control is available in both edit modes to
The low and high limits are the first and last data change the smoothing level of the interpolated
points in the creation of a correction table. curve if spline interpolation is enabled.

Slide control in the bottom position, i. e., smooth-

You can use the buttons and to move the
ing level of 0.000
limits to the areas outside the data points. The
The interpolated curve includes all data points.
curve will be extrapolated based on the preceding
slope.

Slide control in the top position, i. e., smoothing

level > 0.000
Between data points, the interpolated curve
becomes a best fit line.

The optimal smoothing level can be adapted to

match the curve.

D948.131.00/10 en 525
 BEAMSCAN Software
'BEAMSCAN Tools' Module - Starting the BEAMSCAN Tools Module

XIV 'BEAMSCAN Tools' Module

1 General Information on 2 Starting the

the BEAMSCAN Tools BEAMSCAN Tools
Module Module

The BEAMSCAN Tools module includes the fol- The BEAMSCAN Tools module is started in
lowing options for verification of the BEAMSCAN MEPHYSTO Navigator (refer to chapter II
measuring system: "MEPHYSTO Navigator").

• In the Toolbox area, select the Tools applica-

TP Adjustment Tab tion group.

The temperature and atmospheric pressure mea- • Click the module for adjusting the temperature
surement with the BEAMSCAN electrometer is and atmospheric pressure for the BEAMSCAN
factory adjusted by PTW. measuring system.

On the TP Adjustment tab, you can adjust this set- ➔ The main screen of the BEAMSCAN Tools
ting if necessary or restore the factory setting. module will be displayed.

• Select the desired language for the user inter-

face (refer to section 6.1 "Changing the Lan-
guage").

526 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'BEAMSCAN Tools' Module - Main Screen

3 Main Screen

Figure XIV-1: Main screen BEAMSCAN Tools

1 Menu bar
2 Toolbar
3 Tabs for adjustments and checks
4 Status bar

3.1 Explanation of the Icons

3.1.1 Toolbar

Select measuring system and set up

connection

Restore factory default settings for tem-

perature and atmospheric pressure
measurement

Display the online help

D948.131.00/10 en 527
 BEAMSCAN Software
'BEAMSCAN Tools' Module - Selecting the Measuring System and Setting Up the Connection

4 Selecting the Measuring System and Setting Up the

Connection

HINT
A connection to the BEAMSCAN measuring
system can be established only when the
desired measuring system is not accessed by
another module of the BEAMSCAN software
via the interface.

• To select the BEAMSCAN measuring

system, click the Water phantom but-
ton.

➔ The Connection Control Center dialog will be

displayed:

Figure XIV-2: Connection Control Center dialog

• Select the connection for communication with HINT

the desired BEAMSCAN measuring system by
No Connections exist when the BEAMSCAN
selecting the appropriate check box.
Tools module is started for the first time. In
Confirm the selection with OK. this case, create at least one connection for
•
communication with the BEAMSCAN measur-
➔ After the successful initialization of the ing system according to chapter IV "'Water
BEAMSCAN measuring system, the status bar Tank Scans' (WaterTankScans) Module for the
(4) will indicate the selected measuring sys- BEAMSCAN Measuring System", section 12.5
tem. "Settings for Data Transfer".

528 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'BEAMSCAN Tools' Module - Verifying the Temperature and Atmospheric Pressure Measurement

5 Verifying the Temperature and Atmospheric Pressure

Measurement

5.1 Quick Start (Workflow) • Select the TP Adjustment tab

• Adjust the temperature measurement:

Requirements:
– Measure the temperature in the BEAMS-
CAN measuring system and display the
The complete BEAMSCAN measuring system is
value:
installed and all the components are connected.
Load button
All the network settings have been performed.
– Enter the reference temperature:
The BEAMSCAN measuring system is selected Reference field
and the connection is set up.
– Calculate the correction factor and send it
to the BEAMSCAN measuring system:
Adjust button

• Adjust the atmospheric pressure measure-

ment:

– Measure the atmospheric pressure with the

BEAMSCAN measuring system and dis-
play the value:
Load button

– Enter the reference atmospheric pressure:

Reference field

– Calculate the correction factor and send it

to the BEAMSCAN measuring system:
Adjust button

• Restore the factory default settings for tem-

perature and atmospheric pressure measure-
ment:
Factory Reset button

D948.131.00/10 en 529
 BEAMSCAN Software
'BEAMSCAN Tools' Module - Verifying the Temperature and Atmospheric Pressure Measurement

5.2 TP Adjustment Tab 5.3 Adjusting Temperature

and Atmospheric
Pressure Measurement

5.3.1 Adjusting Temperature

Measurement

CAUTION
1
Unsuitable positioning of the reference ther-
mometer sensor.

2 Erroneous Adjustment!
Position the sensor of the reference thermome-
ter as close as possible to the BEAMSCAN
sensor in the water.

Figure XIV-3: TP Adjustment tab • In the Temperature pane, click the Load but-
ton.
1 Temperature adjustment pane
2 Pressure adjustment pane ➔ The temperature measured by the
BEAMSCAN measuring system will be dis-
played in the BEAMSCAN field.

• Read the temperature measured by the refer-

ence thermometer and enter it in the Refer-
ence field.

Input range: (10 … 40) °C

If the difference between the entered tem-

perature and the uncalibrated temperature in
the BEAMSCAN measuring system is greater
than 5 °C, an appropriate message will be
displayed. A major difference is indicative of
a reading error, incorrect input, or defective
measuring system, which should be checked.
Therefore, after checking, you can proceed
with the adjustment or abort the operation.

• Click the Adjust button.

➔ The correction factor for temperature mea-

surement will be calculated and sent to the
BEAMSCAN measuring system.

530 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'BEAMSCAN Tools' Module - Verifying the Temperature and Atmospheric Pressure Measurement

5.3.2 Adjusting Atmospheric 5.3.3 Restoring the Factory Default

Pressure Measurement Settings for Temperature
and Atmospheric Pressure
• In the Pressure pane, click the Load button. Measurement
➔ The atmospheric pressure measured by the • Click the Factory Reset button.
BEAMSCAN measuring system will be dis-
played in the BEAMSCAN field.
➔ The correction factors for temperature and
• Read the atmospheric pressure measured by
atmospheric pressure measurement in the
the reference barometer and enter it in the Ref-
BEAMSCAN measuring system will be reset to
erence field.
the factory settings.
Input range: (700 … 1060) hPa

If the difference between the entered atmos-

pheric pressure and the uncalibrated atmos-
pheric pressure in the BEAMSCAN measuring
system is greater than 15 hPa, an appropri-
ate message will be displayed. A major differ-
ence is indicative of a reading error, incorrect
input, or defective measuring system, which
should be checked. Therefore, after checking,
you can proceed with the adjustment or abort
the operation.

• Click the Adjust button.

➔ The correction factor for atmospheric pressure

measurement will be calculated and sent to the
BEAMSCAN measuring system.

D948.131.00/10 en 531
 BEAMSCAN Software
'BEAMSCAN Tools' Module - Settings in the BEAMSCAN Tools Module

6 Settings in the
BEAMSCAN Tools
Module

6.1 Changing the Language

The menus, dialogs, and messages can be dis-
played in different languages.

The following languages can be selected:

– German
– English
– French
– Spanish

• To change the language, select menu

Tools → Language → <Language>.

➔ A message will inform you that a restart is

required before the change becomes effective.

• Restart the BEAMSCAN Tools module.

➔ The menus, dialogs, and messages will be dis-

played in the selected language.

532 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Convert WP600/700 data to mcc' Module (DataConvert-W) - Starting DataConvert-W

XV 'Convert WP600/700 data to mcc' Module

(DataConvert-W)

1 General Information on 2 Starting DataConvert-W

DataConvert-W
DataConvert-W is started in MEPHYSTO Naviga-
tor (refer to chapter II "MEPHYSTO Navigator").
DataConvert-W is used to convert IBA/Wellhöfer
data of the type WP600 and WP700 for visualiza-
• In the Applications area, select the Relative
tion and comparison. The converted data can be
Dosimetry application group.
opened and displayed in the DataAnalyze mod-
ule. Select the RTPS Data Conversion subgroup
•
and click the module for converting IBA/Well-
IBA/Wellhöfer data of the type OmniPro have to
höfer data.
be converted by means of the DataConvert-S
module. ➔ The DataConvert-W dialog will be displayed.

WARNING
Use of the measurement result as legally rele-
vant measurement.

Incorrect Operation!
DataConvert-W converts data only for visual-
ization and comparison. The data must not be
used as legally relevant measurements for the
verification of the accelerator or ascertaining
the basic data for radiation treatment planning.
You have to accept this with the agreement that
is shown on the welcome screen.

D948.131.00/10 en 533
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Convert WP600/700 data to mcc' Module (DataConvert-W) - Conversion

3 Conversion

3.1 Opening Files – Accelerator and Setup

Enter the administrative data as these data are
Files can only be opened when they are IBA/Well- not included in the IBA/Wellhöfer files (input
höfer files (*.out) of the format WP600 or WP700. required):
– accelerator name
To open a file, click the Open but- – modality
ton or select File → Open. Select – energy
one or several files by means of the – wedge filter or applicator
Open dialog. Existing data will be – block
overwritten. – source surface distance (SSD)
– gantry angle, and
HINT – collimator angle
Converting several files at the same time is
– Comment
only possible if all files have the same IBA/Well-
comment (input not required)
höfer format (WP600 or WP700) and the same
administrative data.
– Output directory and Subdirectory
The directories where the formatted data will
be stored (input required).
3.2 Preparing Data Click the … button to choose the Out-
put Directory. This directory must be created
Before converting the data, you have to enter the
beforehand.
following information:
The Subdirectory need not exist. If the direc-
tory already exists and the data it contains
– Type
would be overwritten, a message will be dis-
Select the data format WP600 or WP700 (input
played and the formatting can be stopped by
required).
the user.
– Scan Dimension
Select if the scan is two-dimensional (input
required).

534 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Convert WP600/700 data to mcc' Module (DataConvert-W) - Conversion

3.3 Converting Data

Click the Convert button or select
File → Convert to convert the
data to the MEPHYSTO MCC for-
mat (*.mcc) and save them to the
defined directories. After saving the
data, an appropriate message will
be displayed.

If the required information is not entered com-

pletely, converting and saving is aborted and an
appropriate message will be displayed.

Then, the converted data can be opened and

displayed in the DataAnalyze module (refer to
chapter XI "'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAna-
lyze) Module").

Figure XV-1: DataConvert-W dialog

D948.131.00/10 en 535
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Convert IBA ASC' Module (DataConvert-S) - Starting DataConvert-S

XVI 'Convert IBA ASC' Module (DataConvert-S)

1 General Information on 2 Starting DataConvert-S

DataConvert-S
DataConvert-S is started in MEPHYSTO Naviga-
tor (refer to chapter II "MEPHYSTO Navigator").
DataConvert-S is used to convert ASCII files
(OmniProAxxept 6.X or Scanditronix RFA300) for
• In the Applications area, select the Relative
visualization and comparison. The converted data
Dosimetry application group.
can be opened and displayed in the DataAnalyze
module. Select the RTPS Data Conversion subgroup
•
and click the module for converting ASCII files.
WARNING
Use of the measurement result as legally rele- ➔ The DataConvert-S dialog will be displayed.
vant measurement.

Incorrect Operation!
DataConvert-S converts data only for visual-
ization and comparison. The data must not be
used as legally relevant measurements for the
verification of the accelerator or ascertaining
the basic data for radiation treatment planning.
You have to accept this with the agreement that
is shown on the welcome screen.

536 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Convert IBA ASC' Module (DataConvert-S) - Converting Data

3 Converting Data

Files can only be converted when they are ASCII Then, the converted data can be opened and
files (*.asc) of the format OmniProAxxept 6.X or displayed in the DataAnalyze module (refer to
Scanditronix RFA300. chapter XI "'Scanned Data Analysis' (DataAna-
lyze) Module").
Click the Convert button or select
File → Convert. Select the desired
file by means of the Open dialog.

If this file meets all the conversion conditions

(refer to section 3.1 "Conversion Conditions"),
the Save dialog will be displayed. Otherwise, an
appropriate message will be displayed.

Select the directory and the file name for saving

the converted file and confirm the entries.

The data are converted to the MEPHYSTO MCC

format (*.mcc) or the MEPHYSTO export for-
mat (*.exp) (the format can be selected via
Tools → Options) and saved to the set directory.
After saving the data, an appropriate message will
be displayed.

Figure XVI-1: DataConvert-S dialog

D948.131.00/10 en 537
 BEAMSCAN Software
'Convert IBA ASC' Module (DataConvert-S) - Converting Data

3.1 Conversion Conditions

Conventions for the conversion are: X corre-
sponds to the inplane direction, Y to the cross-
plane direction, and Z to the depth direction.

A conversion is not possible and an appropriate

message will be displayed if:

– in the RFA ASCII file, the keyword %MOD is

followed by the parameter INT, ABS, or UDF.

– in the RFA ASCII file, the keyword %TYP is

followed by the parameter ISO or UDF.

– in the RFA ASCII file, the keyword %SCN is

followed by the parameter UDF.

– the coordinates change both in inplane and/or

crossplane direction and in depth direction.

538 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Troubleshooting

XVII Troubleshooting

What can I do if …

… the display of the In the Control Panel, check the settings for the display:
BEAMSCAN software
Windows 8.1:
shows artifacts (e.g., text
color and background • Select Control Panel → Appearance and Personalization → Personaliza-
color are similar or iden- tion.
tical)? or
Select Personalize from the context menu of the desktop background.

• Select the color scheme "Windows" that is recommended by PTW.

Windows 10:

• Select the menu for adapting the appearance.

The steps to call up this menu depend on your Windows configuration.

Select, e. g., Personalize from the context menu of the desktop back-
ground.

• Select the color scheme "Windows" that is recommended by PTW.

D948.131.00/10 en 539
 BEAMSCAN Software
Troubleshooting

… the text, icons, or In Control Panel, check the settings for the font size:
BEAMSCAN software
Windows 8.1:
are not displayed com-
pletely? • Select Control Panel → Appearance and Personalization → Display.

• Select the Smaller - 100% (default) option.

Windows 10:

• Select the menu for adjusting the display.

The steps to call up this menu depend on your Windows configuration.

Select, e. g., Display settings from the context menu of the desktop back-
ground.

• Select the scale setting of 100 % that is recommended by PTW.

Log off and on again to apply the changes. It may be necessary to restart
the PC in some cases.

540 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Literature

Literature

[1] Council Directive 93/42/EEC concerning medical devices [11] H. K. Looe, T. S. Stelljes, D. Harder, B. Poppe: The
(Medical Device Directive - MDD) Gaussian line spread functions of single and array-type
ionization chambers DGMP Jahrestagung Jena (2012).
[2] EN 60731 (IEC 60731)
Medical electrical equipment - [12] H. K. Looe, T. S. Stelljes, D. Harder, B. Poppe: Correction
Dosimeters with ionization chambers as used in radio- of the limited spatial resolution of ionization chambers by
therapy iterative deconvolution DGMP Jahrestagung Jena (2012)

[3] EN 60950-1 (IEC 60950-1) [13] A. Fogliata, R. Garcia, T. Knöös, G. Nicolini, A. Clivio,
Information technology equipment - Safety - E. Vanetti, C. Khamphan, and L. Cozzi: Definition of
Part 1: General requirements parameters for quality assurance of flattening filter free
(FFF) photon beams in radiation therapy - Medical
[4] EN 62368-1 (IEC 62368-1) Physics 39 (10), October 2012
Audio/video, information and communication technology
equipment - [14] A. Fogliata, J. Fleckenstein, F. Schneider, M. Pachoud,
Part 1: Safety requirements S. Ghandour, H. Krauss, G. Reggiori, A. Stravato,
F. Lohr, M. Scorsetti, and L. Cozzi: Flattening filter free
[5] JOHANSSON, K.-A.; MATTSSON, L.O.; LINDBORG, L.; beams from TrueBeam and Versa HD units: Evalua-
SVENSSON, H.: Absorbeddose determination with ion- tion of the parameters for quality assurance - Medical
ization chambers in electron and photon beams having Physics 43 (1), January 2016
energies between 1 and 50 MeV, National and Inter-
national Standardization of Radiation Dosimetry (Proc. [15] A. Fogliata, R. Cayez, R. Garcia, C. Khamphan,
Symp. Atlanta, 1977), Vol. 2, IAEA, Vienna (1978) 243. G. Reggiori, M. Scorsetti, and L. Cozzi: Technical Note:
Flattening filter free beam from Halcyon linac: Evaluation
[6] HOHLFELD, K.; ROOS, M.: Dosismessverfahren für Ioni- of the profile parameters for quality assurance - Medical
sationskammern, die zur Anzeige der Wasser-Energiedo- Physics 47 (8), August 2020
sis kalibriert sind, L. von Klitzing, Hrsg., Mediz. Physik
255 - 263 (1986). Lübeck: L. von Klitzing, Mediz. Univer- [16] Sahani G, Sharma SD, Sharma PK, Deshpande DD, Negi
sität PS, Sathianarayanan VK, Rath GK: Acceptance criteria
for flattening filter-free photon beam from standard med-
[7] TRIER, O.: Kohlrausch, Prakt. Physik, 23. Auflage, Abs. ical electron linear accelerator: AERB task group recom-
9.8.6.3, Stuttgart (1985) mendations - Med Phys. 2014 Oct; 39(4): 206-11.

[8] MARKUS, B.; KASTEN, G.: Medizinische Physik, Hrsg. [17] Elekta Medical Linear Accelerator -
Th. Schmidt, 357 - 360 (1984) Customer Acceptance Tests for: All models -
Document ID: 1503568 10 - Publication date: 2020_03
[9] BJR Supplement 25; Central Axis Depth Dose Data for (Elekta 2020)
Use in Radiotherapy: 1996; British Institute of Radiology

[10] H. K. Looe, T. S. Stelljes, D. Harder, B. Poppe: Character-

ization of the response functions of ionization chambers
for photon beam dosimetry 54th Annual meeting of the
AAPM, Charlotte (2012)

D948.131.00/10 en 541
 BEAMSCAN Software
MEPHYSTO MCC Data Format

Appendix A: MEPHYSTO MCC Data Format

The data generated with the PTW measuring and

analysis modules are saved in ASCII files with the
extension *.mcc.

Each line of this file consists of a key word and no,

one or several data values.

The file only contains data that are necessary to

describe the task.
Example:
The LA48 parameters will not be saved if the mea-
surement is a single chamber measurement.

To achieve a uniform format, values will always be

expressed in the following units.

– lengths in the unit [mm]

– times in the unit [s]

– angles in the unit [°]

If measurements are appended to an existing file,

the entry for the most recent change in the file
header will be modified.

For more information, please refer to the

document "Format Description - MCC For-
mat" (D800.299.00) on the installation CD/DVD of
the BEAMSCAN software.

542 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Profiles

Appendix B: Analysis Parameters for Profiles

HINT Homog. or Flatness

For the calculation of the analysis parameters homogeneity

the profile will automatically be corrected for In the Edit protocols and parameters dialog you
central axis deviation. can choose a method for calculation of homo-
geneity:

CAX Dev. a) Percentage Dose Difference to IEC 60976

Central Axis Deviation, deviation of the center of

the field from the central axis (CAX), calculated
from the field size
b) Percentage Dose Ratio

Field Size

distance between the left and right positions for c) Field Ratio
the same dose value (50% dose in most cases)

Pen. Left/Right d) Maximum Variation

penumbra, distance between the positions of the

80% and 20% dose values
e) Deviation for electron profiles according to
IEC 60976
Dmax/Dmin
Deviation = Dmax - Dmin

max./min. percentage of the dose in the flattened

f) Flatness for electron profiles according to
region
Elekta Customer Acceptance Tests document
(Elekta 2020)
Dave

average percentage of the dose in the flattened

region g) In addition, you can select the option Show
tolerance levels at ± 3.00% of (Dmax + Dmin)/2.
In the Details mode, two green dashed lines
will then be displayed parallel to the flattened
region, representing the selected tolerance
(e.g., for the AFSSAPS protocol No. 93).

D948.131.00/10 en 543
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Profiles

Symmetry Wedge Angle

In the Edit protocols and parameters dialog you (for photon profiles only)
can choose a method for calculation of symmetry:
The wedge angle is calculated only if the following
a) Maximum Dose Ratio according to IEC 60976 conditions are met:

– radiation: photons or cobalt

– profile at a depth of 10 cm
D(x) is the dose at point x; x and -x are points
within the flattened region, symmetrical to the – depth dose curve exists
central axis. Symmetry is defined as being the – dose values D1, D2 at positions "field size/4"
maximum ratio within the flattened region, mul- and "- field size/4" of the profile at the depth of
tiplied by 100. 10 cm

b) Area Ratio – dose values D100, D200 at positions 100 mm and

200 mm of the depth dose curve

– The result is calculated as an absolute value.

a = area to the left of the central axis – The wedge angle is displayed only if its
b = area to the right of the central axis absolute value is ≥ 5°.
The areas are delimited by the central axis and In all other cases, the result is given as "< 5"
the 50% field limit. instead of an exact value.

c) Maximum Variation
HINT
The dose values D100 and D200 can be obtained
D(x) is the dose at point x; x and -x are points only when the depth dose curve is opened in
within the flattened region, symmetrical to the DataAnalyze together with the profiles. How-
central axis. ever, the curve must not be selected if you want
to access the Analyze edit window.
d) Symmetry according to Elekta Customer
Acceptance Tests document (Elekta 2020)
Formulas:

absorption coefficient

and

544 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Profiles

Flattened Region
F
Homogeneity and symmetry refer to the flattened
region of a profile.

In the Edit protocols and parameters dialog you

can choose a method for determination of the flat-
tened region:
1
a) Percentage area (90% dose in most cases)
within the 50% field limit minus an arbitrary
2
F F area (1 cm in most cases) on either side
4 4
b) The flattened region is calculated
for cross profiles: Flattened Region = F – dm
Figure B-1: Wedge angle for diagonal pro-
files: Flattened Region = F – dq
1 Standard measuring depth
2 Wedge angle HINT
F is the field size, measured with the 50% dose,
Point Distance one measurement performed along the central
axis and one along the diagonal. The distance
(for electron profiles only) between the 50% field limit and the flattened
Distance between two positions for the left and region on the main axis is referred to as dm, and
right halves of the profile corresponding to any on the diagonal, it is referred to as dq (refer to
dose values (default: 90% and 50%). Figure B-2).

Maximum Dose Ratio

The maximum dose ratio according to AFSSAPS

No. 93 is the ratio of the maximum dose Dmax to
the dose on the central axis D0.

D948.131.00/10 en 545
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Profiles

Example:

A diagonal profile was measured,

1
F = 12 cm (within the 50% dose)
d = 0.2 • F = 0.2 • 12 cm = 2.4 cm, i.e., 2.4 cm on
2 either side of the profile are outside the flattened
dm
region.
The size of the flattened region is
12 cm – 2 • 2.4 cm = 7.2 cm

3
dq

c) The flattened region is calculated as follows:

F
field size F Flattened Region
for main for diag-
Figure B-2: Flattened region axis onal

1 50% field limit 5 cm ≤ F < 10 cm 60% F 60% F

2 flattened region 10 cm ≤ F 80% F 70% F

3 nominal size of irradiated field

field size F dm for dq for

d) 90% isodose minus an arbitrary area on either
main axis diagonal
side
5 cm < F ≤ 10 cm 1 cm 2 cm
10 cm < F ≤ 30 cm 0.1 • F 0.2 • F
30 cm < F 3 cm 6 cm

546 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Profiles

Field Size at SID

Field size at isocenter

Equation:

SID Source Isocenter Distance [cm]

F Field Size for 50% dose [cm]
SSD Source Surface Distance [cm]
D profile depth [cm]

F80 / F90

Flatness F80 / F90 according to IEC 60976 is the

max. distance between the positions of the 80%
or 90% dose values and the geometrical field GF.

The distances are calculated as follows:

for main axis for diagonal

F90 A GF - 90% C GF - 90%
F80 B GF - 80% -

A, C valid for standard measurement depth

B valid for base depth
(refer to Figure B-3)

HINT
For non-square radiation fields C is defined
along the diagonal axes and not along the
bisector.

D948.131.00/10 en 547
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Profiles

Figure B-3: Explanatory diagram for the flatness of the electron field

548 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Profiles

Default Settings for Standardized Electron Profile Protocols

Protocol Analysis parameter Formula

CAX Dev.
Field Size 50%
Pen. Left/Right 80%, 20%
Dmax

*AFSSAPS Dmin
NO 93 Homog. Field Ratio
Symmetry Maximum Dose Ratio
Max. Dose Ratio
Flattened Region 90% Isodose – 0.0 cm
Field Size at SID
CAX Dev.
Field Size 50%
Pen. Left/Right 80%, 20%
Dmax
Dmin
*IEC 60976 Homog. (Deviation) Dmax - Dmin
Symmetry Maximum Dose Ratio
Max. Dose Ratio
Flattened Region 90% Isodose – 1.0 cm
Field Size at SID
F80 / F90

All other standardized protocols do not have definitions for electron profiles.

D948.131.00/10 en 549
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Profiles

Default Settings of the Accelerator Protocols for Electron Profiles

Protocol Analysis parameter Formula

CAX Dev.
Field Size 50 %
Homog. (Flatness) Percentage Dose Ratio
Elekta /
Symmetry Maximum Dose Ratio
Elekta 2016
Max. Dose Ratio
Flattened Region 90% Isodose - 1.0 cm
Field Size at SID
CAX Dev.
Field Size 50 %
Homog. (Flatness)

Symmetry
Elekta 2020

Max. Dose Ratio

Flattened Region 90 % Isodose - 1.0 cm
Field Size at SID
CAX Dev.
Field Size 50 %
Pen. Left/Right 80 %, 20 %
Dmax
Dmin
Dave
Siemens
Homog. (Flatness) Percentage Dose Difference
Symmetry Area Ratio
Flattened Region Field size F Main axis Diagonal
0.1 cm ≤ F ≤ 25.1 cm 100% F - 1.5 cm 100% F - 1.5 cm
25.1 cm < F 80% F - 0.0 cm 80% F - 0.0 cm

Field Size at SID

550 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Profiles

Protocol Analysis parameter Formula

CAX Dev.
Field Size 50%
Dmax

Varian / Homog. (Flatness ±) Max. Variation

Varian 2016 Symmetry Max. Variation
Max. Dose Ratio
Flattened Region 80% of FW - 0.0 cm
Field Size at SID

D948.131.00/10 en 551
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Profiles

Default Settings for Standardized Photon Profile Protocols

Protocol Analysis parameter Formula

CAX Dev.
Field Size 50%
Pen. Left/Right 80%, 20%
Dmax
Dmin

*AFSSAPS Homog. Percentage Dose Difference X Show tolerance level…

NO 93 Symmetry Maximum Dose Ratio
Max. Dose Ratio
Flattened Region Field size F Main axis Diagonal
5 cm ≤ F < 10 cm 60% F - 0.0 cm 60% F - 0.0 cm
10 cm ≤ F 80% F - 0.0 cm 70% F - 0.0 cm

Field Size at SID

CAX Dev.
Field Size 50%
Pen. Left/Right 80%, 20%
Dmax
Dmin
Homog. (Flatness) Percentage Dose Ratio

*IEC 60976 Symmetry Maximum Dose Ratio

Max. Dose Ratio
Flattened Region Field size F Main axis Diagonal
5 cm < F ≤ 10 cm F - 1.0 cm F - 2.0 cm
10 cm < F ≤ 30 cm F - 0.1 • F F - 0.2 • F
30 cm < F F - 3.0 cm F - 6.0 cm

Field Size at SID

All other standardized protocols do not have definitions for photon profiles.

552 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Profiles

Default Settings of the Accelerator Protocols for Photon Profiles

Protocol Analysis parameter Formula

CAX Dev.
Field Size 50%
Homog. (Flatness) Percentage Dose Ratio
Symmetry Maximum Dose Ratio
Elekta / Flattened Region Field Size F Main axis Diagonal
Elekta 2016
5 cm < F ≤ 10 cm F - 1.0 cm F - 2.0 cm
10 cm < F ≤ 30 cm F - 0.1 • F F - 0.2 • F
30 cm < F F - 3.0 cm F - 6.0 cm

Field Size at SID

CAX Dev.
Field Size 50 %
Homog. (Flatness) Percentage Dose Ratio
Symmetry

Elekta 2020
Flattened Region Field Size F Main axis Diagonal
5 cm < F ≤ 10 cm F - 1.0 cm F - 2.0 cm
10 cm < F ≤ 30 cm F - 0.1 • F F - 0.2 • F
30 cm < F F - 3.0 cm F - 6.0 cm

Field Size at SID

D948.131.00/10 en 553
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Profiles

Protocol Analysis parameter Formula

CAX Dev.
Field Size 50%
Pen. Left/Right 80%, 20%
Dmax
Dmin
Siemens
Homog. (Flatness) Percentage Dose Ratio
Symmetry

Flattened Region 80% of FW - 0.0 cm

Field Size at SID
CAX Dev.
Field Size 50%
Homog. (Flatness ±) Max. Variation
Varian /
Symmetry Max. Variation
Varian 2016
Max. Dose Ratio
Flattened Region 80% of FW - 0.0 cm
Field Size at SID

554 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Profiles

General Warning Messages for Photon Profiles

Parameter Required conditions Warning messages

Wedge Angle is only available for profile depth
profile at a depth of 10 cm at 100 mm and dose values of PDD at 100 and
200 mm depth !
Wedge Angle
dose values D100, D200 at positions
100 mm and 200 mm of the depth No PDD-Values available !
dose curve

D948.131.00/10 en 555
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for FFF Photon Profiles

Appendix C: Analysis Parameters for FFF Photon Profiles

(FFF = Flattening-Filter-Free) 2. The first derivative of the smoothed curve is

calculated.
FFF photon profiles can be analyzed either by
A brute force search is employed to search for
renormalization or on the basis of the inflection
the global maximum of the first derivative.
points.
In order to eliminate the effect of noise, all
neighboring points of this maximum are con-
The analysis by renormalization follows the sidered whose derivative exceeds a threshold
papers published by A. Fogliata et al. in Medical (e. g., half the maximum) and that provide a
Physics 39 (10) in October 2012, 43 (1) in Janu- weighted average of their X-values.
ary 2016, and 47 (8) in August 2020 (refer to sec-
tion "Literature"). These papers will be referred 3. The X-values (positions) of the left and right
to as "Fogliata 2012", "Fogliata 2016", and "Fogli- inflection point are determined.
ata 2020" hereinafter. For renormalization, the for-
The corresponding Y-values are calculated
mula from the papers and the corresponding fit
from the original curve by linear interpolation,
parameters for 6 MV FFF and 10 MV FFF are
with the Y-values of the left and right inflection
applied.
point not necessarily being the same. Then,
The fit parameters taken from Fogliata 2012 are the two Y-values are averaged.
included in the Varian protocol. The fit parame- The X-values (positions) are corrected (by lin-
ters taken from Fogliata 2016 are included in the ear interpolation) so that they correspond to
Elekta 2016 and Varian 2016 protocols. the averaged Y-value.

The analysis on the basis of the inflection points

is performed as follows:

1. New data points are added to the existing mea-

suring points by linear interpolation so that
equidistant data points are obtained.

In a next step, the curve is smoothed. The

smoothing operation blurs the penumbra but
its effect on the X-values of the inflection points
(position) is negligible.

556 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for FFF Photon Profiles

HINT HINT
If the profile was measured for an FFF energy, For calculation of the renormalization factor,
the analysis will automatically be performed these publications state the field size and mea-
with the "Analysis parameters for FFF photon suring depth in the unit [cm]. The PTW soft-
profiles". ware, however, indicates the measuring depth
in the unit [mm]. That is why the fit parame-
For field sizes smaller than 10 cm x 10 cm, the
ters "c" and "e" in the PTW tables are 10 times
standardized protocol AERBFFF demands the
smaller.
analysis according to the standardized protocol
IEC 60976. This is not done automatically; the
FFF as FF check box must be selected to set
this function.

Only the energies 6.0 MV FFF and where

10.0 MV FFF will be analyzed. a, b, c, d, e fit parameter for renormalization
F nominal field size [cm]
depth measuring depth [mm]
HINT
For the calculation of the analysis parameters
CAUTION
the profile will automatically be corrected for
central axis deviation. Using the default fit parameters without verifi-
cation.

Erroneous Analysis!
Renorm. Value or Evaluation mode
The fit parameters on which the renormal-
Selection of the analysis mode ization is based were derived from measure-
The selected analysis mode automatically ment data obtained with Elekta Versa HD
changes the setting in the following analysis para- and VARIAN True Beam accelerators. Verify
meters. the analysis when using these fit parameters
for the renormalization of FFF photon profiles
a) Renormalization of other radiation equipment manufacturers.
Adapt the fit parameters if necessary.
Before an FFF photon profile is analyzed, it will be
renormalized according to the specifications set
forth in Fogliata 2012 and Fogliata 2016.

D948.131.00/10 en 557
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for FFF Photon Profiles

The fit parameters for renormalization are depen- VARIAN True Beam accelerator according to
dent on the accelerator and on the energy. Fogliata 2016:

Elekta Versa HD accelerator according to 6 MV FFF 10 MV FFF

Fogliata 2016:
a 91.3 84.4

6 MV FFF 10 MV FFF b 1.2 3.1

a 91 81.8 c 0.138 0.137

b 1.53 3.6 d -0.0075 -0.0063

c 0.115 0.089 e 0.0014 0.0013

d -0.0072 -0.0038
VARIAN True Beam accelerator according to
e 0.0011 0.0008 Fogliata 2012:

VARIAN Halcyon accelerator according to 6 MV FFF 10 MV FFF

Fogliata 2020:
a 95.6 89.08

6 MV FFF b 0.6595 2.4826

a 95.44 c 0.1255 0.1152

b 0.0084 d -0.0099 -0.0078

c 0.1125 e 0.0013 0.0011

d -0.0118
e 0.0011
b) Inflection Points

The analysis will be performed on the basis of the

inflection points.

558 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for FFF Photon Profiles

CAX Dev. Symmetry

Central Axis Deviation (CAX), deviation of the In the Edit protocols and parameters dialog you
center of the field from the central axis (CAX) can choose a method for calculation of symmetry:
In the Edit protocols and parameters dialog you
can choose a calculation method: a) Maximum Dose Ratio

a) calculated from field size

b) calculated between the inflection points D(x) is the dose at point x; x and -x are points
within the field region, symmetrical to the cen-
tral axis. Symmetry is defined as the maximum
Field Size ratio within the field region, multiplied by 100.

In the Edit protocols and parameters dialog, you

b) Area Ratio
can choose a calculation method:

a) Distance between the left and right positions

for the same dose value (50% dose in most a = area to the left of the central axis
cases) of the renormalized profile b = area to the right of the central axis
The areas are delimited by the central axis and
b) Distance between the inflection points
the 50% field limit.

Pen. Left/Right c) Maximum Variation

Penumbra D(x) is the dose at point x; x and -x are points

In the Edit protocols and parameters dialog, you within the field region, symmetrical to the cen-
can choose a calculation method: tral axis.

a) Distance between the positions of the 80% and

d) Symmetry according to Elekta Customer
20% dose values of the renormalized profile
Acceptance Tests document (Elekta 2020)
b) Distance of the defined region around the
inflection points

D948.131.00/10 en 559
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for FFF Photon Profiles

For calculation of the symmetry, the field region b) Lateral Width

is defined as follows. The field region depends on
the nominal field size: Renormalization evaluation mode:
Distance between the positions to the right and
nominal field size field region left of Dcax for the dose values 90 %, 75 %, and
60 % of Dcax
F ≥ 10 cm 80% Field Size
F < 10 cm 60% Field Size Inflection Points evaluation mode:
Distance between the positions to the right and
left of the 100 % dose for the dose values 90 %,
Unflatness 75 %, and 60 %

In the Edit protocols and parameters dialog, you c) Unflatness according to Elekta Customer
can choose a calculation method: Acceptance Tests document (Elekta 2020)

a) Unflatness Inhomogeneity, ratio of three specific dose values

and the CAX dose
Ratio of the CAX dose and the dose at a given
distance from the central axis

The dose values are specified as follows:

Unflatness is calculated for each half of the profile Main axes Diagonals
according to the above formula. The unflatness of
X1 20 % FWHM/2 20 % FWHM/2
the FFF photon profile is defined as the higher of
the two values. X2 50 % FWHM/2 50 % FWHM/2
X3 80 % FWHM/2 60 % FWHM/2
The distance from the central axis depends on the
nominal field size:

nominal field size xoff-axis value at

F ≥ 10 cm 80% Field Size

F < 10 cm 60% Field Size

560 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for FFF Photon Profiles

Slope Left/Right

Slope of a line passing through two fixed points on

the profile. The points are located at 1/3 and 2/3
of the left and right half of the field, respectively.

Slope Left Slope Right

where
FS field size for 50% dose [cm]
x1 position of the first point
D(x1) dose value of the first point
x2 position of the second point
D(x2) dose value of the second point

The slope is only calculated for nominal field

sizes ≥ 10 cm.

Peak Pos.

peak position, off-axis position of the intersection

of the left and right slope

Off Axis Ratio in/out or Off Axis Ratio 3/4cm

Relative dose values at fixed positions (e. g., 3 cm

and 4 cm) to the right and left of the central beam

D948.131.00/10 en 561
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for FFF Photon Profiles

Default Settings for Standardized Protocols for FFF Photon Profiles

Protocol Analysis parameter Formula

CAX Dev. Between inflection points [mm]
Field Size Between inflection points [cm]
Pen. Left/Right Between 1.6 and 0.4 * dose of inflection point [mm]
*AERBFFF
Symmetry Maximum Dose Ratio
Unflatness Lateral Width 90 %, 75 %, 60 % [cm]
Off Axis Ratio 3cm at +/- 3 cm [%]

Settings with selected FFF as FF option:

Protocol Analysis parameter Formula

CAX Dev.
Field Size 50 %
Pen. Left/Right 80 %, 20 %
Dmax
Dmin
Homog. (Flatness) Percentage Dose Ratio

*AERBFFF Symmetry Maximum Dose Ratio

Max. Dose Ratio
Flattened Region Field size F Main axis Diagonal
5 cm < F ≤ 10 cm F - 1.0 cm F - 2.0 cm
10 cm < F ≤ 30 cm F - 0.1 • F F - 0.2 • F
30 cm < F F - 3.0 cm F - 6.0 cm

Field Size at SID

562 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for FFF Photon Profiles

Default Settings of the Accelerator Protocols for FFF Photon Profiles

Protocol Analysis parameter Formula

CAX Dev. Between inflection points [mm]
Field Size Between inflection points [cm]
Pen. Left/Right Between 1.6 and 0.4 * dose of inflection point [mm]
Elekta 2016
Symmetry Maximum Dose Ratio
Off Axis Ratio in at +/- 2 cm [%]
Off Axis Ratio out at +/- 4 cm [%]
CAX Dev. Between inflection points [mm]
Field Size Between inflection points [cm]
Pen. Left/Right Between 1.6 and 0.4 * dose of inflection point [mm]
Symmetry

Elekta 2020

Unflatness

Off Axis Ratio in at +/- 2 cm [%]

Off Axis Ratio out at +/- 4 cm [%]
CAX Dev. Between inflection points [mm]
Field Size Between inflection points [cm]

Varian / Var- Pen. Left/Right Between 1.6 and 0.4 * dose of inflection point [mm]
ian 2016 Symmetry Max. Variation
Off Axis Ratio in at +/- 2 cm [%]
Off Axis Ratio out at +/- 4 cm [%]

D948.131.00/10 en 563
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Electron Depth Dose Curves

Appendix D: Analysis Parameters for Electron Depth Dose

Curves

R100 If the depth dose curve is too short, the X-ray

background line is a straight line through the last
depth of the maximum dose measuring point with a slope of 0.
In the Edit protocols and parameters dialog, you
can choose a calculation method:
R50
a) position of the optimized maximum dose
The position of the optimized maximum dose depth of the 50%dose
is calculated by: In the Edit protocols and parameters dialog, you
can choose a calculation method:
– smoothing the curve if the curve is not
monotonic around the maximum dose a) R50 = I50
– inserting additional interpolated values in
the range of the maximum dose and sub- b) to TG-51
sequent smoothing of the curve. A difference is made between the measure-
ment of ion dose and energy dose.
b) position of the measured maximum dose
Ion dose:
I50 ≤ 100:R50 = 1.029 • I50 – 0.6
Rp I50 > 100:R50 = 1.059 • I50 – 3.7

practical range, i. e., depth at the intersection of Energy dose:

the X-ray background line and best fit line on the R50 = I50
steep sloping section of the curve.
Slope is determined by the positions of the 40%, c) to IAEA TRS 398
50%, and 60% dose values. Calculation according to b)
The X-ray background line is a best fit line over all
points ≥ Rp(estimated) and a safety margin of: I50 depth at 50% ion dose
20 mm for field sizes of > 3 cm x 3 cm
40 mm for field sizes of ≤ 3 cm x 3 cm
Rp(estimated) = R90
0.11 + 0.505 • E0(mean) – 3 • 10-4 • E0(mean)2
depth of the 90% dose

564 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Electron Depth Dose Curves

Rq X-Ray Bck.

position of the intersection of the tangent at the X-ray background as a percentage of the maxi-
dose maximum Dmax and the best fit line on the mum dose
steep sloping section of the curve X-ray background is defined as the percentage
for calculation, refer to Rp dose at the surface that is obtained by re-extrapo-
lating the X-ray background line beyond the prac-
tical range.
Rx
In the Edit protocols and parameters dialog, you
depth of any selected percentage dose value can choose a calculation method:

a) X-ray background is the dose of the intersec-

Rt tion point of calculation of Rp

therapeutic range, i. e., 85% dose position (also

b) X-ray background is the dose of the last mea-
referred to as R80 or, in the AFSSAPS No. 93 pro-
sured point
tocol, as R85)
c) X-ray background = R10 + 100
(R10 is the depth of the 10% dose value)
Ds

percentage dose at the surface d) X-ray background = Rp + 100

(also referred to as D0)
IEC 60976 defines the surface dose as the dose
G0
at a depth of 0.5 mm.
normalized dose gradient (measure of the slope
Dx of the descending curve segment)
In the Edit protocols and parameters dialog, you
percentage dose at any selected depth can choose a calculation method:

a)

b)

c)

D948.131.00/10 en 565
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Electron Depth Dose Curves

Ep0 J2/J1 Ratio

most probable energy at the phantom surface ion dose ratio to AFSSAPS No. 93
Formula:
Formulas:
Ep,0 = 0.22 + 1.98 • Rp + 0.0025 • Rp 2

and
Ep,0 in MeV
Rp in cm
in cm

E0(mean)
where
mean energy at the phantom surface J ion dose
In the Edit protocols and parameters dialog, you dmaxnom depth of the maximum dose under
can choose a calculation method: reference conditions (referred to as
NOMINAL_DMAX in the *.mcc file)
a) IPEMB dosimetry protocol E0nom nominal electron energy in MeV

for ion dose:

*.mcc files of older MEPHYSTO mc² versions do
E0(mean) = 0.818 + 1.935 • R50 + 0.040 • R502
not contain dmaxnom. If required, this value has to
for energy dose: be entered in the *.mcc file by means of an editor.
E0(mean) = 0.656 + 2.059 • R50 + 0.022 • R502
Moving the mouse cursor over the J2/J1 value in
b) NACP dosimetry protocol (table 5) the table with the analysis data or double-clicking
the cell displays themaxnom value used.
c) all other dosimetry protocols

E0(mean) = 2.33 • R50

E0(mean) in MeV
R50 in cm

566 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Electron Depth Dose Curves

Drel(%) Tangent at the

Dmax dose maximum D max
100
Best fit line on the steep
Ds sloping section of the curve
80 - 85 X-ray background

50

R100 Rq Rt R50 Rp d (mm)

0.5 mm

Figure D-1: Analysis parameters for electron depth dose curves

D948.131.00/10 en 567
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Electron Depth Dose Curves

Default Settings of the Standardized Protocols for Electron Depth Dose Curves

Protocol Analysis Formula Conditions *

parameter
R100 optimized
R50 TG51 SSD 90-110, field size ≥ 10 cm x 10 cm for < 20 MeV
*AAPM-TG51 or field size ≥ 20 cm x 20 cm for ≥ 20 MeV
E0(mean) 2.33 • R50 SSD 90-110, field size ≥ 10 cm x 10 cm for < 20 MeV
or field size ≥ 20 cm x 20 cm for ≥ 20 MeV
R100 optimized
R50 50% value SSD 100, field size ≥ 10 cm x 10 cm for < 16 MeV
or field size ≥ 20 cm x 20 cm for ≥ 16 MeV
*AFSSAPS
NO 93 E0(mean) 2.33 • R50 SSD 100, field size ≥ 10 cm x 10 cm for < 16 MeV
or field size ≥ 20 cm x 20 cm for ≥ 16 MeV
J2/J1 Ratio SSD 100, field size ≥ 10 cm x 10 cm for < 16 MeV
or field size ≥ 20 cm x 20 cm for ≥ 16 MeV
R100 optimized
R50 IAEA SSD 100, field size ≥ 10 cm x 10 cm for < 16 MeV
*DIN 6800-2
or field size ≥ 20 cm x 20 cm for ≥ 16 MeV
(2008)
E0(mean) 2.33 • R50 SSD 100, field size ≥ 10 cm x 10 cm for < 16 MeV
or field size ≥ 20 cm x 20 cm for ≥ 16 MeV
R100 optimized
R50 IAEA SSD 100, field size ≥ 10 cm x 10 cm for < 16 MeV
*IAEA398 or field size ≥ 20 cm x 20 cm for ≥ 16 MeV
E0(mean) 2.33 • R50 SSD 100, field size ≥ 10 cm x 10 cm for < 16 MeV
or field size ≥ 20 cm x 20 cm for ≥ 16 MeV

568 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Electron Depth Dose Curves

Protocol Analysis Formula Conditions *

parameter
R100 [cm] optimized
Rp [cm] field size 10 cm x 10 cm
*IEC 60976 Rx (R80) [cm] 80% field size 10 cm x 10 cm
Ds 0.5 mm field size 10 cm x 10 cm
G0 Rp / R80 field size 10 cm x 10 cm
R100 optimized
R50 50% value SSD 100, field size ≥ 12 cm x 12 cm for < 15 MeV
*IBEMP or field size ≥ 20 cm x 20 cm for ≥ 15 MeV
E0(mean) IPEMB SSD 100, field size ≥ 12 cm x 12 cm for < 15 MeV
or field size ≥ 20 cm x 20 cm for ≥ 15 MeV
R100 optimized
R50 50% value SSD 100, field size ≥ 12 cm x 12 cm for < 20 MeV
*NACP or field size ≥ 20 cm x 20 cm for ≥ 20 MeV
E0(mean) NACP SSD 100, field size ≥ 12 cm x 12 cm for < 20 MeV
or field size ≥ 20 cm x 20 cm for ≥ 20 MeV

*: If these conditions are not met, the corresponding analysis parameter is marked red. Moving the
mouse cursor over this area or double-clicking the cell displays the corresponding warning message.

D948.131.00/10 en 569
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Electron Depth Dose Curves

Default Settings of the Accelerator Protocols for Electron Depth Dose Curves

Protocol Analysis parameter Formula

Elekta / R100 optimized
Elekta 2016 /
Rx (R80) 80%
Elekta 2020
R100 optimized
Rp
Siemens Rx (R80) 80%
Ds (D0) 0 mm
X-Ray Bck. R10 + 100 mm
R100 optimized
R50 50% value

Varian / R90
Varian 2016 Rx (R30) 30%
Rt (R80) 80%
Ds 0.5 mm

General Warning Messages for Electron Depth Dose Curves

Parameter Required conditions Warning messages

enough measuring points in X-ray
Rp Curve too short !
background
enough measuring points in X-ray
background
enough measuring points in the R10
X-Ray Bck. Curve too short !
+ 100 mm range
enough measuring points in the Rp +
100 mm range
The NOMINAL_DMAX entry is No valid Dmax nominal ! Measure again or edit
J2/J1
included in the *.mcc file. MCC-File to insert NOMINAL_DMAX.

570 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Photon Depth Dose Curves

Appendix E: Analysis Parameters for Photon Depth Dose

Curves

R100 Ds

depth of the maximum dose percentage dose at the surface

In the Edit protocols and parameters dialog, you (referred to as D0 in the IPEMB protocol)
can choose a calculation method: IEC 60976 defines the surface dose as the dose
at a depth of 0.5 mm.
a) position of the optimized maximum dose
The position of the optimized maximum dose
is calculated by: D100

– smoothing the curve if the curve is not

percentage dose at a depth of 100 mm
monotonic around the maximum dose
(referred to as %dd(10)x in the AAPM-TG51 pro-
– inserting additional interpolated values in tocol)
the range of the maximum dose and sub-
sequent smoothing of the curve.
D200
b) position of the measured maximum dose
percentage dose at a depth of 200 mm

R80
Dx
depth of the 80% dose
percentage dose at any selected depth

R50

depth of the 50% dose

Rx

depth of any selected dose value

D948.131.00/10 en 571
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Photon Depth Dose Curves

Qi NAP

quality index nominal accelerator potential

The quality index is a measure of the quality The nominal accelerator potential is defined
of photon radiation. It is derived from the dose by the quality index according to Figure 3 of
values D100 and D200 at depths of 100 mm and the AAPM TG21 protocol. Numeric values are
200 mm. obtained from a curve approximation as pre-
In the Edit protocols and parameters dialog, you sented by P. Nizin and K. Kase (Med. Phys., Vol.
can choose a calculation method: 13, No. 6, Nov/Dec. 86, p. 961).

a) Formula:

b) Depth dose curve according to

DSSD100/DSSD200:
IAEA TRS 398 and DIN 6800-2 (2008)
unnormalized dose at 100 mm and 200 mm for
constant SSD (source surface distance)

for TPR curves:

DSSD100/DSSD200 = unnormalized dose at 100 mm
c) TPR curve
and 200 mm

for depth dose curves:

Quality index for measurements with lead foil

For measurements with lead foil, the quality index
Qi is calculated as follows:
SSD source surface distance [mm]
d) Qi = D100 • (0.8905 + 0.00150 • D100) Dmax depth of the maximum dose [mm]
for energies ≥ 10 MV, foil distance = D100, D200 unnormalized dose at 100 mm and
50 cmand D100 ≥ 73% 200 mm

e) Qi = D100 • (0.8116 + 0.00264 • D100)

for energies ≥ 10 MV, foil distance =
30 cmand D100 ≥ 71%

f) Qi = D100
for all other cases

572 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Photon Depth Dose Curves

Default Settings of the Standardized Protocols for Photon Depth Dose Curves

Analysis Formula Conditions *

Protocol
parameter
R100 optimized
D100
*AAPM-TG51
(&dd(10)x)
D200
R100 [cm] optimized field size 10 cm x 10 cm
Ds 0.5 mm
*AERBFFF
D100
Qi D200 / D100 SSD 100, field size 10 cm x 10 cm
R100 optimized

*AFSSAPS D100
NO 93 D200
Qi D200 / D100 field size 10 cm x 10 cm
R100 optimized
R80
R50
*DIN 6800-2
Ds 0.5 mm
(2008)
D100
D200
Qi IAEA398/DIN SSD 100, field size 10 cm x 10 cm
R100 optimized
R80
*IAEA398
R50
Qi IAEA398/DIN SSD 100, field size 10 cm x 10 cm
R100 [cm] optimized field size 10 cm x 10 cm
R80
Ds 0.5 mm
*IEC 60976
D100
D200
Qi D200 / D100 SSD 100, field size 10 cm x 10 cm

D948.131.00/10 en 573
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Photon Depth Dose Curves

Analysis Formula Conditions *

Protocol
parameter
R100 optimized
R80
*IBEMP Ds (D0) 0.0 mm
D100
D200
R100 optimized
R80
D100
*NACP
D200
Qi IAEA398/DIN SSD 100, field size 10 cm x 10 cm
NAP

*: If these conditions are not met, the corresponding analysis parameter is marked red. Moving the
mouse cursor over this area or double-clicking the cell displays the corresponding warning message.

Default Settings of the Accelerator Protocols for Photon Depth Dose Curves

Protocol Analysis parameter Formula

R100 optimized
Elekta /
Elekta 2016 / R80
Elekta 2020
D100
R100 optimized
R80
Siemens R50
Ds 0.5 mm
Qi IAEA398/DIN

Varian / R100 optimized

Varian 2016 D100

574 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Bragg Peak Curves

Appendix F: Analysis Parameters for Bragg Peak Curves

Ranges Plateau Level

proximal depths Ra,x and distal depths Rb,y for normalized dose D0
selectable dose values In the Edit protocols and parameters dialog, you
The dose values x and y may or may not be iden- can choose a calculation method:
tical.
The number of depths is user-defined. a) D0 = dose at first measuring point
You insert additional depths with the Insert button b) D0 = dose at a user-defined position
and you delete depths with the Del key.
By selecting the appropriate check box, the Formula:
depths Ra,x and Rb,y are shown in the table with
the analysis data and with dashed lines in Details
mode.

DR 100
dose at Bragg Peak (100% dose)
Zref

reference depth, i. e., depth in the middle of the Rmax

respective value pair Ra,x and Rb,y
depth of the maximum dose
In the Edit protocols and parameters dialog, you
Peak Width can choose a calculation method:

peak width, i.e., positive difference of Ra,x and Rb,y a) position of the optimized maximum dose
For this, the dose values x and y have to be iden- value
tical. The position of the optimized maximum dose
value is calculated by:
– smoothing the curve if the curve is not
Rp
monotonic around the maximum dose
practical range, i.e., the distal depth for a selec- – inserting additional interpolated values in
table dose the range of the maximum dose and sub-
sequent smoothing of the curve.

Rres b) position of the measured maximum dose

residual range, i.e., Rp - Zref

D948.131.00/10 en 575
 BEAMSCAN Software
Analysis Parameters for Bragg Peak Curves

Default Settings of the Standardized Protocols for Bragg Peak Curves

Protocol Analysis parameter Formula

Ranges Ra=95, Rb=95 ✓
Zref
Peak Width
*IAEA398 Rp
Rres
Plateau Level first measuring point
Rmax optimized Rmax finding

Default Settings of the Accelerator Protocols for Bragg Peak Curves

Protocol Analysis parameter Formula

Ranges Ra=95, Rb=95 ✓
Ra=85, Rb=85 ✓
Zref
Peak Width
Bragg Peak
Rp
Rres
Plateau Level first measuring point
Rmax optimized Rmax finding

General Warning Messages for Bragg Peak Curves

Parameter Required conditions Warning messages

The dose values x and y for the
Ranges proximal depths Ra,x and the distal Ra and Rb are different!
depths Rb,y should be identical.

576 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
True-to-Scale Printouts with HTML

Appendix G: True-to-Scale Printouts with HTML

For each print preview, the BEAMSCAN software 5. Enlarge the graphic with the displayed curves
generates two files: an HTML file with the full print- in your application with the help of the ruler to
out and a PNG file that contains the curves (for file obtain a true-to-scale graphic.
names and directories, refer to the table below).
You can use these files to generate your own print- 6. To add the analysis data to the printout,
outs. copy them in the Analyze edit window, using
the Copy Analyze Parameters context menu
1. Load the curves to print and select menu (right-click the table) and paste the data to your
File → Print Preview. Select the print options application.
and confirm with OK.

➔ The HTML and PNG files will be generated. Notes

2. Open the HTML file in your application. 1. To prevent faint colors on the printout, select
or menu Tools → Options. On the Graphics tab,
Use Explorer and double-click the HTML file to adapt the colors of all curves for printing on
open it. white paper.

➔ The Internet browser will now display the print- 2. You can be more creative if you insert tables
out. (e. g., tables with measuring depths) in text
boxes.
3. Press Ctrl+A to select all, then press Ctrl+C to
copy the printout data. 3. The text document (e. g., *.doc) and the HTML
file are both linked to the PNG graphics file. To
4. Paste the copied data to the desired program be able to add a graphic to a text document,
(e. g., Microsoft Word) to create your own print- the graphic needs to be imported. In Microsoft
out. Word, for example, you need to select the
Save graphic in document check box.
HINT
To be able to view HTML files faster, cre- A sample printout is shown below.
ate a link to the Favorites functional group
in MEPHYSTO Navigator.

D948.131.00/10 en 577
 BEAMSCAN Software
True-to-Scale Printouts with HTML

Figure G-1: Sample printout

578 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
List of Data Exported from the Analyze Edit Window toTrack-it

Appendix H: List of Data Exported from the Analyze Edit

Window toTrack-it

During the export from the Analyze edit window to the Track-it database, the data shown in the following
list will be exported if they are relevant for the analysis.

Properties

Name Value type

Measuring device Text
Software Text
Radiation unit Text

Measurement Parameters

Name Unit Value type

Applicator --- Text
Block --- Text
Collimator angle ° Floating-point number
Collimator offset X mm Floating-point number
Collimator offset Y mm Floating-point number
Depth mm Floating-point number
Energy MV/MeV Floating-point number
FFF --- Boolean
Field shape --- Text
Field size (crossplane x inplane) cm x cm Area
Field size definition see below Text
Field size definition depth mm Floating-point number
Gantry angle ° Floating-point number
Measurement inclination ° Floating-point number
Measurement offaxis mm Floating-point number
Measurement rotation in BEV ° Floating-point number
Modality --- Modality
Particle energy MeV/u Floating-point number
PDI to PDD conversion --- Text

D948.131.00/10 en 579
 BEAMSCAN Software
List of Data Exported from the Analyze Edit Window toTrack-it

Name Unit Value type

Scan type --- Text
SDD mm Floating-point number
SSD mm Floating-point number
Wedge angle ° Floating-point number
Wedge type --- Text
X1 mm Floating-point number
X2 mm Floating-point number
Y1 mm Floating-point number
Y2 mm Floating-point number

Data Points

Name Unit Value type

CAX deviation mm Floating-point number
D_avg % Floating-point number
D_max % Floating-point number
D_min % Floating-point number
D<x> % Floating-point number
D100 % Floating-point number
D200 % Floating-point number
E0 (mean) MeV Floating-point number
Ep0 MeV Floating-point number
F80 mm Floating-point number
F90 mm Floating-point number
Field size cm Floating-point number
Field size at SAD cm Floating-point number
Flatness % Floating-point number
J2/J1 Ratio --- Floating-point number
Lateral width at <x>% dose level cm Floating-point number
Maximum dose ratio --- Floating-point number
NAP MV Floating-point number
Normalized dose gradient --- Floating-point number
Off axis ratio (-/+<x> cm) % Floating-point number

580 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
List of Data Exported from the Analyze Edit Window toTrack-it

Name Unit Value type

Peak position mm Floating-point number
Peak width_<xi>_<yi> mm Floating-point number
Penumbra left mm Floating-point number
Penumbra right mm Floating-point number
Plateau level % Floating-point number
Point distance left mm Floating-point number
Point distance right mm Floating-point number
Qi --- Floating-point number
R<x> mm Floating-point number
R100 mm Floating-point number
R50 mm Floating-point number
R80 mm Floating-point number
R90 mm Floating-point number
Ra_<xi>_<yi> mm Floating-point number
Rb_<xi>_<yi> mm Floating-point number
Relative dose at <%> of half FWHM from CAX % Floating-point number
Renormalization value --- Floating-point number
R_max mm Floating-point number
Rp mm Floating-point number
Rq mm Floating-point number
R_res_<xi>_<yi> mm Floating-point number
Rt mm Floating-point number
Slope left % Floating-point number
Slope right % Floating-point number
Surface dose % Floating-point number
Symmetry % Floating-point number
Unflatness % Floating-point number
Wedge angle ° Floating-point number
X-ray background % Floating-point number
Z_ref_<xi>_<yi> mm Floating-point number

D948.131.00/10 en 581
 BEAMSCAN Software
List of Data Exported from the Analyze Edit Window toTrack-it

Measurement Data

Name Unit Value type

<Radiation unit>_<Date+Time ISO 8601 with hh, mm and --- File
ss>_Scan ID<xx>.mcc
Calibration factor detector Gy/C Floating-point number
Calibration factor detector channel 1 Gy/C Floating-point number
Calibration factor detector channel 2 Gy/C Floating-point number
Correction factor --- Floating-point number
Crossplane profile --- Floating-point number[]
Detector --- Text
Detector channel 1 --- Text
Detector channel 2 --- Text
Device ID <x> --- Text
EPOM mode --- Text
EPOM shift mm Floating-point number
FFF evaluation methode --- Text
Gantry rotation --- Text
Gantry upright position ° Floating-point number
Inplane profile --- Floating-point number[]
Inplane diagonal profile --- Floating-point number[]
Inplane diagonal2 profile --- Floating-point number[]
Measurement direction --- Text
Pressure hPa Floating-point number
Processing step <x> --- Text
Reference detector --- Text
SAD mm Floating-point number
SCD mm Floating-point number
Software ID <x> --- Text
Temperature °C Floating-point number
Water tank type --- Text

582 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Transferring the Basic Settings from MEPHYSTO mc² to the BEAMSCAN Software - General Information

Appendix I: Transferring the Basic Settings from

MEPHYSTO mc² to the BEAMSCAN Software

1 General Information Working with Global Basic Settings

The BEAMSCAN software, just like

It is not possible to update MEPHYSTO mc² to MEPHYSTO mc², allows you to additionally save
the BEAMSCAN software. However, the basic the basic settings to any drive ("Global Settings").
settings ("Settings") of MEPHYSTO mc² can be It is possible to configure these basic settings
transferred to the BEAMSCAN software if your once in a central location for all users. For further
version of MEPHYSTO mc² is version 3.0 or information on working with global basic settings,
higher. refer to chapter III "Basic Functions" - 7.5 "Man-
aging the Basic Settings".
You can choose between two options:
Irrespective of the installation target of the
1. You install the BEAMSCAN software on a sep- BEAMSCAN software, first make a backup of all
arate PC and transfer the required basic set- directories containing the global basic settings
tings, e.g., via a network connection. This is because the data will partially be deleted when
the option recommended by PTW. first accessed.

2. You uninstall MEPHYSTO mc² and then install

the BEAMSCAN software.
Remember that uninstalling the program
will delete all defined radiation units, detec-
tors, and settings!

To avoid any loss of data, you can make a backup

of the basic settings with the PTW tool "Settings
Keeper" and later transfer these settings to the
BEAMSCAN software. You will find this tool in
the 'Tools' directory on the installation DVD of the
BEAMSCAN software. Copy the tool to your PC.

D948.131.00/10 en 583
 BEAMSCAN Software
Transferring the Basic Settings from MEPHYSTO mc² to the BEAMSCAN Software - Software Installation

2 Backup of the Basic • Click the Start Backup button.

Settings • When working with global basic settings, per-

form these steps for each directory with basic
settings to be backed up.
• Start the "Settings Keeper" tool as administra-
tor. • Close the "Settings Keeper" tool.

• Select the backup mode by clicking

the Backup button.
3 Software Installation

Now you can uninstall the MEPHYSTO mc² soft-

ware and install the BEAMSCAN software.

Figure I-1: Settings Keeper in the backup

mode

• Select the directory with your local or global

basic settings.

The default directory for local basic settings

is 'C:\Program Files(x86)\PTW\MEPHYSTO
mcc\Settings'.

• Select or create an empty directory where the

basic settings will be stored.

➔ During the backup, a subdirectory named 'Set-

tings' will automatically be created in this direc-
tory.

584 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Transferring the Basic Settings from MEPHYSTO mc² to the BEAMSCAN Software - Transferring the Basic Settings

4 Transferring the 5 Transferring the Basic

Radiation Units and the Settings
Detectors
Follow the instructions below to transfer the basic
settings (analysis protocols, parameter sets, iso-
With the BEAMSCAN software, the content of
dose depths) backed up with the "Settings
the basic settings ("Settings") has changed. The
Keeper" tool:
detector library and the radiation units are sepa-
rated from the basic settings and are now stored
• First transfer the basic settings from the
centrally. As before, you can still access the basic
backup as local basic settings according to
settings via the set path, but they do not include
section 5.1 "Transferring the Basic Settings
the detectors and radiation units any longer.
from the Backup".
Follow the instructions below to transfer the data
When working with global basic settings, also per-
from MEPHYSTO mc² to the BEAMSCAN soft-
form the following steps:
ware:
• Prepare the global basic settings and trans-
• If you want to use the radiation units created
fer the basic settings from the backup as
in MEPHYSTO mc², open the Radiation unit
global basic settings according to section 5.2
Library module and import the radiation units
"Preparing and Transferring the Global Basic
(refer to chapter VII "'Radiation unit Library'
Settings".
Module" - 9 "Importing Radiation Units from
MEPHYSTO mc²").

• If you want to use the detectors cre-

ated in MEPHYSTO mc², open the Detec-
tor Library module and import the detectors
(refer to chapter VIII "'Detector Library' Mod-
ule" - 9 "Importing the Detector Library from
MEPHYSTO mc²").

D948.131.00/10 en 585
 BEAMSCAN Software
Transferring the Basic Settings from MEPHYSTO mc² to the BEAMSCAN Software - Transferring the Basic Settings

5.1 Transferring the Basic • Transferring the global basic setting:

Select the directory for the global basic set-
Settings from the Backup
tings of the BEAMSCAN software.
• Start the "Settings Keeper" tool as administra-
• Click the Start Restore button.
tor.

• Close the "Settings Keeper" tool.

• Select the Restore mode by clicking
the Restore button.

Check the restored settings for correctness.

• For this purpose, start WaterTankScans.

• Check the parameter sets and the isodose

depths.

• Load any file containing measuring data and

analyze it in the Analyze edit window.

• Click the Edit button.

➔ In some cases, you will be informed that data

need to be reconciled.

• Perform the data reconciliation.

Figure I-2: Settings Keeper in the restore
mode
• Check the analysis parameters.
• Select the directory where you saved your
• Close the Edit protocols and parameters dia-
basic settings.
log and the Analyze edit window.
• Transferring the local basic setting:
• Exit WaterTankScans.
Select the directory for the local basic settings
of the BEAMSCAN software.

The default directory for local basic settings

is 'C:\Program Files(x86)\PTW\MEPHYSTO
mcc\Settings'.

586 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Transferring the Basic Settings from MEPHYSTO mc² to the BEAMSCAN Software - Transferring the Basic Settings

5.2 Preparing and

Transferring the Global
Basic Settings
When working with global basic settings, first per-
form the following steps for each global path:

• Start WaterTankScans.

• Via menu Tools → Options → Advanced →

Settings Access Configuration, select the path
to the global settings.

• Exit WaterTankScans.

• Open WaterTankScans again.

• Load any file containing measuring data and

analyze it in the Analyze edit window.

• Click the Edit button.

• In some cases, you will be informed that data

need to be reconciled.

• Perform the data reconciliation.

• Close the Edit protocols and parameters dia-

log and the Analyze edit window.

• Exit WaterTankScans.

• Then transfer the basic settings from the

backup as global basic settings according to
section 5.1 "Transferring the Basic Settings
from the Backup".

• Repeat these steps for each global path.

D948.131.00/10 en 587
 BEAMSCAN Software
Index

Index

A Curve colors............................................................ 61
Curve display........................................................... 50
Actions..................................................................... 55 Curve properties...................................................... 46
Administrative data, DataAnalyze.......................... 503 Curves
Analysis details, colors.......................................... 475 add.................................................................... 445
Analysis parameters analyze.............................................................. 457
Bragg Peak curves................................... 471, 575 average............................................................. 445
depth dose curves.................... 469, 470, 564, 571 compare............................................................ 449
FFF photon profiles.................................. 467, 556 generate............................................................ 445
profiles...................................................... 466, 543 modify............................................................... 476
Analysis protocols.................................................. 463 Noise reduction................................................. 490
Analyze edit window shift................................................................... 482
options.............................................................. 475
warning messages............................................ 474
Arranging tabular and graphic data......................... 50
D
Array, 2D-ARRAY measurements DataAnalyze.......................................................... 438
detector array measurements, analyze............. 460 Data backup.................................................. 400, 415
Atmospheric pressure measurement DataConvert-S....................................................... 536
adjust........................................................ 526, 531 DataConvert-W...................................................... 533
restore factory settings..................................... 531 Data exchange........................................................ 66
Auto Setup...................................................... 74, 288 DataFit................................................................... 519
Auto Setup, Elekta................................................. 205 Auto Fill Mode.......................................... 520, 523
Auto Setup, ViewRay............................................. 209 Table Edit Mode........................................ 520, 521
Auto Setup tab................................ 76, 206, 210, 290 Data format, mcc................................................... 542
Data storage............................................................ 27
B Data transfer
LAN connection................................................ 195
Backup........................................................... 400, 415 settings.............................................................. 193
Basic settings, management of............................... 62 Definitions................................................................ 40
BeamDose Positioning.......................................... 420 Delay times........................................... 168, 265, 365
Bragg Peak curves Deleting curves................................................ 46, 443
change normalization........................................ 462 Deleting data, TableGenerator............................... 517
Depth correction with film inclination angle............ 481
C Depth dose curve.................................................... 50
mirror................................................................. 493
Compare edit window............................................ 449 modify............................................................... 490
options.............................................................. 456 Depth-related correction........................................ 482
COM port................................................................. 25 Details mode.......................................................... 460
Context menu.......................................................... 43 Detector array measurements
Convert IBA ASC................................................... 536 modify............................................................... 479
Converting data Detector Library..................................................... 402
DataConvert-S.................................................. 537 copy to clipboard.............................................. 414
DataConvert-W................................................. 535 export to CSV file............................................. 414
Converting ion dose to energy dose...................... 490 export to Excel file............................................ 415
Convert PDD to TPR, TableGenerator.................. 514 Detector positioning....................................... 420, 426
Convert WP600/700 data to mcc.......................... 533 data transfer settings........................................ 432
Correction table LAN connection................................................ 433
create........................................................ 522, 524 LAN connection, troubleshooting...................... 435
edit............................................................ 522, 524 position correction............................................. 428
Correction Tables................................................... 519 random position................................................ 426
Crosshairs RS232 connection............................................ 436
continuous........................................................... 56 select detector.................................................. 425
discrete............................................................... 56 select measuring system.................................. 423
performing measurement with two...................... 57 to the zero point............................................... 427
symmetrical......................................................... 57
Crossplane............................................................... 40
Cross profiles, extract............................................ 447

588 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Index

Detectors H
add new............................................................ 405
delete................................................................ 413 Highlighting curves.................................................. 45
edit parameters................................................. 406 Highlighting data, TableGenerator......................... 510
parameters........................................................ 408 High voltage check
save changes.................................................... 413 BEAMSCAN measuring system........................ 151
Device Database Selection................................... 418 MP3 measuring systems.................................. 351
Dialog
Continuous Options.................................. 169, 366 I
Measurement Options...................... 188, 276, 385
Options................................................................ 59 Icons, explanation.... 71, 202,
Step-By-Step Options....................... 159, 256, 356 285, 422, 441, 452, 458, 477, 488, 508, 522, 524, 527
Task List........................................... 179, 267, 376 Import
Dialogbox detector library from MEPHYSTO mc².............. 416
Edit protocols and parameters.......................... 465 radiation units from MEPHYSTO mc²............... 400
Dose correction..................................................... 483 Inplane..................................................................... 40
Dose value, subtract.............................................. 481 Installation of software............................................. 21
Drag & Drop............................................................ 66 Intended use............................................................ 19
Interpolation, TableGenerator................................ 511
Isodose color........................................................... 60
E Isodose level............................................................ 60
Edit Dose Values window...................................... 487 Isodoses.................................................................. 51
Energy range................................................. 175, 372
Equidistant measuring points, create..................... 484 L
Error messages
TableGenerator................................................. 518 Language change.......................... 401, 417, 431, 532
Exiting the software................................................. 28 Level indicator......................................... 87, 218, 296
MEPHYSTO Navigator....................................... 28 License Control Center............................................ 29
module................................................................ 28 Licensing software................................................... 29
Export Limits of correction table, DataFit.......................... 525
Track-it, exported data...................................... 579 List of figures............................................................. 8
Track-it database.............................................. 474 Literature................................................................ 541
Extrapolation, TableGenerator............................... 513 Loading data, Table Generator.............................. 509

F M
Field size................................................................. 41 Main screen
File BeamDose Positioning...................................... 422
close.................................................................. 444 BEAMSCAN Tools............................................ 527
open.................................................................. 442 DataAnalyze...................................................... 440
File name................................................................. 41 Detector Library................................................ 404
Radiation unit Library........................................ 392
TableGenerator................................................. 507
G WaterTankScans................................. 70, 201, 284
General information................................................. 13 Matrices, add......................................................... 448
Analyze edit window......................................... 459 Measurement
BeamDose Positioning...................................... 420 Auto Setup.................................................. 74, 288
DataAnalyze...................................................... 438 Auto Setup, Elekta............................................ 205
DataConvert-S.................................................. 536 Auto Setup, functions.................. 78, 207, 211, 291
DataConvert-W................................................. 533 Auto Setup, settings.................... 76, 206, 210, 290
DataFit.............................................................. 519 Auto Setup, ViewRay........................................ 209
Detector Library................................................ 402 define options................................... 188, 276, 385
Device Database Selection............................... 418 Output factors................................... 129, 246, 333
Edit Dose Values window................................. 488 perform Auto Setup.................... 81, 208, 211, 292
Process Edit window........................................ 478 prepare............................................... 72, 203, 286
Radiation unit Library........................................ 391 resume................................................ 85, 216, 294
TableGenerator................................................. 506 start.................................................... 84, 215, 293
WaterTankScans................................. 67, 198, 281 stop..................................................... 85, 216, 294
Graphic colors......................................................... 61 WaterTankScans................................. 72, 203, 286

D948.131.00/10 en 589
 BEAMSCAN Software
Index

Measurement parameters N
beam angle............................................... 125, 329
maximum dose......................................... 130, 334 Normalization........................................................... 52
Measuring curve depth dose curves.............................................. 52
properties............................................ 90, 221, 299 isodoses.............................................................. 54
select.................................................. 90, 221, 299 profiles................................................................ 52
Measuring data Normalizing, TableGenerator................................. 510
delete.................................................. 92, 222, 301
loading stored data............................. 91, 222, 300 O
save.................................................... 91, 221, 300
Measuring parameters Options
Accumulated Charge measuring mode..... 112, 316 DataAnalyze...................................................... 505
air density correction........................ 101, 231, 310 Output factors in DataAnalyze............................... 499
BeamAdjust measuring program....... 123, 242, 327
Beam Inclination measuring program....... 125, 329 P
Continuous Scans measuring mode......... 107, 311
detectors............................................. 98, 229, 308 Parameter set
effective point of measurement................. 102, 105 configure........................... 159, 169, 256, 356, 366
electrometer.............................................. 228, 307 create................................................ 178, 266, 375
EPOM............................................................... 102 delete................................................ 178, 266, 375
Manual Start/Stop measuring mode.......... 110, 314 Print
measurement...................................... 96, 226, 305 analysis data..................................................... 463
measuring mode............................... 106, 232, 311 analysis data, true-to-scale............................... 463
measuring programs......................... 113, 233, 317 compared curves.............................................. 455
Output Factors measuring program.. 127, 244, 331 curves................................................................. 47
PDD and Profiles measuring program.... 114, 234, curves, true-to-scale........................................... 48
318 Table Generator................................................ 517
Plane parallel to central beam measuring Printouts, true-to-scale........................................... 577
program............................................ 116, 235, 320 Process edit window
Plane perpendicular to central beam measuring options.............................................................. 497
program............................................ 118, 237, 322 Profile....................................................................... 50
Points measuring program................ 121, 240, 325 Profiles
radiation unit....................................... 93, 223, 302 deconvolve, photon profiles.............................. 495
setting........................... 93, 96, 223, 226, 302, 305 halve................................................................. 497
Software Trigger measuring mode............ 112, 316 interpolate......................................................... 446
Spill by Time measuring mode.................. 111, 315 merge................................................................ 447
Spill Start/Stop measuring mode.............. 110, 314 mirror................................................................. 497
Star Pattern measuring program....... 120, 239, 324 modify............................................................... 494
Stationary Scans measuring program....... 135, 339 shift................................................................... 496
Stepwise vs Time measuring mode.. 109, 232, 313 symmetrize........................................................ 496
Stepwise vs Trigger measuring mode....... 109, 313 Protocol
TG51 Lead Foil Distance measuring create a new protocol....................................... 472
program.................................................... 136, 340 curve analysis................................................... 463
user-defined correction..................... 102, 231, 310 default settings.................................................. 473
Measuring points delete................................................................ 472
add.................................................................... 489 edit.................................................................... 464
change position or dose value.......................... 489 modify settings.................................................. 471
delete................................................................ 489 PTW-Tool "Settings Keeper".................................. 583
edit.................................................................... 487
interpolate......................................................... 489 Q
select................................................................. 488
Measuring range check......................................... 151 Quick start
Measuring steps............ 160, 162, 257, 259, 357, 359 BeamDose Positioning...................................... 421
Measuring system, select...................................... 528 BEAMSCAN Tools - TP Adjustment.................. 529
Menu bar................................................................. 43 DataAnalyze...................................................... 439
MEPHYSTO Navigator............................................ 32 DataFit.............................................................. 520
application group................................................ 32 TableGenerator................................................. 506
configuration mode............................................. 38 WaterTankScans................................. 68, 199, 282
main screen........................................................ 33
Modifying the display, TableGenerator................... 509

590 D948.131.00/10 en
 BEAMSCAN Software
Index

R T
Radiation unit Library............................................ 391 Tab
Radiation units Delay times....................................... 168, 265, 365
add new............................................................ 393 Linac................................................... 93, 223, 302
delete................................................................ 399 Measurement...................................... 96, 226, 305
editing parameters............................................ 394 PDD Range.............................................. 171, 368
parameters........................................................ 395 PDD Speeds............................................. 175, 372
save changes.................................................... 399 PDD Steps........................................ 160, 257, 357
Range limits.... 160, 162, 166, 168, 171, Profile Range............................................ 173, 370
173, 257, 259, 263, 265, 357, 359, 363, 365, 368, 370 Profile Speeds.......................................... 177, 374
Reference curves.................................. 148, 251, 348 Profile Steps..................................... 162, 259, 359
load................................................... 148, 251, 348 Speeds............................................. 166, 263, 363
measurements with loaded reference TableGenerator...................................................... 506
curves............................................... 149, 252, 349 options.............................................................. 517
remove.............................................. 150, 253, 350 Target directory........................................................ 22
Registering software................................................ 31 Task list................................................. 179, 267, 376
Release interface............................ 92, 189, 222, 301 create................................................ 179, 267, 376
Repairing software................................................... 26 edit.................................................... 180, 268, 377
Resolution..................................... 171, 173, 368, 370 example............................................ 184, 272, 381
measurement of basic data.............. 186, 274, 383
S modify............................................... 181, 269, 378
notes on measurement workflow...... 185, 273, 382
Safety information.................................................... 15 open.................................................. 179, 267, 376
Save predefined......................................... 186, 274, 383
curves............................................................... 443 Temperature measurement
isodoses............................................................ 443 adjust........................................................ 526, 530
Saving data, TableGenerator................................. 516 restore factory settings..................................... 531
Scanned Data Analysis......................................... 438 Three-dimensional graphics.................................... 51
Scan speed Toolbar..................................................................... 43
depth-dependent....................................... 177, 374 TPR/TMR and OCR Table Generator.................... 506
energy-dependent..................................... 175, 372 TPR measurement.......................................... 67, 281
Screen display change.......................................... 406 Continuous TPR Measurement................. 146, 343
Small field dosimetry..................................... 138, 342 measurement of the detector sensor distance.. 346
Smoothing.............................................................. 479 measurement workflow............................. 144, 342
Smoothing level, DataFit....................................... 525 preparation................................................ 145, 345
Speed.................................................... 166, 263, 363 Step-By-Step TPR Measurement..................... 345
Start Transfer basic settings from MEPHYSTO mc²....... 583
BeamDose Positioning...................................... 420 Troubleshooting..................................................... 539
BEAMSCAN Tools............................................ 526 LAN connection........................................ 197, 435
DataAnalyze...................................................... 438
DataConvert-S.................................................. 536 U
DataConvert-W................................................. 533
DataFit.............................................................. 520 Uninstalling software............................................... 26
Detector Library................................................ 403
Device Database Selection............................... 418 W
module in MEPHYSTO Navigator....................... 34
Radiation unit Library........................................ 391 WaterTankScans
TableGenerator................................................. 506 configuration..................................... 158, 255, 355
WaterTankScans................................. 68, 199, 282 Water Tank Scans................................... 67, 198, 281
Starting the software............................................... 27 Wedge angle......................................................... 544
Status bar.......................................................... 44, 58 Workflow
Step intervals........................................ 160, 257, 357 BeamDose Positioning...................................... 421
Symbols................................................................... 17 BEAMSCAN Tools - TP Adjustment.................. 529
Symmetry check, visual......................................... 461 DataAnalyze...................................................... 439
DataFit.............................................................. 520
TableGenerator................................................. 506
WaterTankScans................................. 68, 199, 282

D948.131.00/10 en 591
 BEAMSCAN Software
Index

Z
Zero adjustment...................................... 73, 204, 287
Zero shift................................................................. 80

592 D948.131.00/10 en